Micom P341

MiCOM P341
Interconnection Protection Relay

Software Version 0050B
Technical Guide
Technical Guide MiCOM P341 Interconnection Protection Relay
Volume 1
Issue Control MiCOM P341 Manual Issue D

Doc Ref. Section Page
P341/EN T/C22
Amendments completed 09.12.2004 Description Front Cover Software version details removed from back of front cover Contents Reference to P14x brochure, removed from Application Notes heading Handling of electronic equipment Company name changed Introduction Company name changed Introduction to MiCOM Last line of section : website address changed Introduction to MiCOM guides Reference to P14x brochure, removed from Application Notes summary Reference to P14x brochure, removed from Installation summary Safety Section : Installing, commissioning and servicing Before energising the equipment, the following should be checked: 2 new points added at the end of the list Safety Section : Technical specifications Insulation category : in 1st sentence installation amended to insulation Product safety : law voltage directive amended to low voltage directive Section brought into line with corporate standard. All references to chapters have been replaced with new subdocument references Company name amended Application Notes Company name changed All references to chapters replaced with new subdocument references Publication Latest version (P341/EN BR Cd) Protection features 11th bullet point added Non-protection features 4th bullet point : 2nd sentence amended Configuration column In the menu text column between Power and Overcurrent : Thermal overload has been added
Throughout Throughout
IT IT 1.
4 IT 2. 5
2.
6.
IT
Throughout
AP AP AP AP AP 1.2.1 1.2.2
Throughout Throughout 10 10
AP
2.1
12
P341/EN T/C22
Issue Control MiCOM P341
Manual Issue D
Doc Ref. AP AP Section Page
Amendments completed 09.12.2004 Description CT and VT ratios Data in table amended Rate of change of frequency protection DDB information in sentences 1 and 2 : amended Voltage vector shift protection 3rd equation : amended Figure 2c : title amended Paragraph 3 : DDB information in 1st sentence amended Reconnection timer Paragraph 3 : DDB information in 1st sentence amended Power protection Paragraph 4 : DDB information in 1st sentence amended Data in table amended Sensitive power protection function 1st sentence amended Paragraph 2 : %Pn changed from 2 to 7 Paragraph before table : DDB information in 1st sentence amended Data in table amended Reverse power protection function Table number changed from 2 to 1 1st paragraph after Table 1 : sentences 3 and 4 amended Overcurrent protection Paragraph 6 : DDB information in sentences 1 and 3 amended After table : paragraphs 2 and 3 added Standard earth fault protection element Paragraph 3 : DDB information in sentences 1 and 3 amended Data in table amended Sensitive earth fault protection element (SEF) Paragraph 2 : DDB information in sentences 1 and 3 amended Data in table amended Negative sequence polarisation Paragraph 3 : added General setting guidelines for DEF Paragraph 2 : amended Last 2 angle settings added Operation of sensitive earth fault element tem 3 of list : added Paragraph 2 : 1st sentence amended
2.2 2.4
13 16 17 18
AP AP
2.5 2.6
18 20 20
AP
2.7
21
21 22 AP 2.7.1 22 - 23
AP
2.7.4
25
26 AP 2.8 28
34 AP 2.10.1 35
36 AP AP 2.10.2 2.11.2 37 39
AP
2.11.3
40
AP
2.12
49

Doc Ref. AP AP AP Section Page
P341/EN T/C22
Amendments completed 09.12.2004 Description Calculation of required relay settings Paragraph 3 : last sentence amended Restricted earth fault protection Paragraph 5 : DDB information in 1st sentence amended High impedance restricted earth fault protection Figure 13 : where k = 0.5 changed to where k = 1 Setting guidelines for high impedance REF 1st equation on page amended Sections last list changed from numbers 4 and 5 to numbers 1 and 2 Residual over voltage/neutral voltage displacement protection DDB information in paragraph before table amended Data in table amended Under voltage protection Paragraph 4 : DDB information amended Note added after 4th paragraph Data in table amended Over voltage protection Paragraph 4 : DDB information amended Note added after 4th paragraph Data in table amended Under frequency protection DDB information in 1st two sentences of paragraph before table amended Over frequency protection function DDB information in 1st two sentences of paragraph before table amended Thermal overload protection New section added Reset mechanisms for breaker fail timers Data in 2nd table amended Paragraph after 2nd table : 1st sentence amended and 3rd sentence added Breaker fail timer settings Data in table amended Paragraph 2 : 1st sentence amended Breaker fail undercurrent settings Figure 17 : CB fail logic diagram added Voltage transformer supervision (VTS) Minor amendment in last paragraph
2.13.1 2.14 2.14.1
51 52 53
55 AP 2.14.2 57
AP
2.15
60
61 AP 2.16 62 63 64 AP 2.17 64
AP
2.18
66
AP AP
2.19 2.20
68 69 - 73
AP
2.21.2
75
AP AP AP
2.22.1 2.22.2 4.1
76 77 79
P341/EN T/C22
Manual Issue D
Doc Ref. Section Page
Amendments completed 09.12.2004 Description Loss of all three phase voltages under load conditions Minor amendments in paragraph 2 Absence of three phase voltages upon line energisation Sentence and bullet points added after figure 19 Inputs New section added Outputs New section added Menu settings Bullet points after table amended 1st two paragraphs after bullet points added The CT supervision feature Paragraph 1 : amended Paragraph 2 : added Paragraph 3 : sentence 1 amended and sentence 3 added Paragraph 4 : amended Figure 20 : amended Circuit breaker state monitoring features 1st sentence added to paragraph after 2nd group of bullet points Last sentence added to paragraph before table Figure 21 : added Circuit breaker control Section deleted Pole dead logic New section added Circuit breaker condition monitoring New section added Trip circuit supervision (TCS) New section added Relay alarm conditions Table : replaced Fault records Paragraph 4 : added Event filtering Minor amendments made to 2nd paragraph after table Disturbance recorder Paragraph 1 : re-written Paragraph 3 : last sentence added
AP
4.1.1
79
AP AP AP
4.1.2 4.1.2.1 4.1.2.2
80 - 81 81 82
AP
4.1.3
82
AP
4.2.1
83
84 85 AP AP AP AP AP AP AP AP 4.3.1 4.4 4.5 4.6 4.8 4.9.1.3 4.9.1.6 4.9.4 86 86 86 - 87 87 - 90 92 - 96 98 99 101
AP
4.10
102

Doc Ref. AP AP AP Section Page
P341/EN T/C22
Amendments completed 09.12.2004 Description Control inputs New section added CT connections New section added Auto reset of trip LED indication New section added Directional instantaneous SEF protection (residually connected) Only 1st equation remains, rest of section deleted High impedance restricted earth fault protection 1st equation : amended Metering class current transformers Table : replaced Converting IEC185 current transformer standard protection classification to an ANSI/IEEE standard voltage rating New section added Commissioning test menu New section added All references to chapters replaced with new subdocument references Power supply module RS485 reference changed to EIA(RS)485 Input board Figure 2 : amended Last 2 paragraphs deleted Universal opto isolated logic inputs New section added Power supply board (including EIA(RS)485 communication interface Heading : amended 2nd paragraph after table : all RS485 reference changed to EIA(RS)485 Output relay board Section re-written IRIG-B board Paragraph 2 : RS485 reference changed to EIA(RS)485 PSL data New section added Continuous self-testing 4th bullet point amended
4.13 4.14 4.15
106 107 107 - 108
AP AP AP
5.5.4 5.6 5.7.2
109 110 111
AP AP HW
5.9 6.
112 112 - 115 Throughout
HW
1.1.3
HW HW
2.3.2 2.3.3
7 7-8
8 HW HW HW HW HW 2.4.1 2.4.2 2.5 3.4.3.1 4.2 9 9 9 13 16
P341/EN T/C22
Manual Issue D
Doc Ref. TD Section Page
Amendments completed 09.12.2004 Description All references to chapters replaced with new subdocument references Universal logic inputs (P340 range) Section re-written Output relay contacts Section re-written Auxiliary supply 2nd table : replaced Optically-isolated inputs Paragraph 1 : deleted Reverse power/low forward power/over power (32R / 32L / 32O) Data in table amended Thermal overload (49) New section added Accuracy DT operation setting amended to 2% or 50ms whichever is greater Performance Data in table amended Undercurrent accuracy Data in table amended Local and remote communications New section added SCADA Communications Company name changed Section brought into line with corporate standard. All references to chapters replaced with new subdocument references Relay menu database Amended to reflect latest relay software External connection diagrams New diagrams Hardware/software version history and compatibility Amended to reflect latest relay software
Throughout
TD TD TD TD
1.5 1.6 2.3 2.4
8 8-9 10 10
TD TD
10.9 10.14
32 35
TD TD TD TD CT CT
10.2.2 13.2.2 15.2.4 19.
22 37 39 41
Throughout Throughout
GC CO
VC
Technical Guide MiCOM P341
P341/EN T/D22
INTERCONNECTION PROTECTION RELAY MiCOM P341 CONTENT

Issue Control Handling of Electronic Equipment Safety Instructions Introduction Application Notes Relay Description Technical Data SCADA Communications Relay Menu Database External Connection Diagrams Hardware / Software Version History and Compatibility P341/EN IT/D22 P341/EN AP/D22 P341/EN HW/D22 P341/EN TD/D22 P341/EN CT/D22 P341/EN GC/D22 P341/EN CO/D22 P341/EN VC/C22
P341/EN T/D22
Technical Guide MiCOM P341
HANDLING OF ELECTRONIC EQUIPMENT

A persons normal movements can easily generate electrostatic potentials of several thousand volts. Discharge of these voltages into semiconductor devices when handling circuits can cause serious damage, which often may not be immediately apparent but the reliability of the circuit will have been reduced. The electronic circuits of AREVA T&D products are immune to the relevant levels of electrostatic discharge when housed in their cases. Do not expose them to the risk of damage by withdrawing modules unnecessarily. Each module incorporates the highest practicable protection for its semiconductor devices. However, if it becomes necessary to withdraw a module, the following precautions should be taken to preserve the high reliability and long life for which the equipment has been designed and manufactured. 1. 2. Before removing a module, ensure that you are a same electrostatic potential as the equipment by touching the case. Handle the module by its front-plate, frame, or edges of the printed circuit board. Avoid touching the electronic components, printed circuit track or connectors. Do not pass the module to any person without first ensuring that you are both at the same electrostatic potential. Shaking hands achieves equipotential. Place the module on an antistatic surface, or on a conducting surface which is at the same potential as yourself. Store or transport the module in a conductive bag.
3. 4. 5.
More information on safe working procedures for all electronic equipment can be found in BS5783 and IEC 60147-0F. If you are making measurements on the internal electronic circuitry of an equipment in service, it is preferable that you are earthed to the case with a conductive wrist strap. Wrist straps should have a resistance to ground between 500k 10M ohms. If a wrist strap is not available you should maintain regular contact with the case to prevent the build up of static. Instrumentation which may be used for making measurements should be earthed to the case whenever possible. AREVA T&D strongly recommends that detailed investigations on the electronic circuitry, or modification work, should be carried out in a Special Handling Area such as described in BS5783 or IEC 60147-0F.
CONTENT
1.
1.1 1.2
SAFETY SECTION
Health and Safety Explanation of symbols and labels
3
3 3
2. 3.
3.1 3.2 3.3 3.4 3.5 3.6
INSTALLING, COMMISSIONING AND SERVICING EQUIPMENT OPERATING CONDITIONS

Current transformer circuits External resistors Battery Replacement Insulation and dielectric strength testing Insertion of modules and pcb cards Fibre optic communication
3 4
4 4 4 4 4 4
4. 5. 6.
OLDER PRODUCTS DECOMMISSIONING AND DISPOSAL TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
5 5 6
1.
SAFETY SECTION
This Safety Section should be read before commencing any work on the equipment.
1.1
Health and Safety The information in the Safety Section of the product documentation is intended to ensure that products are properly installed and handled in order to maintain them in a safe condition. It is assumed that everyone who will be associated with the equipment will be familiar with the contents of the Safety Section.
1.2
Explanation of symbols and labels The meaning of symbols and labels may be used on the equipment or in the product documentation, is given below.
Caution : refer to product documentation
Caution : risk of electric shock
Protective/safety *earth terminal
Functional *earth terminal Note: This symbol may also be used for a protective/safety earth terminal if that terminal is part of a terminal block or sub-assembly e.g. power supply.
*NOTE: THE TERM EARTH USED THROUGHOUT THE PRODUCT DOCUMENTATION IS THE DIRECT EQUIVALENT OF THE NORTH AMERICAN TERM GROUND.
2.
INSTALLING, COMMISSIONING AND SERVICING

Equipment connections Personnel undertaking installation, commissioning or servicing work on this equipment should be aware of the correct working procedures to ensure safety. The product documentation should be consulted before installing, commissioning or servicing the equipment. Terminals exposed during installation, commissioning and maintenance may present a hazardous voltage unless the equipment is electrically isolated. If there is unlocked access to the rear of the equipment, care should be taken by all personnel to avoid electrical shock or energy hazards.
Voltage and current connections should be made using insulated crimp terminations to ensure that terminal block insulation requirements are maintained for safety. To ensure that wires are correctly terminated, the correct crimp terminal and tool for the wire size should be used. Before energising the equipment it must be earthed using the protective earth terminal, or the appropriate termination of the supply plug in the case of plug connected equipment. Omitting or disconnecting the equipment earth may cause a safety hazard. The recommended minimum earth wire size is 2.5mm2, unless otherwise stated in the technical data section of the product documentation. Before energising the equipment, the following should be checked: Voltage rating and polarity; CT circuit rating and integrity of connections; Protective fuse rating; Integrity of earth connection (where applicable)
3.
EQUIPMENT OPERATING CONDITIONS

The equipment should be operated within the specified electrical and environmental limits.
3.1
Current transformer circuits Do not open the secondary circuit of a live CT since the high level voltage produced may be lethal to personnel and could damage insulation.
3.2
External resistors Where external resistors are fitted to relays, these may present a risk of electric shock or burns, if touched.
3.3
Battery Replacement Where internal batteries are fitted they should be replaced with the recommended type and be installed with the correct polarity, to avoid possible damage to the equipment.
3.4
Insulation and dielectric strength testing Insulation testing may leave capacitors charged up to a hazardous voltage. At the end of each part of the test, the voltage should be gradually reduced to zero, to discharge capacitors, before the test leads are disconnected.
3.5
Insertion of modules and pcb cards These must not be inserted into or withdrawn from equipment whist it is energised since this may result in damage.
3.6
Fibre optic communication Where fibre optic communication devices are fitted, these should not be viewed directly. Optical power meters should be used to determine the operation or signal level of the device.
4.
OLDER PRODUCTS
Electrical adjustments Equipments which require direct physical adjustments to their operating mechanism to change current or voltage settings, should have the electrical power removed before making the change, to avoid any risk of electrical shock. Mechanical adjustments The electrical power to the relay contacts should be removed before checking any mechanical settings, to avoid any risk of electric shock. Draw out case relays Removal of the cover on equipment incorporating electromechanical operating elements, may expose hazardous live parts such as relay contacts. Insertion and withdrawal of extender cards When using an extender card, this should not be inserted or withdrawn from the equipment whilst it is energised. This is to avoid possible shock or damage hazards. Hazardous live voltages may be accessible on the extender card. Insertion and withdrawal of heavy current test plugs When using a heavy current test plug, CT shorting links must be in place before insertion or removal, to avoid potentially lethal voltages.
5.
DECOMMISSIONING AND DISPOSAL

Decommissioning: The auxiliary supply circuit in the relay may include capacitors across the supply or to earth. To avoid electric shock or energy hazards, after completely isolating the supplies to the relay (both poles of any dc supply), the capacitors should be safely discharged via the external terminals prior to decommissioning. Disposal: It is recommended that incineration and disposal to water courses is avoided. The product should be disposed of in a safe manner. Any products containing batteries should have them removed before disposal, taking precautions to avoid short circuits. Particular regulations within the country of operation, may apply to the disposal of lithium batteries.
6.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
Protective fuse rating The recommended maximum rating of the external protective fuse for this equipment is 16A, Red Spot type of equipment, unless otherwise stated in the technical data section of the product documentation.
Insulation class: IEC 601010-1 : 1990/A2 : 1995 Class I EN 61010-1 : 1993/A2 : 1995 Class I IEC 601010-1 : 1990/A2 : 1995 Category III EN 61010-1 : 1993/A2 : 1995 Category III This equipment requires a protective (safety) earth connection to ensure user safety. Distribution level, fixed installation. Equipment in this category is qualification tested at 5kV peak, 1.2/50s, 500, 0.5J, between all supply circuits and earth and also between independent circuits.
Insulation Category (Overvoltage):
Environment:
IEC 601010-1 : 1990/A2 : 1995 Pollution degree 2 EN 61010-1 : 1993/A2 : 1995 Pollution degree 2
Compliance is demonstrated by reference to generic safety standards.
Product Safety:
72/23/EEC
Compliance with the European Commission Law Voltage Directive. Compliance is demonstrated by reference to generic safety standards.
EN 61010-1 : 1993/A2 : 1995 EN 60950 : 1992/A11 : 1997
Introduction MiCOM P341
P341/EN IT/D22
INTRODUCTION
P341/EN IT/D22
P341/EN IT/D22 Page 1/24
CONTENT
1. 2. 3.
3.1 3.1.1 3.1.2 3.2 3.3 3.3.1 3.3.2 3.3.3 3.4 3.5 3.6 3.6.1 3.6.2 3.6.3 3.6.4 3.6.5 3.7 3.8 3.8.1 3.8.2 3.8.3 3.8.4
INTRODUCTION TO MiCOM INTRODUCTION TO MiCOM GUIDES USER INTERFACES AND MENU STRUCTURE
Introduction to the relay Front panel Relay rear panel Introduction to the user interfaces and settings options Menu structure Protection settings Disturbance recorder settings Control and support settings Password protection Relay configuration Front panel user interface (keypad and LCD) Default display and menu time-out Menu navigation and setting browsing Password entry Reading and clearing of alarm messages and fault records Setting changes Front communication port user interface Rear communication port user interface Courier communication Modbus communication IEC 60870-5 CS 103 communication DNP 3.0 communication
1 4 6
6 6 7 8 9 10 10 11 11 12 12 13 14 14 14 15 16 17 18 20 22 23
P341/EN IT/D22 Page 2/24 Figure 1: Relay front view Figure 2: Relay rear view Figure 4: Front panel user interface Figure 5: Front port connection Figure 6: PC relay signal connection Figure 7: Remote communication connection arrangements
Introduction MiCOM P341 6 8 13 16 17 19
1.
INTRODUCTION TO MICOM
MiCOM is a comprehensive solution capable of meeting all electricity supply requirements. It comprises a range of components, systems and services from AREVA T&D. Central to the MiCOM concept is flexibility. MiCOM provides the ability to define an application solution and, through extensive communication capabilities, to integrate it with your power supply control system. The components within MiCOM are: P range protection relays; C range control products; M range measurement products for accurate metering and monitoring; S range versatile PC support and substation control packages.
MiCOM products include extensive facilities for recording information on the state and behaviour of the power system using disturbance and fault records. They can also provide measurements of the system at regular intervals to a control centre enabling remote monitoring and control to take place. For up-to-date information on any MiCOM product, visit our website: www.areva-td.com
2.
INTRODUCTION TO MiCOM GUIDES

The guides provide a functional and technical description of the MiCOM protection relay and a comprehensive set of instructions for the relays use and application. Divided into two volumes, as follows: Volume 1 Technical Guide, includes information on the application of the relay and a technical description of its features. It is mainly intended for protection engineers concerned with the selection and application of the relay for the protection of the power system. Volume 2 Operation Guide, contains information on the installation and commissioning of the relay, and also a section on fault finding. This volume is intended for site engineers who are responsible for the installation, commissioning and maintenance of the relay. The section content within each volume is summarised below: Volume 1 Technical Guide
Handling of Electronic Equipment Safety Section P341/EN IT Introduction
A guide to the different user interfaces of the protection relay describing how to start using the relay. P341/EN AP Application Notes
Comprehensive and detailed description of the features of the relay including both the protection elements and the relays other functions such as event and disturbance recording, fault location and programmable scheme logic. This section includes a description of common power system applications of the relay, calculation of suitable settings, some typical worked examples, and how to apply the settings to the relay. P341/EN HW Relay Description Overview of the operation of the relays hardware and software. This section includes information on the self-checking features and diagnostics of the relay. P341/EN TD Technical Data
Technical data including setting ranges, accuracy limits, recommended operating conditions, ratings and performance data. Compliance with technical standards is quoted where appropriate. P341/EN CT Communications and Interface Guide
This section provides detailed information regarding the communication interfaces of the relay, including a detailed description of how to access the settings database stored within the relay. The section also gives information on each of the communication protocols that can be used with the relay, and is intended to allow the user to design a custom interface to a SCADA system.
P341/EN GC Relay Menu Database: User interface/Courier/Modbus/IEC 60870-5103/DNP 3.0 Listing of all of the settings contained within the relay together with a brief description of each. P341/EN CO External Connection Diagrams All external wiring connections to the relay. P341/EN VC Volume 2 Hardware / Software Version History and Compatibility Operation Guide
Handling of Electronic Equipment Safety Section P341/EN IT Introduction
A guide to the different user interfaces of the protection relay describing how to start using the relay. P341/EN IN Installation
Recommendations on unpacking, handling, inspection and storage of the relay. A guide to the mechanical and electrical installation of the relay is provided incorporating earthing recommendations. P341/EN CM Commissioning and Maintenance Instructions on how to commission the relay, comprising checks on the calibration and functionality of the relay. A general maintenance policy for the relay is outlined. P341/EN PR Problem Analysis
Advice on how to recognise failure modes and the recommended course of action. P341/EN GC Relay Menu Database: User interface/Courier/Modbus/IEC 60870-5103/DNP 3.0 Listing of all of the settings contained within the relay together with a brief description of each. P341/EN CO External Connection Diagrams All external wiring connections to the relay. P341/EN VC Repair Form Hardware / Software Version History and Compatibility
3.
USER INTERFACES AND MENU STRUCTURE

The settings and functions of the MiCOM protection relay can be accessed both from the front panel keypad and LCD, and via the front and rear communication ports. Information on each of these methods is given in this section to describe how to get started using the relay.
3.1 3.1.1
Introduction to the relay Front panel The front panel of the relay is shown in Figure 1, with the hinged covers at the top and bottom of the relay shown open. Extra physical protection for the front panel can be provided by an optional transparent front cover. With the cover in place read only access to the user interface is possible. Removal of the cover does not compromise the environmental withstand capability of the product, but allows access to the relay settings. When full access to the relay keypad is required, for editing the settings, the transparent cover can be unclipped and removed when the top and bottom covers are open. If the lower cover is secured with a wire seal, this will need to be removed. Using the side flanges of the transparent cover, pull the bottom edge away from the relay front panel until it is clear of the seal tab. The cover can then be moved vertically down to release the two fixing lugs from their recesses in the front panel.
Serial No and I*, V Ratings Top cover
SER No DIAG No
In Vx Vn
1/5 A 50/60 Hz
V V
LCD
TRIP
Fixed function LEDs
ALARM OUT OF SERVICE HEALTHY = CLEAR = READ = ENTER
User programable function LEDs
Keypad
Bottom cover Battery compartment Front comms port Download/monitor port

P0103ENa
Figure 1:
Relay front view
The front panel of the relay includes the following, as indicated in Figure 1: a 16-character by 2-line alphanumeric liquid crystal display (LCD). a 7-key keypad comprising 4 arrow keys (/, 6, 8 and 2), an enter key (5), a clear key (0), and a read key (1). 12 LEDs; 4 fixed function LEDs on the left hand side of the front panel and 8 programmable function LEDs on the right hand side.
Under the top hinged cover: the relay serial number, and the relays current and voltage rating information*.
Under the bottom hinged cover: battery compartment to hold the 1/2 AA size battery which is used for memory back-up for the real time clock, event, fault and disturbance records. a 9-pin female D-type front port for communication with a PC locally to the relay (up to 15m distance) via an EIA(RS)232 serial data connection. a 25-pin female D-type port providing internal signal monitoring and high speed local downloading of software and language text via a parallel data connection.
The fixed function LEDs on the left hand side of the front panel are used to indicate the following conditions: Trip (Red) indicates that the relay has issued a trip signal. It is reset when the associated fault record is cleared from the front display. (Alternatively the trip LED can be configured to be self-resetting)*. Alarm (Yellow) flashes to indicate that the relay has registered an alarm. This may be triggered by a fault, event or maintenance record. The LED will flash until the alarms have been accepted (read), after which the LED will change to constant illumination, and will extinguish when the alarms have been cleared. Out of service (Yellow) indicates that the relays protection is unavailable. Healthy (Green) indicates that the relay is in correct working order, and should be on at all times. It will be extinguished if the relays self-test facilities indicate that there is an error with the relays hardware or software. The state of the healthy LED is reflected by the watchdog contact at the back of the relay. 3.1.2 Relay rear panel The rear panel of the relay is shown in Figure 2. All current and voltage signals*, digital logic input signals and output contacts are connected at the rear of the relay. Also connected at the rear is the twisted pair wiring for the rear EIA(RS)485 communication port, the IRIG-B time synchronising input and the optical fibre rear communication port which are both optional.
Note: *May vary according to relay type/model
Optional IRIG-B board
Digital input connections
Power supply connection

IRIG B
PORT 1
TX
RX
Rear comms port (RS485)
Current* and voltage input terminals
Digital output (relays) connections
P0104ena
Figure 2:
Relay rear view
Refer to the wiring diagram in Appendix B for complete connection details. 3.2 Introduction to the user interfaces and settings options The relay has three user interfaces: the front panel user interface via the LCD and keypad. the front port which supports Courier communication. the rear port which supports one protocol of either Courier, Modbus, IEC 60870-5-103 or DNP3.0. The protocol for the rear port must be specified when the relay is ordered.
The measurement information and relay settings which can be accessed from the three interfaces are summarised in Table 1.
Keypad/ LCD Display & modification of all settings Digital I/O signal status Display/extraction of measurements Display/extraction of fault records Extraction of disturbance records Programmable scheme logic settings Reset of fault & alarm records Clear event & fault records Time synchronisation Control commands
Courier
Modbus
IEC870-5103
DNP3.0
Table 1 3.3 Menu structure The relays menu is arranged in a tabular structure. Each setting in the menu is referred to as a cell, and each cell in the menu may be accessed by reference to a row and column address. The settings are arranged so that each column contains related settings, for example all of the disturbance recorder settings are contained within the same column. As shown in Figure 3, the top row of each column contains the heading which describes the settings contained within that column. Movement between the columns of the menu can only be made at the column heading level. A complete list of all of the menu settings is given in Appendix A of the manual.
Column header
Up to 4 protection setting groups
System data
View records
Overcurrent
Ground fault
Overcurrent
Ground fault
Column data settings
Control & support
Group 1
Group 2 Repeated for groups 2, 3 and 4

P0106ena
Figure 3:
Menu structure
All of the settings in the menu fall into one of three categories: protection settings, disturbance recorder settings, or control and support (C&S) settings. One of two different methods is used to change a setting depending on which category the setting falls into. Control and support settings are stored and used by the relay immediately after they are entered. For either protection settings or disturbance recorder settings, the relay stores the new setting values in a temporary scratchpad. It activates all the new settings together, but only after it has been confirmed that the new settings are to be adopted. This technique is employed to provide extra security, and so that several setting changes that are made within a group of protection settings will all take effect at the same time. 3.3.1 Protection settings The protection settings include the following items: protection element settings scheme logic settings auto-reclose and check synchronisation settings (where appropriate)* fault locator settings (where appropriate)*
There are four groups of protection settings, with each group containing the same setting cells. One group of protection settings is selected as the active group, and is used by the protection elements. 3.3.2 Disturbance recorder settings The disturbance recorder settings include the record duration and trigger position, selection of analogue and digital signals to record, and the signal sources that trigger the recording.
Introduction MiCOM P341 3.3.3 Control and support settings The control and support settings include: 3.4 relay configuration settings open/close circuit breaker* CT & VT ratio settings* reset LEDs active protection setting group password & language settings circuit breaker control & monitoring settings* communications settings measurement settings event & fault record settings user interface settings commissioning settings
Password protection The menu structure contains three levels of access. The level of access that is enabled determines which of the relays settings can be changed and is controlled by entry of two different passwords. The levels of access are summarised in Table 2. Access level Level 0 No password required Operations enabled Read access to all settings, alarms, event records and fault records As level 0 plus: Control commands, e.g. circuit breaker open/close. Reset of fault and alarm conditions. Reset LEDs. Clearing of event and fault records. Level 2 As level 1 plus:
Level 1 Password 1 or 2
Password 2 required All other settings Table 2
Each of the two passwords are 4 characters of upper case text. The factory default for both passwords is AAAA. Each password is user-changeable once it has been correctly entered. Entry of the password is achieved either by a prompt when a setting change is attempted, or by moving to the Password cell in the System data column of the menu. The level of access is independently enabled for each interface, that is to say if level 2 access is enabled for the rear communication port, the front panel access will remain at level 0 unless the relevant password is entered at the front panel. The access level enabled by the password entry will time-out independently for each interface after a period of inactivity and revert to the default level. If the Note: *May vary according to relay type/model
passwords are lost an emergency password can be supplied contact AREVA T&D with the relays serial number. The current level of access enabled for an interface can be determined by examining the 'Access level' cell in the 'System data' column, the access level for the front panel User Interface (UI), can also be found as one of the default display options. The relay is supplied with a default access level of 2, such that no password is required to change any of the relay settings. It is also possible to set the default menu access level to either level 0 or level1, preventing write access to the relay settings without the correct password. The default menu access level is set in the Password control cell which is found in the System data column of the menu (note that this setting can only be changed when level 2 access is enabled). 3.5 Relay configuration The relay is a multi-function device which supports numerous different protection, control and communication features. In order to simplify the setting of the relay, there is a configuration settings column which can be used to enable or disable many of the functions of the relay. The settings associated with any function that is disabled are made invisible, i.e. they are not shown in the menu. To disable a function change the relevant cell in the Configuration column from Enabled to Disabled. The configuration column controls which of the four protection settings groups is selected as active through the Active settings cell. A protection setting group can also be disabled in the configuration column, provided it is not the present active group. Similarly, a disabled setting group cannot be set as the active group. The column also allows all of the setting values in one group of protection settings to be copied to another group. To do this firstly set the Copy from cell to the protection setting group to be copied, then set the Copy to cell to the protection group where the copy is to be placed. The copied settings are initially placed in the temporary scratchpad, and will only be used by the relay following confirmation. To restore the default values to the settings in any protection settings group, set the Restore defaults cell to the relevant group number. Alternatively it is possible to set the Restore defaults cell to All settings to restore the default values to all of the relays settings, not just the protection groups settings. The default settings will initially be placed in the scratchpad and will only be used by the relay after they have been confirmed. Note that restoring defaults to all settings includes the rear communication port settings, which may result in communication via the rear port being disrupted if the new (default) settings do not match those of the master station. 3.6 Front panel user interface (keypad and LCD) When the keypad is exposed it provides full access to the menu options of the relay, with the information displayed on the LCD. The /, 6, 8 and 2 keys which are used for menu navigation and setting value changes include an auto-repeat function that comes into operation if any of these keys are held continually pressed. This can be used to speed up both setting value changes and menu navigation; the longer the key is held depressed, the faster the rate of change or movement becomes.
System frequency
Other default displays
3-phase voltage Alarm messages
Date and time
C C
Column 1 Sytem data
Column 2 View records
Other column headings
Column n Group 4 Overcurrent
Data 1.1 Language
Data 2.1 Last record
C
Note: The C key will return to column header from any menu cell
Data n.1 |>1 function
Data 1.2 Password
Data 2.2 Time and date
Data n.2 |>1 directional
Other setting cells in column 1 Data 1.n Password level 2
Other setting cells in column 2 Data 2.n C A voltage
Other setting cells in column n
Data n.n |> char angle

P0105ena
Figure 4: 3.6.1
Front panel user interface
Default display and menu time-out The front panel menu has a selectable default display. The relay will time-out and return to the default display and turn the LCD backlight off after 15 minutes of keypad inactivity. If this happens any setting changes which have not been confirmed will be lost and the original setting values maintained. The contents of the default display can be selected from the following options: 3-phase and neutral current, 3-phase voltage, power, system frequency, date and time, relay description, or a user-defined plant reference*. The default display is selected with the Default display cell of the Measuret setup column. Also, from the default display the different default display options can be scrolled through using the /and 6 keys. However the menu selected default display will be restored following the menu time-out elapsing. Whenever there is an uncleared alarm present in the relay (e.g. fault record, protection alarm, control alarm etc.) the default display will be replaced by:
Alarms/Faults Present
Entry to the menu structure of the relay is made from the default display and is not affected if the display is showing the Alarms/Faults present message. 3.6.2 Menu navigation and setting browsing The menu can be browsed using the four arrow keys, following the structure shown in Figure 4. Thus, starting at the default display the 8 key will display the first column heading. To select the required column heading use the Pand 6 keys. The setting data contained in the column can then be viewed by using the 2 and 8 keys. It is possible to return to the column header either by holding the [up arrow symbol] key down or by a single press of the clear key 0. It is only possible to move across columns at the column heading level. To return to the default display press the 8 key or the clear key 0 from any of the column headings. It is not possible to go straight to the default display from within one of the column cells using the auto-repeat facility of the 8 key, as the auto-repeat will stop at the column heading. To move to the default display, the 8 key must be released and pressed again. 3.6.3 Password entry When entry of a password is required the following prompt will appear: Enter password **** Level 1 Note: The password required to edit the setting is the prompt as shown above
A flashing cursor will indicate which character field of the password may be changed. Press the 8 and 2 keys to vary each character between A and Z. To move between the character fields of the password, use the 4 and 6 keys. The password is confirmed by pressing the enter key 5. The display will revert to Enter Password if an incorrect password is entered. At this point a message will be displayed indicating whether a correct password has been entered and if so what level of access has been unlocked. If this level is sufficient to edit the selected setting then the display will return to the setting page to allow the edit to continue. If the correct level of password has not been entered then the password prompt page will be returned to. To escape from this prompt press the clear key 0. Alternatively, the password can be entered using the Password cell of the System data column. For the front panel user interface the password protected access will revert to the default access level after a keypad inactivity time-out of 15 minutes. It is possible to manually reset the password protection to the default level by moving to the Password menu cell in the System data column and pressing the clear key 0 instead of entering a password. 3.6.4 Reading and clearing of alarm messages and fault records The presence of one or more alarm messages will be indicated by the default display and by the yellow alarm LED flashing. The alarm messages can either be selfresetting or latched, in which case they must be cleared manually. To view the alarm messages press the read key 1. When all alarms have been viewed, but not
cleared, the alarm LED will change from flashing to constant illumination and the latest fault record will be displayed (if there is one). To scroll through the pages of this use the 1 key. When all pages of the fault record have been viewed, the following prompt will appear: Press clear to reset alarms
To clear all alarm messages press 0; to return to the alarms/faults present display and leave the alarms uncleared, press 1. Depending on the password configuration settings, it may be necessary to enter a password before the alarm messages can be cleared (see section on password entry). When the alarms have been cleared the yellow alarm LED will extinguish, as will the red trip LED if it was illuminated following a trip. Alternatively it is possible to accelerate the procedure, once the alarm viewer has been entered using the 1 key, the 0 key can be pressed, this will move the display straight to the fault record. Pressing 0 again will move straight to the alarm reset prompt where pressing 0 once more will clear all alarms. 3.6.5 Setting changes To change the value of a setting, first navigate the menu to display the relevant cell. To change the cell value press the enter key 5, which will bring up a flashing cursor on the LCD to indicate that the value can be changed. This will only happen if the appropriate password has been entered, otherwise the prompt to enter a password will appear. The setting value can then be changed by pressing the or 6 keys. If the setting to be changed is a binary value or a text string, the required bit or character to be changed must first be selected using the /and 6 keys. When the desired new value has been reached it is confirmed as the new setting value by pressing 5. Alternatively, the new value will be discarded either if the clear button 0 is pressed or if the menu time-out occurs. For protection group settings and disturbance recorder settings, the changes must be confirmed before they are used by the relay. To do this, when all required changes have been entered, return to the column heading level and press the key. Prior to returning to the default display the following prompt will be given:
Update settings? Enter or clear Pressing 5 will result in the new settings being adopted, pressing 0 will cause the relay to discard the newly entered values. It should be noted that, the setting values will also be discarded if the menu time out occurs before the setting changes have been confirmed. Control and support settings will be updated immediately after they are entered, without Update settings? prompt.
P341/EN IT/D22 Page 16/24 3.7 Front communication port user interface
The front communication port is provided by a 9-pin female D-type connector located under the bottom hinged cover. It provides EIA(RS)232 serial data communication and is intended for use with a PC locally to the relay (up to 15m distance) as shown in Figure 5. This port supports the Courier communication protocol only. Courier is the communication language developed by AREVA T&D to allow communication with its range of protection relays. The front port is particularly designed for use with the relay settings program MiCOM S1 which is a Windows 98/NT based software package.
MiCOM relay
Laptop
SK2 SK1
25 pin download/monitor port
Battery
9 pin front comms port Serial data connector (up to 15m)
Serial communication port (COM 1 or COM 2)
P0107ena
Figure 5:
Front port connection Thus the pin
The relay is a Data Communication Equipment (DCE) device. connections of the relays 9-pin front port are as follows: Pin no. 2 Pin no. 3 Pin no. 5 Tx Transmit data Rx Receive data 0V Zero volts common
None of the other pins are connected in the relay. The relay should be connected to the serial port of a PC, usually called COM1 or COM2. PCs are normally Data Terminal Equipment (DTE) devices which have a serial port pin connection as below (if in doubt check your PC manual): 25 Way Pin no. Pin no. Pin no. 3 2 7 9 Way 2 3 5 Rx Receive data Tx Transmit data 0V Zero volts common
For successful data communication, the Tx pin on the relay must be connected to the Rx pin on the PC, and the Rx pin on the relay must be connected to the Tx pin on the PC, as shown in Figure 6. Therefore, providing that the PC is a DTE with pin connections as given above, a straight through serial connector is required, i.e. one that connects pin 2 to pin 2, pin 3 to pin 3, and pin 5 to pin 5. Note that a common cause of difficulty with serial data communication is connecting Tx to Tx and Rx to Rx.
This could happen if a cross-over serial connector is used, i.e. one that connects pin 2 to pin 3, and pin 3 to pin 2, or if the PC has the same pin configuration as the relay.
MiCOM relay PC
DCE Pin 2 Tx Pin 3 Rx Pin 5 0V
Serial data connector
DTE Pin 2 Rx Pin 3 Tx Pin 5 0V
Note: PC connection shown assuming 9 Way serial port
P0108ena
Figure 6:
PC relay signal connection
Having made the physical connection from the relay to the PC, the PCs communication settings must be configured to match those of the relay. The relays communication settings for the front port are fixed as shown in the table below: Protocol Baud rate Courier address Message format Courier 19,200 bits/s 1 11 bit - 1 start bit, 8 data bits, 1 parity bit (even parity), 1 stop bit
The inactivity timer for the front port is set at 15 minutes. This controls how long the relay will maintain its level of password access on the front port. If no messages are received on the front port for 15 minutes then any password access level that has been enabled will be revoked. 3.8 Rear communication port user interface The rear port can support one of four communication protocols (Courier, Modbus, DNP3.0, IEC 60870-5-103), the choice of which must be made when the relay is ordered. The rear communication port is provided by a 3-terminal screw connector located on the back of the relay. See Appendix B for details of the connection terminals. The rear port provides K-Bus/EIA(RS)485 serial data communication and is intended for use with a permanently-wired connection to a remote control centre. Of the three connections, two are for the signal connection, and the other is for the earth shield of the cable. When the K-Bus option is selected for the rear port, the two signal connections are not polarity conscious, however for Modbus, IEC 608705-103 and DNP3.0 care must be taken to observe the correct polarity. The protocol provided by the relay is indicated in the relay menu in the Communications column. Using the keypad and LCD, firstly check that the Comms settings cell in the Configuration column is set to Visible, then move to the Communications column. The first cell down the column shows the communication protocol being used by the rear port.
P341/EN IT/D22 Page 18/24 3.8.1 Courier communication
Courier is the communication language developed by AREVA T&D to allow remote interrogation of its range of protection relays. Courier works on a master/slave basis where the slave units contain information in the form of a database, and respond with information from the database when it is requested by a master unit. The relay is a slave unit which is designed to be used with a Courier master unit such as MiCOM S1, MiCOM S10, PAS&T or a SCADA system. MiCOM S1 is a Windows NT4.0/98 compatible software package which is specifically designed for setting changes with the relay. To use the rear port to communicate with a PC-based master station using Courier, a KITZ K-Bus to EIA(RS)232 protocol converter is required. This unit is available from AREVA T&D. A typical connection arrangement is shown in Figure 7. For more detailed information on other possible connection arrangements refer to the manual for the Courier master station software and the manual for the KITZ protocol converter. Each spur of the K-Bus twisted pair wiring can be up to 1000m in length and have up to 32 relays connected to it.
Twisted pair K-Bus RS485 communications link
MiCOM relay
MiCOM relay
MiCOM relay
RS232 PC
K-Bus
PC serial port
KITZ protocol converter
Modem
Public switched telephone network
Courier master station eg. substation control room
PC
Modem
Remote Courier master station eg. area control centre
P0109ena
Figure 7:
Remote communication connection arrangements
Having made the physical connection to the relay, the relays communication settings must be configured. To do this use the keypad and LCD user interface. In the relay menu firstly check that the Comms settings cell in the Configuration column is set to Visible, then move to the Communications column. Only two settings apply to the rear port using Courier, the relays address and the inactivity timer. Synchronous communication is used at a fixed baud rate of 64kbits/s. Move down the Communications column from the column heading to the first cell down which indicates the communication protocol: Note: *May vary according to relay type/model
Protocol Courier The next cell down the column controls the address of the relay:
Remote address 1 Since up to 32 relays can be connected to one K-bus spur, as indicated in Figure 7, it is necessary for each relay to have a unique address so that messages from the master control station are accepted by one relay only. Courier uses an integer number between 0 and 254 for the relay address which is set with this cell. It is important that no two relays have the same Courier address. The Courier address is then used by the master station to communicate with the relay. The next cell down controls the inactivity timer: Inactivity timer 10.00 mins The inactivity timer controls how long the relay will wait without receiving any messages on the rear port before it reverts to its default state, including revoking any password access that was enabled. For the rear port this can be set between 1 and 30 minutes. Note that protection and disturbance recorder settings that are modified using an online editor such as PAS&T must be confirmed with a write to the Save changes cell of the Configuration column. Off-line editors such as MiCOM S1 do not require this action for the setting changes to take effect. 3.8.2 Modbus communication Modbus is a master/slave communication protocol which can be used for network control. In a similar fashion to Courier, the system works by the master device initiating all actions and the slave devices, (the relays), responding to the master by supplying the requested data or by taking the requested action. Modbus communication is achieved via a twisted pair connection to the rear port and can be used over a distance of 1000m with up to 32 slave devices.
To use the rear port with Modbus communication, the relays communication settings must be configured. To do this use the keypad and LCD user interface. In the relay menu firstly check that the Comms settings cell in the Configuration column is set to Visible, then move to the Communications column. Four settings apply to the rear port using Modbus which are described below. Move down the Communications column from the column heading to the first cell down which indicates the communication protocol: Protocol Modbus The next cell down controls the Modbus address of the relay: Modbus address 23 Up to 32 relays can be connected to one Modbus spur, and therefore it is necessary for each relay to have a unique address so that messages from the master control station are accepted by one relay only. Modbus uses an integer number between 1 and 247 for the relay address. It is important that no two relays have the same Modbus address. The Modbus address is then used by the master station to communicate with the relay. The next cell down controls the inactivity timer: Inactivity timer 10.00 mins The inactivity timer controls how long the relay will wait without receiving any messages on the rear port before it reverts to its default state, including revoking any password access that was enabled. For the rear port this can be set between 1 and 30 minutes. The next cell down the column controls the baud rate to be used: Baud rate 9600 bits/s Modbus communication is asynchronous. Three baud rates are supported by the relay, 9600 bits/s, 19200 bits/s and 38400 bits/s. It is important that whatever baud rate is selected on the relay is the same as that set on the Modbus master station. The next cell down controls the parity format used in the data frames: Parity None Note: *May vary according to relay type/model
The parity can be set to be one of None, Odd or Even. It is important that whatever parity format is selected on the relay is the same as that set on the Modbus master station. 3.8.3 IEC 60870-5 CS 103 communication The IEC specification IEC 60870-5-103: Telecontrol Equipment and Systems, Part 5: Transmission Protocols Section 103 defines the use of standards IEC 60870-5-1 to IEC 60870-5-5 to perform communication with protection equipment. The standard configuration for the IEC 60870-5-103 protocol is to use a twisted pair connection over distances up to 1000m. As an option for IEC 60870-5103, the rear port can be specified to use a fibre optic connection for direct connection to a master station. The relay operates as a slave in the system, responding to commands from a master station. The method of communication uses standardised messages which are based on the VDEW communication protocol. To use the rear port with IEC 60870-5-103 communication, the relays communication settings must be configured. To do this use the keypad and LCD user interface. In the relay menu firstly check that the Comms settings cell in the Configuration column is set to Visible, then move to the Communications column. Four settings apply to the rear port using IEC 60870-5-103 which are described below. Move down the Communications column from the column heading to the first cell which indicates the communication protocol: Protocol IEC 60870-5-103 The next cell down controls the IEC 60870-5-103 address of the relay: Remote address 162 Up to 32 relays can be connected to one IEC 60870-5-103 spur, and therefore it is necessary for each relay to have a unique address so that messages from the master control station are accepted by one relay only. IEC 60870-5-103 uses an integer number between 0 and 254 for the relay address. It is important that no two relays have the same IEC 60870-5-103 address. The IEC 60870-5-103 address is then used by the master station to communicate with the relay. The next cell down the column controls the baud rate to be used: Baud rate 9600 bits/s IEC 60870-5-103 communication is asynchronous. Two baud rates are supported by the relay, 9600 bits/s and 19200 bits/s. It is important that whatever baud rate is selected on the relay is the same as that set on the IEC 60870-5-103 master station.
The next cell down controls the period between IEC 60870-5-103 measurements: Measuret period 30.00 s The IEC 60870-5-103 protocol allows the relay to supply measurements at regular intervals. The interval between measurements is controlled by this cell, and can be set between 1 and 60 seconds. The next cell down the column controls the physical media used for the communication: Physical link EIA(RS)485 The default setting is to select the electrical EIA(RS)485 connection. If the optional fibre optic connectors are fitted to the relay, then this setting can be changed to Fibre optic. The next cell down can be used to define the primary function type for this interface, where this is not explicitly defined for the application by the IEC 60870-5-103 protocol*. Function type 226 3.8.4 DNP 3.0 communication The DNP 3.0 protocol is defined and administered by the DNP User Group. Information about the user group, DNP 3.0 in general and protocol specifications can be found on their website: www.dnp.org The relay operates as a DNP 3.0 slave and supports subset level 2 of the protocol plus some of the features from level 3. DNP 3.0 communication is achieved via a twisted pair connection to the rear port and can be used over a distance of 1000m with up to 32 slave devices. To use the rear port with DNP 3.0 communication, the relays communication settings must be configured. To do this use the keypad and LCD user interface. In the relay menu firstly check that the Comms setting cell in the Configuration column is set to Visible, then move to the Communications column. Four settings apply to the rear port using DNP 3.0, which are described below. Move down the Communications column from the column heading to the first cell which indicates the communications protocol: Protocol DNP 3.0
P341/EN IT/D22 Page 24/24 The next cell controls the DNP 3.0 address of the relay: DNP 3.0 address 232
Upto 32 relays can be connected to one DNP 3.0 spur, and therefore it is necessary for each relay to have a unique address so that messages from the master control station are accepted by only one relay. DNP 3.0 uses a decimal number between 1 and 65519 for the relay address. It is important that no two relays have the same DNP 3.0 address. The DNP 3.0 address is then used by the master station to communicate with the relay. The next cell down the column controls the baud rate to be used: Baud rate 9600 bits/s DNP 3.0 communication is asynchronous. Six baud rates are supported by the relay 1200bits/s, 2400bits/s, 4800bits/s, 9600bits/s, 19200bits/s and 38400bits/s. It is important that whatever baud rate is selected on the relay is the same as that set on the DNP 3.0 master station. The next cell down the column controls the parity format used in the data frames: Parity None The parity can be set to be one of None, Odd or Even. It is important that whatever parity format is selected on the relay is the same as that set on the DNP 3.0 master station. The next cell down the column sets the time synchronisation request from the master by the relay: Time Synch Enabled The time synch can be set to either enabled or disabled. If enabled it allows the DNP 3.0 master to synchronise the time.
Application Notes MiCOM P341
P341/EN AP/D22
APPLICATION NOTES
P341/EN AP/D22
P341/EN AP/D22 Page 1/116
CONTENT
1.
1.1 1.2 1.2.1 1.2.2
INTRODUCTION
Interconnection protection MiCOM interconnection protection relay Protection features Non-protection features
8
9 9 10 10
2.
2.1 2.2 2.3 2.4 2.4.1 2.5 2.5.1 2.6 2.6.1 2.7 2.7.1 2.7.2 2.7.2.1 2.7.3 2.7.3.1 2.7.4 2.7.4.1 2.8 2.8.1 2.8.2 2.8.3 2.9 2.9.1 2.9.2 2.10 2.10.1
APPLICATION OF INDIVIDUAL PROTECTION FUNCTIONS

Configuration column CT and VT ratios Loss of mains protection Rate of change of frequency protection Setting guidelines for df/dt protection Voltage vector shift protection Setting guidelines for voltage vector shift protection Reconnection timer Setting guidelines for the reconnect delay Power protection Sensitive power protection function Over power protection Over power setting guideline Low forward power protection function Low forward power setting guideline Reverse power protection function Reverse power setting guideline Overcurrent protection Transformer magnetising inrush Application of timer hold facility Setting guidelines Directional overcurrent protection Synchronous polarisation Setting guidelines Earth fault protection Standard earth fault protection element
11
11 13 13 15 16 17 19 19 20 20 21 23 23 24 24 24 25 26 29 29 30 30 32 33 34 34
P341/EN AP/D22 Page 2/116 2.10.2 2.11 2.11.1 2.11.2 2.11.3 2.11.4 2.11.5 2.11.6 2.12 2.13 2.13.1 2.13.2 2.14 2.14.1 2.14.2 2.15 2.15.1 2.16 2.16.1 2.17 2.17.1 2.18 2.18.1 2.19 2.19.1 2.20 2.20.1 2.20.2 2.20.3 2.21 2.21.1 2.21.2 2.22 2.22.1 Sensitive earth fault protection element (SEF) Directional earth fault protection (DEF) Residual voltage polarisation Negative sequence polarisation General setting guidelines for DEF Application to insulated systems Setting guidelines insulated systems Application to petersen coil earthed systems Operation of sensitive earth fault element Application considerations Calculation of required relay settings Application of settings to the relay Restricted earth fault protection High impedance restricted earth fault protection Setting guidelines for high impedance REF
Application Notes MiCOM P341 36 38 38 39 39 40 43 43 48 50 50 51 51 52 54 57 60 61 62 63 64 65 66 68 68 69 69 70 72 73 73 74 75 75
Residual over voltage/neutral voltage displacement protection Setting guidelines for residual over voltage/neutral voltage displacement protection Under voltage protection Setting guidelines for under voltage protection Over voltage protection Setting guidelines for over voltage protection Under frequency protection Setting guidelines for under frequency protection Over frequency protection function Setting guidelines for over frequency protection Thermal overload protection Introduction Thermal replica Setting guidelines Circuit breaker fail protection (CBF) Breaker failure protection configurations Reset mechanisms for breaker fail timers Typical settings Breaker fail timer settings
Application Notes MiCOM P341 2.22.2 Breaker fail undercurrent settings
P341/EN AP/D22 Page 3/116 76
3.
3.1
OTHER PROTECTION CONSIDERATIONS

Blocked overcurrent protection
77
77
4.
4.1 4.1.1 4.1.2 4.1.2.1 4.1.2.2 4.1.3 4.2 4.2.1 4.2.2 4.3 4.3.1 4.4 4.5 4.5.1 4.5.2 4.5.2.1 4.5.2.2 4.5.2.3 4.5.2.4 4.6 4.7 4.7.1 4.7.1.1 4.7.2 4.7.3 4.7.3.1 4.7.4 4.7.5 4.7.5.1 4.7.6
APPLICATION OF NON-PROTECTION FUNCTIONS

Voltage transformer supervision (VTS) Loss of all three phase voltages under load conditions Absence of three phase voltages upon line energisation Inputs Outputs Menu settings Current transformer supervision The CT supervision feature Setting the CT supervision element Circuit breaker state monitoring Circuit breaker state monitoring features Pole dead logic Circuit breaker condition monitoring Circuit breaker condition monitoring features Setting guidelines Setting the S I^ thresholds Setting the number of operations thresholds Setting the operating time thresholds Setting the excessive fault frequency thresholds Circuit breaker control Trip circuit supervision (TCS) TCS scheme 1 Scheme description Scheme 1 PSL TCS scheme 2 Scheme description Scheme 2 PSL TCS scheme 3 Scheme description Scheme 3 PSL
79
79 79 80 81 82 82 83 83 84 84 84 86 87 88 89 89 89 90 90 90 92 93 93 95 95 95 96 96 96 97
P341/EN AP/D22 Page 4/116 4.8 4.8.1 4.8.1.1 4.8.1.2 4.8.1.3 4.8.1.4 4.8.1.5 4.8.1.6 4.8.1.7 4.8.1.8 4.8.2 4.8.3 4.8.4 4.9 4.10 4.10.1 4.10.2 4.10.3 4.10.4 4.10.5 Event & fault records Types of event Change of state of opto-isolated inputs Change of state of one or more output relay contacts Relay alarm conditions Protection element starts and trips General events Fault records Maintenance reports Setting changes Resetting of event/fault records Viewing event records via MiCOM S1 support software Event filtering Disturbance recorder Measurements Measured voltages and currents Sequence voltages and currents Power and energy quantities Rms. voltages and currents Demand values
Application Notes MiCOM P341 97 98 98 99 99 100 100 100 100 101 101 101 102 103 104 104 104 104 105 105 105 105 106 106 106 106 106 106 106 106 107 107 107 108 108
4.10.5.1 Fixed demand values 4.10.5.2 Rolling demand values 4.10.5.3 Peak demand values 4.10.6 Settings
4.10.6.1 Default display 4.10.6.2 Local values 4.10.6.3 Remote values 4.10.6.4 Measurement ref 4.10.6.5 Measurement mode 4.10.6.6 Fixed demand period 4.10.6.7 Rolling sub-period and number of sub-periods 4.11 4.12 4.13 4.13.1 Changing setting groups Control inputs VT connections Open delta (vee connected) VT's
Application Notes MiCOM P341 4.13.2 4.14 VT single point earthing Auto reset of trip LED indication
P341/EN AP/D22 Page 5/116 108 108
5.
5.1 5.1.1 5.1.2 5.2 5.2.1 5.2.2 5.3 5.3.1 5.3.2 5.4 5.4.1 5.4.2 5.5 5.5.1 5.5.2 5.5.3 5.5.4 5.5.5 5.6 5.7 5.7.1 5.7.2 5.8 5.9
CT/VT REQUIREMENTS
Time-delayed phase overcurrent elements Time-delayed earth fault overcurrent elements Non-directional instantaneous overcurrent & earth fault protection CT requirements for instantaneous phase overcurrent elements CT requirements for instantaneous earth fault overcurrent elements Directional definite time/IDMT overcurrent & earth fault protection Time-delayed phase overcurrent elements Time-delayed earth fault overcurrent elements Directional instantaneous overcurrent & earth fault protection CT requirements for instantaneous phase overcurrent elements CT requirements for instantaneous earth fault overcurrent elements
109
109 109 109 109 109 109 109 110 110 110 110
Non-directional definite time/IDMT overcurrent & earth fault protection 109
Non-directional/directional definite time/IDMT sensitive earth fault (SEF) protection 110 Non-directional time delayed SEF protection (residually connected) Non-directional instantaneous SEF protection (residually connected) Directional time delayed SEF protection (residually connected) Directional instantaneous SEF protection (residually connected) SEF protection - as fed from a core-balance CT High impedance restricted earth fault protection Reverse and low forward power protection functions Protection class current transformers Metering class current transformers Converting an IEC185 current transformer standard protection classification to a kneepoint voltage Converting IEC185 current transformer standard protection classification to an ANSI/IEEE standard voltage rating 110 110 110 110 110 111 111 111 112 112 113
6.
6.1 6.2 6.3 6.4 6.5
COMMISSIONING TEST MENU

Opto I/P status Relay O/P status Test port status LED status Monitor bits 1 to 8
113
114 114 115 115 115
P341/EN AP/D22 Page 6/116 6.6 6.7 6.8 6.9 6.10 Test mode Test pattern Contact test Test LEDs Using a monitor/download port test box
Application Notes MiCOM P341 115 116 116 116 116
Figure 1: Figure 2a: Figure 2b: Figure 2c: Figure 3: Figure 4: Figure 5: Figure 6: Figure 7: Figure 8: Figure 9: Figure 10: Figure 11: Figure 12: Figure 13: Figure 14: Figure 15a: Figure 15b: Figure 16: Figure 17: Figure 18a: Figure 18b: Figure 19: Figure 20: Figure 21:
Typical system with embedded generation Vector diagram representing steady state condition Single phase line diagram showing generator parameters Transient voltage vector change q due to change in load current DIL Typical distribution system using parallel transformers Positioning of core balance current transformers Current distribution in an insulated system with C phase fault Phasor diagrams for insulated system with C phase fault Current distribution in Peterson Coil earthed system Distribution of currents during a C phase to earth fault Theoretical case no resistance present in XL or Xc Zero sequence network showing residual currents Practical case: resistance present in XL and Xc Resistive components of spill current High impedance principle High impedance REF relay/CT connections Residual voltage, solidly earthed systems Residual voltage, resistance earthed systems Co-ordination of underfrequency protection function with system load shedding CB fail logic Simple busbar blocking scheme (single incomer) Simple busbar blocking scheme (single incomer) VTS logic CT supervision function block diagram CB state monitoring
14 17 18 18 32 38 41 42 44 45 46 47 48 49 53 54 58 59 67 77 78 78 80 83 86
Application Notes MiCOM P341 Figure 22: Figure 23: Figure 24: Figure 25: Figure 26: Figure 27: Figure 28: Figure 29: Pole dead logic Remote control of circuit breaker TCS scheme 1 PSL for TCS schemes 1 and 3 TCS scheme 2 PSL for TCS scheme 2 TCS scheme 2 Trip LED logic diagram
P341/EN AP/D22 Page 7/116 87 91 93 95 95 96 96 109
Application Notes MiCOM P341 1. 1.1 INTRODUCTION Interconnection protection
Small-scale generators can be found in a wide range of situations. These may be used to provide emergency power in the event of loss of the main supply. Alternatively the generation of electrical power may be a by-product of a heat/steam generation process. Where such embedded generation capacity exists it can be economic to run the machines in parallel with the local Public Electricity Suppliers (PES) network. This can reduce a sites overall power demand or peak load. Additionally, excess generation may be exported and sold to the local PES. If parallel operation is possible great care must be taken to ensure that the embedded generation does not cause any dangerous conditions to exist on the local PES network. PES networks have in general been designed for operation where the generation is supplied from central sources down into the network. Generated voltages and frequency are closely monitored to ensure that values at the point of supply are within statutory limits. Tap changers and tap changer control schemes are optimised to ensure that supply voltages remain within these limits. Embedded generation can affect the normal flow of active and reactive power on the network leading to unusually high or low voltages being produced and may also lead to excessive fault current that could exceed the rating of the installed distribution switchgear/cables. It may also be possible for the embedded generators to become disconnected from the main source of supply but be able to supply local load on the PES network. Such islanded operation must be avoided for several reasons to ensure that unearthed operation of the PES network is avoided to ensure that automatic reclosure of system circuit breakers will not result in connecting unsynchronised supplies causing damage to the generators to ensure that system operations staff cannot attempt unsynchronised manual closure of an open circuit breaker. to ensure that there is no chance of faults on the PES system being undetectable due to the low fault supplying capability of the embedded generator to ensure that the voltage and frequency supplied to PES customers remains within statutory limits
Before granting permission for the generation to be connected to their system the PES must be satisfied that no danger will result. The type and extent of protection required at the interconnection point between PES system and embedded generation will need to be analysed. 1.2 MiCOM interconnection protection relay MiCOM relays are a new range of products from AREVA T&D. Using the latest numerical technology the platform includes devices designed for the application to a wide range of power system plant such as motors, generators, feeders, overhead lines and cables. Each relay is designed around a common hardware and software platform in order to achieve a high degree of commonality between products. One such product in the range is the P341 Interconnection Protection Relay. The relay has been designed to provide a wide range of protection functions required to prevent dangerous conditions that could be present when embedded generators provide power to local
P341/EN AP/D22 Page 10/116
power supply networks when the main connection with the Electricity Supply system is lost. The relays also include a comprehensive range of non-protection features to aid with power system diagnosis and fault analysis. All these features can be accessed remotely from one of the relays remote serial communications options. 1.2.1 Protection features The P341 relay contains a wide variety of protection functions, these are summarised below: 1.2.2 Phase Fault Overcurrent Protection four stage back-up protection. Earth Fault Overcurrent Protection four stage back-up protection. Neutral Displacement Protection provides protection against earth faults on impedance earthed/un-earthed systems. Under/Over Voltage Protection two stage protection to prevent the supply of unusual voltages to external supply network. Under/Over Frequency Protection six stage frequency protection to prevent the supply of unusual frequencies to the external supply network. Reverse Power protection against prime mover failure of a generator. Low Forward Power provides an interlock for non urgent tripping. Over Power back-up overload protection, or protection against excessive export power to local network Rate of Change of Frequency Protection to detect the loss of connection to main grid supply network. Voltage Vector Shift Protection to detect the loss of connection to main grid supply network. Thermal overload protection two stage thermal overload protection. Voltage Transformer Supervision to prevent mal-operation of voltage dependent protection elements upon loss of a VT input signal. Programmable Scheme Logic allowing user defined protection and control logic to suit particular customer applications.
Non-protection features Below is a summary of the P341 relay non-protective features: Measurements various measurements of value for display on the relay or accessed from the serial communications, e.g. currents, voltages etc. Fault/Event/Disturbance Records available from the serial communications or on the relay display (fault/event records only on relay display). Four Setting Groups independent setting groups to cater for alternative power system and protection arrangements or special applications. Remote Serial Communications to allow remote access to the relays. The following communications protocols are supported; Courier, MODBUS, IEC 60870-5-103 (VDEW) and DNP 3.0.
Application Notes MiCOM P341 2.
P341/EN AP/D22 Page 11/116
Continuous Self Monitoring power-on diagnostics and self checking routines to provide maximum relay reliability and availability. Commissioning test facilities.
APPLICATION OF INDIVIDUAL PROTECTION FUNCTIONS The following sections detail the individual protection functions in addition to where and how they may be applied. Each section also gives an extract from the respective menu columns to demonstrate how the settings are actually applied to the relay.
2.1
Configuration column The P340 relays include a column in the menu called the CONFIGURATION column. This affects the operation of each of the individual protection functions. The aim of this column is to allow general configuration of the relay from a single point in the menu. Any of the functions that are disabled or made invisible from this column do not then appear within the main relay menu. The following table shows the relay menu for the Configuration column, with default settings. The brief description of the function of each setting is also provided.
Menu Text CONFIGURATION No Operation All Settings Setting Group 1 Setting Group 2 Setting Group 3 Setting Group 4 Select via Menu Select via Optos Group 1 Group 2 Group 3 Group 4 No Operation Save Abort Restore default settings to any or all groups of settings Change setting groups by? Select active setting group used for protection settings Saves all setting changes from stored settings buffer memory into stored settings Selects a group of settings to copy to the group designated in Copy To cell Copies the group of settings selected in the Copy From cell to the selected setting group Selects if Group 1 settings are available on the relay Default Setting Available Settings Function
Restore Defaults
No Operation
Setting Group
Select via Menu
Active Settings
Group 1
Save Changes
No Operation
Copy From
Group 1
Group1, 2, 3 or 4
Copy To
No Operation
Group1, 2, 3 or 4
Setting Group 1
Enabled
Enabled or Disabled
P341/EN AP/D22 Page 12/116

Menu Text Setting Group 2 Default Setting Disabled Available Settings Enabled or Disabled

Function Selects if Group 2 settings are available on the relay Selects if Group 3 settings are available on the relay Selects if Group 4 settings are available on the relay Makes settings visible in the relay menu Makes settings visible in the relay menu Makes settings visible in the relay menu Makes settings visible in the relay menu Makes settings visible in the relay menu Makes settings visible in the relay menu Makes settings visible in the relay menu Makes settings visible in the relay menu Makes settings visible in the relay menu Makes settings visible in the relay menu Makes settings visible in the relay menu Makes settings visible in the relay menu Makes settings visible in the relay menu Makes settings visible in the relay menu Makes settings visible in the relay menu Makes settings visible in the relay menu Makes settings visible in the relay menu Makes settings visible in the relay menu Makes settings visible in the relay menu
Setting Group 3
Disabled
Enabled or Disabled
Setting Group 4 Power Thermal Overload Overcurrent Earth Fault SEF/REF/SPower Residual O/V NVD df/dt V Vector Shift Reconnect Delay Volt Protection Freq Protection CB Fail Supervision Input Labels Output Labels CT & VT Ratios Event Recorder Disturb Recorder Measuret Setup
Disabled Enabled Enabled Enabled Enabled SEF/REF Enabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Enabled Enabled Disabled Disabled Visible Visible Visible Invisible Invisible Invisible
Enabled or Disabled Enabled or Disabled Enabled or Disabled Enabled or Disabled Enabled or Disabled Disabled or SEF/REF or Sensitive Power Enabled or Disabled Enabled or Disabled Enabled or Disabled Enabled or Disabled Enabled or Disabled Enabled or Disabled Enabled or Disabled Enabled or Disabled Invisible or Visible Invisible or Visible Invisible or Visible Invisible or Visible Invisible or Visible Invisible or Visible

Menu Text Comms Settings Commission Tests Default Setting Visible Visible Available Settings Invisible or Visible Invisible or Visible
P341/EN AP/D22 Page 13/116

Function Makes settings visible in the relay menu Makes settings visible in the relay menu Selects if relay protection settings are displayed in primary or secondary current/voltage values
Setting Values
Primary
Primary or Secondary
2.2
CT and VT ratios The P340 relay allows the current and voltage settings to be applied to the relay in either primary or secondary quantities. This is done by programming the Setting Values cell of the CONFIGURATION column to either Primary or Secondary. When this cell is set to Primary, all current, voltage and impedance setting values are scaled by the programmed CT and VT ratios. These are found in the VT & CT RATIOS column, settings for which are shown below:
Menu Text CT & VT RATIOS Main VT Primary Main VT Secy NVD VT Primary NVD VT Secondary Phase CT Primary Phase CT Secy E/F CT Primary E/F CT Secondary SEF CT Primary SEF CT Secondary
110V 110V (Vn=100/120V) 400V (Vn=380/480V) 110 V 110V (Vn=100/120V) 400V (Vn=380/480V) 1 1 1 1 1 1 100V 80V (Vn=100/120V) 360V (Vn=380/480V) 100 V 80V (Vn=100/120V) 360V (Vn=380/480V) 1 1 1 1 1 1 1000000V 140V (Vn=100/120V) 480V (Vn=380/480V) 1000000 V 140V (Vn=100/120V) 480V (Vn=380/480V) 30000 5 30000 5 30000 5 1V 1V (Vn=100/120V) 4V (Vn=380/480V) 1V 1V (Vn=100/120V) 4V (Vn=380/480V) 1 4 1 4 1 4
Default Setting
Setting Range Min. Max.
Step Size
2.3
Loss of mains protection If the capacity of an embedded generator exceeds the locally connected load it is conceivable that it could supply the local load in island mode. Fault clearance may disconnect part of the public supply system from the main source of supply resulting in the embedded generation feeding the local loads, i.e. a Loss of Mains or Loss of Grid condition. This is illustrated in Figure 1. A fault at F will result in the tripping of CB1 disconnecting substations S1, S2 and S3 from the main source of supply. Also note that transformer T1 was supplying the earth connection for S1, S2 and S3, this earth connection is lost when CB1 opens. Should the load at substations S1 and S2 greatly exceed the rating of EG1, the generator will slow down quickly and underfrequency and/or undervoltage relays could operate to disconnect EG1 from the system. The worst scenario is when the external load is smaller than the
P341/EN AP/D22 Page 14/116
generator rating, in this case the generator can continue to operate normally supplying the external loads. The local system will now be operating unearthed and overcurrent protection may be inoperative at S1 and S2 due to the low fault supplying capacity of generator EG1. The embedded generator may also lose synchronism with the main system supply leading to serious problems if CB1 has auto reclosing equipment. An even more serious problem presents itself if manual operation of distribution switchgear is considered. System Operation staff may operate circuit breakers by hand. In these circumstances it is essential that unsynchronised reclosure is prevented as this could have very serious consequences for the operator, particularly if the switchgear is not designed, or rated, to be operated when switching onto a fault. To protect personnel, the embedded machine must be disconnected from the system as soon as the system connection is broken, this will ensure that manual unsynchronised closure is prevented.
CB2 EG1 S3 F CB1 T1
PES system
S1
S2
P2029ENa
Figure 1:
Typical system with embedded generation
Where the embedded generator does not export power under normal conditions it may be possible to use directional power or directional overcurrent protection relays to detect the export of power under loss of mains conditions. If export of power into the system is allowed it may not be possible to set directional relays using settings sensitive enough to detect the loss of the mains connection. In such circumstances a Rate of Change of Frequency and/or Voltage Vector Shift protection can be applied. These detect the slight variation in generator speed that occurs when the main supply connection is disconnected and the generator experiences a step change in load. The type of protection required to detect Loss of Mains conditions will depend on a number of factors, e.g. the generator rating, size of local load, ability to export power, and configuration of supply network etc. Protection requirements should be discussed and agreed with the local Public Electricity Supplier before permission to connect the embedded generator in parallel with the system is granted. A number of protection elements that may be sensitive to the Loss of Mains conditions are offered in the P341 relay; Rate of Change of Frequency, Voltage Vector Shift, Over Power Protection, Directional Overcurrent Protection, Frequency Protection, Voltage Protection. Application of each of these elements is discussed in the following sections.
Application Notes MiCOM P341 2.4 Rate of change of frequency protection
P341/EN AP/D22 Page 15/116
When a machine is running in parallel with the main power supply the frequency and hence speed of the machine will be governed by the grid supply. When the connection with the grid is lost, as described in section 2.3, the now islanded machine is free to slow down or speed up as determined by the new load conditions, machine rating and governor response. Where there is a significant change in load conditions between the synchronised and islanded condition the machine will speed up or slow down before the governor can respond. The rate of change of speed, or frequency, following a power disturbance can be approximated by
df/
dt =
DP.f 2GH
where P f
= Change in power output between synchronised and islanded operation = Rated frequency
G = Machine rating in MVA H = Inertia constant This simple expression assumes that the machine is running at rated frequency and that the time intervals are short enough that AVR and governor dynamics can be ignored. From this equation it is clear that the rate of change of frequency is directly proportional to the change in power output between two conditions. Provided there is a small change in load between the synchronised and islanded (loss of mains) condition the rate of change of frequency as the machine adjusts to the new load conditions can be detectable. The change in speed of the machine is also proportional to the inertia constant and rating of the machine and so will be application dependent. Care must be taken in applying this type of protection as the prime consideration is detecting the loss of grid connection. Failure to detect this condition may result in unsynchronised re-connection via remote re-closing equipment. However if too sensitive a setting is chosen there is a risk of nuisance tripping due to frequency fluctuations caused by normal heavy load switching or fault clearance. Guidance can be given for setting a rate of change of frequency element but these settings must be thoroughly tested on site to prove their accuracy for a given machine and load. A single stage, definite time delayed, rate of change of frequency element is provide in the P341 relay. The element calculates the rate of change of frequency every 3 cycles by calculating the frequency difference over the 3-cycle period as shown.
df/
dt =
fn - fn-3cycle 3cycle
Two consecutive calculations must give a result above the setting threshold before a trip decision can be initiated. The element also allows the user to set a frequency band within which the element is blocked. This provides additional stability for non loss of grid disturbances which do not affect the machine frequency significantly.
P341/EN AP/D22 Page 16/116
A DDB (Digital Data Bus) signal is available to indicate that the element has operated (DDB 440 df/dt Trip). A second DDB signal is available to indicate that the element has started (DDB 630 df/dt Start). These signals are used to operate the output relays (as programmed into the Programmable Scheme Logic (PSL)) and trigger the disturbance recorder. The state of the DDB signals can also be programmed to be viewed in the Monitor Bit x cells of the COMMISSION TESTS column in the relay. The following table shows the relay menu for the rate of change of frequency or df/dt protection element, including the available setting ranges and factory defaults: Menu Text GROUP 1 df/dt df/dt Status df/dt Setting df/dt Time Delay df/dt f Low df/dt f High 2.4.1 Enabled 0.2 Hz/s 0.5 s 49.5 Hz 50.5 Hz 0.1 Hz/s 0s 45 Hz 45 Hz Enabled, Disabled 10 Hz/s 100 s 65 Hz 65 Hz 0.01 Hz/s 0.1 s 0.01 Hz 0.01 Hz Default Setting Setting Range Min. Max. Step Size
Setting guidelines for df/dt protection The rate of change of frequency, or df/dt, protection can be selected by setting the df/dt Status cell to Enabled. The rate of change of frequency setting threshold, df/dt Setting, should be set to the desired level. The time delay setting, df/dt Time Delay, can be used to provide a degree of stability against normal load switching events which will cause a change in the frequency before governor correction. The frequency dead band can be set by setting the upper and lower frequency thresholds, df/dt f High, df/dt f Low, respectively. The setting thresholds should be set such that the loss of mains condition can be detected, this can be determined by system switching during initial commissioning. System simulation testing has shown that the following settings can provide stable operation for external faults, and load switching events, whilst operating for a loss of mains event which causes a 10% change in the machine output, for a typical 4MW machine. These can be used as a guide but will by no means be acceptable in all applications. Machine rating, governor response, local load and system load, will all affect the dynamic response of a machine to a loss of mains event. df/dt Setting df/dt Time Delay df/dt f High df/dt f Low 0.2Hz/s 0.5s 50.5Hz 49.5Hz
Once installed, the settings should be periodically reviewed to ensure that they are adequate to detect a loss of grid connection event, but not too sensitive such that unwanted tripping occurs during normal fault clearance, or load switching, that does not lead to the loss of mains condition. Safety of personnel is paramount and this should be kept in mind when optimising settings; non-synchronised manual
P341/EN AP/D22 Page 17/116
operation of circuit breakers must be prevented by disconnection of the embedded machine when the system becomes separated. 2.5 Voltage vector shift protection An expression for a sinusoidal mains voltage waveform is generally given by the following: V where = Vp sin (wt) wt = 2pft or V = Vp sin q(t)
q(t) =
If the frequency is changing at constant rate Rf from a frequency fo then the variation in the angle q(t) is given by: q(t) = which gives and q(t) = V = 2p f dt, 2p (fo t + t Rf t/2), V sin {2p (fo + t Rf/2)t}
Hence the angle change Dq(t) after time t is given by: Dq(t) = p Rf t2, Therefore the phase of the voltage with respect to a fixed frequency reference when subject to a constant rate of change of frequency changes in proportion to t2. This is a characteristic difference from a rate of change of frequency function, which in most conditions can be assumed as changing linearly with time. A rate of change of frequency of 10 Hz/s results in an angular voltage vector shift of only 0.72 degrees in the first cycle after the disturbance. This is too small to be detected by vector shift relays. In fact a typical setting for a voltage vector shift relay is, normally between 6 and 13 degrees. Therefore a voltage vector shift relay is not sensitive to the change in voltage phase brought about by change of frequency alone. To understand the relation between the resulting voltage vector angle change following a disturbance and the embedded generator characteristics a simplified single phase equivalent circuit of a synchronous generator or induction generator is shown in Figures 2a, 2b and 2c. The voltage VT is the symmetrical terminal voltage of the generator and the voltage E is the internal voltage lying behind the machine impedance which is largely reactive (X). When a disturbance causes a change in current the terminal voltage will jump with respect to its steady state position. The resultant voltage vector is dependent on the rate of change in current, and the subtransient impedance of the machine, which is the impedance the generator presents to a sudden load change. In turn the current change depends on how strong the source is (short circuit capacity) and the voltage regulation at the generator terminal which is also affected by the reactive power load connected to the machine.
E
IL X
VT
IL
IL R
P2030ENa
Figure 2a: Vector diagram representing steady state condition
P341/EN AP/D22 Page 18/116
jX
IL
VT
P2031ENa
Figure 2b: Single phase line diagram showing generator parameters
E VT VT
IL
ILR
ILX
DIL
DILX
P2032ENa
Figure 2c:
Transient voltage vector change q due to change in load current DIL
The voltage vector shift function is designed to respond within one to two full mains cycles when its threshold is exceeded. Discrimination between a loss of mains condition and a circuit fault is therefore achievable only by selecting the angle threshold to be above expected fault levels. This setting can be quantified by calculating the angular change due to islanding. However this angular change depends on system topology, power flows and very often also on the instant of the system faults. For example a bolted three phase short circuit which occurs close to the relay may cause a problem in that it inherently produces a vector shift angle at the instant of the fault which is bigger than any normal setting, independent of the mains condition. This kind of fault would cause the relay to trip shortly after the instant of its inception. Although this may seem to be a disadvantage of the vector shift function, isolating the embedded generator at the instant of a bolted three phase fault is of advantage to the PES. This is because the mains short circuit capacity and consequently the energy feeding the short circuit is limited by the instant operation of the relay. The fast operation of this vector shift function renders it to operate at the instant of a disturbance rather than during a gradual change caused by a gradual change of power flow. Operation can occur at the instant of inception of the fault, at fault clearance or following non-synchronised reclosure, which affords additional protection to the embedded generator. The P341 has a single stage Voltage Vector Shift protection element. This element measures the change in voltage angle over successive power system half-cycles. The element operates by measuring the time between zero crossings on the voltage waveforms. A measurement is taken every half cycle for each phase voltage. Over a power system cycle this produces 6 results, a trip is issued if 5 of the 6 calculations for the last power system cycle are above the set threshold. Checking all three phases makes the element less susceptible to incorrect operation due to harmonic distortion or interference in the measured voltage waveform. A DDB (Digital Data Bus) signal is available to indicate that the element has operated (DDB 441 V Shift Trip). The state of the DDB signal can also be programmed to be viewed in the Monitor Bit x cells of the COMMISSION TESTS column in the relay.
P341/EN AP/D22 Page 19/116
The following table shows the relay menu for the Voltage Vector Shift protection element, including the available setting ranges and factory defaults: Menu Text Default Setting Setting Range Min. Max. Enabled, Disabled 2 30 1 Step Size
GROUP 1 V Vector Shift V Shift Status V Shift Angle 2.5.1 Enabled 10
Setting guidelines for voltage vector shift protection The element can be selected by setting the V Shift Status cell to Enabled. The angle change setting threshold, V Shift Angle, should be set to the desired level. The setting threshold should be set such that the loss of mains condition can be detected, this can be determined by system switching during initial commissioning. System simulation testing has shown that a V Shift Angle setting of 10 can provide stable operation for external faults, and load switching events, whilst operating for a loss of mains event which causes a 10% change in the machine output for a typical 4MW machine. Although in some circumstances, this setting may prove to be too sensitive, it is recommended to achieve a successful loss of mains trip in as many cases as possible. Although the vector shift function may trip the relay due to a bolted 3 phase fault, it is also essential in securing a trip at the instant of an out-ofphase autoreclose, where the df/dt function does not trip. This setting should be used as a guide but will by no means be acceptable in all applications. Machine rating, governor response, local load and system load, will all affect the dynamic response of a machine to a loss of mains event. Once installed the settings should be periodically reviewed to ensure that they are adequate to detect a loss of grid connection event, but not too sensitive such that unwanted tripping occurs during normal fault clearance that does not lead to the loss of mains condition. Safety of personnel is paramount and this should be kept in mind when optimising settings; non-synchronised manual operation of circuit breakers must be prevented by disconnection of the embedded machine when the system becomes separated.
2.6
Reconnection timer As explained in sections 2.4 and 2.5, due to the sensitivity of the settings applied to the df/dt and/or the Voltage Vector Shift element, false operation for non loss of mains events may occur. This could, for example, be due to a close up three phase fault which can cause operation of a Voltage Vector Shift element. Such operations will lead to the disconnection of the embedded machine from the external network and prevent export of power. Alternatively the loss of mains protections may operate correctly, and auto re-closure equipment may restore the grid supply following a transient fault. Disconnection of an embedded generator could lead to a simple loss of revenue. Or in cases where the licensing arrangement demands export of power at times of peak load may lead to penalty charges being imposed. To minimise the disruption caused, the P341 includes a reconnection timer. This timer is initiated following operation of any protection element that could operate due to a loss of mains event, i.e. df/dt, voltage vector shift, under/over frequency, power and under/over voltage. The timer is blocked should a short circuit fault protection element operate, i.e. residual overvoltage, overcurrent, and earth fault. Once the timer delay has expired
P341/EN AP/D22 Page 20/116
the element will provide a pulsed output signal. This signal can be used to initiate external synchronising equipment that can re-synchronise the machine with the system and reclose the CB. A DDB (Digital Data Bus) signal is available to indicate that the element has operated (DDB 742 Reconnection). The state of the DDB signal can also be programmed to be viewed in the Monitor Bit x cells of the COMMISSION TESTS column in the relay. The following table shows the relay menu for the Reconnect Delay, including the available setting ranges and factory defaults: Menu Text Default Setting Setting Range Min. Max. Enabled, Disabled 0s 0.01 s 300 s 30 s 0.01 s 0.01 s Step Size
GROUP 1 RECONNECT DELAY Reconnect Status Reconnect Delay Reconnect tPULSE 2.6.1 Enabled 60 s 1s
Setting guidelines for the reconnect delay The element can be selected by setting the Reconnect Status cell to Enabled. The timer setting, Reconnect Delay, should be set to the desired delay, this would typically be longer than the dead time of system auto reclose equipment to ensure that re-synchronisation is only attempted after the system has been returned to a normal state. The signal pulse time, Reconnect tPULSE should be set such that the output pulse is sufficient to securely initiate the auto synchronising equipment when required.
2.7
Power protection The power protection elements of the P341 relay calculate the three phase active power based on the following formula, using the current measured at the IA, IB, IC inputs on the relay. P = Vala cosfa + Vblb cosfb + Vclc cosfc
Two stages of power protection are provided, these can be independently selected as either Reverse Power, Over Power, Low Forward Power or Disabled, operation in each mode is described in the following sections. The power elements may be selectively disabled, via fixed logic, so that they can be inhibited when used for machine protection and the protected machine CB is open. This will prevent false operation and nuisance flagging of any stage selected to operate as Low Forward power. Where the local licensing agreement prevents the export of power into the local supply Over Power protection may be used as a simple Loss of Mains protection. In these cases the element can be used to provide alarm and trip stages allowing the machine operators to closely monitor the machine export capability. DDB signals are available to indicate starting and tripping of each stage (Starts: DDB 595, DDB 596, Trips: DDB 475, 476). The state of the DDB signals can be programmed to be viewed in the Monitor Bit x cells of the COMMISSION TESTS column in the relay.
P341/EN AP/D22 Page 21/116
Setting ranges for the Power elements are shown in the following table:
Menu Text GROUP 1 POWER Power1 Function -P>1 Setting Reverse
20 x In W (Vn=100/120V) 80 x In W (Vn=380/480V) 20 x In W (Vn=100/120V) 80 x In W (Vn=380/480V) 120 x In W (Vn=100/120V) 20 x In W (Vn=380/480V)
Default Setting
Setting Range Min. Max.
Step Size
Disabled, Reverse, Low Forward, Over

14 x In W (Vn=100/120V) 56 x In W (Vn=380/480V) 14 x In W (Vn=100/120V) 56 x In W (Vn=380/480V) 14 x In W (Vn=100/120V) 56 x In W (Vn=380/480V) 40 x In W (Vn=100/120V) 160 x In W (Vn=380/480V) 40 x In W (Vn=100/120V) 160 x In W (Vn=380/480V) 300 x In W (Vn=100/120V) 1200 x In W (Vn=380/480V) 2 x In W (Vn=100/120V) 8 x In W (Vn=380/480V) 2 x In W (Vn=100/120V) 8 x In W (Vn=380/480V) 2 x In W (Vn=100/120V) 8 x In W (Vn=380/480V)
P<1 Setting
P>1 Setting Power1 Time Delay Power1 DO Timer P1 Poledead Inh Power2 Function P>2 Setting
5s 0s Enabled Low Forward

20 x In W (Vn=100/120V) 20 x In W (Vn=380/480V) 20 x In W (Vn=100/120V) 20 x In W (Vn=380/480V) 120 x In W (Vn=100/120V) 20 x In W (Vn=380/480V)
0s 0s
100 s 100 s Enabled, Disabled
0.01 s 0.01 s

14 x In W (Vn=100/120V) 56 x In W (Vn=380/480V) 14 x In W (Vn=100/120V) 56 x In W (Vn=380/480V) 14 x In W (Vn=100/120V) 56 x In W (Vn=380/480V) 40 x In W (Vn=100/120V) 160 x In W (Vn=380/480V) 40 x In W (Vn=100/120V) 160 x In W (Vn=380/480V) 300 x In W (Vn=100/120V) 100 x In W (Vn=380/480V) 2 x In W (Vn=100/120V) 8 x In W (Vn=380/480V) 2 x In W (Vn=100/120V) 8 x In W (Vn=380/480V) 2 x In W (Vn=100/120V) 8 x In W (Vn=380/480V)
P<2 Setting
P>2 Setting Power2 Time Delay Power2 DO Timer P2 Poledead Inh
5s 0s Enabled
0s 0s
0.01 s 0.01 s
2.7.1
Sensitive power protection function The minimum standard 3 phase power protection setting (7%Pn for P341) can be restrictive for some applications. For example for steam turbine generators and some hydro generators a reverse power setting as low as 0.5%Pn is required. A sensitive setting for low forward power protection may also be required, especially for steam turbine generators which have relatively low over speed design limits. If a power setting less than 7%Pn is required then the sensitive power protection should be used. To improve the power protection sensitivity, a sensitive CT input is used. The CT input is the same as that of the sensitive earth fault and restricted earth fault protection elements, so the user can only select either sensitive power or SEF/REF in the Configuration menu, but not both.
P341/EN AP/D22 Page 22/116
The sensitive power protection measures only A-phase active power, as the abnormal power condition is a 3-phase phenomenon. Having a separate CT input also means that a correctly loaded metering class CT can be used which can provide the required angular accuracy for the sensitive power protection function. A compensation angle setting qC is also be provided to compensate for the angle error introduced by the system CT and VT. The A-phase power is calculated based on the following formula: PA = IA VA cos (f - qC) Where f is the angle of IA with respect to VA and qC is the compensation angle setting. Therefore, rated single phase power, Pn, for a 1A rated CT and 110V rated VT is Pn = In x Vn = 1 x 110/3 = 63.5 W The minimum setting is 0.3 W = 0.47% Pn Two stages of sensitive power protection are provided, these can be independently selected as either reverse power, over power, low forward power or disabled, operation in each mode is described in the following sections. The power elements may be selectively disabled, via fixed logic, so that they can be inhibited when the protected machines CB is open, this will prevent maloperation and nuisance flagging of any stage selected to operate as low forward power. Measurement displays of A Phase sensitive active power, reactive power and power factor angle APh Sen Watts, Aph Sen Vars and APh Power Angle are provided in the MEASUREMENTS 3 menu to aid testing and commissioning. DDB signals are available to indicate starting and tripping of each stage stage (Starts: DDB 643, DDB 644, Trips: DDB 495, 496). The state of the DDB signals can be programmed to be viewed in the Monitor Bit x cells of the COMMISSION TESTS column in the relay. Setting ranges for the Sensitive Power elements are shown in the following table: Menu Text Default Setting Setting Range Min Max Step Size
Group 1: Sensitive Power Sen Power1 Func Sen P>1 Setting Reverse
0.5 x In W (Vn=100/120V) 2 x In W (Vn=380/480V) 0.5 x In W (Vn=100/120V) 2 x In W (Vn=380/480V) 50 x In W (Vn=100/120V) 200 x In W (Vn=380/480V)

0.3 x In W (Vn=100/120V) 1.2 x In W (Vn=380/480V) 0.3 x In W (Vn=100/120V) 1.2 x In W (Vn=380/480V) 0.3 x In W (Vn=100/120V) 1.2 x In W (Vn=380/480V) 15 x In W (Vn=100/120V) 60 x In W (Vn=380/480V) 15 x In W (Vn=100/120V) 60 x In W (Vn=380/480V) 100 x In W (Vn=100/120V) 400 x In W (Vn=380/480V) 0.1 x In W (Vn=100/120V) 0.4 x In W (Vn=380/480V) 0.1 x In W (Vn=100/120V) 0.4 x In W (Vn=380/480V) 0.1 x In W (Vn=100/120V) 0.4 x In W (Vn=380/480V)
Sen P<1 Setting
Sen P>1 Setting Sen Power1 Delay Power1 DO Timer P1 Poledead Inh
5s 0s Enabled
0s 0s
0.1 s 0.1 s
Application Notes MiCOM P341 Menu Text Default Setting Setting Range Min Max
P341/EN AP/D22 Page 23/116 Step Size
Group 1: Sensitive Power Sen Power2 Func Sen P>2 Setting Low Forward
0.5 x In W (Vn=100/120V) 2 x In W (Vn=380/480V) 0.5 x In W (Vn=100/120V) 2 x In W (Vn=380/480V) 50 x In W (Vn=100/120V) 200 x In W (Vn=380/480V)

0.3 x In W (Vn=100/120V) 1.2 x In W (Vn=380/480V) 0.3 x In W (Vn=100/120V) 1.2 x In W (Vn=380/480V) 0.3 x In W (Vn=100/120V) 1.2 x In W (Vn=380/480V) 15 x In W (Vn=100/120V) 60 x In W (Vn=380/480V) 15 x In W (Vn=100/120V) 60 x In W (Vn=380/480V) 100 x In W (Vn=100/120V) 400 x In W (Vn=380/480V) 0.1 x In W (Vn=100/120V) 0.4 x In W (Vn=380/480V) 0.1 x In W (Vn=100/120V) 0.4 x In W (Vn=380/480V) 0.1 x In W (Vn=100/120V) 0.4 x In W (Vn=380/480V)
Sen P<2 Setting
Sen P>2 Setting Sen Power2 Delay Power2 DO Timer
2s 0s Enabled
0s 0s
0.1 s 0.1 s
P2 Poledead Inh 2.7.2 Over power protection
The Over Power function is a directional element that will operate when power flows in the forward direction. From the convention, this means power flowing away from the busbar into the interconnection feeder or out of the protected machine. Over Power protection can be used as simple overload indication, or as a back up protection for failure of governor and control equipment, and would be set above the maximum power rating of the machine. Alternatively the Over Power function can be used as protection against excessive export power for an embedded generator. In some installations the machine may be allowed to operate in parallel with the external supply but the exportation of power into the external supply may be forbidden. In these cases a simple Over Power element can be used to monitor the power flow at the interconnection circuit breaker and trip if power is seen to be exported into the system. For small standby generators this may be accepted as the Loss of Mains protection. 2.7.2.1 Over power setting guideline Each stage of power protection can be selected to operate as an Over Power stage by selecting the Power1 Function/Sen Power1 Func or Power2 Function/Sen Power2 Func cell to Over. The power threshold setting of the Over Power protection, P>1 Setting/Sen P>1 Setting or P2 Setting/Sen P>2 Setting, should be set greater than the machine full load rated power if providing overload protection. If the element is used to prevent the export of power into the external system then the threshold can be set to minimum or just in excess of the power export allowance. A time delay setting, Power1 TimeDelay/Sen Power1 Delay or Power2 TimeDelay/Sen Power2 Delay can be applied. The delay on reset timer, Power1 DO Timer or Power2 DO Timer, would normally be set to zero.
P341/EN AP/D22 Page 24/116 2.7.3 Low forward power protection function
Low forward power may be used where the P341 relay is being used to protect a small generator. When the CB connecting the generator to the system is tripped, the electrical load on the machine is cut. This could lead to generator over-speed if the mechanical input power is not reduced quickly. To reduce the risk of over speed damage, it is sometimes chosen to interlock non-urgent tripping of the generator breaker with a low forward power check. This ensures that the generator set circuit breaker is opened only when the output power is sufficiently low that over speeding is unlikely. The delay in electrical tripping, until prime mover input power has been removed, may be deemed acceptable for non-urgent protection trips; e.g. stator earth fault protection for a high impedance earthed generator. For urgent trips, e.g. stator short circuit protection the low forward power interlock should not be used. With the low probability of urgent trips, the risk of over speed and possible consequences must be accepted. The Low Forward Power protection can be arranged to interlock non-urgent tripping using the relay programmable scheme logic. It can also be arranged to provide a contact for external interlocking of manual tripping, if desired. To prevent unwanted relay alarms and flags, a Low Forward Power protection element can be disabled when the circuit breaker is opened via poledead logic. 2.7.3.1 Low forward power setting guideline Each stage of power protection can be selected to operate as a Low Forward Power stage by selecting the Power1 Function/Sen Power1 Func or Power2 Function/Sen Power2 Func cell to Low Forward. When required, the threshold setting of the Low Forward Power protection function, P<1 Setting/Sen P<1 Setting or P<2 Setting/Sen P<2 Setting, should be less than 50% of the power level that could result in a dangerous over speed transient on loss of electrical loading. The generator set manufacturer should be consulted for a rating for the protected machine. The time delay associated with the Low Forward Power protection function, Power1 Time Delay/Sen Power1 Delay or Power2 Time Delay/Sen Power2 Delay, could be set to zero. However, some delay is desirable so that permission for a non-urgent electrical trip is not given in the event of power fluctuations arising from sudden steam valve/throttle closure. A typical time delay for this reason is 2s. The delay on reset timer, Power1 DO Timer or Power2 DO Timer, would normally be set to zero when selected to operate Low Forward power elements. To prevent unwanted relay alarms and flags, a Low Forward Power protection element can be disabled when the circuit breaker is open via poledead logic. This is controlled by setting the power protection inhibit cells, P1 Poledead Inh or P2 Poledead Inh, to Enabled. 2.7.4 Reverse power protection function Reverse Power protection may be used where the P341 relay is being used to protect a small generator. A generator is expected to supply power to the connected system in normal operation. If the generator prime mover fails, a generator that is connected in parallel with another source of electrical supply will begin to motor. This reversal of power flow due to loss of prime mover can be detected by the reverse power element. The consequences of generator motoring and the level of power drawn from the power system will be dependent on the type of prime mover. Typical levels of
P341/EN AP/D22 Page 25/116
motoring power and possible motoring damage that could occur for various types of generating plant are given in Table 1. Prime Mover Diesel Engine Motoring Power (Percentage Rating) 5% 25% Possible Damage Risk of fire or explosion from unburned fuel
Motoring level depends on compression ratio and cylinder bore stiffness. Rapid disconnection is required to limit power loss and risk of damage. 10% 15% (Split-shaft) >50%) (Single-shaft) With some gear-driven sets, damage may arise due to reverse torque on gear teeth.
Gas Turbine
Compressor load on single shaft machines leads to a high motoring power compared to split-shaft machines. Rapid disconnection is required to limit power loss or damage. Hydraulic Turbines 0.2 >2% (Blades out of water) >2.0% (Blades in water) Blade and runner cavitation may occur with a long period of motoring.
Power is low when blades are above tail-race water level. Hydraulic flow detection devices are often the main means of detecting loss of drive. Automatic disconnection is recommended for unattended operation. Table 1: Motoring power and possible damage for various types of prime mover
In some applications, the level of reverse power in the case of prime mover failure may fluctuate. This may be the case for a failed diesel engine. To prevent cyclic initiation and reset of the main trip timer, and consequent failure to trip, an adjustable reset time delay is provided (Power1 DO Timer/Power2 DO Timer). This delay would need to be set longer than the period for which the reverse power could fall below the power setting (P<1 Setting/Sen P<1 Setting). This setting needs to be taken into account when setting the main trip time delay. It should also be noted that a delay on reset in excess of half the period of any system power swings could result in operation of the reverse power protection during swings. Reverse Power Protection may also be used to interlock the opening of the generator set circuit breaker for non-urgent tripping, as discussed in 2.12.1. Reverse Power interlocking is preferred over Low Forward Power interlocking by some utilities. 2.7.4.1 Reverse power setting guideline Each stage of power protection can be selected to operate as a Reverse Power stage by selecting the Power1 Function/Sen Power1 Func or Power2 Function/Sen Power2 Func cell to Reverse. The power threshold setting of the Reverse Power protection, P>1 Setting/Sen P>1 Setting or P>2 Setting/Sen P>2 Setting, should be less than 50% of the motoring power, typical values for the level of reverse power for generators are given in Table 1.
P341/EN AP/D22 Page 26/116
The reverse power protection function should be time-delayed to prevent false trips or alarms being given during power system disturbances or following synchronisation. A time delay setting, Power1 Time Delay/Sen Power1 Delay or Power2 Time Delay/Sen Power2 Delay of 5s should be applied typically. The delay on reset timer, Power1 DO Timer or Power2 DO Timer, would normally be set to zero. When settings of greater than zero are used for the reset time delay, the pick up time delay setting may need to be increased to ensure that false tripping does not result in the event of a stable power swinging event. 2.8 Overcurrent protection Overcurrent relays are the most commonly used protective devices in any industrial or distribution power system. They provide main protection to both feeders and busbars when unit protection is not used. They are also commonly applied to provide backup protection when unit systems, such as pilot wire schemes, are used. By a combination of time delays and relay pick-up settings, overcurrent relays may be applied to either feeders or power transformers to provide discriminative phase fault protection (and also earth fault protection if system earth fault levels are sufficiently high). In such applications, the various overcurrent relays on the system are co-ordinated with one another such that the relay nearest to the fault operates first. This is referred to as cascade operation because if the relay nearest to the fault does not operate, the next upstream relay will trip in a slightly longer time. The overcurrent protection included in the P341 relay provides four stage nondirectional/directional three phase overcurrent protection with independent time delay characteristics. All overcurrent and directional settings apply to all three phases but are independent for each of the four stages. The first two stages of overcurrent protection have time delayed characteristics which are selectable between inverse definite minimum time (IDMT), or definite time (DT). The third and fourth stages have definite time characteristics only. Various methods are available to achieve correct relay co-ordination on a system; by means of time alone, current alone or a combination of both time and current. Grading by means of current is only possible where there is an appreciable difference in fault level between the two relay locations. Grading by time is used by some utilities but can often lead to excessive fault clearance times at or near source substations where the fault level is highest. For these reasons the most commonly applied characteristic in co-ordinating overcurrent relays is the IDMT type. Each stage can be blocked by energising the relevant DDB signal via the PSL (DDB 354, DDB 355, DDB 356, DDB 357). This allows the overcurrent protection to be integrated into busbar protection schemes, as shown in section 2.18, or can be used to improve grading with downstream devices. DDB signals are also available to indicate the start and trip of each phase of each stage of protection, (Starts: DDB 597-612, Trips: DDB 477-492). The state of the DDB signals can be programmed to be viewed in the Monitor Bit x cells of the COMMISSION TESTS column in the relay. The following table shows the relay menu for the overcurrent protection, including the available setting ranges and factory defaults:
Application Notes MiCOM P341 Menu Text Default Setting Setting Range Min. Max.
GROUP 1 OVERCURRENT
I>1 Function I>1 Direction I>1 Current Set I>1 Time Delay I>1 TMS I>1 Time Dial I>1 Reset Char I>1 tRESET I>2 Cells as for I>1 above I>3 Status I>3 Direction I>3 Current set I>3 Time Delay I>4 Cells as for I>3 above I> Char Angle I> Function Link
{See Note} Note:
IEC S Inverse
Disabled, DT, IEC S Inverse, IEC V Inverse, IEC E Inverse, UK LT Inverse, IEEE M Inverse, IEEE V Inverse, IEEE E Inverse, US Inverse, US ST Inverse Non-Directional, Directional Fwd, Directional Rev 0.08 x In A 0s 0.025 0.5 4.0 x In A 100 s 1.2 15 DT or Inverse 0s 100 s 0.01 s 0.01 x In A 0.01 s 0.025 0.1
Non-Directional 1 x In A 1s 1 7 DT 0s
Disabled Non-Directional 20 x In A 0s
Disabled, Enabled Non-Directional, Directional Fwd, Directional Rev 0.08 x In A 0s 32 x In A 100 s 0.01 x In A 0.01 s
45 00001111
95
+95
Bit 0 I>1 VTS Block, Bit 1 I>2 VTS Block, Bit 2 I>3 VTS Block, Bit 3 I>4 VTS Block, Bit 4, 5, 6 & 7 Not Used
VTS Block When relevant bit set to 1, operation of Voltage Transformer Supervision (VTS) will block stage if directionalised. When set to 0, stage will revert to non-directional. The inverse time delayed characteristics listed above, comply with the following formula: The IEC/UK IDMT curves conform to the following formula: K +L t=Tx a (I/Is) - 1
P341/EN AP/D22 Page 28/116
Application Notes MiCOM P341 The IEEE/US IDMT curves conform to the following formula: K TD x t= (I/Is) a - 1 7 + L
where t K
= operation time = constant = measured current
I
a L T
IS = current threshold setting

= constant = ANSI/IEEE constant (zero for IEC/UK curves) = Time multiplier setting for IEC/UK curves
TD = Time dial setting for IEEE/US curves IDMT characteristics IDMT Curve Description Standard inverse Very inverse Extremely inverse Long time inverse Moderately inverse Very inverse Extremely inverse Inverse Short time inverse Standard IEC IEC IEC UK IEEE IEEE IEEE US-C08 US-C02 K Constant 0.14 13.5 80 120 0.0515 19.61 28.2 5.95 0.02394 a Constant 0.02 1 2 1 0.02 2 2 2 0.02 L Constant 0 0 0 0 0.114 0.491 0.1217 0.18 0.01694
Note that the IEEE and US curves are set differently to the IEC/UK curves, with regard to the time setting. A time multiplier setting (TMS) is used to adjust the operating time of the IEC curves, whereas a time dial setting is employed for the IEEE/US curves. Both the TMS and Time Dial settings act as multipliers on the basic characteristics but the scaling of the time dial is approximately 10 times that of the TMS, as shown in the previous menu. The menu is arranged such that if an IEC/UK curve is selected, the I> Time Dial cell is not visible and vice versa for the TMS setting. Note, that the IEC/UK inverse characteristics can be used with a definite time reset characteristic, however, the IEEE/US curves may have an inverse or definite time reset characteristic. The overcurrent protection function operates from the phase currents measured by the IA, IB and IC measurement inputs on the relay.
Application Notes MiCOM P341 2.8.1 Transformer magnetising inrush
P341/EN AP/D22 Page 29/116
When applying overcurrent protection to the HV side of a power transformer, it is usual to apply a high set instantaneous overcurrent element, in addition to the time delayed low-set, to reduce fault clearance times for HV fault conditions. Typically, this will be set to approximately 1.3 times the LV fault level, such that it will only operate for HV faults. A 30% safety margin is sufficient due to the low transient overreach of the third and fourth overcurrent stages. Transient overreach defines the response of a relay to DC components of fault current and is quoted as a percentage. A relay with a low transient overreach will be largely insensitive to a DC offset and may therefore be set more closely to the steady state AC waveform. The second requirement for this element is that it should remain inoperative during transformer energisation, when a large primary current flows for a transient period. In most applications, the requirement to set the relay above the LV fault level will automatically result in settings that will be above the level of magnetising inrush current. Due to the nature of operation of the third and fourth overcurrent stages in the P341 relays, it is possible to apply settings corresponding to 35% of the peak inrush current, whilst maintaining stability for the condition. This is important where low-set instantaneous stages are used to initiate autoreclose equipment. In such applications, the instantaneous stage should not operate for inrush conditions, which may arise from small teed-off transformer loads for example. However, the setting must also be sensitive enough to provide fast operation under fault conditions. Where an instantaneous element is required to accompany the time delayed protection, as described above, the third or fourth overcurrent stage of the P341 relay should be used, as they have wider setting ranges. 2.8.2 Application of timer hold facility The first two stages of overcurrent protection in the P341 relays are provided with a timer hold facility, which may either be set to zero or to a definite time value. (Note that if an IEEE/US operate curve is selected, the reset characteristic may be set to either definite or inverse time in cell I>1 Reset Char; otherwise this setting cell is not visible in the menu). Setting of the timer to zero means that the overcurrent timer for that stage will reset instantaneously once the current falls below 95% of the current setting. Setting of the hold timer to a value other than zero delays the resetting of the protection element timers for this period. This may be useful in certain applications, for example when grading with upstream electromechanical overcurrent relays which have inherent reset time delays. Another situation where the timer hold facility may be used to reduce fault clearance times is where intermittent faults may be experienced. An example of this may occur in a plastic insulated cable. In this application it is possible that the fault energy melts and reseals the cable insulation, thereby extinguishing the fault. This process repeats to give a succession of fault current pulses, each of increasing duration with reducing intervals between the pulses, until the fault becomes permanent. When the reset time of the overcurrent relay is instantaneous the relay will be repeatedly reset and not be able to trip until the fault becomes permanent. By using the Timer Hold facility the relay will integrate the fault current pulses, thereby reducing fault clearance time.
P341/EN AP/D22 Page 30/116
The timer hold facility can be found for the first and second overcurrent stages as settings I>1 tRESET and I>2 tRESET, respectively. Note that this cell is not visible if an inverse time reset characteristic has been selected, as the reset time is then determined by the programmed time dial setting. 2.8.3 Setting guidelines When applying the overcurrent protection provided in the P341 relays, standard principles should be applied in calculating the necessary current and time settings for co-ordination. The setting example detailed below shows a typical setting calculation and describes how the settings are actually applied to the relay. Assume the following parameters for a relay feeding an LV switchboard: CT Ratio = 500/1 Full Load Current of circuit = 450A Slowest downstream protection = 100A Fuse The current setting employed on the P341 relay must account for both the maximum load current and the reset ratio of the relay itself:
I> must be greater than: 450/0.95 = 474A

The P341 relay allows the current settings to be applied to the relay in either primary or secondary quantities. Programming the Setting Values cell of the CONFIGURATION column to either Primary or Secondary does this. When this cell is set to primary, all phase overcurrent setting values are scaled by the programmed CT ratio. This is found in column 0A of the relay menu, entitled VT & CT RATIOS, where cells Phase CT Primary and Phase CT Secy can be programmed with the primary and secondary CT ratings, respectively. In this example, assuming primary currents are to be used, the ratio should be programmed as 500/1. The required setting is therefore 0.95A in terms of secondary current or 475A in terms of primary. A suitable time delayed characteristic will now need to be chosen. When co-ordinating with downstream fuses, the applied relay characteristic should be closely matched to the fuse characteristic. Therefore, assuming IDMT co-ordination is to be used, an Extremely Inverse (EI) characteristic would normally be chosen. As previously described, this is found under I>1 Function and should therefore be programmed as IEC E Inverse. Finally, a suitable time multiplier setting (TMS) must be calculated and entered in cell I>1 TMS. For more detailed information regarding overcurrent relay co-ordination, reference should be made to ALSTOMS Network Protection & Automation Guide Chapter 9. 2.9 Directional overcurrent protection If fault current can flow in both directions through a relay location, it is necessary to add directionality to the overcurrent relays in order to obtain correct co-ordination. Typical systems that require such protection are parallel feeders (both plain and transformer) and ring main systems, each of which are relatively common in distribution networks.
P341/EN AP/D22 Page 31/116
In order to give directionality to an overcurrent relay, it is necessary to provide it with a suitable reference, or polarising, signal. The reference generally used is the system voltage, as its angle remains relatively constant under fault conditions. The phase fault elements of the P341 relay are internally polarised by the quadrature phasephase voltages, as shown in the table below: Phase of Protection A Phase B Phase C Phase Operate Current Polarising Voltage VBC VCA VAB
IA IB IC
It is therefore important to ensure the correct phasing of all current and voltage inputs to the relay, in line with the supplied application diagram. Under system fault conditions, the fault current vector will lag its nominal phase voltage by an angle dependent upon the system X/R ratio. It is therefore a requirement that the relay operates with maximum sensitivity for currents lying in this region. This is achieved by means of the relay characteristic angle (RCA) setting; this defines the angle by which the current applied to the relay must be displaced from the voltage applied to the relay to obtain maximum relay sensitivity. This is set in cell I>Char Angle in the Overcurrent menu. Figure 3 shows a typical distribution system utilising parallel power transformers. In such an application, a fault at F could result in the operation of both R3 and R4 relays and the subsequent loss of supply to the 11kV busbar. Hence, with this system configuration, it is necessary to apply directional relays at these locations set to look into their respective transformers. These relays should co-ordinate with the nondirectional relays, R1 and R2; hence ensuring discriminative relay operation during such fault conditions. In such an application, relays R3 and R4 may commonly require non-directional overcurrent protection elements to provide protection to the 11kV busbar, in addition to providing a back-up function to the overcurrent relays on the outgoing feeders (R5). When applying the P341 relays in the above application, stage 1 of the overcurrent protection of relays R3 and R4 would be set non-directional and time graded with R5, using an appropriate time delay characteristic. Stage 2 could then be set directional, looking back into the transformer, also having a characteristic which provided correct co-ordination with R1 and R2. IDMT or DT characteristics are selectable for both stages 1 and 2 and directionality of each of the overcurrent stages is set in cell I> Direction
P341/EN AP/D22 Page 32/116

33kV
R1 OC/EF
R2 OC/EF
SBEF R3 DOC/DEF OC/EF F R4 DOC/DEF OC/EF
11kV
R5 OC/EF
Loads
P0110ENa
Figure 3:
Typical distribution system using parallel transformers
Note that the principles previously outlined for the parallel transformer application are equally applicable for plain feeders which are operating in parallel. 2.9.1 Synchronous polarisation For a fault condition that occurs close to the relaying point, the faulty phase voltage will reduce to a value close to zero volts. For single or double phase faults, there will always be at least one healthy phase voltage present for polarisation of the phase overcurrent elements. For example, a close up A to B fault condition will result in the collapse of the A and B phase voltages. However, the A and B phase elements are polarised from VBC and VCA respectively. As such a polarising signal will be present, allowing correct relay operation. For a close up three phase fault, all three voltages will collapse to zero and no healthy phase voltages will be present. For this reason, the P341 relays include a synchronous polarisation feature that stores the pre-fault voltage information and continues to apply it to the DOC elements for a time period of 3.2 seconds. This ensures that either instantaneous or time delayed DOC elements will be allowed to operate, even with a three phase voltage collapse.
Application Notes MiCOM P341 2.9.2 Setting guidelines
P341/EN AP/D22 Page 33/116
The applied current settings for directional overcurrent relays are dependent upon the application in question. In a parallel feeder arrangement, load current is always flowing in the non-operate direction. Hence, the relay current setting may be less than the full load rating of the circuit; typically 50% of In. Note that the minimum setting that may be applied has to take into account the thermal rating of the relay. Some electro-mechanical directional overcurrent relays have continuous withstand ratings of only twice the applied current setting and hence 50% of rating was the minimum setting that could be applied. With the P341, the continuous current rating is 4 x rated current and so it is possible to apply much more sensitive settings, if required. However, there are minimum safe current setting constraints to be observed when applying directional overcurrent protection at the receiving-ends of parallel feeders. The minimum safe settings to ensure that there is no possibility of an unwanted trip during clearance of a source fault are as follows for linear system load: Parallel plain feeders: Set>50% Prefault load current Parallel transformer feeders: Set>87% Prefault load current When the above setting constraints are infringed, independent-time protection is more likely to issue an unwanted trip during clearance of a source fault than dependent-time protection. Where the above setting constraints are unavoidably infringed, secure phase fault protection can be provided with relays which have 2-out-of-3 directional protection tripping logic. A common minimum current setting recommendation (50% relay rated current) would be virtually safe for plain parallel feeder protection as long as the circuit load current does not exceed 100% relay rated current. It would also be safe for parallel transformer feeders, if the system design criterion for two feeders is such that the load on each feeder will never exceed 50% rated current with both feeders in service. For more than two feeders in parallel the 50% relay rated current setting may not be absolutely safe. In a ring main application, it is possible for load current to flow in either direction through the relaying point. Hence, the current setting must be above the maximum load current, as in a standard non-directional application. The required characteristic angle settings for directional relays will differ depending on the exact application in which they are used. Recommended characteristic angle settings are as follows: Plain feeders, or applications with an earthing point (zero sequence source) behind the relay location, should utilise a +30 RCA setting. Transformer feeders, or applications with a zero sequence source in front of the relay location, should utilise a +45 RCA setting.
On the P341 relay, it is possible to set characteristic angles anywhere in the range 95 to +95. Whilst it is possible to set the RCA to exactly match the system fault angle, it is recommended that the above guidelines are adhered to, as these settings have been shown to provide satisfactory performance and stability under a wide range of system conditions.
P341/EN AP/D22 Page 34/116 2.10 Earth fault protection
The P341 relay has a total of four input current transformers; one for each of the phase current inputs and one for supplying the sensitive earth fault protection element. Residual, or earth fault, current can be derived from the sum of the phase current inputs. With this flexible input arrangement, various combinations of standard, sensitive (SEF) and restricted earth fault (REF) protection may be configured within the relay. It should be noted that in order to achieve the sensitive setting range that is available in the P341 relay for SEF protection, the input CT is designed specifically to operate at low current magnitudes. This common input is used to drive either the SEF or REF protection which are enabled / disabled accordingly within the relay menu. 2.10.1 Standard earth fault protection element The four stage Standard Earth Fault protection operates from earth fault current which is derived internally from the summation of the three phase currents. The first and second stages have selectable IDMT or DT characteristics, whilst the third and fourth stages are DT only. Each stage is selectable to be either nondirectional, directional forward or directional reverse. The Timer Hold facility, previously described for the overcurrent elements, is available on each of the first two stages. Each stage can be blocked by energising the relevant DDB signal via the PSL (DDB 358, DDB 359, DDB 360, DDB 361). This allows the overcurrent protection to be integrated into busbar protection schemes, as shown in section 2.18, or can be used to improve grading with downstream devices. DDB signals are also available to indicate the start and trip of each phase of each stage of protection, (Starts: DDB 613-616, Trips: DDB 442-445). The state of the DDB signals can be programmed to be viewed in the Monitor Bit x cells of the COMMISSION TESTS column in the relay. The following table shows the relay menu for the Earth Fault protection, including the available setting ranges and factory defaults:
Menu Text Default Setting Setting Range Min. Max. Step Size
GROUP 1 EARTH FAULT 1 IN>1 Function IEC S Inverse NonDirectional 0.2 x In A 1s 1 7 DT 0s 0s Disabled, DT, IEC S Inverse, IEC V Inverse, IEC E Inverse, UK LT Inverse, IEEE M Inverse, IEEE V Inverse, IEEE E Inverse, US Inverse, US ST Inverse Non-Directional, Directional Fwd, Directional Rev 0.08 x In A 0s 0.025 0.5 4.0 x In A 100 s 1.2 15 DT or Inverse 100 s 0.01 s 0.01 x In A 0.01 s 0.025 0.1
IN>1 Direction IN>1 Current IN>1 Time Delay IN1>1 TMS IN1>1 Time Dial IN>1 Reset Char IN>1 tRESET IN>2 Cells as for IN>1 above

Menu Text Default Setting Setting Range Min. Max.
P341/EN AP/D22 Page 35/116

Step Size
GROUP 1 EARTH FAULT 1 IN>3 Status IN>3 Direction IN>3 Current set IN>3 Time Delay IN>4 Cells as for IN>3 above IN> Function Link See Note} IN> DIRECTIONAL IN> Char Angle IN1> Pol 60 Zero Sequence
5V (Vn=100/120V) 20V (Vn=380/480V) 5V (Vn=100/120V) 20V (Vn=380/480V)
Disabled NonDirectional 20 x In A 0s
Disabled, Enabled Non-Directional, Directional Fwd, Directional Rev 0.08 x In A 0s 32 x In A 100 s 0.01 x In A 0.01 s
00001111
Bit 0 I>1 VTS Block, Bit 1 I>2 VTS Block, Bit 2 I>3 VTS Block, Bit 3 I>4 VTS Block, Bit 4, 5 6&7 Not Used Sub Heading 95 +95 Zero Sequence, Neg Sequence
0.5V (Vn=100/120V) 2V (Vn=380/480V) 0.5V (Vn=100/120V) 2V (Vn=380/480V) 22V (Vn=100/120V) 88V (Vn=380/480V) 22V (Vn=100/120V) 88V (Vn=380/480V) 0.5V (Vn=100/120V) 2V (Vn=380/480V) 0.5V (Vn=100/120V) 2V (Vn=380/480V)
IN1>VNpol Set
IN1>V2pol Set IN1>I2pol Set
0.08 x In A
0.08 x In A
1 x In A
0.015 x In A
Note:
VTS Block - When relevant bit set to 1, operation of VTS will block stage if directionalised. When set to 0, stage will revert to non-directional. For the range of available inverse time delayed characteristics, refer to those of the phase overcurrent elements, section 2.9. The multiple stages may be enabled in the relay at the same time, this provides some application advantages. For example, the parallel transformer application shown in Figure 1 requires directional earth fault protection at locations R3 and R4, to provide discriminative protection. However, in order to provide back-up protection for the busbar and other downstream earth fault devices, non-directional earth fault protection can also be applied. Where a neutral earthing resistor (NER) is used to limit the earth fault level, it is possible that an earth fault condition could cause a flashover of the NER and hence a dramatic increase in the earth fault current. For this reason, it may be appropriate to apply two stage EF protection. The first stage should have current and time characteristics which co-ordinate with downstream earth fault protection. A second stage may then be set with a higher current setting greater than the NER limited fault current but with zero time delay; hence providing fast clearance of an earth fault which gives rise to an NER flashover.
P341/EN AP/D22 Page 36/116 2.10.2 Sensitive earth fault protection element (SEF)
If a system is earthed through high impedance, or is subject to high ground fault resistance, the earth fault level will be severely limited. Consequently, the applied earth fault protection requires both an appropriate characteristic and a sensitive setting range in order to be effective. A separate 4 stage Sensitive Earth Fault element is provided within the P341 relay for this purpose, this has a dedicated CT input. Each stage can be blocked by energising the relevant DDB signal via the PSL (DDB 362, DDB 363, DDB 364, DDB 365). This allows the overcurrent protection to be integrated into busbar protection schemes, as shown in section 2.18, or can be used to improve grading with downstream devices. DDB signals are also available to indicate the start and trip of each phase of each stage of protection, (Starts: DDB 617-620, Trips: DDB 447-450). The state of the DDB signals can be programmed to be viewed in the Monitor Bit x cells of the COMMISSION TESTS column in the relay. The following table shows the relay menu for the Sensitive Earth Fault protection, including the available setting ranges and factory defaults.
Menu Text Default Setting Setting Range Min. Max. Step Size
GROUP 1 SEF/REF PROTN Sens E/F Options SEF SEF, SEF cos (PHI), SEF sin (PHI), Wattmetric, Hi Z REF Disabled, DT, IEC S Inverse, IEC V Inverse, IEC E Inverse, UK LT Inverse, IEEE M Inverse, IEEE V Inverse, IEEE E Inverse, US Inverse, US ST Inverse Non-Directional, Directional Fwd, Directional Rev
0.005 x In A 0s 0.025 0.5 0.1 x In A 200 s 1.2 15 0.00025 x In A 0.01 s 0.025 0.1
ISEF>1 Function
DT
ISEF>1 Direction ISEF>1 Current ISEF>1 Time Delay ISEF>1 TMS ISEF>1 Time Dial ISEF>1 Reset Char ISEF>1 tRESET ISEF>2 Cells as for ISEF>1 above ISEF>3 Status ISEF>3 Direction ISEF>3 Current ISEF>3 Time Delay ISEF>4 Cells as for ISEF>3 above ISEF> Func Link {See Note}
Non-Directional 0.05 x In A 1s 1 7
DT
1s 0s
DT or Inverse
100 s 0.01 s
Disabled NonDirectional
0.2 x In A 1s
Disabled, Enabled Non-Directional, Directional Fwd, Directional Rev

0.002 x In A 0s 0.8 x In A 100 s 0.002 x In A 0.01 s
00001111
Bit 0 ISEF>1 VTS Block, Bit 1 ISEF>2 VTS Block, Bit 2 ISEF>3 VTS Block, Bit 3 ISEF>4 VTS Block, Bit 4, 5, 6 & 7 Not Used

Menu Text Default Setting Setting Range Min. Sub Heading 90 Measured
5V (Vn=100/120V) 20V (Vn=380/480V) 0.5V (Vn=100/120V) 2V (Vn=380/480V)
P341/EN AP/D22 Page 37/116

Step Size
Max.
GROUP 1 SEF/REF PROTN ISEF DIRECTIONAL ISEF> Char Angle ISEF> VNpol Input ISEF> VNpol Set WATTMETRIC SEF 95 +95 Measured, Derived
80V (Vn=100/120V) 320V (Vn=380/480V) 0.5V (Vn=100/120V) 2V (Vn=380/480V)
Sub Heading
9 x In W (Vn=100/120V) 36 x In W (Vn=380/480V) 0 x In W (Vn=100/120V) 0 x In W (Vn=380/480V) 20 x In W (Vn=100/120V) 80 x In W (Vn=380/480V) 0.05 x In W (Vn=100/120V) 0.2 x In W (Vn=380/480V)
PN> Setting Note:
VTS Block - When relevant bit set to 1, operation of VTS will block stage if directionalised. When set to 0, stage will revert to non-directional. For the range of available inverse time delayed characteristics, refer to those of the phase overcurrent elements, section 2.9.
Notes: As can be seen from the menu, the Sens E/F Options cell has a number of setting options. To enable standard, four stage SEF protection, the SEF option should be selected, which is the default setting. However, if wattmetric or restricted earth fault protection is required, then one of the remaining options should be selected. These are described in more detail in section 2.11.6. The WATTMETRIC and RESTRICTED E/F cells will only appear in the menu if the functions have been selected in the Options cell. As shown in the previous menu, each SEF stage is selectable to be either non-directional, directional forward or directional reverse in the ISEF> Direction cell. The Timer Hold facility, previously described for the overcurrent elements in section 2.9, is available on each of the first two stages and is set in the same manner. Settings related to directionalising the SEF protection are described in detail in the following section. SEF would normally be fed from a core balance current transformer (CBCT) mounted around the three phases of the feeder cable. However, care must be taken in the positioning of the CT with respect to the earthing of the cable sheath. See Figure 4 below:
P341/EN AP/D22 Page 38/116

Cable gland Cable box
Cable gland/sheath earth connection
SEF
Incorrect
SEF
No operation
Correct
Operation SEF
P0112ENa
Figure 4:
Positioning of core balance current transformers
As can be seen from the diagram, if the cable sheath is terminated at the cable gland and earthed directly at that point, a cable fault (from phase to sheath) will not result in any unbalance current in the core balance CT. Prior to earthing, the connection must be brought back through the CBCT and earthed on the feeder side. This ensures correct relay operation during earth fault conditions. 2.11 Directional earth fault protection (DEF) Each of the four stages of standard earth fault protection and SEF protection may be set to be directional if required. Consequently, as with the application of directional overcurrent protection, a voltage supply is required by the relay to provide the necessary polarisation. With the standard earth fault protection element in the P341 relay, two options are available for polarisation; Residual Voltage or Negative Sequence. 2.11.1 Residual voltage polarisation With earth fault protection, the polarising signal requires to be representative of the earth fault condition. As residual voltage is generated during earth fault conditions, this quantity is commonly used to polarise DEF elements. The P341 relay can internally derive this voltage from the 3 phase voltage input, or can measure the voltage via the neutral displacement or residual overvoltage input. The method of
P341/EN AP/D22 Page 39/116
measuring the polarising signal is set in the IN> Vnpol Input cell. Where the residual voltage is derived from the 3 phase voltages a 5-limb or three single phase VTs must be used. These types of VT design allow the passage of residual flux and consequently permit the relay to derive the required residual voltage. In addition, the primary star point of the VT must be earthed. A three limb VT has no path for residual flux and is therefore unsuitable to supply the relay. It is possible that small levels of residual voltage will be present under normal system conditions due to system imbalances, VT inaccuracies, relay tolerances etc. Hence, the P341 relay includes a user settable threshold, IN>VNpol Set, which must be exceeded in order for the DEF function to be operational. The residual voltage measurement provided in the MEASUREMENTS 1 column of the menu may assist in determining the required threshold setting during the commissioning stage, as this will indicate the level of standing residual voltage present. Note that residual voltage is nominally 180 out of phase with residual current. Consequently, the DEF relays are polarised from the Vres quantity. This 180 phase shift is automatically introduced within the P341 relay. 2.11.2 Negative sequence polarisation In certain applications, the use of residual voltage polarisation of DEF may either be not possible to achieve, or problematic. An example of the former case would be where a suitable type of VT was unavailable, for example if only a three limb VT was fitted. An example of the latter case would be an HV/EHV parallel line application where problems with zero sequence mutual coupling may exist. In either of these situations, the problem may be solved by the use of negative phase sequence (nps) quantities for polarisation. This method determines the fault direction by comparison of nps voltage with nps current. The operate quantity, however, is still residual current. This is available for selection on the derived earth fault element but not on the SEF protection. It requires a voltage and current threshold to be set in cells IN> V2pol Set & IN> I2pol Set, respectively. Negative sequence polarising is not recommended for impedance earthed systems regardless of the type of VT feeding the relay. This is due to the reduced earth fault current limiting the voltage drop across the negative phase sequence source impedance (V2pol) to negligible levels. If this voltage is less than 0.5 volts the relay will cease to provide DEF protection. 2.11.3 General setting guidelines for DEF When setting the relay characteristic angle (RCA) for the directional overcurrent element, a positive angle setting was specified. This was due to the fact that the quadrature polarising voltage lagged the nominal phase current by 90 i.e. the position of the current under fault conditions was leading the polarising voltage and hence a positive RCA was required. With DEF, the residual current under fault conditions lies at an angle lagging the polarising voltage. Hence, negative RCA settings are required for DEF applications. This is set in cell I>Char Angle in the relevant earth fault menu. The following angle settings are recommended for a residual voltage polarised relay: Resistance earthed systems Distribution systems (solidly earthed) 0 45
Transmission Systems (solidly earthed) 60
P341/EN AP/D22 Page 40/116
For negative sequence polarisation, the RCA settings must be based on the angle of the nps source impedance, much the same as for residual polarising. Typical settings would be: Distribution systems 45
Transmission Systems 60 2.11.4 Application to insulated systems The advantage gained by running a power system which is insulated from earth is the fact that during a single phase to earth fault condition, no earth fault current is allowed to flow. Consequently, it is possible to maintain power flow on the system even when an earth fault condition is present. However, this advantage is offset by the fact that the resultant steady state and transient overvoltages on the sound phases can be very high. It is generally the case, therefore, that insulated systems will only be used in low/medium voltage networks where it does not prove too costly to provide the necessary insulation against such overvoltages. Higher system voltages would normally be solidly earthed or earthed via a low impedance. Operational advantages may be gained by the use of insulated systems. However, it is still vital that detection of the fault is achieved. This is not possible by means of standard current operated earth fault protection. One possibility for fault detection is by means of a residual overvoltage device. This functionality is included within the P341 relays and is detailed in section 2.12. However, fully discriminative earth fault protection on this type of system can only be achieved by the application of a sensitive earth fault element. This type of relay is set to detect the resultant imbalance in the system charging currents that occurs under earth fault conditions. It is therefore essential that a core balance CT is used for this application. This eliminates the possibility of spill current that may arise from slight mismatches between residually connected line CTs. It also enables a much lower CT ratio to be applied, thereby allowing the required protection sensitivity to be more easily achieved. Consider Figure 5:

Ia1 Ib1
P341/EN AP/D22 Page 41/116
IR1 - jXc1
IH1 Ia2 Ib2
IR2 - jXc2
IH2 Ia3 Ib3

IH1 + IH2 + IH3
IR3 - jXc3
IR3 = IH1 + IH2 + IH3 - IH3 IR3 = IH1 + IH2
IH3
IH1 + IH2
P2035ENa
Figure 5:
Current distribution in an insulated system with C phase fault
P341/EN AP/D22 Page 42/116
From Figure 5, it can be seen that the relays on the healthy feeders see the unbalance in the charging currents for their own feeder. The relay on the faulted feeder, however, sees the charging current from the rest of the system (IH1 and IH2 in this case), with its own feeders charging current (IH3) becoming cancelled out. This is further illustrated by the phasor diagrams shown in Figure 6.
Vaf Restrain Vapf
IR1
Ib1 Ia1
Operate Vbf Vcpf Vbpf
Vres (=3Vo) An RCA setting of +90 shifts the MTA to here
IR3 = (IH1+ IH2)

P2036ENa
Figure 6:
Phasor diagrams for insulated system with C phase fault
Referring to the phasor diagram, it can be seen that the C phase to earth fault causes the voltages on the healthy phases to rise by a factor of 3. The A phase charging current (Ia1), is then shown to be leading the resultant A phase voltage by 90. Likewise, the B phase charging current leads the resultant Vb by 90. The unbalance current detected by a core balance current transformer on the healthy feeders can be seen to be the vector addition of Ia1 and Ib1, giving a residual current which lies at exactly 90 lagging the polarising voltage (3Vo). As the healthy phase voltages have risen by a factor of 3, the charging currents on these phases will also be 3 times larger than their steady state values. Therefore, the magnitude of residual current, IR1, is equal to 3 x the steady state per phase charging current. The phasor diagrams indicate that the residual currents on the healthy and faulted feeders, IR1 and IR3 respectively, are in anti-phase. A directional element could therefore be used to provide discriminative earth fault protection. If the polarising voltage of this element, equal to 3Vo, is shifted through +90, the residual current seen by the relay on the faulted feeder will lie within the operate region of the directional characteristic and the current on the healthy feeders will fall within the restrain region. As previously stated, the required characteristic angle setting for the SEF element when applied to insulated systems, is +90. It should be noted though, that this recommended setting corresponds to the relay being connected such that its direction of current flow for operation is from the source busbar towards the feeder, as would be the convention for a relay on an earthed system. However, if the forward direction for operation was set as being from the feeder into the busbar, (which some utilities may standardise on), then a 90( RCA would be required. The
P341/EN AP/D22 Page 43/116
correct relay connections to give a defined direction for operation are shown on the relay connection diagram. Note that discrimination can be provided without the need for directional control. This can only be achieved if it is possible to set the relay in excess of the charging current of the protected feeder and below the charging current for the rest of the system. 2.11.5 Setting guidelines insulated systems As has been previously shown, the residual current detected by the relay on the faulted feeder is equal to the sum of the charging currents flowing from the rest of the system. Further, the addition of the two healthy phase charging currents on each feeder gives a total charging current which has a magnitude of three times the per phase value. Therefore, the total unbalance current detected by the relay is equal to three times the per phase charging current of the rest of the system. A typical relay setting may therefore be in the order of 30% of this value, i.e. equal to the per phase charging current of the remaining system. Practically though, the required setting may well be determined on site, where suitable settings can be adopted based upon practically obtained results. The use of the P140 relays comprehensive measurement and fault recording facilities may prove useful in this respect. 2.11.6 Application to petersen coil earthed systems Power systems are usually earthed in order to limit transient overvoltages during arcing faults and also to assist with detection and clearance of earth faults. Impedance earthing has the advantage of limiting damage incurred by plant during earth fault conditions and also limits the risk of explosive failure of switchgear, which is a danger to personnel. In addition, it limits touch and step potentials at a substation or in the vicinity of an earth fault. If a high impedance device is used for earthing the system, or the system is unearthed, the earth fault current will be reduced but the steady state and transient overvoltages on the sound phases can be very high. Consequently, it is generally the case that high impedance earthing will only be used in low/medium voltage networks in which it does not prove too costly to provide the necessary insulation against such overvoltages. Higher system voltages would normally be solidly earthed or earthed via a low impedance. A special case of high impedance earthing via a reactor occurs when the inductive earthing reactance is made equal to the total system capacitive reactance to earth at system frequency. This practice is widely referred to as Petersen (or resonant) Coil Earthing. With a correctly tuned system, the steady state earthfault current will be zero, so that arcing earth faults become self extinguishing. Such a system can, if designed to do so, be run with one phase earthed for a long period until the cause of the fault is identified and rectified. With the effectiveness of this method being dependent upon the correct tuning of the coil reactance to the system capacitive reactance, an expansion of the system at any time would clearly necessitate an adjustment of the coil reactance. Such adjustment is sometimes automated. Petersen Coil earthed systems are commonly found in areas where the power system consists mainly of rural overhead lines and can be particularly beneficial in locations which are subject to a high incidence of transient faults. Transient earth faults caused by lightning strikes, for example, can be extinguished by the Petersen Coil without the need for line outages. Figure 7 shows a source of generation earthed through a Petersen Coil, with an earth fault applied on the A Phase. Under this situation, it can be seen that the A phase shunt capacitance becomes short circuited by the fault. Consequently, the
P341/EN AP/D22 Page 44/116
calculations show that if the reactance of the earthing coil is set correctly, the resulting steady state earth fault current will be zero.
-Ib -Ic
If = -Ib - Ic + Van
Vba -jXc
(IL)
jXL = 0 if Van = Ib + Ic jXL -jXc
(-Ib) (-Ic) Vba -jXc Vca -jXc
jXL
If
-jXc
-jXc
-IC
A
IL
-IB
N C B
Current vectors for A phase fault

P2037ENa
Figure 7:
Current distribution in Peterson Coil earthed system
Prior to actually applying protective relays to provide earth fault protection on systems which are earthed via a Petersen Coil, it is imperative to gain an understanding of the current distributions that occur under fault conditions on such systems. With this knowledge, it is then possible to decide on the type of relay that may be applied, ensuring that it is both set and connected correctly. Figure 8 shows a radial distribution system having a source which is earthed via a Petersen Coil. Three outgoing feeders are present, the lower of which has a phase to earth fault applied on the C phase.
P341/EN AP/D22 Page 45/116
Ia1 Ib1 IR1

-jXc1
IH1 IL Ia2 Ib2 IR2

-jXc2
jXL
IH2 Ia3 Ib3 Ic3=IF IR3 IL = IF + IH1 + IH2 - IH3 IL

-jXc3
IF
IH3
IH1+IH2
P2038ENa
Figure 8:
Distribution of currents during a C phase to earth fault
Figures 9 (a, b and c) show vector diagrams for the previous system, assuming that it is fully compensated (i.e. coil reactance fully tuned to system capacitance), in addition to assuming a theoretical situation where no resistance is present either in the earthing coil or in the feeder cables. Referring to the vector diagram illustrated in Figure 9a, it can be seen that the C phase to earth fault causes the voltages on the healthy phases to rise by a factor of 3. The A phase charging currents (Ia1, Ia2 and Ia3), are then shown to be leading the resultant A phase voltage by 90 and likewise for the B phase charging currents with respect to the resultant Vb. The unbalance current detected by a core balance current transformer on the healthy feeders can be seen to be a simple vector addition of Ia1 and Ib1, giving a residual current which lies at exactly 90 lagging the residual voltage (Figure 9b). Clearly, as the healthy phase voltages have risen by a factor of 3, the charging currents on these phases will also be 3 times larger than their steady state values. Therefore, the magnitude of residual current, IR1, is equal to 3 x the steady state per phase charging current.
P341/EN AP/D22 Page 46/116

IH3 IH2 IH1 Ia1
N C B
IL a) Capacitive & inductive currents
3Vo
Ib1
IL IR1 = IH1 Ib1 b) Unfaulted line Ia1 c) Faulted line

IH1
-IH2 IR3
IR3 = IF + IH3 = IL IH1 IH2
Vres = -3Vo
Vres=-3Vo
P2039ENa
Figure 9: Note:
Theoretical case no resistance present in XL or Xc
The actual residual voltage used as a reference signal for directional earth fault relays is phase shifted by 180 and is therefore shown as 3Vo in the vector diagrams. This phase shift is automatically introduced within the P140 relays. On the faulted feeder, the residual current is the addition of the charging current on the healthy phases (IH3) plus the fault current (IF). The net unbalance is therefore equal to IL-IH1-IH2, as shown in Figure 9c. This situation may be more readily observed by considering the zero sequence network for this fault condition. This is depicted in Figure 10.
P341/EN AP/D22 Page 47/116
IL
IR0F IR0H IR0H
I0F
Faulted feeder Healthy feeders
3XL
Vo
IH3 IH2 IH1 Xco
Key: IR0F = Residual current on faulted feeder IR0H = Residual current on healthy feeder
It can therefore be seen that:I0F = IL IH1 IH2 IH3 IR0F = IH3 + I0F So: IR0F = IL IH1 IH2
P2040ENa
Figure 10: Zero sequence network showing residual currents In comparing the residual currents occurring on the healthy and on the faulted feeders (Figures 9b & 9c), it can be seen that the currents would be similar in both magnitude and phase; hence it would not be possible to apply a relay which could provide discrimination. However, as previously stated, the scenario of no resistance being present in the coil or feeder cables is purely theoretical. Further consideration therefore needs to be given to a practical application in which the resistive component is no longer ignored consider Figure 11.
P341/EN AP/D22 Page 48/116

Resistive component in grounding coil

Resistive component in feeder
(IH1 + IH2 + IH3) IL

A 3Vo
a) Capacitive & inductive currents with resistive components

N C Restrain Operate B
IR1 = IH1 b) Unfaulted line c) Faulted line
IL
Zero torque line for 0 RCA
-IH1 -IH2

Vres = 3Vo Zero torque line for 0 RCA
Resistive component in grounding coil Resistive component in feeder
IR3
Restrain Operate
P2041ENa
Vres =- 3Vo

A 3Vo
Resistive component in grounding coil
Resistive component in feeder

A 3Vo


IL
IL
-IH1 -IH2
-IH1 -IH2

Vres = 3Vo Zero torque line for 0 RCA Vres =- 3Vo
IR3
Restrain Vres = 3Vo Operate
P2041ENa
IR3
Restrain Operate
P2041ENa
Vres =- 3Vo
Figure 11: Practical case: resistance present in XL and Xc Figure 11a again shows the relationship between the capacitive currents, coil current and residual voltage. It can now be seen that due to the presence of resistance in the feeders, the healthy phase charging currents are now leading their respective phase voltages by less than 90. In a similar manner, the resistance present in the earthing coil has the effect of shifting the current, IL, to an angle less than 90 lagging. The result of these slight shifts in angles can be seen in Figures 11b and 11c. The residual current now appears at an angle in excess of 90 from the polarising voltage for the unfaulted feeder and less than 90 on the faulted feeder. Hence, a directional relay having a characteristic angle setting of 0 (with respect to the polarising signal of 3Vo) could be applied to provide discrimination. i.e. the healthy feeder residual current would appear within the restrain section of the characteristic but the residual current on the faulted feeder would lie within the operate region as shown in diagrams 11b and 11c. In practical systems, it may be found that a value of resistance is purposely inserted in parallel with the earthing coil. This serves two purposes; one is to actually increase the level of earth fault current to a more practically detectable level and the second is to increase the angular difference between the residual signals; again to aid in the application of discriminating protection. 2.12 Operation of sensitive earth fault element It has been shown that the angular difference between the residual currents on the healthy and faulted feeders allows the application of a directional relay whose zero torque line passes between the two currents. Two possibilities exist for the type of protection element that may consequently be applied for earth fault detection:
Application Notes MiCOM P341 1.
P341/EN AP/D22 Page 49/116
A suitably sensitive directional earth fault relay having a relay characteristic angle setting (RCA) of zero degrees, with the possibility of fine adjustment about this threshold. A sensitive directional zero sequence wattmetric relay having similar requirements to 1. above with respect to the required RCA settings. A sensitive directional earth fault relay having Icosf and Isinf characteristics.
2. 3.
All stages of the sensitive earth fault element of the P341 relay are settable down to 0.5% of rated current and would therefore fulfill the requirements of the first method listed above and could therefore be applied successfully. However, many utilities (particularly in central Europe) have standardised on the wattmetric method of earth fault detection, which is described in the following section. Zero sequence power measurement, as a derivative of Vo and Io, offers improved relay security against false operation with any spurious core balance CT output for non earth fault conditions. This is also the case for a sensitive directional earth fault relay having an adjustable Vo polarising threshold. Some utilities in Scandinavia prefer to use Icosf/Isinf for non compensated Peterson Coil or insulated networks. Wattmetric Characteristic The previous analysis has shown that a small angular difference exists between the spill current on the healthy and faulted feeders. It can be seen that this angular difference gives rise to active components of current which are in antiphase to one another. This is shown in Figure 12 below:
Vres = 3Vo Active component of residual current: Faulted Feeder
IR3
IH1 IH2
Operate
IL IR1
Active component of residual current: Healthy Feeder
Restrain
P0113ENa
Figure 12: Resistive components of spill current Consequently, the active components of zero sequence power will also lie in similar planes and so a relay capable of detecting active power would be able to make a discriminatory decision. i.e. if the wattmetric component of zero sequence power was detected in the forward direction, then this would be indicative of a fault on that feeder; if power was detected in the reverse direction, then the fault must be present on an adjacent feeder or at the source. For operation of the directional earth fault element within the P140 relays, all three of the settable thresholds on the relay must be exceeded; namely the current "ISEF>", the voltage "ISEF>VNpol Set" and the power "PN> Setting".
P341/EN AP/D22 Page 50/116
As can be seen from the following formula, the power setting within the relay menu is called PN> and is therefore calculated using residual rather than zero sequence quantities. Residual quantities are three times their respective zero sequence values and so the complete formula for operation is as shown below: Vres x Ires X Cos (f fc) = 9 x Vo x Io x Cos (f fc) Where: f fc = Angle between the Polarising Voltage (-Vres) and the Residual Current = Relay Characteristic Angle (RCA) Setting (ISEF> Char Angle)
Vres = Residual Voltage
Ires = Residual Current

Vo = Zero Sequence Voltage = Zero Sequence Current
Io
The action of setting the PN> threshold to zero would effectively disable the wattmetric function and the relay would operate as a basic, sensitive directional earth fault element. However, if this is required, then the 'SEF' option can be selected from the 'Sens E/F Options' cell in the menu. A further point to note is that when a power threshold other than zero is selected, a slight alteration is made to the angular boundaries of the directional characteristic. Rather than being 90 from the RCA, they are made slightly narrower at 85. Icosf /Isinf Characteristic In some applications, the residual current on the healthy feeder can lie just inside the operating boundary following a fault condition. The residual current for the faulted feeder lies close to the operating boundary. In this case, correct discrimination is achieved by means of an Icosf characteristic as the faulted feeder will have a large active component of residual current, whilst the healthy feeder will have a small value. For insulated earth applications, it is common to use the Isinf characteristic. 2.13 Application considerations Required relay current and voltage connections Referring to the relevant application diagram for the P140 Relay, it should be applied such that its direction for forward operation is looking down into the protected feeder (away from the busbar), with a 0 RCA setting. As illustrated in the relay application diagram, it is usual for the earth fault element to be driven from a core balance current transformer (CBCT). This eliminates the possibility of spill current that may arise from slight mismatches between residually connected line CTs. It also enables a much lower CT ratio to be applied, thereby allowing the required protection sensitivity to be more easily achieved. 2.13.1 Calculation of required relay settings As has been previously shown, for a fully compensated system, the residual current detected by the relay on the faulted feeder is equal to the coil current minus the sum of the charging currents flowing from the rest of the system. Further, as stated in the previous section, the addition of the two healthy phase charging currents on each feeder gives a total charging current which has a magnitude of three times the steady
P341/EN AP/D22 Page 51/116
state per phase value. Therefore, for a fully compensated system, the total unbalance current detected by the relay is equal to three times the per phase charging current of the faulted circuit. A typical relay setting may therefore be in the order of 30% of this value, i.e. equal to the per phase charging current of the faulted circuit. Practically though, the required setting may well be determined on site, where system faults can be applied and suitable settings can be adopted based upon practically obtained results. Also, it should be noted that in most situations, the system will not be fully compensated and consequently a small level of steady state fault current will be allowed to flow. The residual current seen by the relay on the faulted feeder may thus be a larger value, which further emphasises the fact that relay settings should be based upon practical current levels, wherever possible. The above also holds true regarding the required Relay Characteristic Angle (RCA) setting. As has been shown earlier, a nominal RCA setting of 0 is required. However, fine tuning of this setting will require to be carried out on site in order to obtain the optimum setting in accordance with the levels of coil and feeder resistances present. The loading and performance of the CT will also have an effect in this regard. The effect of CT magnetising current will be to create phase lead of current. Whilst this would assist with operation of faulted feeder relays it would reduce the stability margin of healthy feeder relays. A compromise can therefore be reached through fine adjustment of the RCA. This is adjustable in 1 steps on the P341 relay. 2.13.2 Application of settings to the relay All of the relevant settings can be found under the SENSITIVE E/F column within the relay menu. Within the Sens E/F Options cell, there are two possibilities for selecting wattmetric earth fault protection; either on its own or in conjunction with low impedance REF protection, which is described in section 2.10. Note that the residual power setting, PN>, is scaled by the programmed CT and VT ratios in the relay. 2.14 Restricted earth fault protection Earth faults occurring on a transformer winding or terminal may be of limited magnitude, either due to the impedance present in the earth path or by the percentage of transformer winding that is involved in the fault. In general, particularly as the size of the transformer increases, it becomes unacceptable to rely on time delayed protection to clear winding or terminal faults as this would lead to an increased amount of damage to the transformer. A common requirement is therefore to provide instantaneous phase and earth fault protection. Applying differential protection across the transformer may fulfill these requirements. However, an earth fault occurring on the LV winding, particularly if it is of a limited level, may not be detected by the differential relay, as it is only measuring the corresponding HV current. Therefore, instantaneous protection that is restricted to operating for transformer earth faults only is applied. This is referred to as restricted, or balanced, earth fault protection (REF or BEF). The BEF terminology is usually used when the protection is applied to a delta winding. When applying differential protection such as REF, some technique must be employed to give the protection stability under external fault conditions, ensuring that relay operation only occurs for faults on the transformer winding/connections. Two methods are commonly used; bias or high impedance. The biasing technique operates by measuring the level of through current flowing and altering the relay sensitivity accordingly. The high impedance technique ensures that the relay circuit is of sufficiently high impedance such that the differential voltage that may occur under
P341/EN AP/D22 Page 52/116
external fault conditions is less than that required to drive setting current through the relay. The REF protection in the P341 should be applied as a high impedance differential element. Note that the high impedance REF element of the relay shares the same CT input as the SEF protection. Hence, only one of these elements may be selected. A single DDB signal is available to indicate that the REF protection has tripped, DDB 446. The state of the DDB signals can be programmed to be viewed in the Monitor Bit x cells of the COMMISSION TESTS column in the relay. All of the REF settings can be found at the bottom of the SEF/REF Protn column and are shown below, in addition to the SEF setting options: Menu Text Default Setting Setting Range Min. Max. Step Size
GROUP 1 SEF/REF PROTN Sens E/F Options SEF 0.2 x In A SEF, Wattmetric, Hi Z REF 0.05 x In A 1 x In A 0.01 x In A
IREF> Is
Note that CT requirements for REF protection are included in section 6. 2.14.1 High impedance restricted earth fault protection The high impedance principle is best explained by considering a differential scheme where one CT is saturated for an external fault, as shown in Figure 13.

Healthy CT Zm R CT1 R CT2
P341/EN AP/D22 Page 53/116

Saturated CT
Protected circuit
Zm
AG
IF
R L1 VS R L2 Voltage across relay circuit VS = KIF (RCT + 2RL ) where K = 1 Stabilising resistor R ST limits spill current to I S (relay setting) R ST = VS R R
R
R L3 R ST R L4
IS
IF = Maximum secondary through fault current

Where RR = Relay burden RCT = Current transformer secondary winding resistance RL = Resistance of a single lead from the relay to the current transformer
P0115ENb
Figure 13: High impedance principle If the relay circuit is considered to be a very high impedance, the secondary current produced by the healthy CT will flow through the saturated CT. If CT magnetising impedance of the saturated CT is considered to be negligible, the maximum voltage across the relay circuit will be equal to the secondary fault current multiplied by the connected impedance, (RL3 + RL4 + RCT2). The relay can be made stable for this maximum applied voltage by increasing the overall impedance of the relay circuit, such that the resulting current through the relay is less than its current setting. As the impedance of the relay input alone is relatively low, a series connected external resistor is required. The value of this resistor, RST, is calculated by the formula shown in Figure 13. An additional non linear, metrosil, may be required to limit the peak secondary circuit voltage during internal fault conditions. To ensure that the protection will operate quickly during an internal fault, the CTs used to operate the protection must have a kneepoint voltage of at least 4Vs. The necessary relay connections for high impedance REF are shown in Figure 14: As can be seen from Figure 14, the high impedance protection uses an external differential connection between the line CTs and neutral CT. The SEF input is then connected to the differential circuit with a stabilising resistor in series. This leaves the EF1 input free to be connected for standby earth fault protection, if required, either from a residual connection of the line CTs or from a separate neutral CT.
P341/EN AP/D22 Page 54/116
A B C RSTAB SEF Input
P2044ENa
Figure 14: High impedance REF relay/CT connections 2.14.2 Setting guidelines for high impedance REF From the Sens E/F Options cell, Hi Z REF must be selected to enable this protection. The only setting cell then visible is IREF> Is1, which may be programmed with the required differential current setting. This would typically be set to give a primary operating current of either 30% of the minimum earth fault level for a resistance earthed system or between 10 and 60% of rated current for a solidly earthed system. The primary operating current (Iop) will be a function of the current transformer ratio, the relay operating current (IREF> Is1), the number of current transformers in parallel with a relay element (n) and the magnetising current of each current transformer (Ie) at the stability voltage (Vs). This relationship can be expressed in three ways: 1. To determine the maximum current transformer magnetising current to achieve a specific primary operating current with a particular relay operating current. Iop Ie < x - IREF > Is1 n CT ratio 1 2.
To determine the maximum relay current setting to achieve a specific primary operating current with a given current transformer magnetising current. Iop [IREF > Is] < - nIe CT ratio
3.
To express the protection primary operating current for a particular relay operating current and with a particular level of magnetising current.
Iop = (CT ratio) x (IREF> Is1 = nIe)
P341/EN AP/D22 Page 55/116
In order to achieve the required primary operating current with the current transformers that are used, a current setting (IREF> Is) must be selected for the high impedance element, as detailed in expression (2.) above. The setting of the stabilising resistor (RST) must be calculated in the following manner, where the setting is a function of the required stability voltage setting (Vs) and the relay current setting (IREF> Is). Vs IREF>Is = IF (RCT + 2RL) IREF > Is
The above equation assumes negligible relay burden. The stabilising resistor supplied is continuously adjustable up to its maximum declared resistance. USE OF METROSIL NON-LINEAR RESISTORS Metrosils are used to limit the peak voltage developed by the current transformers under internal fault conditions, to a value below the insulation level of the current transformers, relay and interconnecting leads, which are normally able to withstand 3000V peak. The following formulae should be used to estimate the peak transient voltage that could be produced for an internal fault. The peak voltage produced during an internal fault will be a function of the current transformer kneepoint voltage and the prospective voltage that would be produced for an internal fault if current transformer saturation did not occur. This prospective voltage will be a function of maximum internal fault secondary current, the current transformer ratio, the current transformer secondary winding resistance, the current transformer lead resistance to the common point, the relay lead resistance and the stabilising resistor value.
Vp = 2
2 Vk ( Vf - Vk )
Vf = If (RCT + 2RL + RST)

where Vp = peak voltage developed by the c.t. under internal fault conditions. Vk = current transformer knee-point voltage. Vf = maximum voltage that would be produced if c.t. saturation did not occur.
If = maximum internal secondary fault current.

RCT = current transformer secondary winding resistance. RL = maximum lead burden from current transformer to relay.
RST = relay stabilising resistor. When the value given by the formulae is greater than 3000V peak, metrosils should be applied. They are connected across the relay circuit and serve the purpose of shunting the secondary current output of the current transformer from the relay in order to prevent very high secondary voltages. Metrosils are externally mounted and take the form of annular discs. Their operating characteristics follow the expression:
P341/EN AP/D22 Page 56/116 V where V C = CI0.25
= Instantaneous voltage applied to the non-linear resistor (metrosil) = constant of the non-linear resistor (metrosil ) = instantaneous current through the non-linear resistor (metrosil) .
With a sinusoidal voltage applied across the metrosil, the RMS current would be approximately 0.52x the peak current. This current value can be calculated as follows:
Vs (rms) x I(rms) = 0.52 C
2 4
where Vs(rms) = rms value of the sinusoidal voltage applied across the metrosil. This is due to the fact that the current waveform through the non-linear resistor (metrosil) is not sinusoidal but appreciably distorted. For satisfactory application of a non-linear resistor (metrosil), its characteristic should be such that it complies with the following requirements: 1. At the relay voltage setting, the non-linear resistor (metrosil) current should be as low as possible, but no greater than approximately 30mA r.m.s. for 1A current transformers and approximately 100mA r.m.s. for 5A current transformers. At the maximum secondary current, the non-linear resistor (metrosil) should limit the voltage to 1500V r.m.s. or 2120V peak for 0.25 second. At higher relay voltage settings, it is not always possible to limit the fault voltage to 1500V r.m.s., so higher fault voltages may have to be tolerated.
2.
The following tables show the typical Metrosil types that will be required, depending on relay current rating, REF voltage setting etc. Metrosil Units for Relays with a 1 Amp CT The Metrosil units with 1 Amp CTs have been designed to comply with the following restrictions: 1. 2. At the relay voltage setting, the Metrosil current should less than 30mA rms. At the maximum secondary internal fault current the Metrosil unit should limit the voltage to 1500V rms if possible.
The Metrosil units normally recommended for use with 1Amp CT's are as shown in the following table: Relay Voltage Setting Up to 125V rms 125 to 300V rms Note: Nominal Characteristic C 450 900 b 0.25 0.25 Recommended Metrosil Type Single Pole Relay 600A/S1/S256 600A/S1/S1088 Triple Pole Relay 600A/S3/1/S802 600A/S3/1/S1195
Single pole Metrosil units are normally supplied without mounting brackets unless otherwise specified by the customer
Application Notes MiCOM P341 Metrosil Units for Relays with a 5 Amp CT
P341/EN AP/D22 Page 57/116
These Metrosil units have been designed to comply with the following requirements: 1. At the relay voltage setting, the Metrosil current should be less than 100mA rms (the actual maximum currents passed by the units shown below their type description. At the maximum secondary internal fault current the Metrosil unit should limit the voltage to 1500V rms for 0.25secs. At the higher relay settings, it is not possible to limit the fault voltage to 1500V rms hence higher fault voltages have to be tolerated (indicated by *, **, ***). The Metrosil units normally recommended for use with 5 Amp CTs and single pole relays are as shown in the following table:
Recommended Metrosil Type Relay Voltage Setting
Up to 200V rms 600A/S1/S1213 C = 540/640 35mA rms 600A/S2/P/S1217 C = 470/540 70mA rms 600A/S3/P/S1219 C = 430/500 100mA rms 250V rms 600A/S1/S1214 C = 670/800 40mA rms 600A/S2/P/S1215 C = 570/670 75mA rms 600A/S3/P/S1220 C = 520/620 100mA rms 275V rms 600A/S1/S1214 C =670/800 50mA rms 600A/S2/P/S1215 C =570/670 100mA rms 600A/S3/P/S1221 C = 570/670** 100mA rms 300V rms 600A/S1/S1223 C = 740/870* 50mA rms 600A/S2/P/S1196 C =620/740* 100mA rms 600A/S3/P/S1222 C =620/740*** 100mA rm
2.
3.
Secondary Internal Fault Current Amps rms 50A
100A
150A
Note:
*2400V peak
**2200V peak may be
***2600V peak contact
In some situations single disc assemblies AREVA T&D for detailed applications.
acceptable,
Note: 1. The Metrosil units recommended for use with 5 Amp CTs can also be applied for use with triple pole relays and consist of three single pole units mounted on the same central stud but electrically insulated for each other. To order these units please specify "Triple Pole Metrosil Type", followed by the single pole type reference. 2. Metrosil units for higher relay voltage settings and fault currents can be supplied if required.
For further advice and guidance on selecting METROSILS please contact the Applications department at AREVA T&D. 2.15 Residual over voltage/neutral voltage displacement protection On a healthy three phase power system, the addition of each of the three phase to earth voltages is nominally zero, as it is the vector addition of three balanced vectors at 120 to one another. However, when an earth fault occurs on the primary system this balance is upset and a residual voltage is produced. This could be measured, for example, at the secondary terminals of a voltage transformer having a broken delta secondary connection. Hence, a relay that measures residual voltage can be used to offer earth fault protection on such a system. Note that this condition causes a rise in the neutral voltage with respect to earth that is commonly referred to as neutral voltage displacement or NVD. Alternatively, if the system is impedance or
P341/EN AP/D22 Page 58/116
distribution transformer earthed, the neutral displacement voltage can be measured directly in the earth path via a single phase VT. This type of protection can be used to provide earth fault protection irrespective of whether the system is connected to earth or not, and irrespective of the form of earth connection and earth fault current level. Where embedded generation can be run in parallel with the external distribution system it is essential that this type of protection is provided at the interconnection with the external system. This will ensure that if the connection with the main supply system is lost due to external switching events, some type of reliable earth fault protection is provided to isolate the generator from an earth fault. Loss of connection with the external supply system may result in the loss of the earth connection, where this is provided at a distant transformer, and hence current based earth fault protection may be unreliable.
E S R F
ZS
ZL
A-G G
VA
VA VB VC VB VC VB
VC
VA VB VC
VRES VA VC
VB
VRES VC
VB
Residual voltage at R (relay point) is dependant upon Z S / Z L ratio. VRES = Z S0 2ZS1 + Z S0 + 2ZL1 + Z L0
P0117ENa
x3E
Figure 15a: Residual voltage, solidly earthed systems The residual over voltage protection function of the P341 relay consists of two stages with adjustable time delays. Two stages are included for the element to account for applications that require both alarm and trip stages, for example, an insulated system. It is common in such a case for the system to have been designed to withstand the associated healthy phase over voltages for a number of hours following an earth fault. In such applications, an
P341/EN AP/D22 Page 59/116
alarm is generated soon after the condition is detected, which serves to indicate the presence of an earth fault on the system. This gives time for system operators to locate and isolate the fault. The second stage of the protection can issue a trip signal if the fault condition persists. A dedicated voltage input is provided for this protection function, this may be used to measure the residual voltage supplied from either an open delta connected VT. Alternatively, the residual voltage may be derived internally from the three phase to neutral voltage measurements. Where derived measurement is used the 3 phase to neutral voltage must be supplied from either a 5-limb or three single phase VTs.
S R F
E N ZE G
ZS
ZL
A-G
S VC - G
VA - G G,F VB - G VC - G R
VA - G G,F VC - G VB - G
G,F VB - G
VRES VA - G VC - G
VRES VB - G VA - G VC - G Z S0 + 3ZE VB - G
VRES VB - G VC - G
VRES =
x3E
P0118ENa
2ZS1 + Z S0 + 2ZL1 + Z L0 + 3ZE
Figure 15b: Residual voltage, resistance earthed systems These types of VT design allow the passage of residual flux and consequently permit the relay to derive the required residual voltage. In addition, the primary star point of the VT must be earthed. A three limb VT has no path for residual flux and is therefore unsuitable to supply the relay when residual voltage is required to be derived from the phase to neutral voltage measurement. The residual voltage signal also provides a polarising voltage signal for the sensitive directional earth fault protection.
P341/EN AP/D22 Page 60/116
Each stage of protection can be blocked by energising the relevant DDB signal, via the PSL (DDB 368, DDB 369), this can be used to improve grading with downstream devices. DDB signals are also available to indicate the start and trip of each stage of protection, (Starts: DDB 577, DDB 578, Trips: DDB 451, DDB 452). The state of the DDB signals can be programmed to be viewed in the Monitor Bit x cells of the COMMISSION TESTS column in the relay. Setting ranges and default settings for this element are shown in the following table:
Menu Text Default Setting Setting Range Min. Max. Measured, Derived Disabled, DT, IDMT
1V (Vn=100/120V) 4V (Vn=380/480V) 80V (Vn=100/120V) 320V (Vn=380/480V) 1V (Vn=100/120V) 4V (Vn=380/480V)
Step Size
GROUP 1 RESIDUAL O/V NVD VN Input VN>1 Function VN>1 Voltage Set VN>1 Time Delay VN>1 TMS VN>1 tRESET VN>2 Status VN>2 Voltage Set VN>2 Time Delay Measured DT
5V (Vn=100/120V) 20V (Vn=380/480V)
1s 1 0s DT
5V (Vn=100/120V) 20V (Vn=380/480V)
0s 0.5 0s
1V (Vn=100/120V) 4V (Vn=380/480V)
100 s 100 100 s Disabled, DT

80V (Vn=100/120V) 320V (Vn=380/480V)
0.01 s 0.5 0.01 s

1V (Vn=100/120V) 4V (Vn=380/480V)
0s
0s
100 s
0.01 s
The IDMT characteristic available on the first stage is defined by the following formula: t where: K t = Time Multiplier Setting (VN>1 TMS) = Operating Time in Seconds = K / (M-1)
M = Measured Residual Voltage/Relay Setting Voltage (VN>1 Voltage Set) 2.15.1 Setting guidelines for residual over voltage/neutral voltage displacement protection Stage 1 may be selected as either IDMT (inverse time operating characteristic), DT (definite time operating characteristic) or Disabled, within the VN>1 Function cell. Stage 2 operates with a definite time characteristic and is Enabled/Disabled in the VN>2 Status cell. The time delay (VN>1 TMS for IDMT curve; V>1 Time Delay, V>2 Time Delay for definite time) should be selected in accordance with normal relay co-ordination procedures to ensure correct discrimination for system faults. The Residual Over voltage protection can be set to operate from the voltage measured at the Vn input VT terminals or the residual voltage derived from the Phase-Neutral voltage inputs as selected by VN Input.
P341/EN AP/D22 Page 61/116
The voltage setting applied to the elements is dependent upon the magnitude of residual voltage that is expected to occur during the earth fault condition. This in turn is dependent upon the method of system earthing employed and may be calculated by using the formulae previously given in Figs. 15a and 15b. It must also be ensured that the relay is set above any standing level of residual voltage that is present on the system. Note that IDMT characteristics are selectable on the first stage of NVD in order that elements located at various points on the system may be time graded with one another. It must also be ensured that the voltage setting of the element is set above any standing level of residual voltage that is present on the system. A typical setting for residual over voltage protection is 5V. The second stage of protection can be used as an alarm stage on unearthed or very high impedance earthed systems where the system can be operated for an appreciable time under an earth fault condition. 2.16 Under voltage protection Where the P341 relay is being used as interconnection protection the under voltage element is used to prevent power being exported to external loads at a voltage below normal allowable limits. Under voltage protection may also be used for back-up protection for a machine where it may be difficult to provide adequate sensitivity with phase current measuring elements. For an isolated generator, or isolated set of generators, a prolonged under voltage condition could arise for a number of reasons. This could be due to failure of automatic voltage regulation (AVR) equipment or excessive load following disconnection from the main grid supply. Where there is a risk that a machine could become disconnected from the main grid supply and energise external load it is essential that under voltage protection is used. The embedded generator must be prevented from energising external customers with voltage below the statutory limits imposed on the electricity supply authorities. A two stage under voltage element is provided. The element can be set to operate from phase-phase or phase-neutral voltages. Each stage has an independent time delay that can be set to zero for instantaneous operation. Selectable, fixed Logic is included within the relay to allow the operation of the element to be inhibited during periods when the machine is isolated from the external system. Each stage of under voltage protection can be blocked by energising the relevant DDB signal via the PSL, (DDB 370, DDB 371). DDB signals are also available to indicate a 3 phase and per phase start and trip, (Starts: DDB 579-586, Trips: DDB 453-460). The state of the DDB signals can be programmed to be viewed in the Monitor Bit x cells of the COMMISSION TESTS column in the relay. Note: If the undervoltage protection is set for phase-phase operation then the DDB signals V<1/2 Start/Trip A/AB, V<1/2 Start/Trip B/BC, V<1/2 Start/ Trip C/CA refer to V<1/2 Start/Trip AB and V<1/2 Start/Trip BC and V<1/2 Start/Trip CA. If set for phaseneutral then the DDB signals V<1/2 Start/Trip A/AB, V<1/2 Start/Trip B/BC, V<1/2 Start/Trip C/CA refer to V<1/2 Start/Trip A and V<1/2 Start/Trip B and V<1/2 Start/Trip C.
P341/EN AP/D22 Page 62/116 Setting ranges for this element are shown in the following table:
Menu Text Default Setting Setting Range Min. Max. Sub Heading Phase-Neutral Any-phase DT
80 V (Vn=100/120V) 320V (Vn=380/480V) 10V (Vn=100/120V) 40V (Vn=380/480V)
Step Size
GROUP 1 VOLT PROTECTION UNDERVOLTAGE V< Measurt Mode V< Operate Mode V<1 Function V<1 Voltage Set V<1 Time Delay V<1 TMS V<1 Poledead Inh V<2 Function V<2 Voltage Set V<2 Time Delay V<1 Poledead Inh Phase-Phase, Phase-Neutral Any Phase, Three phase Disabled, DT, IDMT
1s 1 Enabled DT
80 V (Vn=100/120V) 320V (Vn=380/480V)
0s 0.5
100 s 100 Disabled, Enabled Disabled, DT
0.01 s 0.5
10V (Vn=100/120V) 40V (Vn=380/480V)
120V (Vn=100/120V) 480V (Vn=380/480V)
1V (Vn=100/120V) 4V (Vn=380/480V)
1s Enabled
0s
100 s Disabled, Enabled
0.01 s
The IDMT characteristic available on the first stage is defined by the following formula: t where: K t = Time Multiplier Setting (V>1 TMS) = Operating Time in Seconds = K / (1-M)
M = Measured Voltage/Relay Setting Voltage (V<1 Voltage Set) 2.16.1 Setting guidelines for under voltage protection Stage 1 may be selected as either IDMT (for inverse time delayed operation), DT (for definite time delayed operation) or Disabled, within the V<1 Function cell. Stage 2 is definite time only and is Enabled/Disabled in the V<2 Status cell. The time delay. (V<1 TMS - for IDMT curve: V<1 Time Delay, V<2 Time Delay for definite time) should be adjusted accordingly. The under voltage protection can be set to operate from Phase-Phase or PhaseNeutral voltage as selected by V< Measurt Mode. Single or three phase operation can be selected in V<1 Operate Mode. When Any Phase is selected, the element will operate if any phase voltage falls below setting, when Three Phase is selected the element will operate when all three phase voltages are below the setting. The under voltage threshold for each stage is set in the V>1 Voltage Set and V>2 Voltage Set cells.
P341/EN AP/D22 Page 63/116
Where the relay is used to provide the protection required for connecting the generator in parallel with the local electricity supply system (e.g. requirements of G59 in the UK), the local electricity supply authority will advise settings for the element. The settings must prevent the generator from exporting power to the system with voltage outside of the statutory limits imposed on the supply authority. For this mode of operation the element must be set to operate from phase to neutral voltage, which will provide an additional degree of earth fault protection. The operating characteristic would normally be set to definite time, set V<1 Function to DT. The time delay, V<1 Time Delay, should be set to co-ordinate with downstream. Additionally, the delay should be long enough to prevent unwanted operation of the under voltage protection for transient voltage dips. These may occur during clearance of faults further into the power system or by starting of local machines. The required time delay would typically be in excess of 3s 5s. As previously stated, local regulations for operating a generator in parallel with the external electricity supply may dictate the settings used for the under voltage protection. For example in the UK the protection should be set to measure phase to neutral voltage and trip at 90% of nominal voltage in a time of less than 0.5s. The second stage can be used as an alarm stage to warn the user of unusual voltage conditions so that corrections can be made. This could be useful if the machine is being operated with the AVR selected to manual control. To prevent operation of any under voltage stage during normal shutdown of the generator poledead logic is included in the relay. This is facilitated by selecting V Poledead Inh to Enabled. This will ensure that when a poledead condition is detected (i.e. all phase currents below the undercurrent threshold or CB Open, as determined by an opto isolator and the PSL) the under voltage element will be inhibited. 2.17 Over voltage protection An over voltage condition could arise when a generator is running but not connected to a power system, or where a generator is providing power to an islanded power system. Such an over voltage could arise in the event of a fault with automatic voltage regulating equipment or if the voltage regulator is set for manual control and an operator error is made. Over voltage protection should be set to prevent possible damage to generator insulation, prolonged over-fluxing of the generating plant, or damage to power system loads. When a generator is synchronised to a power system with other sources, an over voltage could arise if the generator is lightly loaded supplying a high level of power system capacitive charging current. An over voltage condition might also be possible following a system separation, where a generator might experience full-load rejection whilst still being connected to part of the original power system. The automatic voltage regulating equipment and machine governor should quickly respond to correct the over voltage condition in these cases. However, over voltage protection is advisable to cater for a possible failure of the voltage regulator or for the regulator having been set to manual control. A two stage over voltage element is provided. The element can be set to operate from phase-phase or phase-neutral voltages. Each stage has an independent time delay which can be set to zero for instantaneous operation. Each stage of over voltage protection can be blocked by energising the relevant DDB signal via the PSL, (DDB 372, DDB 373). DDB signals are also available to indicate a 3 phase and per phase start and trip, (Starts: DDB 587-594, Trips: DDB 461-468).
P341/EN AP/D22 Page 64/116 Note:
Application Notes MiCOM P341 If the overvoltage protection is set for phase-phase operation then the DDB signals V>1/2 Start/Trip A/AB, V>1/2 Start/Trip B/BC, V>1/2 Start/Trip C/CA refer to V>1/2 Start/Trip AB and V>1/2 Start/Trip BC and V>1/2 Start/Trip CA. If set for phaseneutral then the DDB signals V>1/2 Start/Trip A/AB, V>1/2 Start/Trip B/BC, V>1/2 Start/Trip C/CA refer to V>1/2 Start/Trip A and V>1/2 Start/Trip B and V>1/2 Start/Trip C.
The state of the DDB signals can be programmed to be viewed in the Monitor Bit x cells of the COMMISSION TESTS column in the relay. Setting ranges for this element are shown in the following table:
Menu Text Default Setting Setting Range Min. Max. Sub Heading Phase-Neutral Any-phase DT
Step Size
GROUP VOLT PROTECTION OVERVOLTAGE V> Measurt Mode V> Operate Mode V>1 Function V>1 Voltage Set V>1 Time Delay V>1 TMS V>2 Status V>2 Voltage Set V>2 Time Delay Phase-Phase, Phase-Neutral Any Phase, Three phase Disabled, DT, IDMT
1s 1 DT
130V (Vn=100/120V) 520V (Vn=380/480V)
0s 0.5
60V (Vn=100/120V) 240V (Vn=380/480V)
100 s 100 Disabled, DT

185V (Vn=100/120V) 740V (Vn=380/480V)
0.01 s 0.5
1V (Vn=100/120V) 4V (Vn=380/480V)
1s
0s
100 s
0.01 s
The IDMT characteristic available on the first stage is defined by the following formula: t where: K t = Time Multiplier Setting (V>1 TMS) = Operating Time in Seconds = K / (M - 1)
M = Measured Voltage/Relay Setting Voltage (V>1 Voltage Set) 2.17.1 Setting guidelines for over voltage protection Stage 1 may be selected as either IDMT (for inverse time delayed operation), DT (for definite time delayed operation) or Disabled, within the V>1 Function cell. Stage 2 has a definite time delayed characteristic and is Enabled/Disabled in the V>2 Status cell. The time delay. (V>1 TMS - for IDMT curve; V>1 Time Delay, V>2 Time Delay - for definite time) should be selected accordingly.
P341/EN AP/D22 Page 65/116
The over voltage protection can be set to operate from Phase-Phase or Phase-Neutral voltage as selected by V> Measurt Mode cell. Single or three phase operation can be selected in V> Operate Mode cell. When Any Phase is selected the element will operate if any phase voltage falls below setting, when Three Phase is selected the element will operate when all three phase voltages are above the setting. Generators can typically withstand a 5% over voltage condition continuously. The withstand times for higher over voltages should be declared by the generator manufacturer. To prevent operation during earth faults, the element should operate from the phasephase voltages, to achieve this V>1 Measurt Mode can be set to Phase-Phase with V>1 Operating Mode set to Three-Phase. The over voltage threshold, V>1 Voltage Set, should typically be set to 100%-120% of the nominal phase-phase voltage seen by the relay. The time delay, V>1 Time Delay, should be set to prevent unwanted tripping of the delayed over voltage protection function due to transient over voltages that do not pose a risk to the generating plant; e.g. following load rejection where correct AVR/Governor control occurs. The typical delay to be applied would be 1s 3s, with a longer delay being applied for lower voltage threshold settings. The second stage can be used to provide instantaneous high-set over voltage protection. The typical threshold setting to be applied, V>2 Voltage Set, would be 130 150% of the nominal phase-phase voltage seen by the relay, depending on plant manufacturers advice. For instantaneous operation, the time delay, V>2 Time Delay, should be set to 0s. Where the relay is used to provide the protection required for connecting the generator in parallel with the local electricity supply system (e.g. requirements of G59 in the UK), the local electricity supply authority may advise settings for the element. The settings must prevent the generator from exporting power to the system with voltages outside of the statutory limits imposed on the supply authority. For example in the UK the protection should be set to measure phase to neutral voltage and trip at 110% of nominal voltage in a time of less than 0.5s. If phase to neutral operation is selected, the element may operate during earth faults, where the phase-neutral voltage can rise significantly. 2.18 Under frequency protection Under frequency operation of a generator will occur when the power system load exceeds the prime mover capability of an islanded generator or group of generators. Power system overloading can arise when a power system becomes split, with load left connected to a set of islanded generators that is in excess of their capacity. Automatic load shedding could compensate for such events. In this case, under frequency operation would be a transient condition. This characteristic makes under frequency protection a simple form of Loss of Mains protection on system where it is expected that the islanded load attached to the machine when the grid connection fails exceeds the generator capacity. In the event of the load shedding being unsuccessful, the generators should be provided with backup under frequency protection. Where the P341 relay is being used as interconnection protection the under frequency element is also used to prevent power being exported to external loads at a frequency below normal allowable limits. Four independent definite time-delayed stages of under frequency protection are offered. Two additional over frequency stages can also be reconfigured as under frequency protection by reprogramming the Programmable Scheme Logic. As well as being able to initiate generator tripping, the under frequency protection can also be arranged to initiate local load-shedding, where appropriate.
P341/EN AP/D22 Page 66/116
Energising the relevant DDB signal, via the PSL (DDB 374-377), can block each stage of underfrequency protection. DDB signals are also available to indicate start and trip of each stage, (Starts: DDB 622-625, Trips: DDB 469-472). The state of the DDB signals can be programmed to be viewed in the Monitor Bit x cells of the COMMISSION TESTS column in the relay. Setting ranges for this element are shown in the following table:
Menu Text Default Setting Setting Range Min. Max. Sub Heading Enabled 49.5 Hz 4s Enabled 49.5 Hz 4s Enabled 49.5 Hz 4s Enabled 49.5 Hz 4s 1111 45 Hz 0s Bit 0 Bit 1 Bit 2 Bit 3 - Enable - Enable - Enable - Enable 45 Hz 0s 45 Hz 0s 45 Hz 0s Disabled, Enabled 65 Hz 100 s Disabled, Enabled 65 Hz 100 s Disabled, Enabled 65 Hz 100 s Disabled, Enabled 65 Hz 100 s Block Block Block Block F<1 F<2 F<3 F<4 0.01 Hz 0.01 s during Poledead during Poledead during Poledead during Poledead 0.01 Hz 0.01 s 0.01 Hz 0.01 s 0.01 Hz 0.01 s Step Size
GROUP 1 FREQ PROTECTION UNDER FREQUENCY F<1 Status F<1 Setting F<1 Time Delay F<2 Status F>2 Setting F<2 Time Delay F<3 Status F>3 Setting F<3 Time Delay F<4 Status F<4 Setting F<4 Time Delay F< Function Link
2.18.1 Setting guidelines for under frequency protection Each stage of under frequency protection may be selected as Enabled or Disabled, within the F<x Status cells. The frequency pickup setting, F<x Setting, and time delays, F<x Time Delay, for each stage should be selected accordingly. The protection function should be set so that declared frequency-time limits for the generating set or system are not infringed. Typically, a 10% under frequency condition should be continuously sustainable by the machine however system considerations may mean that settings much closer to the nominal frequency are specified. For industrial generation schemes, where generation and loads may be under common control/ownership, the P341 under frequency protection function could be used to initiate local system load-shedding. Four stage under frequency/load shedding can be provided. The final stage of under frequency protection should be used to trip the generator. Where separate load shedding equipment is provided, the under frequency protection should co-ordinate with it. This will ensure that generator tripping will not occur in the event of successful load shedding following a system overload. Two stages of under frequency protection could be set-up, as illustrated in Figure 16, to co-ordinate with multi-stage system load-shedding.
P341/EN AP/D22 Page 67/116
Frequency
fn F1< B C F2< Turbine prohibited area t2 A B C t1 System frequency response with minimum load shed for recovery System frequency response with under shedding of load Optimum underfrequency protection characteristic Time A
P2047ENa
Figure 16: Co-ordination of underfrequency protection function with system load shedding To prevent operation of any under frequency stage during normal shutdown of the generator poledead logic is included in the relay. This is facilitated for each stage by setting the relevant bit in F< Function Link. For example if F< Function Link is set to 0111, Stage 1, 2 and 3 of under frequency protection will be blocked when the generator CB is open. Selective blocking of the frequency protection stages in this way will allow a single stage of protection to be enabled during synchronisation or offline running to prevent unsynchronised over fluxing of the machine. When the machine is synchronised, and the CB closed, all stages of frequency protection will be enabled providing a multi stage load shed scheme if desired. Where the relay is used to provide the protection required for connecting the generator in parallel with the local electricity supply system (e.g. requirements of G.59 in the UK), the local electricity supply authority may advise settings for the element. The settings must prevent the generator from exporting power to the system with frequency outside of the statutory limits imposed on the supply authority. For example, in the UK the under frequency protection should be set to 47Hz with a trip time of less than 0.5s.
P341/EN AP/D22 Page 68/116 2.19 Over frequency protection function
Over frequency running of a generator arises when the mechanical power input to the alternator is in excess of the electrical load and mechanical losses. The most common occurrence of over frequency is after substantial loss of load. When a rise in running speed occurs, the governor should quickly respond to reduce the mechanical input power, so that normal running speed is quickly regained. Over frequency protection may be required as a backup protection function to cater for governor or throttle control failure following loss of load or during unsynchronised or islanded running. Moderate over frequency operation of a generator is not as potentially threatening to the generator and other electrical plant as under frequency running. Action can be taken at the generating plant to correct the situation without necessarily shutting down the generator. However, where the P341 relay is being used as interconnection protection the under frequency element will prevent power being exported to external loads at a frequency higher than normal allowable limits. Two independent time-delayed stages of over frequency protection are provided. Each stage of protection can be blocked by energising the relevant DDB signal via the PSL, (DDB 378, DDB 379). DDB signals are also available to indicate start and trip of each stage, (Starts: DDB 626, 627, Trips: DDB 473, 474). The state of the DDB signals can be programmed to be viewed in the Monitor Bit x cells of the COMMISSION TESTS column in the relay. Setting ranges for this element are shown in the following table:
Menu Text Default Setting Setting Range Min. Max. Sub Heading Enabled 49.5 Hz 4s Enabled 49.5 Hz 4s 45 Hz 0s 45 Hz 0s Disabled, Enabled 65 Hz 100 s Disabled, Enabled 65 Hz 100 s 0.01 Hz 0.01 s 0.01 Hz 0.01 s Step Size
GROUP 1 FREQ PROTECTION OVER FREQUENCY F>1 Status F>1 Setting F>1 Time Delay F>2 Status F>2 Setting F>2 Time Delay
2.19.1 Setting guidelines for over frequency protection Each stage of over frequency protection may be selected as Enabled or Disabled, within the F>x Status cells. The frequency pickup setting, F>x Setting, and time delays, F>x Time Delay, for each stage should be selected accordingly. The P341 over frequency settings should be selected to co-ordinate with normal, transient over frequency excursions following full-load rejection. The generator manufacturer should declare the expected transient over frequency behaviour, which should comply with international governor response standards. A typical over frequency setting would be 10% above nominal. Where the relay is used to provide the protection required for connecting the generator in parallel with the local electricity supply system (e.g. requirements of G.59 in the UK), the local electricity supply authority may advise settings for the element. The settings must prevent the generator from exporting power to the system with frequency outside of the statutory limits imposed on the supply authority. For
P341/EN AP/D22 Page 69/116
example in the UK over frequency protection should be set to 50.5Hz with a trip time of less than 0.5s. 2.20 Thermal overload protection
2.20.1 Introduction Thermal overload protection can be used to prevent electrical plant from operating at temperatures in excess of the designed maximum withstand. Prolonged overloading causes excessive heating, which may result in premature ageing of the insulation, or in extreme cases, insulation failure. The P341 relay incorporates a current based thermal replica, using positive and negative sequence currents to model heating and cooling of the protected plant. The element can be set with both alarm and trip stages. The P341 thermal protection has been designed specifically for electrical machines but could also be used for other items of plant such as transformers or cables. Overloads can result in stator temperature rises which exceed the thermal limit of the winding insulation. Empirical results suggest that the life of insulation is approximately halved for each 10C rise in temperature above the rated value. However, the life of insulation is not wholly dependent upon the rise in temperature but on the time the insulation is maintained at this elevated temperature. Due to the relatively large heat storage capacity of an electrical machine, infrequent overloads of short duration may not damage the machine. However, sustained overloads of a few percent may result in premature ageing and failure of insulation. The physical and electrical complexity of generator construction result in a complex thermal relationship. It is not therefore possible to create an accurate mathematical model of the true thermal characteristics of the machine. However, if a generator is considered to be a homogeneous body, developing heat internally at a constant rate and dissipating heat at a rate directly proportional to its temperature rise, it can be shown that the temperature at any instant is given by: T = Tmax (1-e-t/t)
Where Tmax t = = final steady state temperature heating time constant
This assumes a thermal equilibrium in the form: Heat developed = Heat stored + Heat dissipated Temperature rise is proportional to the current squared: T T = = K IR2 (1-e-t/t) Tmax = K IR2 if t =
Where IR = the continuous current level which would produce a temperature Tmax in the generator
For an overload current of I the temperature is given by: T = KI2 (1-e-t/t)
P341/EN AP/D22 Page 70/116
For a machine not to exceed Tmax, the rated temperature, then the time t for which the machine can withstand the current I can be shown to be given by: Tmax t = = K IR2 = KI2 (1-e-t/t) t. Log e (1/(1-(I R /I)2))
An overload protection element should therefore satisfy the above relationship. The value of IR may be the full load current or a percentage of it depending on the design. As previously stated it is an oversimplification to regard a generator as an homogeneous body. The temperature rise of different parts or even of various points in the same part may be very uneven. However, it is reasonable to consider that the current-time relationship follows an inverse characteristic. A more accurate representation of the thermal state of the machine can be obtained through the use of temperature monitoring devices (RTDs) which target specific areas. Also, for short time overloads the application of RTDs and overcurrent protection can provide better protection. Note, that the thermal model does not compensate for the effects of ambient temperature change. So if there is an unusually high ambient temperature or if the machine cooling is blocked RTDs will also provide better protection. 2.20.2 Thermal replica The P341 relay models the time-current thermal characteristic of a generator by internally generating a thermal replica of the machine. The thermal overload protection can be selectively enabled or disabled. The positive and negative sequence components of the generator current are measured independently and are combined together to form an equivalent current, Ieq, which is supplied to the replica circuit. The heating effect in the thermal replica is produced by Ieq2 and therefore takes into account the heating effect due to both positive and negative sequence components of current. Unbalanced phase currents will cause additional rotor heating that may not be accounted for by some thermal protection relays based on the measured current only. Unbalanced loading results in the flow of positive and negative sequence current components. Load unbalance can arise as a result of single phase loading, nonlinear loads (involving power electronics or arc furnaces, etc.), uncleared or repetitive asymmetric faults, fuse operation, single-pole tripping and reclosing on transmission systems, broken overhead line conductors and asymmetric failures of switching devices. Any negative phase sequence component of stator current will set up a reverse-rotating component of stator flux that passes the rotor at twice synchronous speed. Such a flux component will induce double frequency eddy currents in the rotor, which can cause overheating of the rotor body, main rotor windings, damper windings etc. This extra heating is not accounted for in the thermal limit curves supplied by the generator manufacturer as these curves assume positive sequence currents only that come from a perfectly balanced supply and generator design. The P340 thermal model may be biased to reflect the additional heating that is caused by negative sequence current when the machine is running. This biasing is done by creating an equivalent heating current rather than simply using the phase current. The M factor is a constant that relates negative sequence rotor resistance to positive sequence rotor resistance. If an M factor of 0 is used the unbalance biasing is disabled and the overload curve will time out against the measured generator positive sequence current. Note, the P340 also includes a negative sequence overcurrent protection function based on I22t specifically for thermal protection of the rotor.
P341/EN AP/D22 Page 71/116
The equivalent current for operation of the overload protection is in accordance with the following expression: Ieq = (I12 + MI22)
Where I1 I2 M = = = positive sequence current negative sequence current a user settable constant proportional to the thermal capacity of the machine
As previously described, the temperature of a generator will rise exponentially with increasing current. Similarly, when the current decreases, the temperature also decreases in a similar manner. Therefore, in order to achieve close sustained overload protection, the P341 relay incorporates a wide range of thermal time constants for heating and cooling. Furthermore, the thermal withstand capability of the generator is affected by heating in the winding prior to the overload. The thermal replica is designed to take account the extremes of zero pre-fault current, known as the cold condition and the full rated pre-fault current, known as the hot condition. With no pre-fault current the relay will be operating on the cold curve. When a generator is or has been running at full load prior to an overload the hot curve is applicable. Therefore, during normal operation the relay will be operating between these two limits. The following equation is used to calculate the trip time for a given current. Note that the relay will trip at a value corresponding to 100% of its thermal state. The thermal time characteristic is given by: t where: t t Ieq = = = time to trip, following application of the overload current, I heating time constant of the protected plant equivalent current relay setting current steady state pre-load current before application of the overload = t loge (Ieq2 IP2)/(Ieq2 (Thermal I>)2
Thermal I> = IP =
The time to trip varies depending on the load current carried before application of the overload, i.e. whether the overload was applied from 'hot or cold. The thermal time constant characteristic may be rewritten as: exp(t/t) where: q and qp = Ip2/ (Thermal I>)2 = Ieq2/(Thermal I>)2 = (q 1) / (q q p)
where q is the thermal state and is qp the prefault thermal state. Note, that the thermal model does not compensate for the effects of ambient temperature change.
P341/EN AP/D22 Page 72/116 t Where K A = = Ieq/Thermal I> IP /Thermal I> = t. Loge (K2-A2/(K2-1))
The Thermal state of the machine can be viewed in the Thermal Overload cell in the MEASUREMENTS 3 column. The thermal state can be reset by selecting Yes in the Reset ThermalO/L cell in Measurements 3. Alternatively the thermal state can be reset by energising DDB 390 Reset ThermalO/L via the relay PSL. A DDB signal Thermal O/L Trip is also available to indicate tripping of the element (DDB 499). A further DDB signal Thermal Alarm is generated from the thermal alarm stage (DDB 399). The state of the DDB signal can be programmed to be viewed in the Monitor Bit x cells of the COMMISSION TESTS column in the relay. Setting ranges for the thermal overload element are shown in the following table: Menu Text GROUP 1: THERMAL OVERLOAD IThermal Thermal I> Thermal Alarm T-heating T-cooling M Factor 2.20.3 Setting guidelines The current setting is calculated as: Thermal Trip = Permissible continuous loading of the plant item/CT ratio. The heating thermal time constant should be chosen so that the overload curve is always below the thermal limits provided by the manufacturer. This will ensure that the machine is tripped before the thermal limit is reached. The relay setting, T-heating", is in minutes. The cooling thermal time constant should be provided by the manufacturer. However, unless otherwise specified, the cooling time constant, "T-cooling", setting should be set equal to the main heating time constant setting, T-heating. The cooling time constant is applied when the machine is running and the load current is decreasing. It is therefore practical to assume the cooling time constant is similar to the heating time constant if information is not available from the manufacturer. When the machine is not turning the machine will normally cool significantly slower than when the rotor is turning. The relay setting, "T-cooling", is in minutes. An alarm can be raised on reaching a thermal state corresponding to a percentage of the trip threshold. A typical setting might be "Thermal Alarm" = 70% of thermal capacity. The thermal alarm could also be used to prevent restarting of the generator until the alarm level resets. For this application a typical setting may be 20%. Enabled 1.2 In A 90% 60 mins 60 mins 0 Disabled, Enabled 0.5 In A 20% 1 min 1 min 0 2.5 In A 100% 200 mins 200 mins 10 0.01 In A 1% 1 min 1 min 1 Default Setting Setting Range Min Max Step Size
P341/EN AP/D22 Page 73/116
The M Factor is used to increase the influence of negative sequence current on the thermal replica protection due to unbalanced currents. If it is required to account for the heating effect of unbalanced currents then this factor should be set equal to the ratio of negative phase sequence rotor resistance to positive sequence rotor resistance at rated speed. When an exact setting can not be calculated a setting of 3 should be used. This is a typical setting and will suffice for the majority of applications for machines. If an M factor of 0 is used the unbalance biasing is disabled and the overload curve will time out against the measured generator positive sequence current. The M factor should be set to 0 if the thermal replica protection is not used to protect machines e.g. for cables or transformers. Note, the extra heating caused by unbalanced phase currents is not accounted for in the thermal limit curves supplied by the generator manufacturer as these curves assume positive sequence currents only that come from a perfectly balanced supply and generator design, so the default setting is 0. 2.21 Circuit breaker fail protection (CBF) Following inception of a fault one or more main protection devices will operate and issue a trip output to the circuit breaker(s) associated with the faulted circuit. Operation of the circuit breaker is essential to isolate the fault, and prevent damage/further damage to the power system. For transmission/sub-transmssion systems, slow fault clearance can also threaten system stability. It is therefore common practice to install circuit breaker failure protection, which monitors that the circuit breaker has opened within a reasonable time. If the fault current has not been interrupted following a set time delay from circuit breaker trip initiation, breaker failure protection (CBF) will operate. CBF operation can be used to backtrip upstream circuit breakers to ensure that the fault is isolated correctly. CBF operation can also reset all start output contacts, ensuring that any blocks asserted on upstream protection are removed. 2.21.1 Breaker failure protection configurations The circuit breaker failure protection incorporates two timers, "CB Fail 1 Timer" and "CB Fail 2 Timer", allowing configuration for the following scenarios: Simple CBF, where only "CB Fail 1 Timer" is enabled. For any protection trip, the "CB Fail 1 Timer" is started, and normally reset when the circuit breaker opens to isolate the fault. If breaker opening is not detected, "CB Fail 1 Timer" times out and closes an output contact assigned to breaker fail (using the programmable scheme logic). This contact is used to backtrip upstream switchgear, generally tripping all infeeds connected to the same busbar section. A re-tripping scheme, plus delayed backtripping. Here, "CB Fail 1 Timer" is used to route a trip to a second trip circuit of the same circuit breaker. This requires duplicated circuit breaker trip coils, and is known as re-tripping. Should retripping fail to open the circuit breaker, a backtrip may be issued following an additional time delay. The backtrip uses "CB Fail 2 Timer", which is also started at the instant of the initial protection element trip.
CBF elements "CB Fail 1 Timer" and "CB Fail 2 Timer" can be configured to operate for trips triggered by protection elements within the relay or via an external protection trip. The latter is acheived by allocating one of the relay opto-isolated inputs to "External Trip" using the programmable scheme logic.
P341/EN AP/D22 Page 74/116 2.21.2 Reset mechanisms for breaker fail timers
It is common practice to use low set undercurrent elements in protection relays to indicate that circuit breaker poles have interrupted the fault or load current, as required. This covers the following situations: Where circuit breaker auxiliary contacts are defective, or cannot be relied upon to definitely indicate that the breaker has tripped. Where a circuit breaker has started to open but has become jammed. This may result in continued arcing at the primary contacts, with an additional arcing resistance in the fault current path. Should this resistance severely limit fault current, the initiating protection element may reset. Thus, reset of the element may not give a reliable indication that the circuit breaker has opened fully.
For any protection function requiring current to operate, the relay uses operation of undercurrent elements (I<) to detect that the necessary circuit breaker poles have tripped and reset the CB fail timers. However, the undercurrent elements may not be reliable methods of resetting circuit breaker fail in all applications. For example: Where non-current operated protection, such as under/overvoltage or under/overfrequency, derives measurements from a line connected voltage transformer. Here, I< only gives a reliable reset method if the protected circuit would always have load current flowing. Detecting drop-off of the initiating protection element might be a more reliable method. Where non-current operated protection, such as under/overvoltage or under/overfrequency, derives measurements from a busbar connected voltage transformer. Again using I< would rely upon the feeder normally being loaded. Also, tripping the circuit breaker may not remove the initiating condition from the busbar, and hence drop-off of the protection element may not occur. In such cases, the position of the circuit breaker auxiliary contacts may give the best reset method.
Resetting of the CBF is possible from a breaker open indication (from the relay's pole dead logic) or from a protection reset. In these cases resetting is only allowed provided the undercurrent elements have also reset. The resetting options are summarised in the following table: Initiation (Menu Selectable) CB Fail Timer Reset Mechnaism The resetting mechanism is fixed (e.g. 50/51/46/21/87..) [IA< operates] & [IB< operates] & [IC< operates] & [IN< operates] The resetting mechanism is fixed. [ISEF< operates] Three options are available. The user can select from the following options. [All I< and IN< elements operate] [Protection element reset] AND [All I< and IN< elements operate] CB open (all 3 poles) AND [All I< and IN< elements operate]
Current based protection
Sensitive earth fault element
Non-current based protection (e.g. 27/59/81/32L..)
P341/EN AP/D22 Page 75/116 Three options are available. The user can select any or all of the options. [All I< and IN< elements operate] [External trip reset] AND [All I< and IN< elements operate] CB open (all 3 poles) AND [All I< and IN< elements operate]
External protection
The selection in the relay menu is grouped as follows:

Menu Text Default Setting Setting Range Min. Max. {Sub-Heading} Enabled 0.2 s Disabled 0.4 s CB Open & I< CB Open & I< 0.1In 0.1In 0.02In Disabled Disabled 0s 0s Enabled, Disabled 10 s Enabled, Disabled 10 s 0.01s I< Only, CB Open & I<, Prot Reset & I< I< Only, CB Open & I<, Prot Reset & I< {Sub-Heading} 0.02In 0.02In 0.001In 3.2In 3.2In 0.8In {Sub-Heading} Enabled, Disabled Enabled, Disabled 0.01In 0.01In 0.0005In 0.01s Step Size
NEG SEQ O/C GROUP 1 BREAKER FAIL CB Fail 1 Status CB Fail 1 Timer CB Fail 2 Status CB Fail 2 Timer Volt Prot Reset Ext Prot Reset UNDERCURRENT I< Current Set IN< Current Set ISEF< Current BLOCKED O/C Remove I> Remove IN>
The "Remove I>" and "Remove IN>" settings are used to remove starts issued from the overcurrent and earth elements respectively following a breaker fail time out (DDB 628 I> Block Start, DDB 629 IN/SEF> Blk Start). The start is removed when the cell is set to Enabled. This can be used to remove a blocking signal from an upstream relay to back trip and clear the fault. 2.22 Typical settings
2.22.1 Breaker fail timer settings Typical timer settings to use are as follows: CB Fail Reset Mechanism tBF Time Delay CB interrupting time + element reset time (max.) + error in tBF timer + safety margin CB auxiliary contacts opening/closing time (max.) + error + safety margin Typical Delay for 2 Cycle Circuit Breaker 50 + 50 + 10 + 50 = 160 ms
Initiating element reset
CB open
50 + 10 + 50 = 110 ms
P341/EN AP/D22 Page 76/116 CB Fail Reset Mechanism Undercurrent elements tBF Time Delay CB interrupting time + undercurrent element (max.) + operating time
Application Notes MiCOM P341 Typical Delay for 2 Cycle Circuit Breaker 50 + 12 + 50 = 112 ms
Note that all CB Fail resetting involves the operation of the undercurrent elements. Where element reset or CB open resetting is used the undercurrent time setting should still be used if this proves to be the worst case. The examples above consider direct tripping of a 2 cycle circuit breaker. Note that where auxiliary tripping relays are used, an additional 10-15ms must be added to allow for trip relay operation. 2.22.2 Breaker fail undercurrent settings The phase undercurrent settings (I<) must be set less than load current, to ensure that I< operation indicates that the circuit breaker pole is open. A typical setting for overhead line or cable circuits is 20% In, with 5% In common for generator circuit breaker CBF. The sensitive earth fault protection (SEF) and standard earth fault undercurrent elements must be set less than the respective trip setting, typically as follows:
ISEF< = (ISEF> trip) / 2 IN<

= (IN> trip) / 2

DDB #162 : Any Trip (RL3) OR DDB #380 : Ext. Trip 3ph R DDB #631 : IA< Start S Q SETTING [4502] : CB Fail 1 Status AND
G37-0 : Disabled G37-1 : Enabled
P341/EN AP/D22 Page 77/116

SETTING [4503] : CB Fail 1 Timer tbf1 DDB #493 : Bfail1 Trip 3ph 0s
DDB #632 : IB< Start AND DDB #633 : IC< Start SETTING [4504] : DDB #635 : IN< Start CB Fail 2 Status
G37-0 : Disabled
SETTING [4505] : CB Fail 2 Timer tbf2 AND 0s DDB #494 : Bfail2 Trip 3ph
DDB #447 : ISEF>1 Trip
OR
G37-1 : Enabled
AND DDB #162 : Any Trip (RL3) S Q DDB #634 : ISEF< Start x 2 Stages DDB #453, 457 : V< Trip x 2 Stages DDB #461, 465 : V> Trip x 2 Stages DDB #451, 457 : VN> Trip x 4 Stages DDB #469 - 472 : F< Trip x 2 Stages DDB #440 : df/dt Trip R AND S Q OR R
OR
DDB #294 : CB Fail Alarm
DDB #441 : V Shift Trip x 2 Stages DDB #475, 476 : Power Trip x 2 Stages DDB #495, 496 : SPower Trip x 2 Stages DDB #473, 474 : F > Trip SETTING [4506] : Volt Prot Reset
G68-0 : I< Only G68-1 : CB Open & I< G68-2 : Prot Reset & I<
S Q OR SETTING [4507] : Ext Prot Reset OR

G68-0 : I< Only G68-1 : CB Open & I<
AND
AND
OR
AND
G68-2 : Prot Reset & I<
AND
DDB #757 : All Poles Dead
DDB #380 : Ext. Trip 3ph
P2181enb
Figure 17: CB fail logic 3. 3.1 OTHER PROTECTION CONSIDERATIONS Blocked overcurrent protection Blocked overcurrent protection involves the use of start contacts from downstream relays wired onto blocking inputs of upstream relays. This allows identical current and time settings to be employed on each of the relays involved in the scheme, as the relay nearest to the fault does not receive a blocking signal and hence trips discriminatively. This type of scheme therefore reduces the amount of required grading stages and consequently fault clearance times. The principle of blocked overcurrent protection may be extended by setting fast acting overcurrent elements on the P341 which are then arranged to be blocked by start contacts from the relays protecting the outgoing feeders. The fast acting element is thus allowed to trip for a fault condition on the busbar but is stable for external feeder faults by means of the blocking signal. This type of scheme therefore provides much reduced fault clearance times for busbar faults than would be the case with conventional time graded overcurrent protection. The availability of multiple overcurrent and earth fault stages means that back-up time graded overcurrent protection is also provided. This is shown in Figures 18a and 18b.
P341/EN AP/D22 Page 78/116
Generator Block highset element CB fail backtrip
O/P from start contact
CB fail backtrip
Feeder 1
Feeder 2
Feeder 3
Feeder 4
P2184enb
Figure 18a: Simple busbar blocking scheme (single incomer)

10.0
Time (secs)
1.0
0.1 0.08 0.01
P3xx IDMT element IDMT margin Feeder IDMT element P3xx high set element Feeder start contact 1.0 10.0 Current (kA) Time to block 100.0
P2185enb
10.0
Time (secs)
1.0
0.1 0.08 0.01
P341 high set element Feeder start contact 1.0 10.0 Current (kA)
P341 IDMT element IDMT margin Feeder IDMT element
Time to block 100.0
Figure 18b: Simple busbar blocking scheme (single incomer) The P140/P341 relays have start outputs available from each stage of each of the overcurrent and earth fault elements, including sensitive earth fault. These start signals may then be routed to output contacts by programming accordingly. Each stage is also capable of being blocked by being programmed to the relevant optoisolated input. Note that the P341 relays provide a 50V field supply for powering the opto-inputs. Hence, in the unlikely event of the failure of this supply, blocking of that relay would not be possible. For this reason, the field supply is supervised and if a failure is detected, it is possible, via the relays programmable scheme logic, to provide an output alarm contact. This contact can then be used to signal an alarm within the
P341/EN AP/D22 Page 79/116
substation. Alternatively, the relays scheme logic could be arranged to block any of the overcurrent/earth fault stages that would operate non-discriminatively due to the blocking signal failure. For further guidance on the use of blocked overcurrent schemes refer to AREVA T&D. 4. 4.1 APPLICATION OF NON-PROTECTION FUNCTIONS Voltage transformer supervision (VTS) The voltage transformer supervision (VTS) feature is used to detect failure of the ac voltage inputs to the relay. This may be caused by internal voltage transformer faults, overloading, or faults on the interconnecting wiring to relays. This usually results in one or more VT fuses blowing. Following a failure of the ac voltage input there would be a misrepresentation of the phase voltages on the power system, as measured by the relay, which may result in maloperation. The VTS logic in the relay is designed to detect the voltage failure, and automatically adjust the configuration of protection elements whose stability would otherwise be compromised. A time-delayed alarm output is also available. There are three main aspects to consider regarding the failure of the VT supply. These are defined below: 1. 2. 3. Loss of one or two phase voltages. Loss of all three phase voltages under load conditions. Absence of three phase voltages upon line energisation.
The VTS feature within the relay operates on detection of negative phase sequence (nps) voltage without the presence of negative phase sequence current. This gives operation for the loss of one or two phase voltages. Stability of the VTS function is assured during system fault conditions, by the presence of nps current. The use of negative sequence quantities ensures correct operation even where three-limb or V connected VTs are used. Negative Sequence VTS Element: The negative sequence thresholds used by the element are V2 = 10V (or 40V on a 380/480V rated relay), and I2 = 0.05 to 0.5In settable (defaulted to 0.05In). 4.1.1 Loss of all three phase voltages under load conditions Under the loss of all three phase voltages to the relay, there will be no negative phase sequence quantities present to operate the VTS function. However, under such circumstances, a collapse of the three phase voltages will occur. If this is detected without a corresponding change in any of the phase current signals (which would be indicative of a fault), then a VTS condition will be raised. In practice, the relay detects the presence of superimposed current signals, which are changes in the current applied to the relay. These signals are generated by comparison of the present value of the current with that exactly one cycle previously. Under normal load conditions, the value of superimposed current should therefore be zero. Under a fault condition a superimposed current signal will be generated which will prevent operation of the VTS. The phase voltage level detectors are fixed and will drop off at 10V (40V on 380/480V relays) and pickup at 30V (120V on 380/480V relays). The sensitivity of the superimposed current elements is fixed at 0.1In.
P341/EN AP/D22 Page 80/116 4.1.2 Absence of three phase voltages upon line energisation
If a VT were inadvertently left isolated prior to line energisation, incorrect operation of voltage dependent elements could result. The previous VTS element detected three phase VT failure by absence of all 3 phase voltages with no corresponding change in current. On line energisation there will, however, be a change in current (as a result of load or line charging current for example). An alternative method of detecting 3 phase VT failure is therefore required on line energisation. The absence of measured voltage on all 3 phases on line energisation can be as a result of 2 conditions. The first is a 3 phase VT failure and the second is a close up three phase fault. The first condition would require blocking of the voltage dependent function and the second would require tripping. To differentiate between these 2 conditions an overcurrent level detector (VTS I> Inhibit) is used which will prevent a VTS block from being issued if it operates. This element should be set in excess of any non-fault based currents on line energisation (load, line charging current, transformer inrush current if applicable) but below the level of current produced by a close up 3 phase fault. If the line is now closed where a 3 phase VT failure is present the overcurrent detector will not operate and a VTS block will be applied. Closing onto a three phase fault will result in operation of the overcurrent detector and prevent a VTS block being applied. This logic will only be enabled during a live line condition (as indicated by the relays pole dead logic) to prevent operation under dead system conditions i.e. where no voltage will be present and the VTS I> Inhibit overcurrent element will not be picked up.
ALL POLE DEAD IA> IB> IC> VA> VB> VC> V2>
1 &
240ms
& & &
&
tVTS 0
S R
1 1
& &
SLOW BLOCK
I2 ANY POLE DEAD
FAST BLOCK
DIA> DIB> DIC> VTS_MANRESET
S R
VTS_AUTORESET MCB / VTS OPTO VTS_BLOCKING
& &
S R Q
ANY VOLTAGE DEPENDENT FUNCTION
& &
1 &
20ms 0
S R
1
Q
INDICATION
ACCELERATE IND
P2226ENa
Note: The accelerated ind input is not used in the generator protection. Figure 19: VTS logic Required to drive the VTS logic are a number of dedicated level detectors as follows: IA>, IB>, IC>, these level detectors operate in less than 20ms and their settings should be greater than load current. This setting is specified as the VTS current threshold. These level detectors pick-up at 100% of setting and drop-off at 95% of setting.
P341/EN AP/D22 Page 81/116
I2>, this level detector operates on negative sequence current and has a user setting. This level detector picks-up at 100% of setting and drops-off at 95% of setting. DIIA>, DIB>, DIC>, these level detectors operate on superimposed phase currents and have a fixed setting of 10% of nominal. These level detectors are subject to a count strategy such that 0.5 cycle of operate decisions must have occured before operation. VA>, VB>, VC>, these level detectors operate on phase voltages and have a fixed setting, Pick-up level = 30V (Vn = 100/120V), 120V (Vn = 380/480V), Drop Off level = 10V (Vn = 100/120V), 40V (Vn = 380/480V). V2>, this level detector operates on negative sequence voltage, it has a fixed setting of 10V/40V depending on VT rating (100/120 or 380/480) with pick-up at 100% of setting and drop-off at 95% of setting.
4.1.2.1 Inputs Signal Name IA>, IB>, IC> I2> DIA, DIB, DIC VA>, VB>, VC> V2> All Pole Dead VTS_Manreset VTS_Autoreset MCB/VTS Opto Description Phase current levels (Fourier Magnitudes) I2 level (Fourier Magnitude) Phase current samples (current and one cycle previous) Phase voltage signals (Fourier Magnitudes) Negative Sequence voltage (Fourier Magnitude) Breaker is open for all phases (driven from auxiliary contact or pole dead logic) A VTS reset performed via front panel or remotely A setting to allow the VTS to automatically reset after this delay To remotely initiate the VTS blocking via an opto Outputs from any function that utilises the system voltage, if any of these elements operate before a VTS is detected the VTS is blocked from operation. The outputs include starts and trips Signal from a fast tripping voltage dependent function used to accelerate indications when the indicate only option is selected Breaker is open on one or more than one phases (driven from auxiliary contact or pole dead logic) The VTS timer setting for latched operation
Any Voltage Dependent Function
Accelerate Ind
Any Pole Dead tVTS
P341/EN AP/D22 Page 82/116 4.1.2.2 Outputs Signal Name VTS Fast Block VTS Slow block VTS Indication 4.1.3 Menu settings Description
Used to block voltage dependent functions Used to block the Any Pole dead signal Signal used to indicate a VTS operation
The VTS settings are found in the SUPERVISION column of the relay menu. The relevant settings are detailed below:
Menu Text SUPERVISION VTS Status VTS Reset Mode VTS Time Delay VTS I> Inhibit VTS I2> Inhibit Blocking Manual 5s 10In 0.05In 1s 0.08In 0.05In Blocking, Indication Manual, Auto 10 s 32In 0.5In 0.1 s 0.01In 0.01In Default Setting Setting Range Min. Max. Step Size
The relay may respond as follows, on operation of any VTS element: VTS set to provide alarm indication only (DDB 292 VT Fail Alarm); Optional blocking of voltage dependent protection elements (DDB 736 VTS Fast Block, DDB 737 VTS Slow Block); Optional conversion of directional overcurrent, earth fault and SEF elements to non-directional protection (available when VTS set to Blocking mode only). These settings are found in the Function Links cell of the relevant protection element columns in the menu.
Time delayed protection elements (Directional SEF, Directional Earth Fault, Power, Sensitive Power) are blocked after the VTS Time Delay on operation of the VTS Slow Block. Fast operating protection elements (Neutral Voltage Displacement, Directional Overcurrent, Undervoltage) are blocked on operation of the VTS Fast Block. Other protections can be selectively blocked by customising the PSL, integrating DDB 736 VTS Fast Block and DDB 737 VTS Slow Block with the protection function logic. The VTS I> Inhibit or VTS I2> Inhibit elements are used to override a VTS block in the event of a fault occurring on the system which could trigger the VTS logic. Once the VTS block has been established, however, it would be undesirable for subsequent system faults to override the block. The VTS block will therefore be latched after a user settable time delay VTS Time Delay. Once the signal has latched then two methods of resetting are available. The first is manually via the front panel interface (or remote communications) provided the VTS condition has been removed and secondly, when in Auto mode, by the restoration of the 3 phase voltages above the phase level detector settings mentioned previously. A VTS indication will be given after the VTS Time Delay has expired. In the case where the VTS is set to indicate only the relay may potentially maloperate, depending on which protection elements are enabled. In this case the VTS indication will be given prior to the VTS time delay expiring if a trip signal is given.
P341/EN AP/D22 Page 83/116
Where a miniature circuit breaker (MCB) is used to protect the voltage transformer ac output circuits, it is common to use MCB auxiliary contacts to indicate a three phase output disconnection. As previously described, it is possible for the VTS logic to operate correctly without this input. However, this facility has been provided for compatibility with various utilities current practices. Energising an opto-isolated input assigned to MCB Open on the relay will therefore provide the necessary block. Where directional overcurrent elements are converted to non-directional protection on VTS operation, it must be ensured that the current pick-up setting of these elements is higher than full load current. 4.2 Current transformer supervision The current transformer supervision feature is used to detect failure of one or more of the ac phase current inputs to the relay. Failure of a phase CT or an open circuit of the interconnecting wiring can result in incorrect operation of any current operated element. Additionally, interruption in the ac current circuits risks dangerous CT secondary voltages being generated. 4.2.1 The CT supervision feature The CT supervision feature operates on detection of derived residual current, in the absence of corresponding derived residual voltage that would normally accompany it. The CT supervision can be set to operate from the residual voltage measured at the VNEUTRAL input or the residual voltage derived from the 3 phase-neutral voltage inputs as selected by the CTS Vn Input setting. The voltage transformer connection used must be able to refer residual voltages from the primary to the secondary side. Thus, this element should only be enabled where the VT is of five limb construction, or comprises three single phase units, and has the primary star point earthed. A derived residual voltage or a measured residual voltage is available. Operation of the element will produce a time-delayed alarm visible on the LCD and event record (plus DDB 293: CT Fail Alarm), with an instantaneous block (DDB 738: CTS Block) for inhibition of protection elements. Protection elements operating from derived quantities are always blocked on operation of the CT supervision element; other protections can be selectively blocked by customising the PSL, integrating DDB 738: CTS Block with the protection function logic.
I N> & V N<

Time delay
CTS block
CTS alarm
P2130ENa
Figure 20: CT supervision function block diagram The following table shows the relay menu for the CT Supervision element, including the available setting ranges and factory defaults:
P341/EN AP/D22 Page 84/116

Menu Text Default Setting Setting Range Min. Max. Sub Heading Disabled 1 0 5 Enabled, Disabled 0.5/2V For 110/440V respectively 0.08 x In 0s 22/88V For 110/440V respectively 4 x In 10s

Step Size
GROUP 1 SUPERVISION CT Supervision CTS Status CTS VN< Inhibit CTS IN> Set CTS Time Delay N/A 0.5/2V For 110/440V respectively 0.01 x In 1s
4.2.2
Setting the CT supervision element The residual voltage setting, "CTS Vn< Inhibit" and the residual current setting, "CTS In> set", should be set to avoid unwanted operation during healthy system conditions. For example "CTS Vn< Inhibit" should be set to 120% of the maximum steady state residual voltage. The "CTS In> set" will typically be set below minimum load current. The time-delayed alarm, "CTS Time Delay", is generally set to 5 seconds. Where the magnitude of residual voltage during an earth fault is unpredictable, the element can be disabled to prevent protection elements being blocked during fault conditions.
4.3
Circuit breaker state monitoring An operator at a remote location requires a reliable indication of the state of the switchgear. Without an indication that each circuit breaker is either open or closed, the operator has insufficient information to decide on switching operations. The relay incorporates circuit breaker state monitoring, giving an indication of the position of the circuit breaker, or, if the state is unknown, an alarm is raised.
4.3.1
Circuit breaker state monitoring features MiCOM relays can be set to monitor normally open (52a) and normally closed (52b) auxiliary contacts of the circuit breaker. Under healthy conditions, these contacts will be in opposite states. Should both sets of contacts be open, this would indicate one of the following conditions: Auxiliary contacts/wiring defective. Circuit Breaker (CB) is defective. CB is in isolated position.
Should both sets of contacts be closed, only one of the following two conditions would apply: Auxiliary contacts/wiring defective. Circuit Breaker (CB) is defective.
If any of the above conditions exist, an alarm will be issued after a 5s time delay. A normally open/normally closed output contact can be assigned to this function via the programmable scheme logic (PSL). The time delay is set to avoid unwanted operation during normal switching duties.
P341/EN AP/D22 Page 85/116
In the CB CONTROL column of the relay menu there is a setting called CB Status Input. This cell can be set at one of the following four options: None 52A 52B Both 52A and 52B Where None is selected no CB status will be available. This will directly affect any function within the relay that requires this signal, for example CB control, autoreclose, etc. Where only 52A is used on its own then the relay will assume a 52B signal from the absence of the 52A signal. Circuit breaker status information will be available in this case but no discrepancy alarm will be available. The above is also true where only a 52B is used. If both 52A and 52B are used then status information will be available and in addition a discrepancy alarm will be possible, according to the following table. 52A and 52B inputs are assigned to relay opto-isolated inputs via the PSL. The CB state monitoring logic is shown in Figure 21. Auxiliary Contact Position 52A Open Closed Closed 52B Closed Open Closed Breaker open Breaker closed CB failure Circuit breaker healthy Circuit breaker healthy Alarm raised if the condition persists for greater than 5s Alarm raised if the condition persists for greater than 5s CB State Detected Action
Open
Open
State unknown
P341/EN AP/D22 Page 86/116

SETTING [0711] : CB Status Input G118-0 : None G118-1 : 52A G118-2 : 52B G118-3 : Both 52A & 52B
AND
DDB #381 : CB Aux 3ph(52-A)
AND
OR
DDB #755 : CB Closed 3ph
AND
OR
XOR
DATA [000C] : Plant Status Bit 0 : CB1 Open Bit 1 : CB1 Closed
AND
OR
AND
OR
DDB #754 : CB Open 3ph
AND
AND XOR
5s 0s
DDB #302 : CB Status Alarm
DDB #382 : CB Aux 3ph(52-B)
P2227ENa
Figure 21: CB state monitoring 4.4 Pole dead logic The Pole Dead Logic can be used to give an indication if one or more phases of the line are dead. It can also be used to selectively block operation of both the under frequency, under voltage and power elements. The under voltage protection will be blocked by a pole dead condition provided the Pole Dead Inhibit setting is enabled. Any of the four under frequency elements can be blocked by setting the relevant F< function links. The Power and Senistive Power protection will be blocked by a pole dead condition provided the Pole Dead Inhibit setting is enabled. A pole dead condition can be determined by either monitoring the status of the circuit breaker auxiliary contacts or by measuring the line currents and voltages. The status of the circuit breaker is provided by the CB State Monitoring logic. If a CB Open signal (DDB 794) is given the relay will automatically initiate a pole dead condition regardless of the current and voltage measurement. Similarly if both the line current and voltage fall below a pre-set threshold the relay will also initiate a pole dead condition. This is necessary so that a pole dead indication is still given even when an upstream breaker is opened. The under voltage (V<) and under current (I<) thresholds have the following, fixed, pickup and drop-off levels: Settings V< Pick-up and drop off I< Pick-up and drop off Range 10V and 30V (100/120V) 40V and 120V (380/480V) 0.05 In and 0.055In Step Size Fixed Fixed
P341/EN AP/D22 Page 87/116
If one or more poles are dead the relay will indicate which phase is dead and will also assert the ANY POLE DEAD DDB signal (DDB 758). If all phases were dead the ANY POLE DEAD signal would be accompanied by the ALL POLE DEAD DDB signal (DDB 757). In the event that the VT fails a signal is taken from the VTS logic (DDB 737 Slow Block) to block the pole dead indications that would be generated by the under voltage and undercurrent thresholds. However, the VTS logic will not block the pole dead indications if they are initiated by a CB Open signal (DDB 754). The pole dead logic diagram is shown below:
20ms t 0 20ms t 0 20ms t 0
Ia< Va<
&
Pole A Dead DDB 759
Ib< Vb<
&
Pole B Dead DDB 760
Ic< Vc< From VTS Logic VTS Slow Block DDB 737 From CB Status Monitoring Logic CB Open DDB 754
&
Pole C Dead DDB 761
Any Pole Dead DDB 758
&
All Poles Dead DDB 757
P2186ena
Figure 22: Pole dead logic 4.5 Circuit breaker condition monitoring Periodic maintenance of circuit breakers is necessary to ensure that the trip circuit and mechanism operate correctly, and also that the interrupting capability has not been compromised due to previous fault interruptions. Generally, such maintenance is based on a fixed time interval, or a fixed number of fault current interruptions. These methods of monitoring circuit breaker condition give a rough guide only and can lead to excessive maintenance. The P340 relays record various statistics related to each circuit breaker trip operation, allowing a more accurate assessment of the circuit breaker condition to be determined. These monitoring features are discussed in the following section.
P341/EN AP/D22 Page 88/116 4.5.1 Circuit breaker condition monitoring features
For each circuit breaker trip operation the relay records statistics as shown in the following table taken from the relay menu. The menu cells shown are counter values only. The Min/Max values in this case show the range of the counter values. These cells can not be set: Menu Text CB CONDITION CB operations {3 pole tripping} Total IA Broken Total IB Broken Total IC Broken CB operate time Reset CB Data 0 0 0 0 0 No 0 0 0 0 0 Yes, No 10000 25000In^ 25000In^ 25000In^ 0.5s 1 1 1 1In^ 0.001 Default Setting Setting Range Min Max Step Size
The above counters may be reset to zero, for example, following a maintenance inspection and overhaul. The following table, detailing the options available for the CB condition monitoring, is taken from the relay menu. It includes the set up of the current broken facility and those features which can be set to raise an alarm or CB lockout. Menu Text CB MONITOR SETUP Broken I^ I^ Maintenance I^ Maintenance I^ Lockout I^ Lockout No CB Ops Maint No CB Ops Maint No CB Ops Lock No CB Ops Lock CB Time Maint CB Time Maint CB Time Lockout CB Time Lockout Fault Freq Lock Fault Freq Count 2 Alarm disabled 1000In^ Alarm disabled 2000In^ Alarm disabled 10 Alarm disabled 20 Alarm disabled 0.1s Alarm disabled 0.2s Alarm disabled 10 1 1In^ 1In^ 1 1 0.005s 0.005s 1 2 25000In^ 25000In^ 10000 10000 0.5s 0.5s 9999 0.1 1In^ 1In^ 1 1 0.001s 0.001s 1 Alarm disabled, Alarm enabled Alarm disabled, Alarm enabled Alarm disabled, Alarm enabled Alarm disabled, Alarm enabled Alarm disabled, Alarm enabled Alarm disabled, Alarm enabled Alarm disabled, Alarm enabled Default Setting Setting Range Min. Max. Step Size
Application Notes MiCOM P341 Menu Text CB MONITOR SETUP Fault Freq Time 3600s 0 Default Setting Setting Range Min.
Max.
9999s
1s
The circuit breaker condition monitoring counters will be updated every time the relay issues a trip command. In cases where the breaker is tripped by an external protection device it is also possible to update the CB condition monitoring. This is achieved by allocating one of the relays opto-isolated inputs (via the programmable scheme logic) to accept a trigger from an external device. The signal that is mapped to the opto is called Ext Trip 3Ph, DDB 380. Note that when in Commissioning test mode the CB condition monitoring counters will not be updated. 4.5.2 Setting guidelines
4.5.2.1 Setting the S I^ thresholds Where overhead lines are prone to frequent faults and are protected by oil circuit breakers (OCBs), oil changes account for a large proportion of the life cycle cost of the switchgear. Generally, oil changes are performed at a fixed interval of circuit breaker fault operations. However, this may result in premature maintenance where fault currents tend to be low, and hence oil degradation is slower than expected. The S I^ counter monitors the cumulative severity of the duty placed on the interrupter allowing a more accurate assessment of the circuit breaker condition to be made. For OCBs, the dielectric withstand of the oil generally decreases as a function of S I2t. This is where I is the fault current broken, and t is the arcing time within the interrupter tank (not the interrupting time). As the arcing time cannot be determined accurately, the relay would normally be set to monitor the sum of the broken current squared, by setting Broken I^ = 2. For other types of circuit breaker, especially those operating on higher voltage systems, practical evidence suggests that the value of Broken I^ = 2 may be inappropriate. In such applications Broken I^ may be set lower, typically 1.4 or 1.5. An alarm in this instance may be indicative of the need for gas/vacuum interrupter HV pressure testing, for example. The setting range for Broken I^ is variable between 1.0 and 2.0 in 0.1 steps. It is imperative that any maintenance programme must be fully compliant with the switchgear manufacturers instructions. 4.5.2.2 Setting the number of operations thresholds Every operation of a circuit breaker results in some degree of wear for its components. Thus, routine maintenance, such as oiling of mechanisms, may be based upon the number of operations. Suitable setting of the maintenance threshold will allow an alarm to be raised, indicating when preventative maintenance is due. Should maintenance not be carried out, the relay can be set to lockout the autoreclose function on reaching a second operations threshold. This prevents further reclosure when the circuit breaker has not been maintained to the standard demanded by the switchgear manufacturers maintenance instructions.
P341/EN AP/D22 Page 90/116
Certain circuit breakers, such as oil circuit breakers (OCBs) can only perform a certain number of fault interruptions before requiring maintenance attention. This is because each fault interruption causes carbonising of the oil, degrading its dielectric properties. The maintenance alarm threshold "No CB Ops Maint" may be set to indicate the requirement for oil sampling for dielectric testing, or for more comprehensive maintenance. Again, the lockout threshold "No CB Ops Lock" may be set to disable autoreclosure when repeated further fault interruptions could not be guaranteed. This minimises the risk of oil fires or explosion. 4.5.2.3 Setting the operating time thresholds Slow CB operation is also indicative of the need for mechanism maintenance. Therefore, alarm and lockout thresholds (CB Time Maint/CB Time Lockout) are provided and are settable in the range of 5 to 500ms. This time is set in relation to the specified interrupting time of the circuit breaker. 4.5.2.4 Setting the excessive fault frequency thresholds A circuit breaker may be rated to break fault current a set number of times before maintenance is required. However, successive circuit breaker operations in a short period of time may result in the need for increased maintenance. For this reason it is possible to set a frequent operations counter on the relay which allows the number of operations "Fault Freq Count" over a set time period "Fault Freq Time" to be monitored. A separate alarm and lockout threshold can be set. 4.6 Circuit breaker control The relay includes the following options for control of a single circuit breaker: Local tripping and closing, via the relay menu. Local tripping and closing, via relay opto-isolated inputs. Remote tripping and closing, using the relay communications.
It is recommended that separate relay output contacts are allocated for remote circuit breaker control and protection tripping. This enables the control outputs to be selected via a local/remote selector switch as shown in Figure 23. Where this feature is not required the same output contact(s) can be used for both protection and remote tripping.

+ ve Protection trip Remote control trip Remote control close Trip 0 Close
P341/EN AP/D22 Page 91/116
Local Remote
Trip
Close ve
P0123ENa
Figure 23: Remote control of circuit breaker The following table is taken from the relay menu and shows the available settings and commands associated with circuit breaker control. Depending on the relay model some of the cells may not be visible:
Menu Text CB CONTROL CB control by Close Pulse Time Trip Pulse Time Man Close Delay CB Healthy Time Lockout Reset Reset Lockout By Man Close RstDly CB Status Input Disabled 0.5 s 0.5 s 10 s 5s No CB Close 5s None 0.01 s Disabled, Local, Remote, Local+Remote, Opto, Opto+Local, Opto+Remote, Opto+Rem+Local 0.01 s 0.01 s 0.01 s 0.01 s 10 s 5s 600 s 9999 s No, Yes User Interface, CB Close 600 s 0.01 s None, 52A, 52B, Both 52A and 52B 0.01 s 0.01 s 0.01 s 0.01 s Default Setting Setting Range Min. Max. Step Size
A manual trip will be permitted provided that the circuit breaker is initially closed. Likewise, a close command can only be issued if the CB is initially open. To confirm these states it will be necessary to use the breaker 52A and/or 52B contacts (the different selection options are given from the CB Status Input cell above). If no CB auxiliary contacts are available then this cell should be set to None. Under these circumstances no CB control (manual or auto) will be possible.
P341/EN AP/D22 Page 92/116
Once a CB Close command is initiated the output contact can be set to operate following a user defined time delay (Man Close Delay). This would give personnel time to move away from the circuit breaker following the close command. This time delay will apply to all manual CB Close commands. The length of the trip or close control pulse can be set via the Trip Pulse Time and Close Pulse Time settings respectively. These should be set long enough to ensure the breaker has completed its open or close cycle before the pulse has elapsed. Note that the manual close commands are found in the SYSTEM DATA column of the menu. If an attempt to close the breaker is being made, and a protection trip signal is generated, the protection trip command overrides the close command. There is also a CB Healthy check if required. This facility accepts an input to one of the relays opto-isolators to indicate that the breaker is capable of closing (circuit breaker energy for example). A user settable time delay is included "CB Healthy Time" for manual closure with this check. If the CB does not indicate a healthy condition in this time period following a close command then the relay will lockout and alarm. If the CB fails to respond to the control command (indicated by no change in the state of CB Status inputs) a "CB Failed to Trip" or "CB Failed to Close" alarm will be generated after the relevant trip or close pulses have expired. These alarms can be viewed on the relay LCD display, remotely via the relay communications, or can be assigned to operate output contacts for annunciation using the relays programmable scheme logic (PSL). The "Lockout Reset" and "Reset Lockout by" setting cells in the menu are applicable to CB Lockouts associated with manual circuit breaker closure, CB Condition monitoring (Number of circuit breaker operations, for example). The lockout alarms can be reset using the Lockout Reset command or the by pressing the Clear key after reading the alarm or by closing the CB if the Reset Lockout By setting is set to CB Close or via an opto input using DDB 175, Reset Lockout. If lockout is reset by closing the CB then there is a time delay after closing the CB to resetting of lockout, the Man Close RstDly. 4.7 Trip circuit supervision (TCS) The trip circuit, in most protective schemes, extends beyond the relay enclosure and passes through components such as fuses, links, relay contacts, auxiliary switches and other terminal boards. This complex arrangement, coupled with the importance of the trip circuit, has led to dedicated schemes for its supervision. Several trip circuit supervision schemes with various features can be produced with the P340 range. Although there are no dedicated settings for TCS, in the P340, the following schemes can be produced using the programmable scheme logic (PSL). A user alarm is used in the PSL to issue an alarm message on the relay front display. If necessary, the user alarm can be re-named using the menu text editor to indicate that there is a fault with the trip circuit.
Application Notes MiCOM P341 4.7.1 TCS scheme 1
P341/EN AP/D22 Page 93/116
4.7.1.1 Scheme description
Optional
P2228ENa
Figure 24: TCS scheme 1 This scheme provides supervision of the trip coil with the breaker open or closed, however, pre-closing supervision is not provided. This scheme is also incompatible with latched trip contacts, as a latched contact will short out the opto for greater than the recommended DDO timer setting of 400ms. If breaker status monitoring is required a further 1 or 2 opto inputs must be used. Note, a 52a CB auxiliary contact follows the CB position and a 52b contact is the opposite. When the breaker is closed, supervision current passes through the opto input, blocking diode and trip coil. When the breaker is open current still flows through the opto input and into the trip coil via the 52b auxiliary contact. Hence, no supervision of the trip path is provided whilst the breaker is open. Any fault in the trip path will only be detected on CB closing, after a 400ms delay. Resistor R1 is an optional resistor that can be fitted to prevent mal-operation of the circuit breaker if the opto input is inadvertently shorted, by limiting the current to <60mA. The resistor should not be fitted for auxiliary voltage ranges of 30/34 volts or less, as satisfactory operation can no longer be guaranteed. The table below shows the appropriate resistor value and voltage setting (OPTO CONFIG menu) for this scheme. This TCS scheme will function correctly even without resistor R1, since the opto input automatically limits the supervision current to less that 10mA. However, if the opto is accidentally shorted the circuit breaker may trip. Auxiliary Voltage (Vx) 24/27 30/34 48/54 Resistor R1 (ohms) 1.2k Opto Voltage Setting with R1 Fitted 24/27
P341/EN AP/D22 Page 94/116 110/250 220/250 Note: 2.5k 5.0k
Application Notes MiCOM P341 48/54 110/125
When R1 is not fitted the opto voltage setting must be set equal to supply voltage of the supervision circuit.
Application Notes MiCOM P341 4.7.2 Scheme 1 PSL
P341/EN AP/D22 Page 95/116
Figure 25 shows the scheme logic diagram for the TCS scheme 1. Any of the available opto inputs can be used to indicate whether or not the trip circuit is healthy. The delay on drop off timer operates as soon as the opto is energised, but will take 400ms to drop off / reset in the event of a trip circuit failure. The 400ms delay prevents a false alarm due to voltage dips caused by faults in other circuits or during normal tripping operation when the opto input is shorted by a self-reset trip contact. When the timer is operated the NC (normally closed) output relay opens and the LED and user alarms are reset. The 50ms delay on pick-up timer prevents false LED and user alarm indications during the relay power up time, following an auxiliary supply interruption.
0 0
Opto Input
Drop-Off
400
Straight
NC Output Relay
&
50
Latching
LED
Pick-up
User Alarm
P2229ENa
Figure 25: PSL for TCS schemes 1 and 3 4.7.3 TCS scheme 2
Optional
Optional
P2230ENa
Figure 26: TCS scheme 2 Much like scheme 1, this scheme provides supervision of the trip coil with the breaker open or closed and also does not provide pre-closing supervision. However, using two opto inputs allows the relay to correctly monitor the circuit breaker status since they are connected in series with the CB auxiliary contacts. This is achieved by assigning Opto A to the 52a contact and Opto B to the 52b contact. Provided the Circuit Breaker Status is set to 52a and 52b (CB CONTROL column) and optos A and B are connected to CB Aux 3ph (52a) (DDB 381) and CB Aux 3ph (52b) (DDB 382) the relay will correctly monitor the status of the breaker. This scheme is also fully compatible with latched contacts as the supervision current will be maintained through the 52b contact when the trip contact is closed.
P341/EN AP/D22 Page 96/116
When the breaker is closed, supervision current passes through opto input A and the trip coil. When the breaker is open current flows through opto input B and the trip coil. As with scheme 1, no supervision of the trip path is provided whilst the breaker is open. Any fault in the trip path will only be detected on CB closing, after a 400ms delay. As with scheme 1, optional resistors R1 and R2 can be added to prevent tripping of the CB if either opto is shorted. The resistor values of R1 and R2 are equal and can be set the same as R1 in scheme 1. 4.7.4 Scheme 2 PSL The PSL for this scheme (Figure 27) is practically the same as that of scheme 1. The main difference being that both opto inputs must be off before a trip circuit fail alarm is given.
DDB381 CB Aux 3ph (52a) Opto Input A 1 Opto Input B DDB382 CB Aux 3ph (52b) 0 Drop-Off 400 0 Straight 0
Output Relay
Latching & 0 Pick-Up 50
LED
User Alarm
P2187ENa
Figure 27: PSL for TCS scheme 2 4.7.5 TCS scheme 3
P2231ENa
Figure 28: TCS scheme 2
P341/EN AP/D22 Page 97/116
Scheme 3 is designed to provide supervision of the trip coil with the breaker open or closed, but unlike schemes 1 and 2, it also provides pre-closing supervision. Since only one opto input is used, this scheme is not compatible with latched trip contacts. If circuit breaker status monitoring is required a further 1 or 2 opto inputs must be used. When the breaker is closed, supervision current passes through the opto input, resistor R1 and the trip coil. When the breaker is open current flows through the opto input, resistors R1 and R2 (in parallel), resistor R3 and the trip coil. Unlike schemes 1 and 2, supervision current is maintained through the trip path with the breaker in either state, thus giving pre-closing supervision. As with schemes 1 and 2, resistors R1 and R2 are used to prevent false tripping, if the opto-input is accidentally shorted. However, unlike the other two schemes, this scheme is dependent upon the position and value of these resistors. Removing them would result in incomplete trip circuit monitoring. The table below shows the resistor values and voltage settings required for satisfactory operation. Auxiliary Voltage (Vx) 24/27 30/34 48/54 110/250 220/250 Note: 4.7.6 Scheme 3 PSL The PSL for scheme 3 is identical to that of scheme 1 (see Figure 25). 4.8 Event & fault records The relay records and time tags up to 250 events and stores them in non-volatile (battery backed up) memory. This enables the system operator to establish the sequence of events that occurred within the relay following a particular power system condition, switching sequence etc. When the available space is exhausted, the oldest event is automatically overwritten by the new one. The real time clock within the relay provides the time tag to each event, to a resolution of 1ms. The event records are available for viewing either via the frontplate LCD or remotely, via the communications ports. Local viewing on the LCD is achieved in the menu column entitled "VIEW RECORDS". This column allows viewing of event, fault and maintenance records and is shown the following table: Resistor R1 & R2 (ohms) 1.2k 2.5k 5.0k Resistor R3 (ohms) 0.6k 1.2k 2.5k Opto Voltage Setting 24/27 48/54 110/125
Scheme 3 is not compatible with auxiliary supply voltages of 30/34 volts and below.
P341/EN AP/D22 Page 98/116 VIEW RECORDS LCD Reference Select Event Time & Date Event Text Event Value Select Fault Description
Setting range from 0 to 249. This selects the required event record from the possible 250 that may be stored. A value of 0 corresponds to the latest event and so on. Time & Date Stamp for the event given by the internal Real Time Clock Up to 32 Character description of the Event refer to following sections) Up to 32 Bit Binary Flag or integer representative of the Event (refer to following sections) Setting range from 0 to 4. This selects the required fault record from the possible 5 that may be stored. A value of 0 corresponds to the latest fault and so on. The following cells show all the fault flags, protection starts, protection trips, fault location, measurements etc. associated with the fault, i.e. the complete fault record.
Select Report Report Text Report Type Reset Indication
Setting range from 0 to 4. This selects the required maintenance report from the possible 5 that may be stored. A value of 0 corresponds to the latest report and so on. Up to 32 Character description of the occurrence (refer to following sections) These cells are numbers representative of the occurrence. They form a specific error code which should be quoted in any related correspondence to AREVA T&D. Either Yes or No. This serves to reset the trip LED indications provided that the relevant protection element has reset.
For extraction from a remote source via communications, refer to the SCADA Communications section, where the procedure is fully explained. Note that a full list of all the event types and the meaning of their values is given in Appendix A. 4.8.1 Types of event An event may be a change of state of a control input or output relay, an alarm condition, setting change etc. The following sections show the various items that constitute an event: 4.8.1.1 Change of state of opto-isolated inputs If one or more of the opto (logic) inputs has changed state since the last time that the protection algorithm ran, the new status is logged as an event. When this event is selected to be viewed on the LCD, three applicable cells will become visible as shown below:
Application Notes MiCOM P341 Time & date of event LOGIC INPUTS Event Value 0101010101010101
P341/EN AP/D22 Page 99/116
The Event Value is an 8 or 16 bit word showing the status of the opto inputs, where the least significant bit (extreme right) corresponds to opto input 1 etc. The same information is present if the event is extracted and viewed via PC. 4.8.1.2 Change of state of one or more output relay contacts If one or more of the output relay contacts has changed state since the last time that the protection algorithm ran, then the new status is logged as an event. When this event is selected to be viewed on the LCD, three applicable cells will become visible as shown below: Time & date of event OUTPUT CONTACTS Event Value 010101010101010101010 The Event Value is a 7, 14 or 21 bit word showing the status of the output contacts, where the least significant bit (extreme right) corresponds to output contact 1 etc. The same information is present if the event is extracted and viewed via PC. 4.8.1.3 Relay alarm conditions Any alarm conditions generated by the relays will also be logged as individual events. The following table shows examples of some of the alarm conditions and how they appear in the event list: Alarm Condition
Battery Fail Field Voltage Fail Setting Group Via Opto Invalid Protection Disabled Frequency Out of Range VTS Alarm CB Trip Fail Protection User Alarm (Self Reset) User Alarm (Manual Reset)
Resulting Event Event Text

Battery Fail ON/OFF Field V Fail ON/OFF Setting Grp Invalid ON/OFF Protn Disabled ON/OFF Freq out of Range ON/OFF VT Fail Alarm ON/OFF CB Fail ON/OFF User Alarm 1, 2 ON/OFF User Alarm 3 ON/OFF
Event Value
Bit position 0 in 32 bit field Bit position 1 in 32 bit field Bit position 2 in 32 bit field Bit position 3 in 32 bit field Bit position 13 in 32 bit field Bit position 4 in 32 bit field Bit position 6 in 32 bit field Bit position 29, 30 in 32 bit field Bit position 31 in 32 bit field
P341/EN AP/D22 Page 100/116
The previous table shows the abbreviated description that is given to the various alarm conditions and also a corresponding value which displays alarms as bit positions in a 32 bit field. The bit will be set to 1 if the alarm is ON and 0 if it is OFF. This value is appended to each alarm event in a similar way as for the input and output events previously described. It is used by the event extraction software, such as MiCOM S1, to identify the alarm and is therefore invisible if the event is viewed on the LCD. Either ON or OFF is shown after the description to signify whether the particular condition has become operated or has reset. 4.8.1.4 Protection element starts and trips Any operation of protection elements, (either a start or a trip condition), will be logged as an event record, consisting of a text string indicating the operated element and an event value. Again, this value is intended for use by the event extraction software, such as MiCOM S1, rather than for the user, and is therefore invisible when the event is viewed on the LCD. 4.8.1.5 General events A number of events come under the heading of General Events - an example is shown below: Nature of Event Level 1 password modified, either from user interface, front or rear port Displayed Text in Event Record PW1 edited UI, F or R Displayed Value 6, 11, 16 respectively
A complete list of the General Events is given in Appendix A. 4.8.1.6 Fault records Each time a fault record is generated, an event is also created. The event simply states that a fault record was generated, with a corresponding time stamp. Note that viewing of the actual fault record is carried out in the "Select Fault" cell further down the "VIEW RECORDS" column, which is selectable from up to 5 records. These records consist of fault flags, fault location, fault measurements etc. Also note that the time stamp given in the fault record itself will be more accurate than the corresponding stamp given in the event record as the event is logged some time after the actual fault record is generated. The fault record is triggered from the Fault REC TRIG signal assigned in the default programmable scheme logic to relay 3, protection trip. Note, the fault measurements in the fault record are given at the time of the protection start. Also, the fault recorder does not stop recording until any start or relay 3 (protection trip) resets in order to record all the protection flags during the fault. It is recommended that the triggering contact (relay 3 for example) be self reset and not latching. If a latching contact was chosen the fault record would not be generated until the contact had fully reset. 4.8.1.7 Maintenance reports Internal failures detected by the self monitoring circuitry, such as watchdog failure, field voltage failure etc. are logged into a maintenance report. The Maintenance Report holds up to 5 such events and is accessed from the "Select Report" cell at the bottom of the "VIEW RECORDS" column. Each entry consists of a self explanatory text string and a Type and Data cell, which are explained in the menu extract at the beginning of this section and in further detail in Appendix A.
P341/EN AP/D22 Page 101/116
Each time a Maintenance Report is generated, an event is also created. The event simply states that a report was generated, with a corresponding time stamp. 4.8.1.8 Setting changes Changes to any setting within the relay are logged as an event. Two examples are shown in the following table: Type of setting change Control/Support Setting Group 1 Change Note: Displayed Text in Event Record C & S Changed Group 1 Changed Displayed Value 22 24
4.8.2
Control/Support settings are communications, measurement, CT/VT ratio settings etc, which are not duplicated within the four setting groups. When any of these settings are changed, the event record is created simultaneously. However, changes to protection or disturbance recorder settings will only generate an event once the settings have been confirmed at the setting trap. Resetting of event/fault records If it is required to delete either the event, fault or maintenance reports, this may be done from within the "RECORD CONTROL" column.
4.8.3
Viewing event records via MiCOM S1 support software When the event records are extracted and viewed on a PC they look slightly different than when viewed on the LCD. The following shows an example of how various events appear when displayed using MiCOM S1: - Monday 03 November 1998 15:32:49 GMT I>1 Start ON 2147483881 ALSTOM : MiCOM Model Number: P141 Address: 001 Column: 00 Row: 23 Event Type: Protection operation - Monday 03 November 1998 15:32:52 GMT Fault Recorded 0 ALSTOM : MiCOM Model Number: P141 Address: 001 Column: 01 Row: 00 Event Type: Fault record - Monday 03 November 1998 15:33:11 GMT Logic Inputs 00000000 ALSTOM : MiCOM Model Number: P141 Address: 001 Column: 00 Row: 20 Event Type: Logic input changed state
P341/EN AP/D22 Page 102/116
- Monday 03 November 1998 15:34:54 GMT Output Contacts 0010000 ALSTOM : MiCOM Model Number: P141 Address: 001 Column: 00 Row: 21 Event Type: Relay output changed state As can be seen, the first line gives the description and time stamp for the event, whilst the additional information that is displayed below may be collapsed via the +/ symbol. For further information regarding events and their specific meaning, refer to Appendix A. 4.8.4 Event filtering It is possible to disable the reporting of events from any user interface that supports setting changes. The settings which control the various types of events are in the Record Control column. The effect of setting each to disabled is as follows: None of the occurrences that produce an alarm will result in an event being generated. The presence of any alarms is still reported by the alarm LED flashing and the alarm bit being set in the communications status byte. Alarms can still be read using the Read key on the relay front panel. No event will be generated for any change in relay output state. No event will be generated for any change in logic input state. No General Events will be generated. No event will be generated for any fault that produces a fault record. The fault records can still be viewed by operating the Select Fault setting in column 0100. No event will be generated for any occurrence that produces a maintenance record. The maintenance records can still be viewed by operating the Select Maint setting in column 0100. Any operation of protection elements will not be logged as an event.
Alarm Event
Relay O/P Event Opto Input Event General Event Fault Rec Event
Maint Rec Event
Protection Event
Note that some occurrences will result in more than one type of event, e.g. a battery failure will produce an alarm event and a maintenance record event. If the Protection Event setting is Enabled a further set of settings is revealed which allow the event generation by individual DDB signals to be enabled 1 or disabled 0. As can be seen, the first line gives the description and time stamp for the event, whilst the additional information that is displayed below may be collapsed via the +/ symbol.
P341/EN AP/D22 Page 103/116
For further information regarding events and their specific meaning, refer to Appendix A. 4.9 Disturbance recorder The integral disturbance recorder has an area of memory specifically set aside for record storage. The number of records that may be stored by COURIER MODBUS and DNP3.0 relays is dependent upon the selected recording duration but the relays typically have the capability of storing a minimum of 20 records, each of 10.5 second duration. VDEW relays, which have an un-compressed disturbance recorder, can only store 8 records of typically 1.8 seconds at 50 Hz or 8 records of approximately 1.5 seconds duration at 60 Hz. Disturbance records continue to be recorded until the available memory is exhausted, at which time the oldest record(s) are overwritten to make space for the newest one. The recorder stores actual samples which are taken at a rate of 12 samples per cycle. Each disturbance record consists of eight analog data channels and thirty-two digital data channels. Note that the relevant CT and VT ratios for the analog channels are also extracted to enable scaling to primary quantities). Note that if a CT ratio is set less than unity, the relay will choose a scaling factor of zero for the appropriate channel. The "DISTURBANCE RECORDER" menu column is shown in the following table:
Menu Text DISTURB RECORDER Duration Trigger Position Trigger Mode Analog Channel 1 Analog Channel 2 Analog Channel 3 Analog Channel 4 Analog Channel 5 Analog Channel 6 Analog Channel 7 Analog Channel 8 Digital Inputs 1 to 32 1.5 s 33.3% Single VAN VBN VCN VN IA IB IC IN SEF
Relays 1 to 7/14 and Optos 1 to 8/16 No Trigger except Dedicated Trip Relay O/Ps which are set to Trigger L/H
Default Setting
Setting Range Min. 0.1 s 0 Max. 10.5 s 100% Single or Extended
Step Size
0.01 s 0.1%
VAN, VBN, VCN, VCHECKSYNC, IA, IB, IC, IN, IN SEF As above As above As above As above As above As above As above Any of 7 or 14 O/P Contacts or Any of 8 or 16 Opto Inputs or Internal Digital Signals No Trigger, Trigger L/H, Trigger H/L
Inputs 1 to 32 Trigger
Note:
The available analog and digital signals will differ between relay types and models and so the individual courier database in the SCADA Communications section should be referred to when determining default settings etc.
P341/EN AP/D22 Page 104/116
The pre and post fault recording times are set by a combination of the "Duration" and "Trigger Position" cells. "Duration" sets the overall recording time and the "Trigger Position" sets the trigger point as a percentage of the duration. For example, the default settings show that the overall recording time is set to 1.5s with the trigger point being at 33.3% of this, giving 0.5s pre-fault and 1s post fault recording times. If a further trigger occurs whilst a recording is taking place, the recorder will ignore the trigger if the "Trigger Mode" has been set to "Single". However, if this has been set to "Extended", the post trigger timer will be reset to zero, thereby extending the recording time. As can be seen from the menu, each of the analog channels is selectable from the available analog inputs to the relay. The digital channels may be mapped to any of the opto isolated inputs or output contacts, in addition to a number of internal relay digital signals, such as protection starts, LEDs etc. The complete list of these signals may be found by viewing the available settings in the relay menu or via a setting file in MiCOM S1. Any of the digital channels may be selected to trigger the disturbance recorder on either a low to high or a high to low transition, via the "Input Trigger" cell. The default trigger settings are that any dedicated trip output contacts (e.g. relay 3) will trigger the recorder. It is not possible to view the disturbance records locally via the LCD; they must be extracted using suitable software such as MiCOM S1. This process is fully explained in the SCADA Communications section. 4.10 Measurements The relay produces a variety of both directly measured and calculated power system quantities. These measurement values are updated on a per second basis and are summarised below: Phase Voltages and Currents Phase to Phase Voltage and Currents Sequence Voltages and Currents Power and Energy Quantities Rms. Voltages and Currents Peak, Fixed and Rolling Demand Values 4.10.1 Measured voltages and currents The relay produces both phase to ground and phase to phase voltage and current values. The are produced directly from the DFT (Discrete Fourier Transform) used by the relay protection functions and present both magnitude and phase angle measurement. 4.10.2 Sequence voltages and currents Sequence quantities are produced by the relay from the measured Fourier values; these are displayed as magnitude values. 4.10.3 Power and energy quantities Using the measured voltages and currents the relay calculates the apparent, real and reactive power quantities. These are produced on a phase by phase basis together with three-phase values based on the sum of the three individual phase values. The signing of the real and reactive power measurements can be controlled using the measurement mode setting. The four options are defined in the table below:
Application Notes MiCOM P341 Measurement Mode 0 (Default) Parameter Export Power Import Power Lagging Vars Leading VArs Export Power Import Power Lagging Vars Leading VArs Export Power Import Power Lagging Vars Leading VArs Export Power Import Power Lagging Vars Leading VArs
P341/EN AP/D22 Page 105/116 Signing + + + +
+ + + +
Table 2:
Measurement mode
In addition to the measured power quantities the relay calculates the power factor on a phase by phase basis in addition to a three-phase power factor. These power values are also used to increment the total real and reactive energy measurements. Separate energy measurements are maintained for the total exported and imported energy. The energy measurements are incremented up to maximum values of 1000GWhr or 1000GVARhr at which point they will reset to zero, it is also possible to reset these values using the menu or remote interfaces using the Reset Demand cell. 4.10.4 Rms. voltages and currents Rms. Phase voltage and current values are calculated by the relay using the sum of the samples squared over a cycle of sampled data. 4.10.5 Demand values The relay produces fixed, rolling and peak demand values, using the Reset Demand menu cell it is possible to reset these quantities via the User Interface or the remote communications. 4.10.5.1Fixed demand values The fixed demand value is the average value of a quantity over the specified interval; values are produced for each phase current and for three phase real and reactive power. The fixed demand values displayed by the relay are those for the previous interval, the values are updated at the end of the fixed demand period. 4.10.5.2Rolling demand values The rolling demand values are similar to the fixed demand values, the difference being that a sliding window is used. The rolling demand window consists of a number of smaller sub-periods. The resolution of the sliding window is the subperiod length, with the displayed values being updated at the end of each of the subperiods.
P341/EN AP/D22 Page 106/116 4.10.5.3Peak demand values
Peak demand values are produced for each phase current and the real and reactive power quantities. These display the maximum value of the measured quantity since the last reset of the demand values. 4.10.6 Settings The following settings under the heading Measurement setup can be used to configure the relay measurement function. Measurement Setup Default Display Local Values Remote Values Measurement Ref Measurement Mode Fix Dem Period Roll Sub Period Num Sub Periods Distance Unit* Fault Location* Default Value Description Primary Primary VA 0 30 minutes 30 minutes 1 Km Distance Options/Limits Description/Plant Reference/ Frequency/Access Level/3Ph + N Current/3Ph Voltage/Power/Date and time Primary/Secondary Primary/Secondary VA/VB/VC/IA/IB/IC 0 to 3 Step 1 1 to 99 minutes step 1 minute 1 to 99 minutes step 1 minute 1 to 15 step 1 Km/miles Distance/ohms/% of Line
* Note these settings are available for products with integral fault location. 4.10.6.1Default display This setting can be used to select the default display from a range of options, note that it is also possible to view the other default displays whilst at the default level using the and keys. However once the 15 minute timeout elapses the default display will revert to that selected by this setting. 4.10.6.2Local values This setting controls whether measured values via the front panel user interface and the front Courier port are displayed as primary or secondary quantities. 4.10.6.3Remote values This setting controls whether measured values via the rear communication port are displayed as primary or secondary quantities. 4.10.6.4Measurement ref Using this setting the phase reference for all angular measurements by the relay can be selected. 4.10.6.5Measurement mode This setting is used to control the signing of the real and reactive power quantities; the signing convention used is defined in Table 2, section 4.10.3. 4.10.6.6Fixed demand period This setting defines the length of the fixed demand window.
Application Notes MiCOM P341 4.10.6.7Rolling sub-period and number of sub-periods
P341/EN AP/D22 Page 107/116
These two settings are used to set the length of the window used for the calculation of rolling demand quantities and the resolution of the slide for this window. 4.11 Changing setting groups The setting groups can be changed either via opto inputs or via a menu selection. In the Configuration column if 'Setting Group - Select Via Optos' is selected then optos 1 and 2, which are dedicated for setting group selection, can be used to select the setting group as shown in the table below. If 'Setting Group - Select Via Menu' is selected then in the Configuration column the 'Active Settings - Group1/2/3/4' can be used to select the setting group. If this option is used then opto inputs 1 and 2 can be used for other functions in the programmable scheme logic. OPTO 1 0 1 0 1 Note: OPTO 2 0 0 1 1 Selected Setting Group 1 2 3 4
4.12
Setting groups comprise both Settings and Programmable Scheme Logic. Each is independent per group - not shared as common. The settings are generated in the Settings and Records application within MiCOM S1, or can be applied directly from the relay front panel menu. The programmable scheme logic can only be set using the PSL Editor application within MiCOM S1, generating files with extension ".psl". It is essential that where the installation needs application-specific PSL, that the appropriate .psl file is downloaded (sent) to the relay, for each and every setting group that will be used. If the user fails to download the required .psl file to any setting group that may be brought into service, then factory default PSL will still be resident. This may have severe operational and safety consequences. Control inputs Menu Text CONTROL INPUTS Ctrl I/P Status Control Input 1 Control Input 2 to 32 00000000000000000000000000000000 No Operation No Operation No Operation, Set, Reset No Operation, Set, Reset Default Setting Setting Range Step Size
The Control Input commands can be found in the Control Input menu. In the Ctrl I/P status menu cell there is a 32 bit word which represent the 32 control input commands. The status of the 32 control inputs can be read from this 32 bit word. The 32 control inputs can also be set and reset from this cell by setting a 1 to set or 0 to reset a particular control input. Alternatively, each of the 32 Control Inputs can can be set and reset using the individual menu setting cells Control Input 1, 2, 3, etc. The Control Inputs are available through the relay menu as described above and also via the rear communications. In the programmable scheme logic editor 32 Control Input signals, DDB 832-863, which can be set to a logic 1 or On state, as described above, are available to perform control functions defined by the user.
P341/EN AP/D22 Page 108/116 4.13 VT connections
4.13.1 Open delta (vee connected) VT's The P341 relay can be used with vee connected VTs by connecting the VT secondaries to C19, C20 and C21 input terminals, with the C22 input left unconnected (see Figures 2 and 17 in Appendix B). This type of VT arrangement cannot pass zero-sequence (residual) voltage to the relay, or provide any phase to neutral voltage quantities. Therefore any protection that is dependent upon zero sequence voltage measurements should be disabled unless a direct measurement can be made via the measured VN input (C23-C24). Therefore, neutral displacement protection, sensitive directional earth fault protection, directional earth fault protection and CT supervision should be disabled unless the residual voltage is measured directly from the secondary of the earthing transformer or from a broken delta VT winding on a 5 limb VT. The under and over voltage protection can be set as phase-to-phase measurement with vee connected VTs. The directional overcurrent protection uses phase-phase voltages anyway, therefore the accuracy should not be affected. The protection functions which use phase-neutral voltages are the power, sensitive power protection and voltage vector shift protection; all are for detecting abnormal generator operation under 3-phase balanced conditions, therefore the 'neutral' point, although 'floating' will be approximately at the centre of the three phase voltage vectors. The accuracy of single phase voltage measurements can be impaired when using vee connected VTs. The relay attempts to derive the phase to neutral voltages from the phase to phase voltage vectors. If the impedance of the voltage inputs were perfectly matched the phase to neutral voltage measurements would be correct, provided the phase to phase voltage vectors were balanced. However, in practice there are small differences in the impedance of the voltage inputs, which can cause small errors in the phase to neutral voltage measurements. This may give rise to an apparent residual voltage. This problem also extends to single phase power and impedance measurements that are also dependent upon their respective single phase voltages. The phase to neutral voltage measurement accuracy can be improved by connecting 3, well matched, load resistors between the phase voltage inputs (C19, C20, C21) and neutral C22, thus creating a virtual neutral point. The load resistor values must be chosen so that their power consumption is within the limits of the VT. It is recommended that 10kW 1% (6W) resistors are used for the 110V (Vn) rated relay, assuming the VT can supply this burden. 4.13.2 VT single point earthing The P340 range will function correctly with conventional 3 phase VTs earthed at any one point on the VT secondary circuit. Typical earthing examples being neutral earthing and yellow phase earthing. 4.14 Auto reset of trip LED indication The trip LED can be reset when the flags for the last fault are displayed. The flags are displayed automatically after a trip occurs, or can be selected in the fault record menu. The reset of trip LED and the fault records is performed by pressing the 0 key once the fault record has been read. Setting Sys Fn Links (SYSTEM DATA Column) to logic 1 sets the trip LED to automatic reset. Resetting will occur when the circuit is reclosed and the Any Pole Dead signal (DDB 758) has been reset for three seconds. Resetting, however, will be prevented if the Any start signal is active after the breaker closes.

Tr3Ph (Any Trip) Reset (Command) Reset (Logic Input) SETTING: SELF RESET ENABLE DISABLE
P341/EN AP/D22 Page 109/116

S Q R Trip LED
&
3s 0
Any Pole Dead Any Start
P2129ENa
Figure 29: Trip LED logic diagram 5. CT/VT REQUIREMENTS The CT requirements for P341 are as shown below. The current transformer requirements are based on a maximum prospective fault current of 50 times the relay rated current (In) and the relay having an instantaneous setting of 25 times rated current (In). The current transformer requirements are designed to provide operation of all protection elements. Where the criteria for a specific application are in excess of those detailed above, or the actual lead resistance exceeds the limiting value quoted, the CT requirements may need to be increased according to the formulae in the following sections. Nominal Rating 1A 5A Nominal Output 2.5VA 7.5VA Accuracy Class 10P 10P Accuracy Limited Factor 20 20 Limiting Lead Resistance 1.3 ohms 0.11 ohms
Separate requirements for Restricted Earth Fault and reverse power protection are given in section 5.6 and 5.7. 5.1 5.1.1 Non-directional definite time/IDMT overcurrent & earth fault protection Time-delayed phase overcurrent elements VK 5.1.2
Icp/2 * (RCT + RL + Rrp) Icn/2 * (RCT + 2RL + Rrp + Rrn)
Time-delayed earth fault overcurrent elements VK
5.2 5.2.1
Non-directional instantaneous overcurrent & earth fault protection CT requirements for instantaneous phase overcurrent elements VK
Isp * (RCT + RL + Rrp) Isn * (RCT + 2RL + Rrp + Rrn)
5.2.2
CT requirements for instantaneous earth fault overcurrent elements VK
5.3 5.3.1
Directional definite time/IDMT overcurrent & earth fault protection Time-delayed phase overcurrent elements VK
Icp/2 * (RCT + RL + Rrp)
P341/EN AP/D22 Page 110/116 5.3.2 Time-delayed earth fault overcurrent elements VK 5.4 5.4.1
Icn/2 * (RCT + 2RL + Rrp + Rrn)
Directional instantaneous overcurrent & earth fault protection CT requirements for instantaneous phase overcurrent elements VK
Ifp/2 * (RCT + RL + Rrp) Ifn/2 * (RCT + 2RL + Rrp + Rrn)
5.4.2
CT requirements for instantaneous earth fault overcurrent elements VK
5.5 5.5.1
Non-directional/directional definite time/IDMT sensitive earth fault (SEF) protection Non-directional time delayed SEF protection (residually connected) VK
Icn/2 * (RCT + 2RL + Rrp + Rrn) Isn/2 * (RCT + 2RL + Rrp + Rrn) Icn/2 * (RCT + 2RL + Rrp + Rrn) Ifn/2 * (RCT + 2RL + Rrp + Rrn)
5.5.2
Non-directional instantaneous SEF protection (residually connected) VK
5.5.3
Directional time delayed SEF protection (residually connected) VK
5.5.4
Directional instantaneous SEF protection (residually connected) VK
5.5.5
SEF protection - as fed from a core-balance CT Core balance current transformers of metering class accuracy are required and should have a limiting secondary voltage satisfying the formulae given below: Directional non-directional time delayed element: VK
Icn/2 * (RCT + 2RL + Rrn) Ifn/2 * (RCT + 2RL + Rrn) Isn/2 * (RCT + 2RL + Rrn)
Directional instantaneous element: VK
Non-directional instantaneous element VK
Note that, in addition, it should be ensured that the phase error of the applied core balance current transformer is less than 90 minutes at 10% of rated current and less than 150 minutes at 1% of rated current. Abbreviations used in the previous formulae are explained below: where VK = = = = Required CT knee-point voltage (volts) Maximum prospective secondary earth fault current (amps) Maximum prospective secondary phase fault current (amps) Maximum prospective secondary earth fault current or 31 times I> setting (whichever is lower) (amps)
Ifn Ifp Icn
P341/EN AP/D22 Page 111/116
Icp Isn Isp

RL Rrp Rrn 5.6
= = =
Maximum prospective secondary phase fault current or 31 times I> setting (whichever is lower) (amps) Stage 2 & 3 Earth Fault setting (amps) Stage 2 and 3 setting (amps) Resistance of current transformer secondary winding (ohms) Resistance of a single lead from relay to current transformer (ohms) Impedance of relay phase current input at 30In (ohms) Impedance of the relay neutral current input at 30In (ohms)
RCT = = = =
High impedance restricted earth fault protection The High Impedance Restricted Earth Fault element shall maintain stability for through faults and operate in less than 40ms for internal faults provided the following equations are met in determining CT requirements and the value of the associated stabilising resistor: Rst VK where VK Rst = = = = = Required CT knee-point voltage (volts) Value of Stabilising resistor (ohms) Maximum through fault current level (amps) CT knee point voltage (volts) Current setting of REF element (amps), (IREF>Is) Resistance of current transformer secondary winding (ohms) Resistance of a single lead from relay to current transformer (ohms) =
IF (RCT + 2RL) Is
4 * Is * Rs
If
VK IS
RCT = RL 5.7 =
Reverse and low forward power protection functions For both reverse and low forward power protection function settings greater than 3% Pn, the phase angle errors of suitable protection class current transformers will not result in any risk of mal-operation or failure to operate. However, for the sensitive power protection if settings less than 3% are used, it is recommended that the current input is driven by a correctly loaded metering class current transformer.
5.7.1
Protection class current transformers For less sensitive power function settings (>3%Pn), the phase current input of the P340 should be driven by a correctly loaded class 5P protection current transformer. To correctly load the current transformer, its VA rating should match the VA burden (at rated current) of the external secondary circuit through which it is required to drive current.
P341/EN AP/D22 Page 112/116 5.7.2 Metering class current transformers
For low Power settings (<3%Pn), the In Sensitive current input of the P340 should be driven by a correctly loaded metering class current transformer. The current transformer accuracy class will be dependent on the reverse power and low forward power sensitivity required. The table below indicates the metering class current transformer required for various power settings below 3%Pn. To correctly load the current transformer, its VA rating should match the VA burden (at rated current) of the external secondary circuit through which it is required to drive current. Use of the P340 sensitive power phase shift compensation feature will help in this situation. Reverse and Low Forward Power Settings %Pn 0.5 0.6 0.8 1.0 1.2 1.4 1.6 1.8 2.0 2.2 2.4 2.6 2.8 3.0 Sensitive power current transformer requirements 5.8 Converting an IEC185 current transformer standard protection classification to a kneepoint voltage The suitability of an IEC standard protection class current transformer can be checked against the kneepoint voltage requirements specified previously. If, for example, the available current transformers have a 15VA 5P 10 designation, then an estimated kneepoint voltage can be obtained as follows: Vk where: Vk = Required kneepoint voltage Current transformer rated burden (VA) Accuracy limit factor Current transformer secondary rated current (A) = VA x ALF In + ALF x In x Rct 1.0 0.5 0.2 Metering CT Class 0.1
VA = ALF = In =
Application Notes MiCOM P341 Rct =
P341/EN AP/D22 Page 113/116 Resistance of current transformer secondary winding (W)
If Rct is not available, then the second term in the above equation can be ignored. Example: 400/5A, 15VA 5P 10, Rct = 0.2W Vk = = 5.9 15 x 10 5 40V + 10 x 5 x 0.2
Converting IEC185 current transformer standard protection classification to an ANSI/IEEE standard voltage rating MiCOM Px40 series protection is compatible with ANSI/IEEE current transformers as specified in the IEEE C57.13 standard. The applicable class for protection is class "C", which specifies a non air-gapped core. The CT design is identical to IEC class P, or British Standard class X, but the rating is specified differently. The ANSI/IEEE C Class standard voltage rating required will be lower than an IEC knee point voltage. This is because the ANSI/IEEE voltage rating is defined in terms of useful output voltage at the terminals of the CT, whereas the IEC knee point voltage includes the voltage drop across the internal resistance of the CT secondary winding added to the useful output. The IEC/BS knee point is also typically 5% higher than the ANSI/IEEE knee point. Therefore Vc = = Where Vc Vk In = = = C Class standard voltage rating IEC Knee point voltage required CT rated current = 5A in USA CT secondary winding resistance [ Vk - Internal voltage drop ] / 1.05 [ Vk - (In . RCT . ALF) ] / 1.05
RCT =
(for 5A CTs, the typical resistance is 0.002 ohms/secondary turn) ALF = The CT accuracy limit factor, the rated dynamic current output of a "C" class CT (Kssc) is always 20 x In
The IEC accuracy limit factor is identical to the 20 times secondary current ANSI/IEEE rating. Therefore Vc 6. = [ Vk - (100 . RCT ) ] / 1.05
COMMISSIONING TEST MENU To help minimise the time required to test MiCOM relays the relay provides several test facilities under the COMMISSION TESTS menu heading. There are menu cells which allow the status of the opto-isolated inputs, output relay contacts, internal digital data bus (DDB) signals and user-programmable LEDs to be monitored. Additionally there are cells to test the operation of the output contacts and userprogrammable LEDs.
P341/EN AP/D22 Page 114/116
The following table shows the relay menu of commissioning tests, including the available setting ranges and factory defaults: Menu Text COMMISSION TESTS Opto I/P Status Relay O/P Status Test Port Status LED Status Monitor Bit 1 Monitor Bit 2 Monitor Bit 3 Monitor Bit 4 Monitor Bit 5 Monitor Bit 6 Monitor Bit 7 Monitor Bit 8 Test Mode Test Pattern Contact Test Test LEDs Table 3 6.1 Opto I/P status This menu cell displays the status of the relays opto-isolated inputs as a binary string, a 1 indicating an energised opto-isolated input and a 0 a de-energised one. If the cursor is moved along the binary numbers the corresponding label text will be displayed for each logic input. It can be used during commissioning or routine testing to monitor the status of the opto-isolated inputs whilst they are sequentially energised with a suitable dc voltage. 6.2 Relay O/P status This menu cell displays the status of the digital data bus (DDB) signals that result in energisation of the output relays as a binary string, a 1 indicating an operated state and 0 a non-operated state. If the cursor is moved along the binary numbers the corresponding label text will be displayed for each relay output. The information displayed can be used during commissioning or routine testing to indicate the status of the output relays when the relay is in service. Additionally fault finding for output relay damage can be performed by comparing the status of the output contact under investigation with its associated bit. 64 (LED 1) 65 (LED 2) 66 (LED 3) 67 (LED 4) 68 (LED 5) 69 (LED 6) 70 (LED 7) 71 (LED 8) Disabled All bits set to 0 No Operation No Operation Disabled Test Mode Contacts Blocked 0 = Not Operated 1 = Operated No Operation Apply Test Remove Test No Operation Apply Test 0 to 511 See Appendix A for details of digital data bus signals Default Setting Settings
Application Notes MiCOM P341 Note:
P341/EN AP/D22 Page 115/116 When the Test Mode cell is set to Enabled this cell will continue to indicate which contacts would operate if the relay was in-service, it does not show the actual status of the output relays.
6.3
Test port status This menu cell displays the status of the eight digital data bus (DDB) signals that have been allocated in the Monitor Bit cells. If the cursor is moved along the binary numbers the corresponding DDB signal text string will be displayed for each monitor bit. By using this cell with suitable monitor bit settings, the state of the DDB signals can be displayed as various operating conditions or sequences are applied to the relay. Thus the programmable scheme logic can be tested. As an alternative to using this cell, the optional monitor/download port test box can be plugged into the monitor/download port located behind the bottom access cover. Details of the monitor/download port test box can be found in section 6.10 of these Application Notes.
6.4
LED status The LED Status cell is an eight bit binary string that indicates which of the user-programmable LEDs on the relay are illuminated when accessing the relay from a remote location, a 1 indicating a particular LED is lit and a 0 not lit.
6.5
Monitor bits 1 to 8 The eight Monitor Bit cells allow the user to select the status of which digital data bus signals can be observed in the Test Port Status cell or via the monitor/download port. Each Monitor Bit is set by entering the required digital data bus (DDB) signal number (0 511) from the list of available DDB signals in Appendix A of this guide. The pins of the monitor/download port used for monitor bits are given in the table overleaf. The signal ground is available on pins 18, 19, 22 and 25. Monitor Bit Monitor/ Download Port Pin Table 4 THE MONITOR/DOWNLOAD PORT DOES NOT HAVE ELECTRICAL ISOLATED AGAINST INDUCED VOLTAGES ON THE COMMUNICATIONS CHANNEL. IT SHOULD THEREFORE ONLY BE USED FOR LOCAL COMMUNICATIONS. 1 11 2 12 3 15 4 13 5 20 6 21 7 23 8 24
6.6
Test mode This menu cell is used to allow secondary injection testing to be performed on the relay without operation of the trip contacts. It also enables a facility to directly test the output contacts by applying menu controlled test signals. To select test mode this cell should be set to Enabled which takes the relay out of service causing an alarm condition to be recorded and the yellow Out of Service LED to illuminate. Once testing is complete the cell must be set back to Disabled to restore the relay back to service.
P341/EN AP/D22 Page 116/116
WHEN THE TEST MODE CELL IS SET TO ENABLED THE RELAY SCHEME LOGIC DOES NOT DRIVE THE OUTPUT RELAYS AND HENCE THE PROTECTION WILL NOT TRIP THE ASSOCIATED CIRCUIT BREAKER IF A FAULT OCCURS. HOWEVER, THE COMMUNICATIONS CHANNELS WITH REMOTE RELAYS REMAIN ACTIVE WHICH, IF SUITABLE PRECAUTIONS ARE NOT TAKEN, COULD LEAD TO THE REMOTE ENDS TRIPPING WHEN CURRENT TRANSFORMERS ARE ISOLATED OR INJECTION TESTS ARE PERFORMED. 6.7 Test pattern The Test Pattern cell is used to select the output relay contacts that will be tested when the Contact Test cell is set to Apply Test. The cell has a binary string with one bit for each user-configurable output contact which can be set to 1 to operate the output under test conditions and 0 to not operate it. 6.8 Contact test When the Apply Test command in this cell is issued the contacts set for operation (set to 1) in the Test Pattern cell change state. After the test has been applied the command text on the LCD will change to No Operation and the contacts will remain in the Test State until reset issuing the Remove Test command. The command text on the LCD will again revert to No Operation after the Remove Test command has been issued. Note: When the Test Mode cell is set to Enabled the Relay O/P Status cell does not show the current status of the output relays and hence can not be used to confirm operation of the output relays. Therefore it will be necessary to monitor the state of each contact in turn.
6.9
Test LEDs When the Apply Test command in this cell is issued the eight user-programmable LEDs will illuminate for approximately 2 seconds before they extinguish and the command text on the LCD reverts to No Operation.
6.10
Using a monitor/download port test box A monitor/download port test box containing 8 LEDs and a switchable audible indicator is available from AREVA T&D, or one of their regional sales offices. It is housed in a small plastic box with a 25-pin male D-connector that plugs directly into the relays monitor/download port. There is also a 25-pin female D-connector which allows other connections to be made to the monitor/download port whilst the monitor/download port test box is in place. Each LED corresponds to one of the monitor bit pins on the monitor/download port with Monitor Bit 1 being on the left hand side when viewing from the front of the relay. The audible indicator can either be selected to sound if a voltage appears any of the eight monitor pins or remain silent so that indication of state is by LED alone.
Relay Description MiCOM P341
P341/EN HW/D22
RELAY DESCRIPTION
P341/EN HW/D22
P341/EN HW/D22 Page 1/16
CONTENT
1.
1.1 1.1.1 1.1.2 1.1.3 1.1.4 1.2 1.2.1 1.2.2 1.2.3 1.2.4 1.2.5
RELAY SYSTEM OVERVIEW

Hardware overview Processor board Input module Power supply module IRIG-B board Software overview Real-time operating system System services software Platform software Protection & control software Disturbance recorder
3
3 3 3 3 3 4 5 5 5 5 5
2.
2.1 2.2 2.3 2.3.1 2.3.2 2.3.3 2.4 2.4.1 2.4.2 2.5 2.6
HARDWARE MODULES
Processor board Internal communication buses Input module Transformer board Input board Universal opto isolated logic inputs Power supply module (including output relays) Power supply board (including EIA(RS)485 communication interface) Output relay board IRIG-B board Mechanical layout
5
5 6 6 6 6 7 8 8 9 9 9
3.
3.1 3.2 3.3 3.3.1 3.3.2 3.3.3 3.4
RELAY SOFTWARE
Real-time operating system System services software Platform software Record logging Settings database Database interface Protection & control software
10
10 11 11 11 11 11 12
P341/EN HW/D22 Page 2/16 3.4.1 3.4.2 3.4.3 3.4.3.1 3.4.4 3.4.5 Overview - protection & control scheduling Signal processing Programmable scheme logic PSL data Event, fault & maintenance recording Disturbance recorder
Relay Description MiCOM P341 12 12 13 13 13 14
4.
4.1 4.1.1 4.1.2 4.1.3 4.2
SELF TESTING & DIAGNOSTICS

Start-up self-testing System boot Initialisation software Platform software initialisation & monitoring Continuous self-testing
14
14 15 15 15 15
Figure 1: Figure 2: Figure 3:
Relay modules and information flow Main input board Relay software structure
4 7 10
Relay Description MiCOM P341 1. 1.1 RELAY SYSTEM OVERVIEW Hardware overview
The relay hardware is based on a modular design whereby the relay is made up of an assemblage of several modules which are drawn from a standard range. Some modules are essential while others are optional depending on the users requirements. The different modules that can be present in the relay are as follows: 1.1.1 Processor board Processor board which performs all calculations for the relay and controls the operation of all other modules within the relay. The processor board also contains and controls the user interfaces (LCD, LEDs, keypad and communication interfaces). 1.1.2 Input module The input module converts the information contained in the analogue and digital input signals into a format suitable for processing by the processor board. The standard input module consists of two boards: a transformer board to provide electrical isolation and a main input board which provides analogue to digital conversion and the isolated digital inputs. 1.1.3 Power supply module The power supply module provides a power supply to all of the other modules in the relay, at three different voltage levels. The power supply board also provides the EIA(RS)485 electrical connection for the rear communication port. On a second board the power supply module contains the relays which provide the output contacts. 1.1.4 IRIG-B board This board, which is optional, can be used where an IRIG-B signal is available to provide an accurate time reference for the relay. There is also an option on this board to specify a fibre optic rear communication port, for use with IEC 60870 communication only. All modules are connected by a parallel data and address bus which allows the processor board to send and receive information to and from the other modules as required. There is also a separate serial data bus for conveying sample data from the input module to the processor. Figure 1 shows the modules of the relay and the flow of information between them.

Present values of all settings Battery backed-up SRAM Executable software code & data, setting database data
Alarm, event, fault, disturbance & maintenance records
Default settings & parameters, language text, software code
E 2PROM
SRAM
Flash EPROM
Front LCD panel
RS232 Front comms port Parallel test port CPU
LEDs
Main processor board

Timing data
IRIG-B signal
IRIG-B board optional
Serial data bus (sample data)
Fibre optic rear comms port optional
Power supply, rear comms data, output relay status
Parallel data bus Digital input values
Output relay contacts (x7)
Relay board
ADC
Input board
Power supply (3 voltages), rear comms data
Analogue input signals
Power supply board
Transformer board
Power supply
Watchdog contacts
Field voltage
Rear RS485 communication port
Current & voltage inputs up to 9 (for feeder)
Figure 1: 1.2
Relay modules and information flow
Software overview The software for the relay can be conceptually split into four elements: the real-time operating system, the system services software, the platform software and the protection and control software. These four elements are not distinguishable to the user, and are all processed by the same processor board. The distinction between the four parts of the software is made purely for the purpose of explanation here:
Digital inputs (x8)
Output relays
Opto-isolated
inputs
P0126ENa
Relay Description MiCOM P341 1.2.1 Real-time operating system
The real time operating system is used to provide a framework for the different parts of the relays software to operate within. To this end the software is split into tasks. The real-time operating system is responsible for scheduling the processing of these tasks such that they are carried out in the time available and in the desired order of priority. The operating system is also responsible for the exchange of information between tasks, in the form of messages. 1.2.2 System services software The system services software provides the low-level control of the relay hardware. For example, the system services software controls the boot of the relays software from the non-volatile flash EPROM memory at power-on, and provides driver software for the user interface via the LCD and keypad, and via the serial communication ports. The system services software provides an interface layer between the control of the relays hardware and the rest of the relay software. 1.2.3 Platform software The platform software deals with the management of the relay settings, the user interfaces and logging of event, alarm, fault and maintenance records. All of the relay settings are stored in a database within the relay which provides direct compatibility with Courier communications. For all other interfaces (i.e. the front panel keypad and LCD interface, Modbus and IEC60870-5-103 and DNP3.0) the platform software converts the information from the database into the format required. The platform software notifies the protection & control software of all settings changes and logs data as specified by the protection & control software. 1.2.4 Protection & control software The protection and control software performs the calculations for all of the protection algorithms of the relay. This includes digital signal processing such as Fourier filtering and ancillary tasks such as the measurements. The protection & control software interfaces with the platform software for settings changes and logging of records, and with the system services software for acquisition of sample data and access to output relays and digital opto-isolated inputs. 1.2.5 Disturbance recorder The analogue values and logic signals are routed from the protection and control software to the disturbance recorder software. This software compresses the data to allow a greater number of records to be stored. The platform software interfaces to the disturbance recorder to allow extraction of the stored records. 2. HARDWARE MODULES The relay is based on a modular hardware design where each module performs a separate function within the relays operation. This section describes the functional operation of the various hardware modules. 2.1 Processor board The relay is based around a TMS320C32 floating point, 32-bit digital signal processor (DSP) operating at a clock frequency of 20MHz. This processor performs all of the calculations for the relay, including the protection functions, control of the data communication and user interfaces including the operation of the LCD, keypad and LEDs.
The processor board is located directly behind the relays front panel which allows the LCD and LEDs to be mounted on the processor board along with the front panel communication ports. These comprise the 9-pin D-connector for EIA(RS)232 serial communications (e.g. using MiCOM S1 and Courier communications) and the 25-pin D-connector relay test port for parallel communication. All serial communication is handled using a two-channel 85C30 serial communications controller (SCC). The memory provided on the main processor board is split into two categories, volatile and non-volatile: the volatile memory is fast access (zero wait state) SRAM which is used for the storage and execution of the processor software, and data storage as required during the processors calculations. The non-volatile memory is sub-divided into 3 groups: 2MB of flash memory for non-volatile storage of software code and text, 256kB of battery backed-up SRAM for the storage of disturbance, event and fault record data, and 32kB of E2PROM memory for the storage of configuration data, including the present setting values. 2.2 Internal communication buses The relay has two internal buses for the communication of data between different modules. The main bus is a parallel link which is part of a 64-way ribbon cable. The ribbon cable carries the data and address bus signals in addition to control signals and all power supply lines. Operation of the bus is driven by the main processor board which operates as a master while all other modules within the relay are slaves. The second bus is a serial link which is used exclusively for communicating the digital sample values from the input module to the main processor board. The DSP processor has a built-in serial port which is used to read the sample data from the serial bus. The serial bus is also carried on the 64-way ribbon cable. 2.3 Input module The input module provides the interface between the relay processor board(s) and the analogue and digital signals coming into the relay. The input module consists of two PCBs; the main input board and a transformer board. The P341 relay provides four voltage inputs and four current inputs. 2.3.1 Transformer board The standard transformer board holds up to four voltage transformers (VTs) and up to five current transformers (CTs). The current inputs will accept either 1A or 5A nominal current (menu and wiring options) and the voltage inputs can be specified for either 110V or 440V nominal voltage (order option). The transformers are used both to step-down the currents and voltages to levels appropriate to the relays electronic circuitry and to provide effective isolation between the relay and the power system. The connection arrangements of both the current and voltage transformer secondaries provide differential input signals to the main input board to reduce noise. 2.3.2 Input board The main input board is shown as a block diagram in Figure 2. It provides the circuitry for the digital input signals and the analogue-to-digital conversion for the analogue signals. Hence it takes the differential analogue signals from the CTs and VTs on the transformer board(s), converts these to digital samples and transmits the samples to the main processor board via the serial data bus. On the input board the analogue signals are passed through an anti-alias filter before being multiplexed into a single analogue-to-digital converter chip. The A-D converter provides 16-bit resolution and a serial data stream output. The digital input signals are opto isolated on this board to prevent excessive voltages on these inputs causing damage to the relay's internal circuitry.
The signal multiplexing arrangement provides for 16 analogue channels to be sampled. The P341 provides 4 current inputs and 4 voltage inputs. 3 spare channels are used to sample 3 different reference voltages for the purpose of continually checking the operation of the multiplexer and the accuracy of the A-D converter. The sample rate is maintained at 24 samples per cycle of the power waveform by a logic control circuit which which is driven by the frequency tracking function on the main processor board. The calibration E2PROM holds the calibration coefficients which are used by the processor board to correct for any amplitude or phase error introduced by the transformers and analogue circuitry. The other function of the input board is to read the state of the signals present on the digital inputs and present this to the parallel data bus for processing. The input board holds 8 optical isolators for the connection of up to eight digital input signals. The opto-isolators are used with the digital signals for the same reason as the transformers with the analogue signals; to isolate the relays electronics from the power system environment. A 48V field voltage supply is provided at the back of the relay for use in driving the digital opto-inputs.
Anti-alias filters VT Diffn to single Low pass filter Optical isolator 8 digital inputs 8 Optical isolator
Transformer board
4 voltage inputs
Input board
Noise filter
Noise filter
VT
Diffn to single
Low pass filter
Buffer
CT
16:1 Multiplexer
Diffn to single
Low pass filter
Buffer
16-bit ADC
Serial Interface
Up to 9 current inputs
Serial sample data bus
Sample control Up to 9 Up to 9
Up to 9
Trigger from processor board Calibration E2 PROM
Parallel bus
CT
Diffn to single
Low pass filter
P0127ENb
Figure 2:
Main input board
The input board provides some hardware filtering of the digital signals to remove unwanted noise before buffering the signals for reading on the parallel data bus. Depending on the relay model, more than 8 digital input signals can be accepted by the relay. This is achieved by the use of an additional opto-board which contains the same provision for 8 isolated digital inputs as the main input board, but does not contain any of the circuits for analogue signals which are provided on the main input board. 2.3.3 Universal opto isolated logic inputs The P340 series relays are fitted with universal opto isolated logic inputs that can be programmed for the nominal battery voltage of the circuit of which they are a part. They nominally provide a Logic 1 or On value for Voltages 80% of the set lower nominal voltage and a Logic 0 or Off value for the voltages 60% of the set higher nominal voltage. This lower value eliminates fleeting pickups that may occur during
Parallel bus
a battery earth fault, when stray capacitance may present up to 50% of battery voltage across an input. Each input also has a pre-set filter of cycle which renders the input immune to induced noise on the wiring: although this method is secure it can be slow, particularly for intertripping. For the P341 interconnection protection relay, the protection task is executed two times per cycle, i.e. after every 12 samples for the sample rate of 24 samples per power cycle used by the relay. Therefore, the time taken to register a change in the state of an opto input can vary between a half to one cycle. The time to register the change of state will depend on if the opto input changes state at the start or end of a protection task cycle with the additional half cycle filtering time. In the Opto Config menu the nominal battery voltage can be selected for all opto inputs by selecting one of the five standard ratings in the Global Nominal V settings. If Custom is selected then each opto input can individually be set to a nominal voltage value. Menu Text OPTO CONFIG Global Nominal V Opto Input 1 Opto Input 2-32 2.4 24-27 24-27 24-27 24-27, 30-34, 48-54, 110-125, 220-250, Custom 24-27, 30-34, 48-54, 110-125, 220-250 24-27, 30-34, 48-54, 110-125, 220-250 Default Setting Setting Range Min Max Step Size
Power supply module (including output relays) The power supply module contains two PCBs, one for the power supply unit itself and the other for the output relays. The power supply board also contains the input and output hardware for the rear communication port which provides an RS485 communication interface.
2.4.1
Power supply board (including EIA(RS)485 communication interface) One of three different configurations of the power supply board can be fitted to the relay. This will be specified at the time of order and depends on the nature of the supply voltage that will be connected to the relay. The three options are shown in table 1 below: Nominal dc Range 24/54V 48/125V 110/250V Table 1: Nominal ac Range dc only 30/100V rms 100/240V rms Power supply options
The output from all versions of the power supply module are used to provide isolated power supply rails to all of the other modules within the relay. Three voltage levels are used within the relay, 5.1V for all of the digital circuits, 16V for the analogue electronics, e.g. on the input board, and 22V for driving the output relay coils. All power supply voltages including the 0V earth line are distributed around the relay via the 64-way ribbon cable. One further voltage level is provided by the power supply board which is the field voltage of 48V. This is brought out to terminals on the back of the relay so that it can be used to drive the optically isolated digital inputs.
The two other functions provided by the power supply board are the EIA(RS)485 communications interface and the watchdog contacts for the relay. The EIA(RS)485 interface is used with the relays rear communication port to provide communication using one of either Courier, Modbus, DNP 3.0 or IEC 60870-5-103 protocols. The EIA(RS)485 hardware supports half-duplex communication and provides optical isolation of the serial data being transmitted and received. All internal communication of data from the power supply board is conducted via the output relay board which is connected to the parallel bus. The watchdog facility provides two output relay contacts, one normally open and one normally closed which are driven by the main processor board. These are provided to give an indication that the relay is in a healthy state. 2.4.2 Output relay board There are 2 versions of the output relay board one with seven relays, three normally open contacts and four changeover contacts and one with eight relays, two normally open contacts and six changeover contacts. For relay models with suffix A hardware, only the 7 output relay boards were available. For equivalent relay models in suffix B hardware or greater the base numbers of output contacts, using the 7 output relay boards, is being maintained for compatibility. The 8 output relay board is only used for new relay models or existing relay models available in new case sizes or to provide additional output contacts to existing models for suffix issue B or greater hardware. Note, the model number suffix letter refers to the hardware version. The relays are driven from the 22V power supply line. The relays state is written to or read from using the parallel data bus. Depending on the relay model, more than seven output contacts may be provided, through the use of up to three extra relay boards. Each additional relay board provides a further seven or eight output relays. 2.5 IRIG-B board The IRIG-B board is an order option which can be fitted to provide a timing reference for the relay. This can be used wherever an IRIG-B signal is available. The IRIG-B signal is connected to the board via a BNC connector on the back of the relay. The timing information is used to synchronise the relays internal real-time clock to an accuracy of 1ms. The internal clock is then used for the time tagging of the event, fault maintenance and disturbance records. The IRIG-B board can also be specified with a fibre optic transmitter/receiver which can be used for the rear communication port instead of the EIA(RS)485 electrical connection (IEC 60870 only). 2.6 Mechanical layout The case materials of the relay are constructed from pre-finished steel which has a conductive covering of aluminium and zinc. This provides good earthing at all joints giving a low impedance path to earth which is essential for performance in the presence of external noise. The boards and modules use a multi-point earthing strategy to improve the immunity to external noise and minimise the effect of circuit noise. Ground planes are used on boards to reduce impedance paths and spring clips are used to ground the module metalwork. Heavy duty terminal blocks are used at the rear of the relay for the current and voltage signal connections. Medium duty terminal blocks are used for the digital logic input signals, the output relay contacts, the power supply and the rear communication port. A BNC connector is used for the optional IRIG-B signal. 9-pin
and 25-pin female D-connectors are used at the front of the relay for data communication. Inside the relay the PCBs plug into the connector blocks at the rear, and can be removed from the front of the relay only. The connector blocks to the relays CT inputs are provided with internal shorting links inside the relay which will automatically short the current transformer circuits before they are broken when the board is removed. The front panel consists of a membrane keypad with tactile dome keys, an LCD and 12 LEDs mounted on an aluminium backing plate. 3. RELAY SOFTWARE The relay software was introduced in the overview of the relay at the start of this section. The software can be considered to be made up of four sections: the real-time operating system the system services software the platform software the protection & control software
This section describes in detail the latter two of these, the platform software and the protection & control software, which between them control the functional behaviour of the relay. Figure 3 shows the structure of the relay software.
Protection & Control Software Disturbance recorder task Protection task Platform Software Fourier signal processing Protection algorithms Event, fault, disturbance, maintenance record logging Protection & control settings Settings database Sampling function copies samples into 2 cycle buffer Remote communications interface - Modbus Remote communications interface IEC60870-5-103 Measurements and event, fault & disturbance records
Programable & fixed scheme logic
Supervisor task
Control of output contacts and programmable LEDs
Front panel interface - LCD & keypad Control of interfaces to keypad, LCD, LEDs, front & rear comms ports. Self-checking maintenance records
Local & Remote communications interface - Courier
Sample data & digital logic inputs
System services software
Relay hardware
P0128ENa
Figure 3: 3.1
Relay software structure
Real-time operating system The software is split into tasks; the real-time operating system is used to schedule the processing of the tasks to ensure that they are processed in the time available and in the desired order of priority. The operating system is also responsible in part for controlling the communication between the software tasks through the use of operating system messages.
Relay Description MiCOM P341 3.2 System services software
As shown in Figure 3, the system services software provides the interface between the relays hardware and the higher-level functionality of the platform software and the protection & control software. For example, the system services software provides drivers for items such as the LCD display, the keypad and the remote communication ports, and controls the boot of the processor and downloading of the processor code into SRAM from non-volatile flash EPROM at power up. 3.3 Platform software The platform software has three main functions: to control the logging of all records that are generated by the protection software, including alarms and event, fault, disturbance and maintenance records. to store and maintain a database of all of the relays settings in non-volatile memory. to provide the internal interface between the settings database and each of the relays user interfaces, i.e. the front panel interface and the front and rear communication ports, using whichever communication protocol has been specified (Courier, Modbus, DNP 3.0, IEC 60870-5-103).
3.3.1
Record logging The logging function is provided to store all alarms, events, faults and maintenance records. The records for all of these incidents are logged in battery backed-up SRAM in order to provide a non-volatile log of what has happened. The relay maintains four logs: one each for up to 32 alarms, 250 event records, 5 fault records and 5 maintenance records. The logs are maintained such that the oldest record is overwritten with the newest record. The logging function can be initiated from the protection software or the platform software is responsible for logging of a maintenance record in the event of a relay failure. This includes errors that have been detected by the platform software itself or error that are detected by either the system services or the protection software function. See also the section on supervision and diagnostics later in this section.
3.3.2
Settings database The settings database contains all of the settings and data for the relay, including the protection, disturbance recorder and control & support settings groups. The settings The platform softwares are maintained in non-volatile E2PROM memory. management of the settings database includes the responsibility of ensuring that only one user interface modifies the settings of the database at any one time. This feature is employed to avoid confusion between different parts of the software during a setting change. For changes to protection settings and disturbance recorder settings, the platform software operates a scratchpad in SRAM memory. This allows a number of setting changes to be made in any order but applied to the protection elements, and saved in the database in E2PROM, at the same time (see also section P341/EN IT/C22 on the user interface). If a setting change affects the protection & control task, the database advises it of the new values.
3.3.3
Database interface The other function of the platform software is to implement the relays internal interface between the database and each of the relays user interfaces. The database of settings and measurements must be accessible from all of the relays user interfaces to allow read and modify operations. The platform software presents the data in the appropriate format for each user interface.
P341/EN HW/D22 Page 12/16 3.4 Protection & control software
The protection and control software task is responsible for processing all of the protection elements and measurement functions of the relay. To achieve this it has to communicate with both the system services software and the platform software as well as organise its own operations. The protection software has the highest priority of any of the software tasks in the relay in order to provide the fastest possible protection response. The protection & control software has a supervisor task which controls the start-up of the task and deals with the exchange of messages between the task and the platform software. 3.4.1 Overview - protection & control scheduling After initialisation at start-up, the protection & control task is suspended until there are sufficient samples available for it to process. The acquisition of samples is controlled by a sampling function which is called by the system services software and takes each set of new samples from the input module and stores them in a twocycle buffer. The protection & control software resumes execution when the number of unprocessed samples in the buffer reaches a certain number. For the P341 generator loss of mains protection relay, the protection task is executed twice per cycle, i.e. after every 12 samples for the sample rate of 24 samples per power cycle used by the relay. The protection and control software is suspended again when all of its processing on a set of samples is complete. This allows operations by other software tasks to take place. 3.4.2 Signal processing The sampling function provides filtering of the digital input signals from the optoisolators and frequency tracking of the analogue signals. The digital inputs are checked against their previous value over a period of half a cycle. Hence a change in the state of one of the inputs must be maintained over at least half a cycle before it is registered with the protection & control software. The frequency tracking of the analogue input signals is achieved by a recursive Fourier algorithm which is applied to one of the input signals, and works by detecting a change in the measured signals phase angle. The calculated value of the frequency is used to modify the sample rate being used by the input module so as to achieve a constant sample rate of 24 samples per cycle of the power waveform. The value of the frequency is also stored for use by the protection & control task. When the protection & control task is re-started by the sampling function, it calculates the Fourier components for the analogue signals. The Fourier components are calculated using a one-cycle, 24-sample Discrete Fourier Transform (DFT). The DFT is always calculated using the last cycle of samples from the 2-cycle buffer, i.e. the most recent data is used. The DFT used in this way extracts the power frequency fundamental component from the signal and produces the magnitude and phase angle of the fundamental in rectangular component format. The DFT provides an accurate measurement of the fundamental frequency component, and effective filtering of harmonic frequencies and noise. This performance is achieved in conjunction with the relay input module which provides hardware anti-alias filtering to attenuate frequencies above the half sample rate, and frequency tracking to maintain a sample rate of 24 samples per cycle. The Fourier components of the input current and voltage signals are stored in memory so that they can be accessed by all of the protection elements algorithms. The samples from the input module are also used in an unprocessed form by the disturbance recorder for waveform recording and to calculate true rms values of current, voltage and power for metering purposes.
Relay Description MiCOM P341 3.4.3 Programmable scheme logic
The purpose of the programmable scheme logic (PSL) is to allow the relay user to configure an individual protection scheme to suit their own particular application. This is achieved through the use of programmable logic gates and delay timers. The input to the PSL is any combination of the status of the digital input signals from the opto-isolators on the input board, the outputs of the protection elements, e.g. protection starts and trips, and the outputs of the fixed protection scheme logic. The fixed scheme logic provides the relays standard protection schemes. The PSL itself consists of software logic gates and timers. The logic gates can be programmed to perform a range of different logic functions and can accept any number of inputs. The timers are used either to create a programmable delay, and/or to condition the logic outputs, e.g. to create a pulse of fixed duration on the output regardless of the length of the pulse on the input. The outputs of the PSL are the LEDs on the front panel of the relay and the output contacts at the rear. The execution of the PSL logic is event driven; the logic is processed whenever any of its inputs change, for example as a result of a change in one of the digital input signals or a trip output from a protection element. Also, only the part of the PSL logic that is affected by the particular input change that has occurred is processed. This reduces the amount of processing time that is used by the PSL. The protection & control software updates the logic delay timers and checks for a change in the PSL input signals every time it runs. This system provides flexibility for the user to create their own scheme logic design. However, it also means that the PSL can be configured into a very complex system, and because of this setting of the PSL is implemented through the PC support package MiCOM S1. 3.4.3.1 PSL data In the PSL editor in MiCOM S1 when a PSL file is downloaded to the relay the user can specify the group to download the file and a 32 character PSL reference description. This PSL reference is shown in the Grp1/2/3/4 PSL Ref cell in the PSL DATA menu in the relay. The download date and time and file checksum for each groups PSL file is also shown in the PSL DATA menu in cells Date/Time and Grp 1/2/3/4 PSL ID. The PSL data can be used to indicate if a PSL has been changed and thus be useful in providing information for version control of PSL files. The default PSL Reference description is Default PSL followed by the model number e.g. Default PSL P34x??????0yy0? where x refers to the model e.g. 1, 2, 3 and yy refers to the software version e.g. 05. This is the same for all protection setting groups (since the default PSL is the same for all groups). Since the LCD display (bottom line) only has space for 16 characters the display must be scrolled to see all 32 characters of the PSL Reference description. The default date and time is the date and time when the defaults were loaded from flash into EEPROM. Note: 3.4.4 The PSL DATA column information is only supported by Courier and Modbus, but not DNP3 or IEC60870-5-103.
Event, fault & maintenance recording A change in any digital input signal or protection element output signal is used to indicate that an event has taken place. When this happens, the protection & control task sends a message to the supervisor task to indicate that an event is available to be processed and writes the event data to a fast buffer in SRAM which is controlled by the supervisor task. When the supervisor task receives either an event or fault record
message, it instructs the platform software to create the appropriate log in battery backed-up SRAM. The operation of the record logging to battery backed-up SRAM is slower than the supervisors buffer. This means that the protection software is not delayed waiting for the records to be logged by the platform software. However, in the rare case when a large number of records to be logged are created in a short period of time, it is possible that some will be lost if the supervisors buffer is full before the platform software is able to create a new log in battery backed-up SRAM. If this occurs then an event is logged to indicate this loss of information. Maintenance records are created in a similar manner with the supervisor task instructing the platform software to log a record when it receives a maintenance record message. However, it is possible that a maintenance record may be triggered by a fatal error in the relay in which case it may not be possible to successfully store a maintenance record, depending on the nature of the problem. See also the section on self supervision & diagnostics later in this section. 3.4.5 Disturbance recorder The disturbance recorder operates as a separate task from the protection & control task. It can record the waveforms for up to 8 analogue channels and the values of up to 32 digital signals. The recording time is user selectable up to a maximum of 10 seconds. The disturbance recorder is supplied with data by the protection & control task once per cycle. The disturbance recorder collates the data that it receives into the required length disturbance record. It attempts to limit the demands it places on memory space by saving the analogue data in compressed format whenever possible. This is done by detecting changes in the analogue input signals and compressing the recording of the waveform when it is in a steady-state condition. The compressed disturbance records can be decompressed by MiCOM S1 which can also store the data in COMTRADE format, thus allowing the use of other packages to view the recorded data. 4. SELF TESTING & DIAGNOSTICS The relay includes a number of self-monitoring functions to check the operation of its hardware and software when it is in service. These are included so that if an error or fault occurs within the relays hardware or software, the relay is able to detect and report the problem and attempt to resolve it by performing a re-boot. This involves the relay being out of service for a short period of time which is indicated by the Healthy LED on the front of the relay being extinguished and the watchdog contact at the rear operating. If the restart fails to resolve the problem, then the relay will take itself permanently out of service. Again this will be indicated by the LED and watchdog contact. If a problem is detected by the self-monitoring functions, the relay attempts to store a maintenance record in battery backed-up SRAM to allow the nature of the problem to be notified to the user. The self-monitoring is implemented in two stages: firstly a thorough diagnostic check which is performed when the relay is booted-up, e.g. at power-on, and secondly a continuous self-checking operation which checks the operation of the relays critical functions whilst it is in service. 4.1 Start-up self-testing The self-testing which is carried out when the relay is started takes a few seconds to complete, during which time the relays protection is unavailable. This is signalled by the Healthy LED on the front of the relay which will illuminate when the relay has passed all of the tests and entered operation. If the testing detects a problem, the relay will remain out of service until it is manually restored to working order.
Relay Description MiCOM P341 The operations that are performed at start-up are as follows: 4.1.1 System boot
The integrity of the flash EPROM memory is verified using a checksum before the program code and data stored in it is copied into SRAM to be used for execution by the processor. When this has been completed the data then held in SRAM is compared to that in the flash EPROM to ensure that the two are the same and that no errors have occurred in the transfer of data from flash EPROM to SRAM. The entry point of the software code in SRAM is then called which is the relay initialisation code. 4.1.2 Initialisation software The initialisation process includes the operations of initialising the processor registers and interrupts, starting the watchdog timers (used by the hardware to determine whether the software is still running), starting the real-time operating system and creating and starting the supervisor task. In the course of the initialisation process the relay checks: the status of the battery. the integrity of the battery backed-up SRAM that is used to store event, fault and disturbance records. the voltage level of the field voltage supply which is used to drive the opto-isolated inputs. the operation of the LCD controller. the watchdog operation.
At the conclusion of the initialisation software the supervisor task begins the process of starting the platform software. 4.1.3 Platform software initialisation & monitoring In starting the platform software, the relay checks the integrity of the data held in E2PROM with a checksum, the operation of the real-time clock, and the IRIG-B board if fitted. The final test that is made concerns the input and output of data; the presence and healthy condition of the input board is checked and the analogue data acquisition system is checked through sampling the reference voltage. At the successful conclusion of all of these tests the relay is entered into service and the protection started-up. 4.2 Continuous self-testing When the relay is in service, it continually checks the operation of the critical parts of its hardware and software. The checking is carried out by the system services software (see section on relay software earlier in this section) and the results reported to the platform software. The functions that are checked are as follows: the flash EPROM containing all program code and language text is verified by a checksum. the code and constant data held in SRAM is checked against the corresponding data in flash EPROM to check for data corruption. the SRAM containing all data other than the code and constant data is verified with a checksum. the E2PROM containing setting values is verified by a checksum, whenever its data is accessed.
P341/EN HW/D22 Page 16/16 the battery status. the level of the field voltage.
the integrity of the digital signal I/O data from the opto-isolated inputs and the relay contacts, is checked by the data acquisition function every time it is executed. The operation of the analogue data acquisition system is continuously checked by the acquisition function every time it is executed, by means of sampling the reference voltage on a spare multiplexed channel. the operation of the IRIG-B board is checked, where it is fitted, by the software that reads the time and date from the board.
In the unlikely event that one of the checks detects an error within the relays subsystems, the platform software is notified and it will attempt to log a maintenance record in battery backed-up SRAM. If the problem is with the battery status or the IRIG-B board, the relay will continue in operation. However, for problems detected in any other area the relay will initiate a shutdown and re-boot. This will result in a period of up to 5 seconds when the protection is unavailable, but the complete restart of the relay including all initialisations should clear most problems that could occur. As described above, an integral part of the start-up procedure is a thorough diagnostic self-check. If this detects the same problem that caused the relay to restart, i.e. the restart has not cleared the problem, then the relay will take itself permanently out of service. This is indicated by the Healthy LED on the front of the relay, which will extinguish, and the watchdog contact which will operate.
Technical Data MiCOM P341
P341/EN TD/D22
TECHNICAL DATA
P341/EN TD/D22
P341/EN TD/D22 Page 1/42
CONTENT
1.
1.1 1.2 1.3 1.4 1.5 1.6 1.7 1.8 1.9
RATINGS
Currents Voltages Auxiliary voltage Frequency Universal logic inputs (P340 range) Output relay contacts Field voltage Loop through connections Wiring requirements
7
7 7 7 8 8 8 9 9 9
2.
2.1 2.2 2.3 2.4
BURDENS
Current circuit Voltage circuit Auxiliary supply Optically-isolated inputs
9
9 10 10 10
3.
3.1 3.2
ACCURACY
Reference conditions Influencing quantities
10
10 11
4.
4.1 4.2 4.3 4.4
HIGH VOLTAGE WITHSTAND

Dielectric withstand Impulse Insulation resistance ANSI dielectric withstand
11
11 12 12 12
5.
5.1 5.1.1 5.1.2 5.1.3 5.2 5.2.1 5.2.2
ELECTRICAL ENVIRONMENT
Performance criteria Class A Class B Class C Auxiliary supply tests, dc interruption, etc. DC voltage interruptions DC voltage fluctuations
12
12 12 12 13 13 13 13
P341/EN TD/D22 Page 2/42 5.3 5.3.1 5.3.2 5.4 5.5 5.6 5.6.1 5.6.2 5.7 5.7.1 5.7.2 5.7.3 5.8 5.9 5.10 5.11 5.12 5.13 AC voltage dips and short interruptions AC voltage short interruptions AC voltage dips High frequency disturbance Fast transients Conducted/radiated emissions Conducted emissions Radiated emissions Conducted/radiated immunity Conducted immunity Radiated immunity Radiated immunity from digital radio telephones Electrostatic discharge Surge immunity Power frequency magnetic field Power frequency interference Surge withstand capability (SWC) Radiated immunity
Technical Data MiCOM P341 13 13 13 14 14 14 14 14 15 15 15 15 15 15 16 16 16 16
6.
6.1 6.2 6.3
ATMOSPHERIC ENVIRONMENT
Temperature Humidity Enclosure protection
17
17 17 17
7.
7.1 7.1.1 7.1.2 7.1.3 7.1.4
MECHANICAL ENVIRONMENT
Performance criteria Severity classes Vibration (sinusoidal) Shock and bump Seismic
17
17 18 18 18 18
8. 9. 10.
10.1
EC EMC COMPLIANCE EC LVD COMPLIANCE PROTECTION FUNCTIONS

Three phase non-directional/directional overcurrent protection (50/51) (67)
19 19 19
19
Technical Data MiCOM P341 10.1.1 10.1.2 10.1.3 Setting ranges Time delay settings Transient overreach and overshoot
P341/EN TD/D22 Page 3/42 19 20 20 20 20 21 21 21 21 22 25 25 25 25 26 26 26 26 27 27 27 27 28 28 28 28 28 29 29 29 29 29 30 30 30
10.1.3.1 Accuracy 10.2 10.2.1 Inverse time (IDMT) characteristic Time multiplier settings for IEC/UK curves
10.2.1.1 Time dial settings for IEEE/US curves 10.2.1.2 Definite time characteristic 10.2.1.3 Reset characteristics 10.2.2 10.3 10.3.1 Accuracy Earth fault & sensitive earth fault protection (50N/51N) (67N) (64) Setting ranges
10.3.1.1 Earth fault, sensitive earth fault 10.3.1.2 Polarising quantities for earth fault measuring elements 10.3.1.3 Restricted earth fault (low impedance) 10.3.1.4 Restricted earth fault (high impedance) 10.3.2 10.3.3 10.3.4 EF and SEF time delay characteristics Wattmetric SEF settings (zero sequence power settings) Accuracy
10.3.4.1 Earth fault 1 10.3.4.2 Earth fault 2 10.3.4.3 SEF 10.3.4.4 REF 10.3.4.5 Wattmetric SEF 10.3.4.6 Polarising quantities 10.4 10.4.1 10.4.2 10.4.3 10.5 10.5.1 10.5.2 10.5.3 10.6 10.6.1 Neutral displacement/residual overvoltage (59N) Setting ranges Time delay settings Accuracy Under voltage (27) Level settings Under voltage protection time delay characteristics Accuracy Over voltage (59) Level settings
P341/EN TD/D22 Page 4/42 10.6.2 10.6.3 10.7 10.7.1 10.8 10.8.1 10.9 10.9.1 10.10 Over voltage protection time delay characteristics Accuracy Under frequency (81U) Accuracy Over frequency (81O) Accuracy
Technical Data MiCOM P341 30 31 31 31 31 31 32 32
Reverse power/low forward power/over power (32R /32L /32O) Accuracy
Sensitive reverse power/low forward power/over power (32R /32L /32O) 33 33 34 34 34 34 34 34 34 34 34 35 35
10.10.1 Accuracy 10.11 Rate of change of frequency
10.11.1 Setting range 10.11.2 Accuracy 10.12 Reconnection time delay
10.12.1 Setting range 10.12.2 Accuracy 10.13 Voltage vector shift
10.13.1 Setting range 10.13.2 Accuracy 10.14 Thermal overload (49)
10.14.1 Accuracy
11.
11.1 11.1.1 11.2 11.2.1
SUPERVISORY FUNCTIONS
Voltage transformer supervision Accuracy Current transformer supervision Accuracy
35
35 35 36 36
12.
12.1 12.2
PROGRAMMABLE SCHEME LOGIC

Level settings Accuracy
36
36 36
13.
13.1 13.2 13.2.1 13.2.2
MEASUREMENTS AND RECORDING FACILITIES

Measurements IRIG-B and real time clock Features Performance
37
37 37 37 37
14.
14.1 14.2
DISTURBANCE RECORDS
Level settings Accuracy
38
38 38
15.
15.1 15.1.1 15.1.2 15.1.3 15.2 15.2.1 15.2.2 15.2.3 15.2.4
PLANT SUPERVISION
CB state monitoring control and condition monitoring CB monitor settings CB control settings Accuracy CB fail and backtrip breaker fail Timer settings Timer accuracy Undercurrent settings Undercurrent accuracy
38
38 38 38 38 39 39 39 39 39
16.
16.1
INPUT AND OUTPUT SETTING RANGES

CT and VT ratio settings
39
39
17. 18. 19.

19.1 19.2 19.2.1
BATTERY LIFE FREQUENCY RESPONSE LOCAL AND REMOTE COMMUNICATIONS

Front port Rear port Performance
40 40 41
41 41 41
Figure 1: Figure 2: Figure 3: Figure 4:
IEC inverse time curves American inverse time curves Biased REF characteristic Frequency response
23 24 26 40
1.
1.1
RATINGS
Currents In = 1A or 5A ac rms. Separate terminals are provided for the 1A and 5A windings, with the neutral input of each winding sharing one terminal. CT Type Standard Sensitive Duration Continuous rating 10 minutes 5 minutes 3 minutes 2 minutes 10 seconds 1 second Operating Range 0 to 64 n 0 to 2 n Withstand 4 n 4.5 n 5 n 6 n 7 n 30 n 100 n
1.2
Voltages Maximum rated voltage relate to earth 300Vdc or 300Vrms. Nominal Voltage Vn 100 120Vph - ph rms 380 480Vph - ph rms Withstand (Vn = 100/120V) 240Vph - ph rms 312Vph - ph rms Short Term Above Vn 0 to 200Vph - ph rms 0 to 800Vph - ph rms Withstand (Vn = 380/480V) 880Vph - ph rms 1144Vph - ph rms
Duration Continuous (2Vn) 10 seconds (2.6Vn) 1.3 Auxiliary voltage
The relay is available in three auxiliary voltage versions, these are specified in the table below: Nominal Ranges 24 48V dc 48 110V dc (30 100V ac rms) ** 110 240V dc (100 240V ac rms) ** ** rated for ac or dc operation. Operative dc Range 19 to 65V 37 to 150V 87 to 300V Operative ac Range 24 to 110V 80 to 265V
P341/EN TD/D22 Page 8/42 1.4 Frequency
The nominal frequency (Fn) is dual rated at 50 60Hz, the operate range is 40Hz 70Hz. 1.5 Universal logic inputs (P340 range) The P340 series relays are fitted with universal opto isolated logic inputs that can be programmed for the nominal battery voltage of the circuit of which they are a part. They nominally provide a Logic 1 or On value for Voltages 80% of the set lower nominal voltage and a Logic 0 or Off value for the voltages 60% of the set higher nominal voltage. This lower value eliminates fleeting pickups that may occur during a battery earth fault, when stray capacitance may present up to 50% of battery voltage across an input. Each input also has a pre-set filter of cycle which renders the input immune to induced noise on the wiring. In the Opto Config menu the nominal battery voltage can be selected for all opto inputs by selecting one of the five standard ratings in the Global Nominal V settings. If Custom is selected then each opto input can individually be set to a nominal voltage value. Menu Text OPTO CONFIG Global Nominal V Opto Input 1 Opto Input 2-32 24-27 24-27 24-27 24-27, 30-34, 48-54, 110-125, 220-250, Custom 24-27, 30-34, 48-54, 110-125, 220-250 24-27, 30-34, 48-54, 110-125, 220-250 Default Setting Setting Range Min Max Step Size
Battery Voltage (V dc) 24/27 30/34 48/54 110/125 220/250
Logical off (V dc) <16.2 <20.4 <32.4 <75 <150
Logical on (V dc) >19.2 >24 >38.4 >88 >176
All the logic inputs are independent and isolated. The P341 relay has a base number of opto inputs of 8 in the 40TE case. One optional board can be added to the P341 to increase its number of opto inputs, the boards available are the 8 opto input board or the 8 output contact board or the 4 opto input + 4 output contact board. 1.6 Output relay contacts There are 2 versions of the output relay board one with seven relays, three normally open contacts and four changeover contacts and one with eight relays, two normally open contacts and six changeover contacts. For relay models with suffix A hardware, only the 7 output relay boards were available. For equivalent relay models in suffix B hardware or greater the base numbers of output contacts, using the 7 output relay boards, is being maintained for compatibility. The 8 output relay board is only used for new relay models or existing relay models available in new case sizes or to provide additional output contacts to
existing models for suffix issue B or greater hardware. Note, the model number suffix letter refers to the hardware version. The P341 has a base number of relay contacts of 7 in the 40TE case. One optional board can be added to the P341 to increase its number of output contacts, the boards available are the 8 opto input board or the 8 output contact board or the 4 opto input + 4 output contact board. Make & Carry Carry 30A for 3s 250A for 30ms 10A continuous dc: 50W resistive dc: 62.5W inductive (L/R = 40ms) ac: 2500VA resistive (P.F. = 1) ac: 2500VA inductive (P.F. = 0.7) 10A and 300V 10,000 operation minimum 100,000 operations minimum
Break Maxima: Loaded Contact: Unloaded Contact: Watchdog Contact Break 1.7 Field voltage
dc: 30W resistive dc: 15W inductive (L/R = 40ms) ac: 375VA inductive (P.F. = 0.7)
The field voltage provided by the relay is nominally 48V dc with a current limit of 112mA. The operating range shall be 40V to 60V with an alarm raised at <35V. 1.8 Loop through connections Terminals D17 D18 and F17 F18 are internally connected together for convenience when wiring, maxima 5A and 300V. 1.9 Wiring requirements The requirements for the wiring of the relay and cable specifications are detailed in the installation section of the Operation Guide (Volume 2).
2.
2.1
BURDENS
Current circuit CT burden (At Nominal Current) Phase Earth <0.15 VA <0.2VA
P341/EN TD/D22 Page 10/42 2.2 Voltage circuit Reference Voltage (Vn) Vn = 100 120V Vn = 380 480V 2.3 Auxiliary supply Case Size Size 8 /40TE Size 12 /60TE * No output contacts or optos energised Each additional energised opto input Each additional energised opto input Each additional energised opto input Each additional energised output relay 2.4 Optically-isolated inputs Peak current of opto inputs when energised is 3.5 mA (0-300V). Maximum input voltage 300 V dc (any setting). Minimum* 11W or 24 VA 11W or 24 VA
<0.06VA rms at 110V <0.06VA rms at 440V
0.09W (24/27, 30/34, 48/54 V) 0.12W (110/125 V) 0.19W (220/250 V) 0.13W
3.
ACCURACY
For all accuracies specified, the repeatability is 2.5% unless otherwise specified. If no range is specified for the validity of the accuracy, then the specified accuracy is valid over the full setting range.
3.1
Reference conditions Quantity General Ambient temperature Atmospheric pressure Relative humidity Input energising quantity Current Voltage Frequency Auxiliary supply Settings Time multiplier setting Time dial n Vn 50 or 60Hz DC 48V or 110V AC 63.5V or 110V Reference value 1.0 7 5% 5% 0.5% 5% 20 C 86kPa to 106kPa 45 to 75 % 2C Reference Conditions Test Tolerance
Technical Data MiCOM P341 Quantity General Phase angle 3.2 Influencing quantities 0 Reference Conditions
P341/EN TD/D22 Page 11/42 Test Tolerance
No additional errors will be incurred for any of the following influencing quantities: Quantity Environmental Temperature Mechanical (Vibration, Shock, Bump, Seismic) Quantity Electrical Frequency Harmonics (single) Auxiliary voltage range Aux. supply ripple Point on wave of fault waveform DC offset of fault waveform Phase angle Magnetising inrush 5 Hz to 70 Hz 5% over the range 2nd to 17th 0.8 LV to 1.2 HV (dc) 0.8 LV to 1.1 HV (ac) 12% Vn with a frequency of 2.fn 0 to 360 No offset to fully offset 90 to + 90 No operation with OC elements set to 35% of peak anticipated inrush level. 25C to +55C According to IEC 60255-21-1:198 IEC 60255-21-2:1988 IEC 60255-21-3:1995 Operative range Operative Range (Typical Only)
4.
4.1
HIGH VOLTAGE WITHSTAND

Dielectric withstand IEC60255-5:1997 2.0kVrms for one minute between all terminals and case earth. 2.0kVrms for one minute between all terminals of each independent circuit grouped together, and all other terminals. This includes the output contacts and loop through connections D17/D18 and F17/F18. 1.5kVrms for one minute across dedicated normally open contacts of output relays. 1.0kVrms for 1 minute across normally open contacts of changeover and watchdog output relays.
P341/EN TD/D22 Page 12/42 4.2 Impulse IEC60255-5:1997
The product will withstand without damage impulses of 5kV peak, 1.2/50s, 0.5J across: Each independent circuit and the case with the terminals of each independent circuit connected together. Independent circuits with the terminals of each independent circuit connected together. Terminals of the same circuit except normally open metallic contacts. 4.3 Insulation resistance IEC60255-5:1997 The insulation resistance is greater than 100 M at 500Vdc. 4.4 ANSI dielectric withstand ANSI/IEEE C37.90. (1989) (Reaff. 1994) 1kV rms. for 1 minute across open contacts of the watchdog contacts. 1kV rms. for 1 minute across open contacts of changeover output contacts. 1.5kV rms. for 1 minute across normally open output contacts.
5.
5.1
ELECTRICAL ENVIRONMENT
Performance criteria The following three classes of performance criteria are used within sections 5.2 to 5.13 (where applicable) to specify the performance of the MiCOM relay when subjected to the electrical interference. The performance criteria are based on the performance criteria specified in EN 50082-2:1995.
5.1.1
Class A During the testing the relay will not maloperate, upon completion of the testing the relay will function as specified. A maloperation will include a transient operation of the output contacts, operation of the watchdog contacts, reset of any of the relays microprocessors or an alarm indication. The relay communications and IRIG-B signal must continue uncorrupted via the communications ports and IRIG-B port respectively during the test, however relay communications and the IRIG-B signal may be momentarily interrupted during the tests, provided that they recover with no external intervention.
5.1.2
Class B During the testing the relay will not maloperate, upon completion of the testing the relay will function as specified. A maloperation will include a transient operation of the output contacts, operation of the watchdog contacts, reset of any of the relays microprocessors or an alarm indication. A transitory operation of the output LEDs is acceptable provided no permanent false indications are recorded.
The relay communications and IRIG-B signal must continue uncorrupted via the communications ports and IRIG-B port respectively during the test, however relay communications and the IRIG-B signal may be momentarily interrupted during the tests, provided that they recover with no external intervention. 5.1.3 Class C The relay will power down and power up again in a controlled manner within 5 seconds. The output relays are permitted to change state during the test as long as they reset once the relay powers up. Communications to relay may be suspended during the testing as long as communication recovers with no external intervention after the testing. 5.2 5.2.1 Auxiliary supply tests, dc interruption, etc. DC voltage interruptions IEC 60255-11:1979. DC Auxiliary Supply Interruptions 2, 5, 10, 20ms. Performance criteria - Class A. DC Auxiliary Supply Interruptions 50, 100, 200ms, 40s. Performance criteria - Class C. 5.2.2 DC voltage fluctuations IEC 60255-11:1979. AC 100Hz ripple superimposed on DC max. and min. auxiliary supply at 12% of highest rated DC. Performance criteria - Class A. 5.3 5.3.1 AC voltage dips and short interruptions AC voltage short interruptions IEC 61000-4-11:1994. AC Auxiliary Supply Interruptions 2, 5, 10, 20ms. Performance criteria - Class A. AC Auxiliary Supply Interruptions 50, 100, 200ms, 1s, 40s. Performance criteria - Class C. 5.3.2 AC voltage dips IEC 61000-4-11:1994 AC Auxiliary Supply 100% Voltage Dips 2, 5, 10, 20ms. Performance criteria Class A. AC Auxiliary Supply 100% Voltage Dips 50, 100, 200ms, 1s, 40s. Performance criteria - Class C. AC Auxiliary Supply 60% Voltage Dips 2, 5, 10, 20ms. Performance criteria - Class A.
P341/EN TD/D22 Page 14/42 AC Auxiliary Supply 60% Voltage Dips 50, 100, 200ms, 1s, 40s. Performance criteria - Class C. AC Auxiliary Supply 30% Voltage Dips 2, 5, 10, 20ms. Performance criteria - Class A. AC Auxiliary Supply 30% Voltage Dips 50, 100, 200ms, 1s, 40s. Performance criteria - Class C. 5.4 High frequency disturbance IEC 60255-22-1:1988 Class III. 1MHz burst disturbance test. 2.5kV common mode.
Power supply, field voltage, CTs, VTs, opto inputs, output contacts, IRIG-B and terminal block communications connections. 1kV differential mode. Power supply, field voltage, CTs, VTs, opto inputs and output contacts. Performance criteria Class A. 5.5 Fast transients IEC 60255-22-4:1992 (EN 61000-4-4:1995), Class III and Class IV. 2kV 5kHz (Class III) and 4kV 2.5kHz (Class IV) direct coupling. Power supply, field voltage, opto inputs, output contacts, CTs, VTs. 2kV 5kHz (Class III) and 4kV 2.5kHz (Class IV) capacitive clamp. IRIG-B and terminal block communications connections. Performance criteria Class A. 5.6 5.6.1 Conducted/radiated emissions Conducted emissions EN 55011:1998 Class A, EN 55022:1994 Class A. 0.15 - 0.5MHz, 79dBV (quasi peak) 66dBV (average). 0.5 - 30MHz, 73dBV (quasi peak) 60dBV (average). 5.6.2 Radiated emissions EN 55011:1998 Class A, EN 55022:1994 Class A. 30 - 230MHz, 40dBV/m at 10m measurement distance. 230 - 1000MHz, 47dBV/m at 10m measurement distance.
Technical Data MiCOM P341 5.7 5.7.1 Conducted/radiated immunity Conducted immunity EN 61000-4-6:1996 Level 3.
10V emf @ 1kHz 80% am, 150kHz to 80MHz. Spot tests at 27MHz, 68MHz. Performance criteria Class A. 5.7.2 Radiated immunity IEC 60255-22-3:1989 Class III (EN 61000-4-3: 1997 Level 3). 10 V/m 80MHz - 1GHz @ 1kHz 80% am. Spot tests at 80MHz, 160MHz, 450MHz, 900MHz. Performance criteria Class A. 5.7.3 Radiated immunity from digital radio telephones ENV 50204:1995 10 V/m 900MHz 5 MHz and 1.89GHz 5MHz, 200Hz rep. Freq., 50% duty cycle pulse modulated. Performance criteria Class A. 5.8 Electrostatic discharge IEC 60255-22-2:1996 Class 3 & Class 4. Class 4: 15kV air discharge. Class 3: 6kV contact discharge. Tests carried out both with and without cover fitted. Performance criteria Class A. 5.9 Surge immunity IEC 61000-4-5:1995 Level 4. 4kV common mode 12 source impedance, 2kV differential mode 2 source impedance. Power supply, field voltage, VTs. The CT inputs are immune to all levels of common mode surge as per IEC 61000-45: 1995 Level 4. Total immunity to differential surges to Level 4 can be achieved by adding a time delay of at least 20ms. Note, routing the CT wires as a pair reduces the likelihood of a differential surge. 4kV common mode 42 source impedance, 2kV differential mode 42 source impedance. Opto inputs, output contacts. 4kV common mode 2 source impedance applied to cable screen. Terminal block communications connections and IRIG-B. Performance criteria Class A under reference conditions.
P341/EN TD/D22 Page 16/42 5.10 Power frequency magnetic field IEC 61000-4-8:1994 Level 5.
100A/m field applied continuously in all planes for the EUT in a quiescent state and tripping state 1000A/m field applied for 3s in all planes for the EUT in a quiescent state and tripping state Performance criteria Class A. 5.11 Power frequency interference NGTS* 2.13 Issue 3 April 1998, section 5.5.6.9. 500V rms. common mode. 250V rms. differential mode. Voltage applied to all non-mains frequency inputs. Permanently connected communications circuits tested to Class 3 (100-1000m) test level 50mV Performance criteria Class A. * National Grid Technical Specification 5.12 Surge withstand capability (SWC) ANSI/IEEE C37.90.1 (1990) (Reaff. 1994) Oscillatory SWC Test. 2.5kV 3kV, 1 - 1.5MHz - common and differential mode applied to all circuits except for IRIG-B and terminal block communications, which are tested common mode only via the cable screen. Fast Transient SWC Tests 4 - 5kV crest voltage - common and differential mode - applied to all circuits except for IRIG-B and terminal block communications, which are tested common mode only via the cable screen. Performance criteria Class A 5.13 Radiated immunity ANSI/IEEE C37.90.2 1995 35 V/m 25MHz - 1GHz no modulation applied to all sides. 35 V/m 25MHz - 1GHz, 100% pulse modulated, front only. Performance criteria Class A.
6.
6.1
ATMOSPHERIC ENVIRONMENT
Temperature IEC 60068-2-1:1990/A2:1994 - Cold IEC 60068-2-2:1974/A2:1994 - Dry heat IEC 60255-6:1988. Operating Temperature Range C (Time Period in Hours) Cold Temperature -25 (96) Dry Heat Temperature 55 (96) Storage Temperature Range C (Time Period in Hours) Cold Temperature -25 (96) Dry Heat Temperature 70 (96)
6.2
Humidity IEC 60068-2-3:1969 Damp heat, steady state, 40 C 2 C and 93% relative humidity (RH) +2% -3%, duration 56 days. IEC 60068-2-30:1980. Damp heat cyclic, six (12 + 12 hour cycles) of 55C 2C 93% 3% RH and 25C 3C 93% 3% RH.
6.3
Enclosure protection IEC 60529:1989. IP52 Category 2. IP5x Protected against dust, limited ingress permitted. IPx2 Protected against vertically falling drops of water with the product in 4 fixed positions of 15 tilt with a flow rate of 3mm/minute for 2.5 minutes.
7.
7.1
MECHANICAL ENVIRONMENT
Performance criteria The following two classes of performance criteria are used within sections to (where applicable) to specify the performance of the MiCOM relay when subjected to mechanical testing.
P341/EN TD/D22 Page 18/42 7.1.1 Severity classes
The following table details the Class and Typical Applications of the vibration, shock bump and seismic tests detailed previously: Class 1 Typical Application Measuring relays and protection equipment for normal use in power plants, substations and industrial plants and for normal transportation conditions Measuring relays and protection equipment for which a very high security margin is required or where the vibration (shock and bump) (seismic shock) levels are very high, e.g. shipboard application and for severe transportation conditions.
7.1.2
Vibration (sinusoidal) IEC 60255-21-1:1988 Cross over frequency - 58 to 60 Hz Vibration response Severity Class 2 Peak Displacement Below Cross Over Frequency (mm) 0.075 Peak Acceleration Above Cross Over Frequency (gn) 1 Number of Sweeps in Each Axis 1 Frequency Range (Hz) 10 150
Vibration endurance Severity Class 2 7.1.3 Shock and bump IEC 60255-21-2:1988 IEC 60255-21-2:1988 Type of Test Shock Response Shock withstand Bump 7.1.4 Seismic IEC 60255-21-3:1993 Cross over frequency - 8 to 9Hz x = horizontal axis, y = vertical axis Severity Class 2 1 1 Peak Acceleration ( gn) 10 15 10 Duration of Pulse ( ms ) 11 11 16 Number of Pulses in Each Direction 3 3 1000 Peak Acceleration (gn) 2.0 Number of Sweeps in Each Axis 20 Frequency Range (Hz) 10 150
Technical Data MiCOM P341 Peak Displacement Below Cross Over Frequency (mm) x 2 7.5 y 3.5 Peak Acceleration Above Cross Over Frequency (gn) x 2.0 y 1.0 1
Severity Class
Number of Sweep Cycles in Each Axis
Frequency Range (Hz) 1- 35
8.
EC EMC COMPLIANCE
Compliance to the European Community Directive 89/336/EEC amended by 93/68/EEC is claimed via the Technical Construction File route. The Competent Body has issued a Technical Certificate and a Declaration of Conformity has been completed. The following Generic Standards used to establish conformity: EN 50081-2:1994 EN 50082-2:1995.
9.
EC LVD COMPLIANCE
Compliance with European Community Directive on Low Voltage 73/23/EEC is demonstrated by reference to generic safety standards: EN 61010-1:1993/A2: 1995 EN 60950:1992/A11 1997
10.
10.1
PROTECTION FUNCTIONS
Three phase non-directional/directional overcurrent protection (50/51) (67)
10.1.1 Setting ranges Setting >1 Current Set >2 Current Set >3 Current Set >4 Current Set Stage 1st Stage 2nd Stage 3rd Stage 4th Stage Range 0.08 - 4.0n 0.08 - 4.0n 0.08 - 32n 0.08 - 32n Step Size 0.01n 0.01n 0.01n 0.01n
Directional overcurrent settings: Range Relay characteristic angle -95 to +95 Step Size 1
The directional elements polarising is fixed and uses a cross polarised quantity, if the polarising voltage falls to less than 0.5V synchronous memory polarising is available for 3.2s.
P341/EN TD/D22 Page 20/42 10.1.2 Time delay settings
Each overcurrent element has an independent time setting and each time delay is capable of being blocked by an optically isolated input: Element 1st Stage 2nd Stage 3rd Stage 4th Stage Time Delay Type Definite Time (DT) or IDMT DT or IDMT DT DT
Curve Type IEC / UK curves All other 10.1.3 Transient overreach and overshoot 10.1.3.1Accuracy Additional tolerance due to increasing X/R ratios Overshoot of overcurrent elements 10.2 Inverse time (IDMT) characteristic
Reset Time Delay DT only IDMT or DT
5% over the X/R ratio of 1 to 90 <30ms
IDMT characteristics are selectable from a choice of four IEC/UK and five IEEE/US curves as shown in the table below. The IEC/UK IDMT curves conform to the following formula: K + L t = T x (/ ) - 1 s The IEEE/US IDMT curves conform to the following formula: K + L TD t = x (/ ) - 1 7 s
where t K S L T TD = operation time = constant = measured current = current threshold setting = constant = ANSI/IEEE constant (zero for IEC/UK curves) = time multiplier setting for IEC/UK curves = time dial setting for IEEE/US curves
Technical Data MiCOM P341 IDMT characteristics IDMT Curve Description Standard inverse Very inverse Extremely inverse Long time inverse Moderately inverse Very inverse Extremely inverse Inverse Short time inverse Standard IEC IEC IEC UK IEEE IEEE IEEE US-C08 US-C02 K Constant 0.14 13.5 80 120 0.0515 19.61 28.2 5.95 0.02394
Constant 0.02 1 2 1 0.02 2 2 2 0.02
L Constant 0 0 0 0 0.114 0.491 0.1217 0.18 0.01694
The IEC extremely inverse curve becomes definite time at currents greater than 20 x setting. The IEC standard, very and long time inverse curves become definite time at currents greater than 30 x setting. 10.2.1 Time multiplier settings for IEC/UK curves Name TMS 10.2.1.1Time dial settings for IEEE/US curves Name TD 10.2.1.2Definite time characteristic Element All stages 10.2.1.3Reset characteristics For all IEC/UK curves, the reset characteristic is definite time only. For all IEEE/US curves, the reset characteristic can be selected as either inverse curve or definite time. The definite time can be set (as defined in IEC) to zero. Range 0 to 100 seconds in steps of 0.01 seconds. The Inverse Reset characteristics are dependent upon the selected IEEE/US IDMT curve as shown in the table below. All inverse reset curves conform to the following formula: tr TD tReset = x 1 - (/ ) 7 s Range 0 to 100s Step Size 10ms Range 0.5 to 15 Step Size 0.1 Range 0.025 to 1.2 Step Size 0.025
P341/EN TD/D22 Page 22/42 Where tReset = tr S TD = = = = = reset time constant measured current current threshold setting constant
time dial Setting (same setting as that employed by IDMT curve) Standard IEEE IEEE IEEE US-C08 US-C02 tr Constant 4.85 21.6 29.1 5.95 2.261 Constant 2 2 2 2 2
IEEE/US IDMT Curve Description Moderately Inverse Very Inverse Extremely Inverse Inverse Short Time Inverse Inverse Reset Characteristics 10.2.2 Accuracy Pick-up Drop-off Minimum trip level of IDMT elements IDMT characteristic shape IEEE reset DT operation DT reset
Setting 5% 0.95 x Setting 5% 1.05 x Setting 5% 5% or 40ms whichever is greater (under reference conditions)* 5% or 40ms whichever is greater 2% or 50ms whichever is greater 5% 2 hysteresis 2 IEC 60255-3 1998 IEEE C37.112 1996 UK curves US curves
Directional boundary accuracy (RCA 90) Characteristic
Reference conditions TMS=1, TD=7 and > setting of 1A, operating range 2-20n
IEC Curves
1000
100
Operating Time (s)
10
Curve 4 Curve 1
1
Curve 2 Curve 3
0.1 1.0 10.0 Current (Multiples of Is)
Curve 1 Curve 2 Curve 3 Curve 4 Standard inverse Very inverse Extremely inverse UK long time inverse
P2136ENa
100.0
Figure 1:
IEC inverse time curves
Amercian Curves
100
10
Operating Time (s)
Curve 5 Curve 6 Curve 9 Curve 7 Curve 8
0.1 1.0
10.0 Current (Multiples of Is)
100.0
Curve 5 Curve 6 Curve 7 Curve 8 Curve 9

Figure 2:
IEEE moderately inverse IEEE very inverse IEEE extremely inverse US inverse US short time inverse
P2137ENa
American inverse time curves
Technical Data MiCOM P341 10.3
Earth fault & sensitive earth fault protection (50N/51N) (67N) (64) There are two standard earth fault elements, Earth Fault 1 uses measured quantities, Earth Fault 2 uses derived quantities.
10.3.1 Setting ranges 10.3.1.1Earth fault, sensitive earth fault Range Earth Fault 1 (Measured) N1>1 Current Set N1>2 Current Set N1>3 Current Set N1>4 Current Set Earth Fault 2 (Derived) N2>1 Current Set N2>2 Current Set N2>3 Current Set N2>4 Current Set Sensitive Earth Fault (Measured) SEF>1 Current Set SEF>2 Current Set SEF>3 Current Set SEF>4 Current Set 0.08 - 4.0n 0.08 - 4.0n 0.08 - 32n 0.08 - 32n 0.08 - 4.0n 0.08 - 4.0n 0.08 - 32n 0.08 - 32n 0.005 - 0.1n 0.005 - 0.1n 0.005 - 0.8n 0.005 - 0.8n Step Size 0.01n 0.01n 0.01n 0.01n 0.01n 0.01n 0.01n 0.01n 0.00025n 0.00025n 0.001n 0.001n
10.3.1.2Polarising quantities for earth fault measuring elements The polarising quantity for earth fault elements can be either zero sequence or negative sequence values. This can be set independently set for Earth Fault 1 and Earth Fault 2. Characteristic Angle Settings Setting N1> Char angle N2> Char angle SEF> Char angle Zero Sequence Voltage Polarisation Setting N1>VNpol Set (Vn = 100/120 V) N1>VNpol Set (Vn = 380/480 V) Negative Sequence Polarisation Setting N1>2pol Set N1>V2pol Set (Vn = 100/120 V) N1>V2pol Set (Vn = 380/480 V) Range 0.08 - 1.0n 0.5 25V 2.0 100V Step Size 0.01n 0.5V 2V Range 0.5 80V 2.0 320V Step Size 0.5V 2V Range -95 to +95 -95 to +95 -95 to +95 Step Size 1 1 1
P341/EN TD/D22 Page 26/42 10.3.1.3Restricted earth fault (low impedance) Setting REF> K1 REF> K2 REF> s1 REF> s2 Range 0% to 20% 0% to 150% 8% to 100% n 10% to 150% n
Step Size 1% (minimum) 1% (minimum) 1% n 1% n
I DIFF
Trip k2
IS1
k1 I S2
No Trip
I BIAS
P2171ENb
Figure 3:
Biased REF characteristic
10.3.1.4Restricted earth fault (high impedance) The High Impedance Restricted Earth Fault protection is mutually exclusive with the Sensitive Earth Fault protection as the same sensitive current input is used. This element should be used in conjunction with an external stabilising resistor. Setting REF> K1 10.3.2 EF and SEF time delay characteristics The earth-fault measuring elements for EF and SEF are followed by an independently selectable time delay. These time delays are identical to those of the Phase Overcurrent time delay. The reset time delay is also the same as the Phase overcurrent reset time. 10.3.3 Wattmetric SEF settings (zero sequence power settings) If Wattmetric SEF is selected an additional zero sequence power threshold is applied, this is settable according to the following table: Name PN> Setting Range 0 - 20W (Rating = 1A, 100/120V) 0 - 100W (Rating = 5A, 100/120V) 0 - 80W (Rating = 1A, 380/440V) 0 - 400W (Rating = 5A, 380/440V) Step Size 0.05W 0.25W 0.20W 1W Range 0% to 20% Step Size 1% (minimum)
Technical Data MiCOM P341 10.3.4 Accuracy 10.3.4.1Earth fault 1 Pick-up Drop-off Minimum trip level of IDMT elements IDMT characteristic shape IEEE reset DT operation DT reset Repeatability Setting 5% 0.95 x Setting 5% 1.05 x Setting 5%
5% or 40ms whichever is greater (under reference conditions)* 5% or 40ms whichever is greater 2% or 50ms whichever is greater 5% 2.5%
* Reference conditions TMS=1, TD=7 and N> setting of 1A, operating range 2-20n. 10.3.4.2Earth fault 2 Pick-up Drop-off Minimum trip level of IDMT elements IDMT characteristic shape IEEE reset DT operation DT reset Repeatability Setting 5% >0.85 x Setting 1.05 x Setting 5% 5% or 40ms whichever is greater (under reference conditions)* 10% or 40ms whichever is greater 2% or 50ms whichever is greater 2% or 50ms whichever is greater 5%
* Reference conditions TMS=1, TD=7 and N> setting of 1A, operating range 2 - 20n. 10.3.4.3SEF Pick-up Drop-off Minimum trip level of IDMT elements IDMT characteristic shape IEEE reset DT operation DT reset Repeatability Setting 5% 0.95 x Setting 5% 1.05 x Setting 5% 5% or 40ms whichever is greater (under reference conditions)* 7.5% or 60ms whichever is greater 2% or 50ms whichever is greater 5% 5%
Reference conditions TMS=1, TD=7 and N> setting of 100mA, operating range 2-20s.
P341/EN TD/D22 Page 28/42 10.3.4.4REF Pick-up Drop-off Low impedance operating time High impedance pick-up High impedance operating time Repeatability 10.3.4.5Wattmetric SEF Pick-up Drop-off Boundary accuracy Repeatability 10.3.4.6Polarising quantities Zero Sequence Polarising Operating boundary pick-up Hysteresis VN> Pick-up VN> Drop-off Negative Sequence Polarising Operating boundary pick-up Hysteresis V2> Pick-up V2> Drop-off 2> Pick-up 2> Drop-off 10.4 2of RCA 90 <3 Setting 10% 0.9 x Setting 10% Setting 10% 0.9 x Setting 10% 2of RCA 90 <3 Setting 10% 0.9 x Setting 10% For P=0W For P>0W For P=0W For P>0W SEF> 5% P> 5% (0.95 x SEF>) 5% 0.9 x P> 5% 5% with 1 hysteresis 5% Setting formula 5%
0.80 x Setting formula 5% <60ms Setting 5% <30ms <15%
Neutral displacement/residual overvoltage (59N)
10.4.1 Setting ranges Name VN>1 (Vn 100/120V) VN>2 (Vn 100/120V) VN>1 (Vn 380/480V) VN>2 (Vn 380/480V) Range 1 80V 1 80V 4 320V 4 320V Step Size 1V 1V 4V 4V
Technical Data MiCOM P341 10.4.2 Time delay settings
The inverse characteristic for VN>1 shall be given by the following formula : t = where K t M = = = Time multiplier setting operating time in seconds Applied input voltage/relay setting voltage (Vs) Range TMS setting (K) DT reset setting 10.4.3 Accuracy Pick-up Drop-off IDMT characteristic shape DT operation Reset Repeatability 10.5 Under voltage (27) For DT Start For IDMT Start Setting 5% 1.05 x Setting 5% 0.95 x Setting 5% 5% or 60ms whichever is greater 2% or 20ms whichever is greater Instantaneous operation <55ms <35ms <5% 0.5 100s 0 100s Step Size 0.5 0.01s K (M - 1)
10.5.1 Level settings Name V<1 & V<2 (Vn = 100/120V) V<1 & V<2 (Vn = 380/480V) Range 10 120V 40 480V Step Size 1V 4V
10.5.2 Under voltage protection time delay characteristics Under voltage measuring elements are followed by an independently selectable time delay. The first element have time delay characteristics selectable as either Inverse Time or Definite Time. The remaining element shall have an associated Definite Time delay setting. Each measuring element time delay is capable of being blocked by the operation of a user defined logic (optical isolated) input.
P341/EN TD/D22 Page 30/42 The inverse characteristic shall be given by the following formula : t = where K t M = = = Time multiplier setting operating time in seconds Applied input voltage/relay setting voltage (Vs) Range DT setting TMS Setting (K) Definite time and TMS setting ranges. 10.5.3 Accuracy Pick-up Drop-off IDMT characteristic shape DT operation Reset Repeatability 10.6 Over voltage (59) For DT Start For IDMT Start Setting 5% 0.95 x Setting 5% 1.05 x Setting 5% 0 100s 0.5 100 K (1 - M)
Step Size 0.01s 0.5
2% or 50ms whichever is greater 2% or 50ms whichever is greater <75ms <1%
10.6.1 Level settings Name V>1 & V>2 (Vn = 100/120V) V>1 & V>2 (Vn = 380/480V) Range 60 185V 240 740V Step Size 1V 4V
10.6.2 Over voltage protection time delay characteristics Over voltage measuring elements are followed by an independently selectable time delay. The first elements have time delay characteristics selectable as either Inverse Time or Definite Time. The remaining element shall have an associated Definite Time delay setting. Each measuring element time delay is capable of being blocked by the operation of a user defined logic (optical isolated) input. The inverse characteristics are given by the following formula: t = K (M - 1)
Technical Data MiCOM P341 where K T M = = = Time multiplier setting Operating time in seconds Applied input voltage/relay setting voltage (Vs) Range DT setting TMS Setting (K) Definite time and TMS setting ranges 10.6.3 Accuracy Pick-up Drop-off IDMT characteristic shape DT operation Reset 10.7 Under frequency (81U) Settings f (for all stages) t (for all stages) 10.7.1 Accuracy Pick-up Drop-off DT operation Setting 0.01Hz Range 45 65 Hz 0 100s For DT Start For IDMT Start Setting 5% 1.05 x Setting 5% 0.95 x Setting 5% 0 100s 0.5 100s
Step Size 0.01s 0.5
2% or 50ms whichever is greater 2% or 50ms whichever is greater <75ms
Step Size 0.01 Hz 0.01s
(Setting + 0.025Hz) 0.01Hz 2% or 50ms whichever is greater*
* The operating will also include a time for the relay to frequency track (20Hz/second) 10.8 Over frequency (81O) Settings f (for all stages) t (for all stages) 10.8.1 Accuracy Pick-up Drop-off DT operation Setting 0.01Hz (Setting - 0.025Hz) 0.01Hz 2% or 50ms whichever is greater* Range 45 65 Hz 0 100s Step Size 0.01 Hz 0.01s
* The operating will also include a time for the relay to frequency track 20Hz/second)
P341/EN TD/D22 Page 32/42 10.9 Reverse power/low forward power/over power (32R /32L /32O) Settings Stage 1 Mode Enable/disable Reverse/low forward/over 14W 40W (n=1A, Vn=100/120V) 56W 160W (n=1A, Vn=380/480V) 70W 200W (n=5A, Vn=100/120V) 280W 800W (n=5A, Vn=380/480V) Equivalent Range in %Pn 8% - 21% 14W 40W (n=1A, Vn=100/120V) 56W 160W (n=1A, Vn=380/480V) 70W 200W (n=5A, Vn=100/120V) 280W 800W (n=5A, Vn=380/480V) Equivalent Range in %Pn 8% - 21% 14W 300W (n=1A, Vn=100/120V) 56W 1200W (n=1A, Vn=380/480V) 70W 1500W (n=5A, Vn=100/120V) 280W 6000W (n=5A, Vn=380/480V) Equivalent Range in %Pn 8% - 157% DT DO Timer Stage 2 10.9.1 Accuracy Pick-up Drop-off Reverse/Over Power Low forward Power Setting 10% 0.95 of setting 10% 1.05 of setting 10% 0 100s 0 100s Same as Stage 1 Range
Step Size
P> (reverse power)
2W 8W 10W 40W 1% 2W 8W 10W 40W 1% 2W 8W 10W 40W 1% 0.01s 0.01s
P< (low forward power
P> (over power)
Pick-up (angle variation) Drop-off (angle variation) Operating time Repeatability Disengagement time tRESET Instantaneous operating time
Expected pick-up angle 1 degree Expected drop-off angle 2.5 degree 2% or 50ms whichever is greater <5% <50ms 5% <50ms
Technical Data MiCOM P341 10.10
Sensitive reverse power/low forward power/over power (32R /32L /32O) Settings Stage 1 Mode Enable/disable Reverse/low forward/over 0.3W 15W (n=1A, Vn=100/120V) 1.2W 60W (n=1A, Vn=380/480V) P> (reverse power) 1.5W 75W (n=5A, Vn=100/120V) 6.0W 300W (n=5A, Vn=380/480V) Equivalent range in %Pn 0.5% 23% 0.3W 15W (n=1A, Vn=100/120V) 1.2W 60W (n=1A, Vn=380/480V) P< (low forward power) 1.5W 75W (n=5A, Vn=100/120V) 6.0W 300W (n=5A, Vn=380/480V) Equivalent range in %Pn 0.5% 23% 0.3W 100W (n=1A, Vn=100/120V) 1.2W 400W (n=1A, Vn=380/480V) P> (over power) 1.5W 500W (n=5A, Vn=100/120V) 6.0W 2000W (n=5A, Vn=380/480V) Equivalent range in %Pn 0.5% 157% DT DO Timer Compensation angle C Stage 2 -5 5 Same as Stage 1 0 100s 0 100s 0.1W 0.4W 0.5W 2.0W 0.2% 0.1W 0.4W 0.5W 2.0W 0.2% 0.1W 0.4W 0.5W 2.0W 0.2% 0.01s 0.01s 0.1 Range Step Size
10.10.1 Accuracy Pick-up Drop-off Reverse/Over Power Low forward Power Setting 10% 0.9 of setting 10% 1.1 of setting 10% Expected pick-up angle 2 degree Expected drop-off angle 2.5 degree 2% or 50ms whichever is greater <5% <50ms 5% <50ms
Pick-up (angle variation) Drop-off (angle variation) Operating time Repeatability Disengagement time tRESET Instantaneous operating time
P341/EN TD/D22 Page 34/42 10.11 Rate of change of frequency
10.11.1 Setting range Settings df/dt Status df/dt Setting df/dt Time Delay df/dt f Low df/dt f High 10.11.2 Accuracy Pick-up Operating time Lower deadband operating time Upper deadband operating time Operation over deadband Repeatability 10.12 Reconnection time delay Setting 0.5Hz/s 2% or 160ms whichever is greater 2% or 160ms whichever is greater 2% or 160ms whichever is greater 2% or 170ms whichever is greater <5% Range Enable/Disable 0.1 10Hz/s 0 100s 45 65Hz 45 65Hz 0.01Hz 0.01s 0.01Hz 0.01Hz Step Size
10.12.1 Setting range Settings Reconnect Status Reconnect Reconnect delay Reconnect pulse 10.12.2 Accuracy Operating time 10.13 Voltage vector shift 2% or 50ms whichever is greater Range Enable/Disable 0.1 10Hz/s 0 300s 0.03 30s 0.01Hz 0.01s 0.01s Step Size
10.13.1 Setting range Settings V Shift Status V shift angle 10.13.2 Accuracy Pick-up Trip pulse Setting 0.5 500ms 2% Range Enable/Disable 2 30 1 Step Size
Technical Data MiCOM P341 10.14 Thermal overload (49) Settings Thermal I> Thermal Alarm T-heating T-cooling M Factor 10.14.1 Accuracy Pick-up Thermal alarm Thermal overload Cooling time accuracy Repeatability Range 0.5 - 1.5 n 20 -100% 1 - 200 minutes 1 - 200 minutes 0 - 10
Step Size 0.01n 1% 1 minute 1 minute 1
Calculated trip time 5% Calculated trip time 5% 5% of theoretical <2.5%
11.
11.1
SUPERVISORY FUNCTIONS
Voltage transformer supervision Name Negative phase sequence voltage threshold (V2) Phase overvoltage Superimposed current VTS 2> Inhibit VTS > Inhibit VTS Time Delay Range 10V (100/120V) 40V (380/480V) P.U.30V, D.O. 10V (100/120V) P.U.120V, D.O.40V (380/480V) 0.1 n 0.05 n to 0.5 n 0.08 n to 32 n 1.0 10s Step Size Fixed Fixed Fixed 0.01 n 0.01 n 0.1s
11.1.1 Accuracy Fast block operation Fast block reset Time delay <25ms <30ms Setting 2% or 20ms whichever is greater
P341/EN TD/D22 Page 36/42 11.2 Current transformer supervision
The N and VN thresholds take the same values as set for the directional earth fault element. Settings VN < N> Time delay t CTS time delay 11.2.1 Accuracy Pick-up Drop-off N> VN < N> VN < Setting 5% Setting 5% 0.9 x Setting 5% (1.05 x Setting) 5% or 1V whichever is greater Setting 2% or 20ms whichever is greater < 1 cycle < 35ms Range 0.5 - 22V (Vn = 100/120V) 2 - 88V (Vn = 380 / 440V) 0.08n - 4n 0 - 10s 0 - 10s Step Size 0.5V 2V 0.01n 1s 1s
Time delay operation CTS block operation CTS reset
12.
12.1
PROGRAMMABLE SCHEME LOGIC

Level settings Settings Time delay t Range 0-14400000ms (4 hrs) Step Size 1ms
12.2
Accuracy Output conditioner timer Dwell conditioner timer Pulse conditioner timer Setting 2% or 50ms whichever is greater Setting 2% or 50ms whichever is greater Setting 2% or 50ms whichever is greater
13.
13.1
MEASUREMENTS AND RECORDING FACILITIES

Measurements Accuracy under reference conditions. Measurand Current Voltage Power (W) Reactive Power (VArs) Apparent Power (VA) Energy (Wh) Energy (Varh) Phase accuracy Frequency Range 0.05 to 3 n 0.05 to 2 Vn 0.2 to 2 Vn 0.05 to 3 n 0.2 to 2 Vn 0.05 to 3 n 0.2 to 2 Vn 0.05 to 3 n 0.2 to 2 Vn 0.2 to 3 n 0.2 to 2 Vn 0.2 to 3 n 0 to 360 5 to 70Hz Accuracy 1.0% of reading 1.0% of reading 5% of reading at unity power factor 5% of reading at zero power factor 5% of reading 5% of reading at zero power factor 5% of reading at zero power factor 0.5 0.025Hz
13.2
IRIG-B and real time clock
13.2.1 Features Real time 24 hour clock settable in hours, minutes and seconds Calendar settable from January 1994 to December 2092 Clock and calendar maintained via battery after loss of auxiliary supply Internal clock synchronisation using IRIG-B Interface for IRIG-B signal is BNC 13.2.2 Performance Year 2000 Real time clock accuracy Modulation ratio Input signal peak-peak amplitude Input impedance at 1000 Hz External clock synchronisation Compliant < 1 seconds / day 1/3 or 1/6 200 mV to 20 V 6000 Conforms to IRIG standard 200-98, format B12X
14.
14.1
DISTURBANCE RECORDS
Level settings Settings Duration Trigger position Range 0.1 10.5s 0 100% Step Size 10ms 0.1%
8 analogue channels, 32 digital channels, single or extended trigger modes 14.2 Accuracy Magnitude and relative phases Duration Trigger position 5% of applied quantities 2% 2% (minimum trigger 100ms)
15.
15.1
PLANT SUPERVISION
CB state monitoring control and condition monitoring
15.1.1 CB monitor settings Setting

Broken ^ (mult) ^ Maintenance ^ Lockout No CB Ops maintenance No CB Ops lockout CB time maintenance CB time lockout Fault frequency count Fault frequency time
Range
12 1 25000 (x (CT ratio^mult)) A 1 25000 (x (CT ratio^mult)) A 1 10000 1 10000 0.005 0.5s 0.005 0.5s 0 9999 0 9999
Step
0.1 1 (x (CT ratio^mult)) A 1 (x (CT ratio^mult)) A 1 1 0.001s 0.001s 1 1
15.1.2 CB control settings Setting Man close RstDly 15.1.3 Accuracy Timers Broken current accuracy 2% or 20ms whichever is greater 5% Range 0.01 600s Step 0.01s
Technical Data MiCOM P341 15.2 CB fail and backtrip breaker fail
15.2.1 Timer settings Setting CB fail 1 timer CB fail 2 timer The timers are reset by: undercurrent elements operating, or initiating element drop-off (loss of external initiating signal), or circuit breaker open auxiliary contact. (If current operation/external device is not applicable) Range 0 10s 0 10s Step 0.01s 0.01s
15.2.2 Timer accuracy Timers Reset time 15.2.3 Undercurrent settings Name Phase < Earth N< Sensitive Earth SEF< 15.2.4 Undercurrent accuracy Pick-up Operating time Reset 10% or 25mA whichever is the greater <12ms (Typical <10ms) <15ms (Typical <10ms) Range 0.02 - 3.2 n 0.02 - 3.2 n 0.001 - 0.8 n Step Size 0.01 n 0.01 n 0.0005 n 2% or 40ms whichever is greater <30ms
16.
16.1
INPUT AND OUTPUT SETTING RANGES

CT and VT ratio settings The primary and secondary rating can be independently set for each set of CT or VT inputs, for example the earth fault CT ratio can be different to that used for the phase currents. Primary Range Current transformer Voltage transformer 1 to 30000 Amps step size 1A 100V to 1000 kV step size 1V Secondary Range 1 or 5 Amps 80 to 140V (Vn = 100/120V) 320 to 560V (Vn = 380/480V)
17.
BATTERY LIFE
Battery life (assuming relay energised for 90% of time) > 10 years 1/2 AA size 3.6 V lithium thionyl chloride battery (SAFT advanced battery reference LS14250)
18.
FREQUENCY RESPONSE
With the exception of the RMS measurements all other measurements and protection functions are based on the Fourier derived fundamental component. The fundamental component is extracted by using a 24 sample Discrete Fourier Transform (DFT). This gives good harmonic rejection for frequencies up to the 23rd harmonic. The 23rd is the first predominant harmonic that is not attenuated by the Fourier filter and this is known as an Alias. However, the Alias is attenuated by approximately 85% by an additional, analogue, anti-aliasing filter (low pass filter). The combined affect of the anti-aliasing and Fourier filters is shown below:
1.2 Magnitude (per unit) 1 0.8 0.6 0.4 0.2 0 0 5 10 Harmonic
P1124ENa
Power frequency (eg 50/60 Hz)
Combined response of fourier and anti-aliasing filters
Anti-aliasing filter response
15
20
25
Figure 4:
Frequency response
For power frequencies that are not equal to the selected rated frequency the harmonics would not be attenuated to zero amplitude. For small deviations of 1Hz, this is not a problem but to allow for larger deviations, an improvement is obtained by the addition of frequency tracking. With frequency tracking the sampling rate of the analogue / digital conversion is automatically adjusted to match the applied signal. In the absence of a suitable signal to amplitude track, the sample rate defaults to the selected rated frequency (Fn). In the presence of a signal within the tracking range (5 to 70Hz), the relay will lock on to the signal and the measured frequency will coincide with the power frequency as labelled in the diagram above. The resulting outputs for harmonics up to the 23rd will be zero.
19.
LOCAL AND REMOTE COMMUNICATIONS

The following claims for Local & Remote Communications are applicable to the P34x range of generator relays.
19.1
Front port Setting Protocol Message format Baud rate Courier IEC 60870-5 FT1.2 19 200 bits/s
19.2
Rear port Rear Port Settings Physical links Setting Options EIA(RS)485 or Fibre optic EIA(RS)485 only 0 - 255 (step 1) 1 - 247 (step 1) 1 - 65519 (step 1) 9600 or 19200 bits/s 9600/19200/38400 bits/s 1200/2400/4800/9600/ 19200/38400 bits/s Inactivity timer Parity Measurement period Time sync 1 - 30 minutes (step 1) Odd, Even or None 1 - 60 minutes (step 1) Enabled / Disabled Setting Available For: IEC 60870-5-CS103 only Courier, Modbus and DNP3.0 IEC 60870-5-CS103 and Courier Modbus only DNP3.0 only IEC 60870-5-CS103 only Modbus, Courier DNP3.0 Not DNP3.0 Modbus or DNP3.0 IEC only DNP3.0
Remote address Modbus address DNP3.0 address Baud rate
19.2.1 Performance Front and rear ports conforming to Courier communication protocol Rear ports conforming to Modbus communication protocol Rear ports conforming to IEC 60870-5-CS103 communication protocol Rear ports conforming to DNP3.0 communication protocol Compliant Compliant Compliant Compliant
SCADA Communications MiCOM P341
P341/EN CT/D22
SCADA COMMUNICATIONS
P341/EN CT/D22
P341/EN CT/D22 Page 1/20
CONTENT
1. 2.
2.1 2.2 2.3 2.4 2.5 2.5.1 2.5.2 2.5.3 2.5.4 2.6 2.6.1 2.6.2 2.6.3 2.6.4 2.7 2.8
INTRODUCTION COURIER INTERFACE

Courier protocol Front courier port Supported command set Relay courier database Setting changes Method 1 Method 2 Relay settings Setting transfer mode Event extraction Automatic event extraction Event types Event format Manual event record extraction Disturbance record extraction Programmable logic settings
3 3
3 4 4 5 6 6 6 6 7 7 7 7 8 8 8 9
3.
3.1 3.2 3.3 3.4 3.5 3.5.1 3.5.2 3.5.3 3.6 3.6.1 3.6.2 3.6.3
MODBUS INTERFACE
Communication link Modbus functions Response codes Register mapping Event extraction Manual selection Automatic extraction Record data Disturbance record extraction Manual selection Automatic extraction Record data
10
10 10 11 11 11 11 12 12 13 13 13 14
P341/EN CT/D22 Page 2/20 3.7 3.7.1 3.7.2 3.7.3 Setting changes Password protection Control and support settings Protection and disturbance recorder settings
SCADA Communications MiCOM P341 14 14 15 15
4.
4.1 4.2 4.3 4.4 4.5 4.6 4.7 4.8 4.9 4.10
IEC60870-5-103 INTERFACE
Physical connection and link layer Initialisation Time synchronisation Spontaneous events General interrogation Cyclic measurements Commands Test mode Disturbance records Blocking of monitor/command direction
16
16 16 17 17 17 17 17 17 18 18
5.
5.1 5.2 5.3 5.4 5.5 5.6 5.7 5.7.1 5.7.2 5.7.3
DNP3 INTERFACE
DNP3 protocol DNP3 menu setting Object 1 binary inputs Object 10 binary outputs Object 20 binary counters Object 30 analogue input DNP3 configuration using MiCOM S1 Object 1 Object 20 Object 30
18
18 18 18 19 19 19 19 20 20 20
1.
INTRODUCTION
This section describes the remote interfaces of the MiCOM relay in enough detail to allow integration within a substation communication network. As has been outlined in earlier sections the relay supports a choice of one of three protocols via the rear communication interface. This is in addition to the front serial interface which supports the Courier protocol. The rear EIA(RS)485 interface is isolated and is suitable for permanent connection whichever protocol is selected. The advantage of this type of connection is that up to 32 relays can be daisy chained together using a simple twisted pair electrical connection. For each of the three protocol options the supported functions/commands will be listed together with the database definition. The operation of standard procedures such as extraction of event, fault and disturbance records or setting changes will also be described. It should be noted that the descriptions contained within this section do not aim to fully detail the protocol itself. The relevant documentation for the protocol should be referred to for this information. This section serves to describe the specific implementation of the protocol on the relay.
2.
2.1
COURIER INTERFACE
Courier protocol Courier is an AREVA T&D communication protocol. The concept of the protocol is that a standard set of commands are used to access a database of settings/data within the relay. This allows a generic master to be able to communicate with different slave devices. The application specific aspects are contained, within the database itself rather than the commands used to interrogate it. i.e. the master station does not need to be pre-configured. The same protocol can be used via two physical links K-Bus or EIA(RS)232; K-Bus is based on EIA(RS)485 voltage levels and is synchronous, the EIA(RS)232 interface uses IEC60870 FT1.2 (IEC60870) frame format. The relay supports an IEC60870 connection on the front, for one to one connection, this is not suitable for permanent connection. This interface uses a fixed baud rate, 11 bit frame and a fixed device address. The rear EIA(RS)485 interface is used to provide a permanent connection for K-Bus and allows multi-drop connection. It should be noted that although K-Bus is based on EIA(RS)485 voltage levels it is a synchronous protocol using FM0 encoding. It is not possible to use a standard EIA(RS)232 to EIA(RS)485 converter to convert IEC60870 to K-Bus. The following documentation should be referred to for a detailed description of the Courier protocol, command set and link description. R6509 R6510 R6511 R6512 K-Bus Interface Guide IEC60870 Interface Guide Courier Protocol Courier User Guide
P341/EN CT/D22 Page 4/20 2.2 Front courier port
The front EIA(RS)232 port supports the Courier protocol for one to one communication. It is designed for use during installation and commissioning/maintenance and is not suitable for permanent connection. Since this interface will not be used to link the relay to a substation communication system some of the features of Courier are not implemented. These are as follows: Automatic extraction of Event Records: Courier Status byte does not support the Event flag Sent Event/Accept Event commands are not implemented Automatic extraction of Disturbance records: Courier Status byte does not support the Disturbance flag Busy Response Layer: Courier Status byte does not support the Busy flag, the only response to a request will be the final data Fixed Address: The address of the front Courier port is always 1, the Change Device address command is not supported. It should be noted that although automatic extraction of event and disturbance records is not supported it is possible to manually access this data via the front port. 2.3 Supported command set The following Courier commands are supported by the relay: Protocol Layer Reset Remote Link Poll Status Poll Buffer* Low Level Commands Send Event* Accept Event* Send Block Store Block Identifier Store Block Footer Menu Browsing Get Column Headings Get Column Text Get Column Values Get Strings Get Text
SCADA Communications MiCOM P341 Get Value Get Column Setting Limits Setting Changes Enter Setting Mode Preload Setting Abort Setting Execute Setting Reset Menu Cell Set Value Control Commands Select Setting Group Change Device Address* Set Real Time Note: 2.4
Commands indicated with a * are not supported via the front Courier port.
Relay courier database The Courier database is two dimensional structure with each cell in the database being referenced by a row and column address. Both the column and the row can take a range from 0 to 255. Addresses in the database are specified as hexadecimal values, e.g. 0A02 is column 0A (10 decimal) row 02. Associated settings/data will be part of the same column, row zero of the column contains a text string to identify the contents of the column. Appendix A contains the complete database definition for the relay for each cell location the following information is stated: Cell Text Cell Datatype Cell value
Whether if the cell is settable, if so Minimum value Maximum value Step size Password Level required to allow setting changes String information (for Indexed String or Binary flag cells)
P341/EN CT/D22 Page 6/20 2.5 Setting changes (See Courier User Guide Chapter 9)
Courier provides two mechanisms for making setting changes, both of these are supported by the relay. Either method can be used for editing any of the settings within the relay database. 2.5.1 Method 1 This uses a combination of three commands to perform a settings change: Enter Setting Mode - checks that the cell is settable and returns the limits Preload Setting - Places a new value to the cell, this value is echoed to ensure that setting corruption has not taken place, the validity of the setting is not checked by this action. Execute Setting - Confirms the setting change, if the change is valid then a positive response will be returned, if the setting change fails then an error response will be returned. Abort Setting - This command can be used to abandon the setting change. This is the most secure method and is ideally suited to on-line editors as the setting limits are taken from the relay before the setting change is made. However this method can be slow if many settings are being changed as three commands are required for each change. 2.5.2 Method 2 The Set Value command can be used to directly change a setting, the response to this command will be either a positive confirm or an error code to indicate the nature of a failure. This command can be used to implement a setting more rapidly then the previous method, however the limits are not extracted from the relay. This method is most suitable for off-line setting editors such as MiCOM S1. 2.5.3 Relay settings There are three categories of settings within the relay database Control and Support Disturbance Recorder Protection Settings Group
Setting changes made to the control and support settings are implemented immediately and stored in non-volatile memory. Settings made to either the Disturbance recorder settings or the Protection Settings Groups are stored in scratchpad memory only and are not immediately implemented by the relay. To action setting changes made to these areas of the relay database the Save Changes cell in the Configuration column must be written to. This allows the changes to either be confirmed and stored within non-volatile memory or the setting changes to be aborted.
SCADA Communications MiCOM P341 2.5.4 Setting transfer mode
If it is necessary to transfer all of the relay settings to or from the relay a cell within the Communication System Data column can be used. This cell (location BF03) when set to 1 makes all of the relay settings visible. Any setting changes made with the relay set in this mode are stored in scratchpad memory (including control and support settings). When the value of BF03 is set back to 0 any setting changes are confirmed and stored in non-volatile memory. 2.6 Event extraction Events can be extracted either automatically (rear port only) or manually (either Courier port). For automatic extraction all events are extracted in sequential order using the standard Courier mechanism, this includes fault/maintenance data if appropriate. The manual approach allows the user to select events, faults or maintenance data at random from the stored records. 2.6.1 Automatic event extraction (See Chapter 7 Courier User Guide) This method is intended for continuous extraction of event and fault information as it is produced, it is only supported via the rear Courier port. When new event information is created the Event bit is set within the Status byte, this indicates to the Master device that event information is available. The oldest, unextracted event can be extracted from the relay using the Send Event command. The relay will respond with the event data, which will be either a Courier Type 0 or Type 3 event. The Type 3 event is used for fault records and maintenance records. Once an event has been extracted from the relay the Accept Event can be used to confirm that the event has been successfully extracted. If all events have been extracted then the event bit will reset, if there are more events still to be extracted the next event can be accessed using the Send Event command as before. 2.6.2 Event types Events will be created by the relay under the following circumstances: Change of state of output contact Change of state of opto input Protection element operation Alarm condition Setting Change Password entered/timed-out Fault Record (Type 3 Courier Event) Maintenance record (Type 3 Courier Event)
P341/EN CT/D22 Page 8/20 2.6.3 Event format
The Send Event command results in the following fields being returned by the relay: Cell Reference Timestamp Cell Text Cell Value
Appendix B contains a table of the events created by the relay and indicates how the contents of the above fields are interpreted. Fault records and Maintenance records will return a Courier Type 3 event which contains the above fields together with two additional fields: Event extraction column Event number
These events contain additional information which is extracted from the relay using the referenced extraction column. Row 01 of the extraction column contains a setting which allows the fault/maintenance record to be selected. This setting should be set to the event number value returned within the record, the extended data can be extracted from the relay by uploading the text and data from the column. 2.6.4 Manual event record extraction Column 01 of the database can be used for manual viewing of event, fault and maintenance records. The contents of this column will depend of the nature of the record selected. It is possible to select by event number, or to directly select a fault record or maintenance record. Event Record selection (Row 01) - This cell can be set to a value between 0 to 249 to select which of the 250 stored events is selected, 0 will select the most recent record; 249 the oldest stored record. For simple event records (Type 0) cells 0102 to 0105 contain the event details. A single cell is used to represent each of the event fields. If the event selected is a fault or maintenance record (Type 3) then the remainder of the column will contain the additional information. Fault Record Selection (Row 05) - This cell can be used to directly select a fault record using a value between 0 and 4 to select one of up to five stored fault records (0 will be the most recent fault and 4 will be the oldest). The column will then contain the details of the fault record selected. Maintenance Record Selection (Row F0) - This cell can be used to select a maintenance record using a value between 0 and 4 and operates in a similar way to the fault record selection. It should be noted that if this column is used to extract event information from the relay the number associated with a particular record will change when a new event or fault occurs. 2.7 Disturbance record extraction The stored disturbance records within the relay are accessible in a compressed format via the Courier interface. The records are extracted using column B4, it should be noted that cells required for extraction of uncompressed disturbance records are not supported.
Select Record Number (Row 01) - This cell can be used to select the record to be extracted. Record 0 will be the oldest unextracted record, older records will be assigned positive values, and negative values will be used for more recent records. To facilitate automatic extraction via the rear port the Disturbance bit of the Status byte is set by the relay whenever there are unextracted disturbance records. Once a record has been selected, using the above cell, the time and date of the record can be read from cell 02. The disturbance record itself can be extracted using the block transfer mechanism from cell B00B. It should be noted that the file extracted from the relay is in a compressed format, it will be necessary to use MiCOM S1 to decompress this file and save the disturbance record in the COMTRADE format. As has been stated the rear Courier port can be used to automatically extract disturbance records as they occur. This operates using the standard Courier mechanism defined in Chapter 8 of the Courier User Guide. The front Courier port does not support automatic extraction although disturbance record data can be extracted manually from this port. 2.8 Programmable logic settings The programmable logic settings can be uploaded from and downloaded to the relay using the block transfer mechanism defined in Chapter 12 of the Courier User Guide. The following cells are used to perform the extraction B204 Domain: Used to select either PSL settings (Upload or download) or PSL configuration data (Upload only) B208 Sub-Domain: Used to select the Protection Setting Group to be uploaded/downloaded. B20C Version: Used on a download to check the compatibility of the file to be downloaded with the relay. B21C Transfer Mode: Used to set-up the transfer process B120 Data Transfer Cell: Used to perform upload/download.
The Programmable scheme logic settings can be uploaded and downloaded to and from the relay using this mechanism. If it is necessary to edit the settings MiCOM S1 must be used as the data format is compressed. MiCOM S1 also performs checks on the validity of the settings before they are downloaded to the relay.
3.
MODBUS INTERFACE
The Modbus interface is a master/slave protocol, it is defined by MODICON Inc by the following document: Modicon Modbus Protocol Reference Guide PI-MBUS-300 Rev. E
3.1
Communication link This interface also uses the rear EIA(RS)485 port for communication using RTU mode communication rather than ASCII mode as this provides more efficient use of the communication bandwidth. This mode of communication is defined in page 7 of the Modbus Guide. The following parameters can be configured for this port using either the front panel interface or the front Courier port: Baud Rate Device Address Parity Inactivity Time
3.2
Modbus functions The following Modbus function codes are supported by the relay: 01 02 03 04 06 08 11 12 16 Read Coil Status Read Input Status Read Holding Registers Read Input Registers Preset Single Register Diagnostics Fetch Communication Event Counter Fetch Communication Event Log Preset Multiple Registers 127 max
These are interpreted by the MiCOM relay in the following way: 01 02 03 04 06 16 Read status of output contacts (0xxxx addresses) Read status of opto inputs (1xxxx addresses) Read Setting values (4xxxx addresses) Read Measured values (3xxxx addresses Write single setting value (4xxxx addresses) Write multiple setting values (4xxxx addresses)
SCADA Communications MiCOM P341 3.3 Response codes Code 01 02 Modbus description Illegal Function Code Illegal Data Address MiCOM interpretation
The function code transmitted is not supported by the slave The start data address in the request is not an allowable value. If any of the cells in the range to be written to cannot be accessed due to password protection then all changes within the request are discarded and this error response will be returned. Note: If the start address is correct but the range includes non - implemented addresses this response is not produced. A value referenced in the data field transmitted by the master is not within range. Other values transmitted within the same packet will be executed if inside range. The write command cannot be implemented due to the database being locked by another interface. This response is also produced if the relay software is busy executing a previous request.
03
Illegal Value
06
Slave Device Busy
3.4
Register mapping The relay supports the following memory page references:Memory Page 0xxxx 1xxxx 3xxxx 4xxxx Interpretation Read and write access of the Output Relays. Read only access of the Opto Inputs. Read only access of Data. Read and write access of Settings.
where xxxx represents the addresses available in the page (0 to 9999). Note that the extended memory file (6xxxx) is not supported. A complete map of the Modbus addresses supported by the relay is contained in Appendix 1 of this service manual. 3.5 Event extraction The relay supports two methods of event extraction providing either automatic or manual extraction of the stored event, fault and maintenance records. 3.5.1 Manual selection The following registers can be read to indicate the numbers of the various types of record stored. 30100 - Number of stored records 30101 - Number of stored fault records 30102 - Number of stored maintenance records
There are three registers available to manually select stored records. 40100 - Select Event, 0 to 249 40101 - Select Fault, 0 to 4 40102 - Select Maintenance Record, 0 to 4 For each of the above registers a value of 0 represents the most recent stored record. Each fault or maintenance record logged causes an event record to be created by the relay. If this event record is selected the additional registers allowing the fault or maintenance record details will also become populated. (See 3.5.3 for details) 3.5.2 Automatic extraction The automatic extraction facilities allow all types of record to be extracted as they occur. Event records are extracted in sequential order including any fault or maintenance data that may be associated with the event. The Modbus master can determine whether the relay has any events stored that have not yet been extracted. This is performed by reading the relay status register 30001 (G26 data type). If the event bit of this register is set then the relay has unextracted events available. To select the next event for sequential extraction the master station writes a value of 1 to the record selection register 40400 (G18 data type). The event data together with any fault/maintenance data can be read from the registers specified below. Once the data has been read the event record can be marked as having been read by writing a value of 2 to register 40400. The process can then be repeated untill all events have been extracted. 3.5.3 Record data The location and format of the registers used to access the record data is the same whether they have been selected using either of the two mechanisms detailed above. Event Description Time and Date Event Type Event Value Modbus Address 30103 30107 30108 Length 4 1 2 Comments See G12 data type See G13 data type. Indicates type of event Nature of Value depends on Event Type. This will contain the status as a binary flag for Contact, Opto, Alarm and protection events. This indicates the Modbus Register address where the change occurred. Alarm 30011 Relays 30723 Optos 30725 Protection events Like the Relay and Opto addresses this will map onto the Modbus address of the South Park extensions depending on which bit of the DDB the change occurred. These will range from 30727 to 30785. For Platform events, Fault events and Maintenance events the default is 0.
Modbus Address
30110
SCADA Communications MiCOM P341 Event Description Event Index Modbus Address 30111 Length 1 Comments
This register will contain the DDB No for protection events or the bit No for alarm events. The direction of the change will be indicated by the MSB 0 means that there is no additional data 1 means fault record data can be read from 30113 to 30199 (number of registers depends on the product) 2 means maintenance record data can be read from 30036 to 30039
Additional Data Present
30112
If a fault record or maintenance record is directly selected using the manual mechanism then the data can be read from the register ranges specified above, the event record data in cells 30103 to 30111 will not be available. It is possible using register 40401(G6 data type) to clear independently the stored relay event/fault and maintenance records. This register also provides an option to reset the relay indications, this has the same effect on the relay as pressing the clear key within the alarm viewer using the front panel menu. 3.6 Disturbance record extraction The relay provides facilities for both manual and automatic extraction of disturbance records. The two methods differ only in the mechanism for selecting a disturbance record, the method for extracting the data and the format of the data are identical. 3.6.1 Manual selection Each disturbance record has a unique identifier which increments for each stored record and resets at a value of 65535. The following registers can be used to determine the identifiers for the stored records 30800 - The number of stored disturbance records 30801 - The identifier for the oldest stored record A record can be selected by writing the required record identifier to register 40250. It is possible to read the timestamp of the selected record and in this way produce a list of all the stored records. 3.6.2 Automatic extraction The Modbus master station can determine the presence of unread disturbance records by polling register 30001 (G26 data type). When the disturbance bit of this register is set disturbance records are available for extraction. To select the next disturbance record write a value of 0 x 0004 to cell 40400 (G18 data type). Once the disturbance record data has been read by the master station this record can be marked as having been read by writing a value of 0 x 0008 to register 40400.
P341/EN CT/D22 Page 14/20 3.6.3 Record data
The timestamp for a record selected using either of the above means can be read from registers 30930 to 30933. The disturbance record data itself is stored in a compressed format, due to the size of the disturbance record it must be read using a paging system. The number of pages required to extract a record will depend on the configured size of the record. When a record is first selected the first page of data will be available in registers 30803 to 30929 (the number of registers required for the current page can be read from register 30802, this will be 127 for all but the last page in the record). Once the first page has been read the next page can be selected by writing a value of 0x0010 to register 40400. If this action is performed on the last page for the disturbance record an illegal value error response will be returned. This error response can be used by the Modbus master to indicate that the last page of the disturbance record has been read. 3.7 Setting changes The relay settings can be split into two categories: control and support settings disturbance record settings and protection setting groups
Changes to settings within the control and support area are executed immediately. Changes to either the protection setting groups or the disturbance recorder are stored in a temporary area and must be confirmed before they are implemented. All the relay settings are edited via Modbus using 4xxxx addresses. The following points should be noted when settings are being edited: Settings implemented using multiple registers must be written to using a multiregister write operation. The first address for a multi-register write must be a valid address, if there are unmapped addresses within the range being written to then the data associated with these addresses will be discarded. If a write operation is performed with values that are out of range then the illegal data response will be produced. Valid setting values within the same write operation will be executed. If a write operation is performed attempting to change registers that require a higher level of password access than is currently enabled then all setting changes in the write operation will be discarded.
3.7.1
Password protection As described in the introduction to this service manual the relay settings can be subject to Password protection. The level of password protection required to edit a setting is indicated in relay setting database (Appendix A). Level 2 is the highest level of password access, level 0 indicates that no password is required for editing.
SCADA Communications MiCOM P341 The following registers are available to control Password protection: 40001&40002 40022 40023&40024 40025&40026 30010 3.7.2 Password Entry Default Password Level Setting to Change password level 1 Setting to Change password level 2 Can be read to indicate current access level
Control and support settings Control and support settings are executed immediately on the write operation.
3.7.3
Protection and disturbance recorder settings Setting changes to either of these areas are stored in a scratchpad area and will not be used by the relay unless a confirm or to abort operation is performed. Register 40405 can be used to either to confirm or abort the setting changes within the scratchpad area. It should be noted that the relay supports four groups of protection settings. The Modbus addresses for each of the four groups are repeated within the following address ranges: Group 1 Group 2 Group 3 Group 4 41000-42999 43000-44999 45000-46999 47000-48999
In addition to the basic editing of the protection setting groups the following functions are provided. Default values can be restored to a setting group or to all of the relay settings by writing to register 40402. It is possible to copy the contents of one setting group to another by writing the source group to register 40406 and the target group to 40407.
It should be noted that the setting changes performed by either of the two operations defined above are made to the scratchpad area. These changes must be confirmed by writing to register 40405. The active protection setting groups can be selected by writing to register 40404. An illegal data response will be returned if an attempt is made to set the active group to one that has been disabled.
4.
IEC60870-5-103 INTERFACE
The IEC60870-5-103 interface is a master/slave interface with the relay as the slave device. This protocol is based on the VDEW communication protocol. The relay conforms to compatibility level 2, compatibility level 3 is not supported. The following IEC60870-5-103 facilities are supported by this interface: Initialisation (Reset) Time Synchronisation Event Record Extraction General Interrogation Cyclic Measurements General Commands Disturbance Record Extraction Private Codes
4.1
Physical connection and link layer Two connection options are available for IEC60870-5-103, either the rear EIA(RS)485 port or an optional rear fibre optic port. Should the fibre optic port be fitted the selection of the active port can be made via the front panel menu or the front Courier port, however the selection will only be effective following the next relay power up. For either of the two modes of connection it is possible to select both the relay address and baud rate using the front panel menu/front Courier. Following a change to either of these two settings a reset command is required to re-establish communications.
4.2
Initialisation Whenever the relay has been powered up, or if the communication parameters have been changed a reset command is required to initialise the communications. The relay will respond to either of the two reset commands (Reset CU or Reset FCB), the difference being that the Reset CU will clear any unsent messages in the relays transmit buffer. The relay will respond to the reset command with an identification message ASDU 5, the Cause Of Transmission COT of this response will be either Reset CU or Reset FCB depending on the nature of the reset command. The following information will be contained in the data section of this ASDU: Manufacturer Name: AREVA T&D
The Software Identification Section will contain the first four characters of the relay model number to identify the type of relay, e.g. P141 and the software reference. In addition to the above identification message, if the relay has been powered up it will also produce a power up event.
SCADA Communications MiCOM P341 4.3 Time synchronisation
The relay time and date can be set using the time synchronisation feature of the IEC60870-5-103 protocol. The relay will correct for the transmission delay as specified in IEC60870-5-103. If the time synchronisation message is sent as a send/confirm message then the relay will respond with a confirm. Whether the time synchronisation message is sent as a send confirm or a broadcast (send/no reply) message, a time synchronisation message will be returned as Class 1 data. If the relay clock is being synchronised using the IRIG-B input then it will not be possible to set the relay time using the IEC60870-5-103 interface. An attempt to set the time via the interface will cause the relay to create an event with the current date and time taken from the IRIG-B synchronised internal clock. 4.4 Spontaneous events The events created by the relay will be passed using the standard function type/information numbers to the IEC60870-5-103 master station. Private codes are used, thus any events that cannot be passed using the standardised messages can be sent using Private Codes. Events are categorised using the following information: Function Type Information number
Appendix A contains a complete listing of all events produced by the relay. 4.5 General interrogation The GI request can be used to read the status of the relay, the function numbers, and information numbers that will be returned during the GI cycle are indicated in Appendix A. 4.6 Cyclic measurements The relay will produce measured values using ASDU 9 on a cyclical basis, this can be read from the relay using a Class 2 poll (note ADSU 3 is not used). The rate at which the relay produces new measured values can be controlled using the Measurement Period setting. This setting can be edited from the front panel menu/front Courier port and is active immediately following a change. It should be noted that the measurands transmitted by the relay are sent as a proportion of either 1.2 or 2.4 times the rated value of the analog value. The selection of either 1.2 or 2.4 for a particular value is indicated in Appendix A. 4.7 Commands A list of the supported commands is contained in Appendix A. The relay will respond to other commands with an ASDU 1, with a cause of transmission (COT) of negative acknowledgement of a command. 4.8 Test mode It is possible using either the front panel menu or the front Courier port to disable the relay output contacts to allow secondary injection testing to be performed. This is interpreted as test mode by the IEC60870-5-103 standard. An event will be produced to indicate both entry to and exit from test mode. Spontaneous events and cyclic measured data transmitted whilst the relay is in test mode will have a COT of test mode.
P341/EN CT/D22 Page 18/20 4.9 Disturbance records
The disturbance records stored in uncompressed format and can be extracted using the standard mechanisms described in IEC60870-5-103. 4.10 Blocking of monitor/command direction The relay does support a facility to block messages in the Monitor direction and also in the Command direction.
5.
5.1
DNP3 INTERFACE
DNP3 protocol The DNP3 protocol is defined and administered by the DNP Users Group. Information about the user group, DNP3 in general and the protocol specifications can be found on their website: www.dnp.org The descriptions given here are intended to accompany the device profile document which is included in Appendix A. The DNP3 protocol is not described here, please refer to the documentation available from the user group. The device profile document specifies the full details of the DNP3 implementation for the relay. This is the standard format DNP3 document which specifies which objects, variations and qualifiers are supported. The device profile document also specifies what data is available from the relay via DNP3. The relay operates as a DNP3 slave and supports subset level 2 of the protocol, plus some of the features from level 3. DNP3 communication uses the EIA(RS)485 communication port at the rear of the relay. The data format is 8 data bits, 1 start bit and 1 stop bit. Parity is configurable (see menu settings below).
5.2
DNP3 menu setting The settings shown below are available in the menu for DNP3 in the Communications column. Setting Remote Address Baud Rate Range 0 65534 1200, 2400, 4800, 9600, 19200, 38400 None, Odd, Even Enabled, Disabled Description DNP3 address of relay (decimal) Selectable baud rate for DNP3 communication Parity setting Enables or disables the relay requesting time sync from the master via IIN bit 4 word 1
Parity Time Sync 5.3
Object 1 binary inputs Object 1, binary inputs, contains information describing the state of signals within the relay which mostly form part of the digital data bus (DDB). In general these include the state of the output contacts and input optos, alarm signals and protection start and trip signals. The DDB number column in the device profile document provides the DDB numbers for the DNP3 point data. These can be used to cross-reference to the DDB definition list which is also found in Appendix A. The binary input points can also be read as change events via object 2 and object 60.
SCADA Communications MiCOM P341 5.4 Object 10 binary outputs
Object 10, binary outputs, contains commands which can be operated via DNP3. As such all points accept commands of type pulse on and latch on and execute the command once for either command. Pulse off and latch off are also accepted but result in no action being taken. The other fields ignored (queue, clear, trip/close, in time and off time). A read of object 10 will give a value of zero at all times since the commands do not have a data value. Due to that fact that many of the relays functions are configurable, it may be the case that some of the object 10 commands are not available for operation. For example a test auto-reclose command when the auto-reclose function is disabled. In the case of a read from object 10 this will result in the point being reported as off-line and for an operate command to object 12 will generate an error response. 5.5 Object 20 binary counters Object 20, binary counters, contains cumulative counters and measurements. The binary counters can be read as their present running value from object 20, or as a frozen value from object 21. The running counters of object 20 accept the read, freeze and freeze and clear functions. The freeze function takes the current value of the object 20 running counter and stores is it the corresponding object 21 frozen counter. The freeze and clear function resets the object 20 running counter to zero after freezing its value. 5.6 Object 30 analogue input Object 30, analogue inputs, contains information from the relays measurements columns in the menu. All object 30 points are reported via DNP3 as fixed point values although they are stored inside the relay in floating point format. The conversion to fixed point format requires the use of a scaling factor, which differs for the various types of data within the relay e.g. current, voltage, phase angle etc. The data types supported are listed at the end of the device profile document with each type allocated a D number, i.e. D1, D2, etc. In the object 30 point list each data point has a D number data type assigned to it which defines the scaling factor, default deadband setting and the range and resolution of the deadband setting. The deadband is the setting used to determine whether a change event should be generated for each point. The change events can be read via object 32 or object 60 and will be generated for any point whose value has changed by more than the deadband setting since the last time the data value was reported. Any analogue measurement that is unavailable at the time it is read will be reported as offline, e.g. the thermal state when the thermal protection is disabled in the configuration column. Note that all object 30 points are reported as secondary values in DNP3 (with respect to CT and VT ratios). 5.7 DNP3 configuration using MiCOM S1 A PC support package for DNP3 is available as part of the Settings and Records module of MiCOM S1. The S1 module allows configuration of the relays DNP3 response. The PC is connected to the relay via a serial cable to the 9-pin front part of the relay see section P341/EN IT/C22, Introduction. The configuration data is uploaded from the relay to the PC in a block of compressed format data and downloaded to the relay in a similar manner after modification. The new DNP3 configuration takes effect in the relay after the download is complete. The default configuration can be restored at any time by choosing All Settings from the Restore Defaults cell in the menu Configuration column. In S1 the DNP3 data is displayed on three tabbed screen, one for each object1, 20 and 30. Object 10 is not configurable.
P341/EN CT/D22 Page 20/20 5.7.1 Object 1
For every point included in the device profile document there is a check box for membership of class 0 and radio buttons for class 1, 2 or 3 membership. Any point which is in class 0 must be a member of one of the change event classes, 1, 2 or 3. Points which are configured out of class 0 are by default not capable of generating change events. Furthermore, points that are not part of class 0 are effectively removed from the DNP3 response by renumbering the points that are in class 0 into a contiguous list starting at point number 0. The renumbered point numbers are shown at the left hand side of the screen in S1 and can be printed out to form a revised device profile for the relay. This mechanism allows best use of available bandwidth by only reporting the data points required by the user when a poll for all points is made. 5.7.2 Object 20 The running counter value of object 20 points can be configured to be in or out of class 0. Any running counter that is in class 0 can have its frozen value selected to be in or out of the DNP3 response, but a frozen counter cannot be included without the corresponding running counter. As with object 1, the class 0 response will be renumbered into a contiguous list of points based on the selection of running counters. The frozen counters will also be renumbered based on the selection; note that if some of the counters that are selected as running are not also selected as frozen then the renumbering will result in the frozen counters having different point numbers to their running counterparts. For example, object 20 point 3 (running counter) might have its frozen value reported as object 21 point 1. 5.7.3 Object 30 For the analogue inputs, object 30, the same selection options for classes 0, 1, 2 and 3 are available as for object 1. In addition to these options, which behave in exactly the same way as for object 1, it is possible to change the deadband setting for each point. The minimum and maximum values and the resolution of the deadband settings are defined in the device profile document; MiCOM S1 will allow the deadband to be set to any value within these constraints.
Relay Menu Database MiCOM P341
P341/EN GC/D22
RELAY MENU DATABASE
P341/EN GC/D22
MiCOM P341 Guide Interconnection Protection Relay Relay Menu Database This version of the Relay Menu Database is specific to the following models Model Number P341------0050B Software Number P341------0050-A/B/C
For other models / software versions, please contact AREVA T&D for the relevant information. (Software versions P341------0010*, P341------0020*, P341------0030*, P341------0040* are not supported by this menu database, see P341/EN T/B11 (0020 0040) and TG8617A (0010) for information on the menu database for these software versions).
P341/EN GC/D22 Page 1/158
RELAY MENU DATABASE

This database is split into several sections, these are as follows: Menu Database for Courier, User Interface and Modbus Menu Datatype Definition Event Data for Courier, User Interface and Modbus IEC60870-5-103 Interoperability Guide Internal Digital Signals DNP3.0 Device Profile Document Default Programmable Logic
Menu database This database defines the structure of the relay menu for the courier interface, the front panel user interface and the Modbus interface. This includes all the relay settings and measurements. Datatypes for Modbus and indexed strings for Courier and the user interface are cross-referenced to the Menu Datatype Definition section (using a G Number). For all settable cells the setting limits and default value are also defined within this database. Note: Label V1 V2 V3 1 2 3 4 The following labels are used within the database Description Main VT Rating Checksynch VT Rating NVD VT Rating Phase CT Rating Earth Fault CT Rating Sensitive CT Rating Mutual CT Rating Value 1 (120/110V) 4 (380/480V) 1 (100/110V) 4 (380/480V) 1 (100/110V) 4 (380/480V) 1 or 5 (Setting 0A08) 1 or 5 (Setting 0A0A) 1 or 5 (Setting 0A0C) 1 or 5 (Setting 0A0E)
Menu datatype definition This table defines the datatypes used for Modbus (the datatypes for the Courier and user interface are defined within the Menu Database itself using the standard Courier Datatypes). This section also defines the indexed string setting options for all interfaces. The datatypes defined within this section are cross-referenced to from the menu Database using a G number. Event data This section specifies all the event information that can be produced by the relay. It details exactly how each event will be presented via the Courier, User and Modbus interfaces. IEC60870-5-103 interoperability guide This table fully defines the operation of the IEC60870-5-103 (VDEW) interface for the relay it should be read in conjunction with the relevant section of the Communications section of this manual.
P341/EN GC/D22 Page 2/158 Internal digital signals
This table defines all of the relay internal digital signals (opto inputs, output contacts and protection inputs and outputs). A relay may have up to 512 internal signals each referenced by a numeric index as shown in this table. This numeric index is used to select a signal for the commissioning monitor port. It is also used to explicitly define protection events produced by the relay (see the Event Data section). DNP3.0 device profile document This table defines all of the objects, functions and/or qualifiers supported. Default programmable logic This section documents the default programmable logic for the various models of the relay. This default logic for each model of the relay is supplied with the MiCOM S1 Scheme Logic Editor PC support software. References Section 1 Introduction: User Interface operation and connections to the relay Section 5 Communications: Overview of communication interfaces Courier User Guide R6512 Modicon Modbus Protocol Reference Guide PI-MBUS-300 Rev E
IEC60870-5-103 Telecontrol Equipment and Systems Transmission Protocols Companion Standard for the informative interface of Protection Equipment
Courier Text SYSTEM DATA Language Password Sys Fn Links Description Plant Reference Model Number Serial Number Frequency Comms Level Relay Address
UI
Courier Col 00 Row 00 01 02 03 04 05 06 08 09 0A 0B
Data Type
Strings
Modbus Address
Start
End
Modbus Database
Default Setting
Cell Type
Min
Max
Step
Model Password Level P341 P342 P343 * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * 2 0 2 2 2 * * * * * * *
Comment
Indexed String ASCII Password(4 chars) Binary Flag (8 bits) Indexed Strings ASCII Text(16 chars) ASCII Text(16 chars) ASCII Text(32 chars) ASCII Text(7 chars) Unsigned Integer(8 bits) Unsigned Integer(16 bits) Unsigned Integer(16 bits) Binary Flag(16 bits)
G19 G20 G95 G3 G3 G3 G3 40001 40003 40004 40012 30020 30044 40020 40011 40019 30035 30051 40002
G19 G20 G95 G3 G3 G3 G3 G1
English AAAA
Setting Setting Setting
0 65 1 32 32
3 90 1 163 163
1 1 1 1 1
MiCOM P34* ALSTOM Model Number Serial Number 50 2 255
Setting Setting Data Data Setting Data Setting Data Data Data Data
* = 1 for Model 1, 2 for Model 2, 3 for Model 3
50
60
10
* *
255
* * * * *
30001 30002 30004 30006 G55 G55 40021 30052 30084 30008 30011 30059 30085 30009 30012
G26 G4 G5 G1 No Operation G55 G3 G8 G9 G96 No Operation
Needs to be address of interface Rear Courier Address available via LCD Relay status (repeat of Courier Status byte without the busy flag
Plant Status Control Status Active Group UNUSED CB Trip/Close CB Trip/Close Software Ref. 1 Opto I/P Status Relay O/P Status Alarm Status 1 UNUSED Access Level Password Control Password Level 1 Password Level 2 VIEW RECORDS 01 N/A
0C 0D 0E 0F 10 10 11 20 21 22 23 D0 D1 D2 D3 00
Binary Flag(16 bits) Binary Flag(16 bits) Unsigned Integer(16 bits) Indexed String(2) Indexed String(2) ASCII Text(16 chars) Binary Flag(32 bits) Indexed String Binary Flag(32 bits) Indexed String Binary Flag(32 bits) Indexed String Unsigned Integer(16 bits) Unsigned Integer(16 bits) ASCII Password(4 chars) ASCII Password(4 chars) G1 G22 G20 G20
Command Command Data Data Data Data
0 0
2 2
1 1
1 0
* * * * * * * * * * * * * *
Visible to LCD+Front Port Visible to Rear Port
30010 40022 40023 40025 30100 30101 30102 40024 40026
G1 G22 G20 G20 G1 G1 G1 0 G13 30106 G12 (From Record) (From Record) 2 AAAA AAAA
Data Setting Setting Setting 0 65 65 2 90 90 1 1 1 2 1 2
* * * * *
* * * * *
* * * * * No of event records stored Number of Fault records stored
Select Event Menu Cell Ref Time & Date Event Text N/A
01 02 03 04
Unsigned Integer(16 bits) Cell Reference IEC870 Time & Date Ascii String (32 chars)
40100 30107 30103
Setting Data Data Data
249
0 * * * * * * * * *
Max value is oldest record Indicates type of event. See Event sheet See Event sheet
Courier Text
UI
Courier Col Row 05
Data Type
Strings
Modbus Address
Start 30108
End 30109
Modbus Database
Default Setting
Cell Type
Min
Max
Step
Model Password Level P341 P342 P343 * * *
Comment Note DTL depends on event type binary flag for o/p, opto, alarm & prot. See event sheet of Spreadsheet Allows Fault Record to be selected Modbus address where change occurred Alarm 330011; Relay 30723; Opto 30725 Protection 30727-30754 Status of current 16 DDB elements Additional data present A/B/C/N Visible if Start A/B/C/N
Event Value
Unsigned Int / Binary Flag (32 bits)
G27
Data
Select Fault
06
Unsigned Integer (16 bits)
40101
Setting
30110
G1
Data
30111 30112 Started Phase ABCN Tripped Phase ABCN Gen Differential Trip Power Start 1 2 Power Trip 1 2 Field Failure Alarm Field Failure Start 1 2 Field Failure Trip 1 2 NPS Thermal Alarm Trip Volt Dep O/C Start Trip Underimedance Start Z< 12 Underimedance Trip Z< 12 Overcurrent Start I> 1234 Overcurrent Trip I> 1234 Earth Fault Start IN> 1234 Earth Fault N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A
G1 G1
Data Data Data Data Data Data Data Data Data Data Data Data Data Data Data
* * * *
* * * *
* * * *
A/B/C/N Visible if Trip A/B/C/N * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * 1/2 visible if Start 1/2 * 1/2 visible if Trip 1/2 * * 1/2 visible if Start 1/2 * 1/2 visible if Trip 1/2 * * * 1/2 visible if Start Z< 1/2 * 1/2 visible if Trip Z< 1/2 * 1/2/3/4 Visible if Start I>1/2/3/4 Data * * * 1/2/3/4 Visible if Trip I>1/2/3/4 Data * * * 1/2/3/4 visible if Start IN>1/2/3/4 Data * * *
Courier Text Trip IN> 1234 Sensitive E/F Start ISEF> 1234 Sensitive E/F Trip ISEF> 1234 Restricted E/F Trip IREF> Sensitive Power Start 1 2 Sensitive Power Trip 1 2 Residual O/V NVD Start VN> 1 2 Residual O/V NVD Trip VN> 1 2 100% Stator EF Start Trip V/Hz Alarm Start Trip df/dt Start Trip V Vector Shift Trip Dead Machine Trip U/Voltage start V< 1 2 AB BC CA U/Voltage Trip V< 1 2 AB BC CA O/Voltage Start V> 1 2 AB BC CA O/Voltage Trip V> 1 2 AB BC CA Underfrequency Start F< 1234 Underfrequency Trip F< 1234 Overfrequency Start F> 1 2 Overfrequency Trip F> 1 2
UI
Courier Col Row
Data Type
Strings
Modbus Address
Start
End
Modbus Database
Default Setting
Cell Type
Min
Max
Step
Model Password Level P341 P342 P343
Comment 1/2/3/4 visible if Trip IN>1/2/3/4
N/A
Data
* 1/2/3/4 visible if Start ISEF>1/2/3/4
N/A
Data
* 1/2/3/4 visible if Trip ISEF>1/2/3/4
N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A
Data Data Data Data Data Data Data Data Data Data Data Data Data Data Data
* * * * *
* * * * *
* * 1/2 visible if Start 1/2 * 1/2 visible if trip 1/2 * 1/2 visible if Start VN>1/2 * 1/2 visible if Trip VN>1/2 *
* * *
* * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * 1/2/3/4 visible if Start F<1/2/3/4 Ph-Ph or Ph-N 1/2 visible if Start V<1/2 Ph-Ph or Ph-N 1/2 visible if Trip V<1/2 Ph-Ph or Ph-N 1/2 visible if Start V>1/2 Ph-Ph or Ph-N 1/2 visible if Trip V>1/2
N/A
Data
* 1/2/3/4 visible if Trip F<1/2/3/4
N/A N/A
Data Data
* *
* *
* 1/2 visible if Start F>1/2 * 1/2 visible if Trip F>1/2
Courier Text RTD Alarm RTD 1 label RTD Alarm RTD 2 label RTD Alarm RTD 3 label RTD Alarm RTD 4 label RTD Alarm RTD5 label RTD Alarm RTD6 label RTD Alarm RTD7 label RTD Alarm RTD8 label RTD Alarm RTD9 label RTD Alarm RTD10 label RTD Trip RTD 1 label RTD Trip RTD 2 label RTD Trip RTD 3 label RTD Trip RTD 4 label RTD Trip RTD5 label RTD Trip RTD6 label RTD Trip RTD7 label RTD Trip RTD8 label RTD Trip RTD9 label RTD Trip RTD10 label Breaker Fail CB Fail 1 2 Supervision VTS CTS
UI
Courier Col N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A Row
Data Type
Strings
Modbus Address
Start
End
Modbus Database
Default Setting
Cell Type
Min
Max
Step
Model Password Level P341 P342 P343 * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * *
Comment
Data Data Data Data Data Data Data Data Data Data Data Data Data Data Data Data Data Data Data Data Data Data
1/2 visible if CB Fail 1/2 * VTS/CTS visible if AlarmVTS/CTS
Courier Text PoleSlip z based Start Z1 Z2 PoleSlip z based Trip Z1 Z2 Thermal Overload Alarm Trip Faulted Phase Start Elements1 Start Elements2 Trip Elements1 Trip Elements2 Fault Alarms Fault Time Active Group System Frequency Fault Duration CB Operate Time Relay Trip Time IA IA-1 IB IB-1 IC IC-1 VAB VBC VCA VAN VBN VCN IA-2 IB-2 IC-2 IA Differential IB Differential IC Differential VN Measured VN Derived IN Measured IN Derived
UI
Courier Col N/A N/A N/A Row
Data Type
Strings
Modbus Address
Start
End
Modbus Database
Default Setting
Cell Type
Min
Max
Step
Model Password Level P341 P342 P343 * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * *
Comment
Data Data Data 07 08 09 0A 0B 0C 0D 0E 0F 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 1A 1B 1C 1D 1E 1F 20 21 22 23 24 Binary Flag (8 Bits) Binary Flag (32 Bits) Indexed String Binary Flag (32 Bits) Indexed String Binary Flag (32 Bits) Indexed String Binary Flag (32 Bits) Indexed String Binary Flag (32 Bits) Indexed String IEC870 Time & Date Unsigned Integer Courier Number (frequency) Courier Number (time) Courier Number (time) Courier Number (time) Courier Number (current) Courier Number (current) Courier Number (current) Courier Number (voltage) Courier Number (voltage) Courier Number (voltage) Courier Number (voltage) Courier Number (voltage) Courier Number (voltage) Courier Number (current) Courier Number (current) Courier Number (current) Courier Number (current) Courier Number (current) Courier Number (current) Courier Number (voltage) Courier Number (voltage) Courier Number (current) 30124 30128 30129 30130 30132 30133 30135 30137 30139 30141 30143 30145 30147 30149 30151 30153 30155 30157 30159 30161 30163 30165 30167 30169 30134 30136 30138 30140 30142 30144 30146 30148 30150 30152 30154 30156 30158 30160 30162 30164 30166 30168 30170 30131 30127 G12 G1 G30 G24 G25 G24 G24 G24 G24 G24 G24 G24 G24 G24 G24 G24 G24 G24 G24 G24 G24 G24 G24 G24 (From Record) Data Data Data Data Data Data Data Data Data Data Data Data Data Data Data Data Data Data Data Data Data Data Data Data G16 G84 G107 G85 G86 G87 30113 30114 30116 30118 30120 30122 30115 30117 30119 30121 30123 G16 G84 G107 G85 G86 G87 Data Data Data Data Data Data
N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A
Started phases + tripped phases Started Elements Started Elements Tripped main elements Tripped secondary elements Faullt Alarms/Warnings
Courier Text I Sensitive IREF Diff IREF Bias I2 3 Phase Watts 3 Phase VArs 3Ph Power Factor RTD 1 Label RTD 2 Label RTD 3 Label RTD 4 Label RTD 5 Label RTD 6 Label RTD 7 Label RTD 8 Label RTD 9 Label RTD 10 Label df/dt V Vector Shift Select Maint Maint Text Maint Type Maint Data Reset Indication MEASUREMENTS 1 IA Magnitude IA-1 Magnitude IA Phase Angle IA-1 Phase Angle IB Magnitude IB-1 Magnitude IB Phase Angle IB-1 Phase Angle IC Magnitude IC-1 Magnitude IC Phase Angle IC-1 Phase Angle IN Measured Mag IN Measured Ang IN Derived Mag IN Derived Angle I Sen Magnitude I Sen Angle I1 Magnitude
UI
Courier Col Row 25 26 27 28 29 2A 2B 2C 2D 2E 2F 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 F0 F1 F2 F3 FF 02 00 01 01 02 02 03 03 04 04 05 05 06 06 07 08 09 0A 0B 0C 0D
Data Type Courier Number (current) Courier Number (current) Courier Number (current) Courier Number (current) Courier Number (Power) Courier Number (VAr) Courier Number (Decimal) Courier Number (Temperature) Courier Number (Temperature) Courier Number (Temperature) Courier Number (Temperature) Courier Number (Temperature) Courier Number (Temperature) Courier Number (Temperature) Courier Number (Temperature) Courier Number (Temperature) Courier Number (Temperature) Courier Number (Hz/s) Courier Number (Angle) Unsigned Integer (16 bits) Ascii Text (32 chars) Unsigned integer (32 bits) Unsigned integer (32 bits) Indexed String Courier Number (current) Courier Number (current) Courier Number (angle) Courier Number (angle) Courier Number (current) Courier Number (current) Courier Number (angle) Courier Number (angle) Courier Number (current) Courier Number (current) Courier Number (angle) Courier Number (angle) Courier Number (current) Courier Number (angle) Courier Number (current) Courier Number (angle) Courier Number (current) Courier Number (degrees) Courier Number (current)
Strings
Modbus Address
Start 30171 30173 30175 30177 30179 30181 30183 30184 30185 30186 30187 30188 30189 30190 30191 30192 30193 30194 30195 40102 30036 30038
End 30172 30174 30176 30178 30180 30182
Modbus Database
Default Setting
Cell Type
Min
Max
Step
Model Password Level P341 P342 P343 * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * *
Comment
G24 G24 G24 G24 G125 G125 G30 G10 G10 G10 G10 G10 G10 G10 G10 G10 G10 G25 G30 G1 Manual override to select a fault record.
Data Data Data Data Data Data Data Data Data Data Data Data Data Data Data Data Data Data Data Setting Data Data Data No Command Data Data Data Data Data Data Data Data Data Data Data Data Data Data Data Data Data Data Data 0 1 1 1 0 4 1 0
* * * * * * * * * * * *
* * * * * * *
* * * * * * *
Allows Self Test Report to be selected
30037 30039
G27 G27
G11 30200 30200 30202 30202 30203 30203 30205 30205 30206 30206 30208 30208 30209 30211 30212 30214 30215 30217 30218 30219 30216 30213 30210 30207 30207 30204 30204 30201 30201 G24 G24 G30 G30 G24 G24 G30 G30 G24 G24 G30 G30 G24 G30 G24 G30 G24 G30 G24
* * * * * * * * * * * * * *
* * * * * * * * * * *
Courier Text I2 Magnitude I0 Magnitude IA RMS IB RMS IC RMS VAB Magnitude VAB Phase Angle VBC Magnitude VBC Phase Angle VCA Magnitude VCA Phase Angle VAN Magnitude VAN Phase Angle VBN Magnitude VBN Phase Angle VCN Magnitude VCN Phase Angle VN Measured Mag VN Measured Ang VN Derived Mag VN Derived Ang V1 Magnitude V2 Magnitude V0 Magnitude VAN RMS VBN RMS VCN RMS Frequency MEASUREMENTS 2 A Phase Watts B Phase Watts C Phase Watts A Phase VArs B Phase VArs C Phase VArs A Phase VA B Phase VA C Phase VA 3 Phase Watts 3 Phase VArs 3 Phase VA 3Ph Power Factor APh Power Factor BPh Power Factor CPh Power Factor
UI
Courier Col Row 0E 0F 10 11 12 14 15 16 17 18 19 1A 1B 1C 1D 1E 1F 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 03 2D 00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 0A 0B 0C 0E 0F 10 11
Data Type Courier Number (current) Courier Number (current) Courier Number (current) Courier Number (current) Courier Number (current) Courier Number (voltage) Courier Number (angle) Courier Number (voltage) Courier Number (angle) Courier Number (voltage) Courier Number (angle) Courier Number (voltage) Courier Number (angle) Courier Number (voltage) Courier Number (angle) Courier Number (voltage) Courier Number (angle) Courier Number (voltage) Courier Number (angle) Courier Number (voltage) Courier Number (angle) Courier Number (voltage) Courier Number (voltage) Courier Number (voltage) Courier Number (voltage) Courier Number (voltage) Courier Number (voltage) Courier Number (frequency) Courier Number (Power) Courier Number (Power) Courier Number (Power) Courier Number (VAr) Courier Number (VAr) Courier Number (VAr) Courier Number (VA) Courier Number (VA) Courier Number (VA) Courier Number (Power) Courier Number (VAr) Courier Number (VA) Courier Number (decimal) Courier Number (decimal) Courier Number (decimal) Courier Number (decimal)
Strings
Modbus Address
Start 30220 30222 30224 30226 30228 30230 30232 30233 30235 30236 30238 30239 30241 30242 30244 30245 30247 30248 30250 30251 30252 30253 30255 30257 30259 30261 30263 30265 30300 30303 30306 30309 30312 30315 30318 30321 30324 30327 30330 30333 30339 30340 30341 30342
End 30221 30223 30225 30227 30229 30231 30234 30237 30240 30243 30246 30249 30252 30254 30256 30258 30260 30262 30264
Modbus Database
Default Setting
Cell Type
Min
Max
Step
Model Password Level P341 P342 P343 * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * *
Comment
G24 G24 G24 G24 G24 G24 G30 G24 G30 G24 G30 G24 G30 G24 G30 G24 G30 G24 G30 G24 G30 G24 G24 G24 G24 G24 G24 G30
Data Data Data Data Data Data Data Data Data Data Data Data Data Data Data Data Data Data Data Data Data Data Data Data Data Data Data Data Data Data Data Data Data Data Data Data Data Data Data Data Data Data Data Data
30302 30305 30308 30311 30314 30317 30320 30323 30326 30329 30332 30335
G29 G29 G29 G29 G29 G29 G29 G29 G29 G29 G29 G29 G30 G30 G30 G30
P341/EN GC/D22 Page 10/158
Courier Text 3Ph WHours Fwd 3Ph WHours Rev 3Ph VArHours Fwd 3Ph VArHours Rev 3Ph W Fix Demand 3Ph VArs Fix Dem IA Fixed Demand IB Fixed Demand IC Fixed Demand 3 Ph W Roll Dem 3Ph VArs RollDem IA Roll Demand IB Roll Demand IC Roll Demand 3Ph W Peak Dem 3Ph VAr Peak Dem IA Peak Demand IB Peak Demand IC Peak Demand Reset Demand
UI
Courier Col Row 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 1A 1B 1C 1D 1E 1F 20 21 22 23 24 25
Data Type Courier Number (Wh) Courier Number (Wh) Courier Number (VArh) Courier Number (VArh) Courier Number (Power) Courier Number (Vars) Courier Number (Current) Courier Number (Current) Courier Number (Current) Courier Number (Power) Courier Number (VAr) Courier Number (Current) Courier Number (Current) Courier Number (Current) Courier Number (Power) Courier Number (VAr) Courier Number (Current) Courier Number (Current) Courier Number (Current) Indexed String
Strings
Modbus Address
Start 30343 30346 30349 30352 30355 30358 30361 30363 30365 30367 30370 30373 30375 30377 30379 30382 30385 30387 30389
End 30345 30348 30351 30354 30357 30360 30362 30364 30366 30369 30372 30374 30376 30378 30381 30384 30386 30388 30390 30392 30394 30396 30398 30400 30402 30404 30406 30408 30410 30412 30414 30416 30418 30420 30422 30424 30426 30428 30430
Modbus Database
Default Setting
Cell Type
Min
Max
Step
Model Password Level P341 P342 P343 * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * *
Comment 3 Phase Watt - Hours (Forward) 3 Phase Watts - Hours (Reverse) 3 Phase VAr - Hours (Forward) 3 Phase VAr - Hours (Reverse) 3 Phase Watts - Fixed Demand 3 Phase VArs - Fixed Demand
G29 G29 G29 G29 G29 G29 G24 G24 G24 G29 G29 G24 G24 G24 G29 G29 G24 G24 G24 G11 G125 G125 G125 G125 G125 G125 G125 G125 G125 G125 G125 G125 G125 G125 G125 G125 G125 G125 G125 G125 No
Data Data Data Data Data Data Data Data Data Data Data Data Data Data Data Data Data Data Data Command Data Data Data Data Data Data Data Data Data Data Data Data Data Data Data Data Data Data Data Data 0 1 1 1
3 Phase Watts - Rolling Demand 3 Phase VArs - Rolling Demand
3 Phase Watts - Peak Demand 3 Phase VArs - Peak Demand
G11
40103 30391 30393 30395 30397 30399 30401 30403 30405 30407 30409 30411 30413 30415 30417 30419 30421 30423 30425 30427 30429
* * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * *
N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A
A Phase Watts (see [0301]) B Phase Watts (see [0302]) C Phase Watts (see [0303]) A Phase VArs (see [0304]) B Phase VArs (see [0305]) C Phase VArs (see [0306]) A Phase VA (see [0307]) B Phase VA (see [0308]) C Phase VA (see [0309]) 3 Phase Watts (see [030A]) 3 Phase VArs (see [030B]) 3 Phase VA (see [030C]) 3 Phase WHours Fwd (see [0312]) 3 Phase WHours Rev (see [0313]) 3 Phase VArHours Fwd (see [0314]) 3 Phase VArHours Rev (see [0315]) 3 Phase W Fix Demand (see [0316]) 3 Phase VArs Fix Demand (see [0317]) 3 Phase W Roll Demand (see [031B]) 3 Phase VArs Roll Demand (see [031C])
P341/EN GC/D22 Page 11/158
Courier Text
UI N/A N/A
Courier Col Row
Data Type
Strings
Modbus Address
Start 30431 30433
End 30432 30434
Modbus Database
Default Setting
Cell Type
Min
Max
Step
Model Password Level P341 P342 P343 * * * * * * * * *
Comment 3 Phase W Peak Demand (see [0320]) 3 Phase VArs Peak Demand (see [0321]) Visible if (0915=2) II ((0911=1 && (x650 = 1))
G125 G125
Data Data
MEASUREMENTS 3 MEASUREMENTS 3 IA-2 Magnitude IA-2 Phase Angle IB-2 Magnitude IB-2 Phase Angle IC-2 Magnitude IC-2 Phase Angle IA Differential IB Differential IC Differential IA Bias IB Bias IC Bias IREF Diff IREF Bias VN 3rd Harmonic NPS Thermal Reset NPSThermal RTD 1 RTD 2 RTD 3 RTD 4 RTD 5 RTD 6 RTD 7 RTD 8 RTD 9 RTD 10 RTD Open Cct RTD Short Cct RTD Data Error Reset RTD Flags
04 04
00 00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 0A 0B 0C 0D 0E 0F 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 1A 1B 1C 1D 1E 1F Courier Number (Current) Courier Number (Angle) Courier Number (Current) Courier Number (Angle) Courier Number (Current) Courier Number (Angle) Courier Number (Current) Courier Number (Current) Courier Number (Current) Courier Number (Current) Courier Number (Current) Courier Number (Current) Courier Number (Current) Courier Number (Current) Courier Number (Voltage) Courier Number (Percentage) Indexed String Courier Number (Temperature) Courier Number (Temperature) Courier Number (Temperature) Courier Number (Temperature) Courier Number (Temperature) Courier Number (Temperature) Courier Number (Temperature) Courier Number (Temperature) Courier Number (Temperature) Courier Number (Temperature) Binary Flag (10 bits) Indexed String Binary Flag (10 bits) Indexed String Binary Flag (10 bits) Indexed String Indexed string G11 40105 G11 No Command 0 1 1 1 G110 30475 G110 Data G109 30474 G109 Data G108 G11 30435 30437 30438 30440 30441 30443 30444 30446 30448 30450 30452 30454 30456 30458 30460 30462 40104 30463 30464 30465 30466 30467 30468 30469 30470 30471 30472 30473 30445 30447 30449 30451 30453 30455 30457 30459 30461 30442 30439 30436 G24 G30 G24 G30 G24 G30 G24 G24 G24 G24 G24 G24 G24 G24 G24 G1 G11 G10 G10 G10 G10 G10 G10 G10 G10 G10 G10 G108 No Data Data Data Data Data Data Data Data Data Data Data Data Data Data Data Data Command Data Data Data Data Data Data Data Data Data Data Data 0 1 1 1
* * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * Visible if (090E=1) && (X304 = 1) Visible if (090E=1) && (X304 = 1) Courier text = RTD lable setting Courier text = RTD lable setting Courier text = RTD lable setting Courier text = RTD lable setting Courier text = RTD lable setting Courier text = RTD lable setting Courier text = RTD lable setting Courier text = RTD lable setting Courier text = RTD lable setting Courier text = RTD lable setting Visible if (0915=1) && (XA01 >= 3) Visible if (0915=1) && (XA01 >= 3) Visible if (090B=1) && (X001 = 1) Visible if (090B=1) && (X001 = 1) Visible if (090B=1) && (X001 = 1)
P341/EN GC/D22 Page 12/158
Courier Text APh Sen Watts
UI
Courier Col Row 20
Data Type Courier Number (Power)
Strings
Modbus Address
Start 30476
End 30477
Modbus Database
Default Setting
Cell Type
Min
Max
Step
Model Password Level P341 P342 P343 * * *
Comment Visible only when Spower is selected in the Configuration column Visible only when Spower is selected in the Configuration column Visible only when Spower is selected in the Configuration column Visible if (0911=1) && (X650 = 1) Visible if (0911=1) && (X650 = 1) CB CONDITION MONITORING Number of Circuit Breaker Operations Broken Current A Phase Broken Current B Phase Broken Current C Phase Circuit Breaker operating time Reset All Values
G125
Data
APh Sen Vars
21
Courier Number (Var)
30478
30479
G125
Data
APh Power Angle Thermal Overload Reset ThermalO/L CB CONDITION CB Operations Total IA Broken Total IB Broken Total IC Broken CB Operate Time Reset CB Data CB CONTROL CB Control by Close Pulse Time Trip Pulse Time Man Close Delay CB Healthy Time Lockout Reset Reset Lockout by Man Close RstDly CB Status Input DATE AND TIME Date/Time Date 12-Jan-98 Time 12:00 IRIG-B Sync IRIG-B Status Battery Status Battery Alarm CONFIGURATION Restore Defaults Setting Group Active Settings Save Changes Copy From 09 N/A 08 07 06
22 23 24 00 01 02 03 04 05 06 00 01 02 03 05 06 08 09 0A 11 00 01 N/A N/A 04 05 06 07 00 01 02 03 04 05
Courier Number (angle) Courier Number (Percentage) Indexed String G11
30480 30481 40106
G30 G1 G11 No
Data Data Command 0 1 1 1
* * * *
* * * * * * * * * * *
* * * * * * * * * * *
Unsigned Integer Courier Number (current) Courier Number (current) Courier Number (current) Courier Number (time) Indexed String Indexed String Courier Number (Time) Courier Number (Time) Courier Number (Time) Courier Number (Time) Indexed String Indexed String Courier Number (Time) Indexed String IEC870 Time & Date G11 G81 G11 G99
30600 30601 30603 30605 30607 40150 40200 40201 40202 40203 40204 40206 40207 40208 40209 40300 40303 40205 30602 30604 30606
G1 G24 G24 G24 G25 G11 G99 G2 G2 G2 G35 G11 G81 G2 G118 G12 No Disabled 0.5 0.5 10 5 No CB Close 5 None
Data Data Data Data Data Command Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Command Setting Setting Setting Setting 0 0 0.1 0.1 0.01 0.01 0 0 0.01 0 1 7 10 5 600 9999 1 1 600 3 1 1 0.01 0.01 0.01 0.01 1 1 0.01 1 1 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 0
* * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * *
Manual Close Delay * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * Front Panel Menu only Front Panel Menu only Manual Close Reset Delay
Indexed String Indexed String Indexed String Indexed String Indexed String Indexed String Indexed String Indexed String Indexed String
G37 G17 G59 G37 G53 G61 G90 G62 G90
40304 30090 30091 40305 40402 40403 40404 40405 40406
G37 G17 G59 G37 G53 G61 G90 G62 G90
Disabled
Setting Data Data
* * *
Enabled No Operation Menu 1 No Operation Group 1
Setting Command Setting Setting Command Setting
0 0 0 0 0 0
1 5 1 3 2 3
1 1 1 1 1 1
2 2 2 1 2 2
* * * * * * *
P341/EN GC/D22 Page 13/158
Courier Text Copy To Setting Group 1 Setting Group 2 Setting Group 3 Setting Group 4 Gen Differential Power Field Failure NPS Thermal System Backup Overcurrent Thermal Overload NOT USED Earth Fault NOT USED SEF/REF/SPower Residual O/V NVD 100% Stator EF V/Hz df/dt V Vector Shift Dead Machine Reconnect Delay Volt Protection Freq Protection RTD Inputs CB Fail Supervision NOT USED NOT USED Pole Slipping Input Labels Output Labels RTD Labels CT & VT Ratios Recorder Control Disturb Recorder Measure't Setup Comms Settings Commission Tests Setting Values NOT USED
UI
Courier Col Row 06 07 08 09 0A 0B 0C 0D 0E 0F 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 1A 1B 1C 1D 1E 1F 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 2A 2B 2C 2D 2E 2F
Data Type Indexed String Indexed String Indexed String Indexed String Indexed String Indexed String Indexed String Indexed String Indexed String Indexed String Indexed String Indexed String Indexed String Indexed String Indexed String Indexed String Indexed String Indexed String Indexed String Indexed String Indexed String Indexed String Indexed String Indexed String Indexed String Indexed String
Strings
Modbus Address
Start 40407 40408 40409 40410 40411 40412 40413 40414 40415 40416 40417 40433 40418 40419 40420 40421 40422 40423 40424 40425 40426 40427 40428 40429 40430 40431
End
Modbus Database
Default Setting No Operation Enabled Disabled Disbaled Disabled Enabled Enabled Enabled Enabled Enabled Enabled Disabled Enabled Disabled SEF/REF Enabled Disabled Disabled Enabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Enabled Enabled Enabled Disabled Disabled
Cell Type
Min 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
Max 3 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 2 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
Step 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
Model Password Level P341 P342 P343 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * NOT USED * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * *
Comment
G98 G37 G37 G37 G37 G37 G37 G37 G37 G37 G37 G37 G37 G114 G37 G37 G37 G37 G37 G37 G37 G37 G37 G37 G37 G37
G98 G37 G37 G37 G37
Command Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting
Residual Overvoltage
Indexed String Indexed String Indexed String Indexed String Indexed String Indexed String Indexed String Indexed String Indexed String Indexed String Indexed String
G37 G80 G80 G80 G80 G80 G80 G80 G80 G80 G54
40432
Enabled Visible Visible Visible Visible Invisible Invisible Invisible Visible Visible Primary
Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
2 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * *
* * * * * * * * * * * * Record selection command register Disturbance recorder
40400
G18
P341/EN GC/D22 Page 14/158
Courier Text
UI
Courier Col Row
Data Type
Strings
Modbus Address
Start 40401
End
Modbus Database
Default Setting
Cell Type
Min
Max
Step
Model Password Level P341 P342 P343 * * * * * * * * * *
Comment Record control command register values for multiplier see mult column Label V1=Main VT Rating/110 Label M1=0A01/0A02 Neutral Displacement VT Primary Label V3=Neutral Disp VT Rating/110 Neutral Displacement VT Secondary Label M3=0A05/0A06 I1=Phase CT secondary rating Label M4=0A07/0A08
G6
CT AND VT RATIOS Main VT Primary Main VT Sec'y
0A
00 01 02 Courier Number (Voltage) Courier Number (Voltage) 40500 40502 40501 G35 G2 110 110 Setting Setting 100 80*V1 1000000 140*V1 1 1*V1 2 2
* *
NVD VT Primary
05
Courier Number (Voltage)
40506
40507
G35
110
Setting
100
1000000
NVD VT Secondary Phase CT Primary Phase CT Sec'y E/F CT Primary E/F CT Secondary SEF CT Primary SEF CT Secondary RECORD CONTROL Clear Events Clear Faults Clear Maint Alarm Event Output Event Opto Input Event Relay Sys Event Fault Rec Event Maint Rec Event Protection Event DDB 31 - 0 DDB 63 - 32 DDB 95 - 64 DDB 127 - 96 DDB 159 - 128 DDB 191 - 160 DDB 223 - 192 DDB 255 - 224 DDB 287 - 256 DDB 319 - 288 DDB 351 - 320 DDB 383 - 352 0B 0B 0B 0B 0B 0B 0B 0B 0B 0B 0B 0B 0B 0B 0B 0B 0B 0B 0B 0B
06 07 08 09 0A 0B 0C 00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 0A 0B 0C 0D 0E 0F 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
Courier Number (Voltage) Courier Number (Current) Courier Number (Current) Courier Number (Current) Courier Number (Current) Courier Number (Current) Courier Number (Current)
40508 40509 40510 40511 40512 40513 40514
G2 G2 G2 G2 G2 G2 G2
110 1 1 1 1 1 1
Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting
80*V3 1 1 1 1 1 1
140*V3 30000 5 30000 5 30000 5
1*V3 1 4 1 4 1 4
2 2 2 2 2 2 2
* * *
* * * * *
* * * * *
Label I2=E/F CT secondary rating Label M5=0A09/0A0A
* * *
* * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * *
* *
Label I3=SEF CT secondary rating Label M6=0A0B/0A0C
* * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * *
Indexed String Indexed String Indexed String Indexed String Indexed String Indexed String Indexed String Indexed String Indexed String Indexed String Binary Flag (32 bits) Binary Flag (32 bits) Binary Flag (32 bits) Binary Flag (32 bits) Binary Flag (32 bits) Binary Flag (32 bits) Binary Flag (32 bits) Binary Flag (32 bits) Binary Flag (32 bits) Binary Flag (32 bits) Binary Flag (32 bits) Binary Flag (32 bits)
G11 G11 G11 G37 G37 G37 G37 G37 G37 G37 G27 G27 G27 G27 G27 G27 G27 G27 G27 G27 G27 G27 40520 40521 40522 40523 40524 40525 40526 40527 40529 40531 40533 40535 40537 40539 40541 40543 40545 40547 40549 40528 40530 40532 40534 40536 40538 40540 40542 40544 40546 40548 40550 G37 G37 G37 G37 G37 G37 G37 G27 G27 G27 G27 G27 G27 G27 G27 G27 G27 G27 G27
No No No Enabled Enabled Enabled Enabled Enabled Enabled Enabled 0xFFFFFFFF 0xFFFFFFFF 0xFFFFFFFF 0xFFFFFFFF 0xFFFFFFFF 0xFFFFFFFF 0xFFFFFFFF 0xFFFFFFFF 0xFFFFFFFF 0xFFFFFFFF 0xFFFFFFFF 0xFFFFFFFF
Command Command Command Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0xFFFFFFFF 0xFFFFFFFF 0xFFFFFFFF 0xFFFFFFFF 0xFFFFFFFF 0xFFFFFFFF 0xFFFFFFFF 0xFFFFFFFF 0xFFFFFFFF 0xFFFFFFFF 0xFFFFFFFF 0xFFFFFFFF
1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 32 32 32 32 32 32 32 32 32 32 32 32
1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
1 1 1 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2
* * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * *
P341/EN GC/D22 Page 15/158
Courier Text DDB 415 - 384 DDB 447 - 416 DDB 479 - 448 DDB 511 - 480 DDB 543 - 512 DDB 575 - 544 DDB 607 - 576 DDB 639 - 608 DDB 671 - 640 DDB 703 - 672 DDB 735 - 704 DDB 767 - 736 DDB 799 - 768 DDB 831 - 800 DDB 863 - 832 DDB 895 - 864 DDB 927 - 896 DDB 959 - 928 DDB 991 - 960 DDB 1022 - 992 DISTURB RECORDER Duration Trigger Position Trigger Mode Analog Channel 1 Analog Channel 2 Analog Channel 3 Analog Channel 4 Analog Channel 5 Analog Channel 6 Analog Channel 7 Analog Channel 8 Digital Input 1 Input 1 Trigger Digital Input 2 Input 2 Trigger Digital Input 3 Input 3 Trigger Digital Input 4 Input 4 Trigger
UI
Courier Col 0B 0B 0B 0B 0B 0B 0B 0B 0B 0B 0B 0B 0B 0B 0B 0B 0B 0B 0B 0B 0C Row 17 18 19 1A 1B 1C 1D 1E 1F 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 2A 00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 0A 0B 0C 0D 0E 0F 10 11 12 13
Data Type Binary Flag (32 bits) Binary Flag (32 bits) Binary Flag (32 bits) Binary Flag (32 bits) Binary Flag (32 bits) Binary Flag (32 bits) Binary Flag (32 bits) Binary Flag (32 bits) Binary Flag (32 bits) Binary Flag (32 bits) Binary Flag (32 bits) Binary Flag (32 bits) Binary Flag (32 bits) Binary Flag (32 bits) Binary Flag (32 bits) Binary Flag (32 bits) Binary Flag (32 bits) Binary Flag (32 bits) Binary Flag (32 bits) Binary Flag (32 bits) Courier Number (Time) Courier Number (%) Indexed String Indexed String Indexed String Indexed String Indexed String Indexed String Indexed String Indexed String Indexed String Indexed String Indexed String Indexed String Indexed String Indexed String Indexed String Indexed String Indexed String
Strings
Modbus Address
Start 40551 40553 40555 40557 40559 40561 40563 40565 40567 40569 40571 40573 40575 40577 40579 40581 40583 40585 40587 40589 40600 40601
End 40552 40554 40556 40558 40560 40562 40564 40566 40568 40570 40572 40574 40576 40578 40580 40582 40584 40586 40588 40590
Modbus Database
Default Setting 0xFFFFFFFF 0xFFFFFFFF 0xFFFFFFFF 0xFFFFFFFF 0xFFFFFFFF 0xFFFFFFFF 0xFFFFFFFF 0xFFFFFFFF 0xFFFFFFFF 0xFFFFFFFF 0xFFFFFFFF 0xFFFFFFFF 0xFFFFFFFF 0xFFFFFFFF 0xFFFFFFFF 0xFFFFFFFF 0xFFFFFFFF 0xFFFFFFFF 0xFFFFFFFF 0xFFFFFFFF 1.5 33.3 Single VAN VBN VCN VN IA IB IC IN SEF Relay 1 No Trigger Relay 2 No Trigger Relay 3 No Trigger Relay 4 No Trigger
Cell Type
Min 0xFFFFFFFF 0xFFFFFFFF 0xFFFFFFFF 0xFFFFFFFF 0xFFFFFFFF 0xFFFFFFFF 0xFFFFFFFF 0xFFFFFFFF 0xFFFFFFFF 0xFFFFFFFF 0xFFFFFFFF 0xFFFFFFFF 0xFFFFFFFF 0xFFFFFFFF 0xFFFFFFFF 0xFFFFFFFF 0xFFFFFFFF 0xFFFFFFFF 0xFFFFFFFF 0xFFFFFFFF 0.1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
Max 32 32 32 32 32 32 32 32 32 32 32 32 32 32 32 32 32 32 32 32 10.5 100 1 ** ** ** ** ** ** ** ** DDB Size 2 DDB Size 2 DDB Size 2 DDB Size 2
Step 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 0.01 0.1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
Model Password Level P341 P342 P343 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * *
Comment
G27 G27 G27 G27 G27 G27 G27 G27 G27 G27 G27 G27 G27 G27 G27 G27 G27 G27 G27 G27
G27 G27 G27 G27 G27 G27 G27 G27 G27 G27 G27 G27 G27 G27 G27 G27 G27 G27 G27 G27 G2 G2 G34 G31 G31 G31 G31 G31 G31 G31 G31 G32 G66 G32 G66 G32 G66 G32 G66
Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting
DISTURBANCE RECORDER
G34 G31 G31 G31 G31 G31 G31 G31 G31 G32 G66 G32 G66 G32 G66 G32 G66
40602 40603 40604 40605 40606 40607 40608 40609 40610 40611 40612 40613 40614 40615 40616 40617 40618
** Max = 7 for Model1, 8 for Model2, 11 for Model3 ** Max = 7 for Model1, 8 for Model2, 11 for Model3 ** Max = 7 for Model1, 8 for Model2, 11 for Model3 ** Max = 7 for Model1, 8 for Model2, 11 for Model3 ** Max = 7 for Model1, 8 for Model2, 11 for Model3 ** Max = 7 for Model1, 8 for Model2, 11 for Model3 ** Max = 7 for Model1, 8 for Model2, 11 for Model3 ** Max = 7 for Model1, 8 for Model2, 11 for Model3
P341/EN GC/D22 Page 16/158
Courier Text Digital Input 5 Input 5 Trigger Digital Input 6 Input 6 Trigger Digital Input 7 Input 7 Trigger Digital Input 8 Input 8 Trigger Digital Input 9 Input 9 Trigger Digital Input 10 Input 10 Trigger Digital Input 11 Input 11 Trigger Digital Input 12 Input 12 Trigger Digital Input 13 Input 13 Trigger Digital Input 14 Input 14 Trigger Digital Input 15 Input 15 Trigger Digital Input 16 Input 16 Trigger Digital Input 17 Input 17 Trigger Digital Input 18 Input 18 Trigger Digital Input 19 Input 19 Trigger Digital Input 20 Input 20 Trigger
UI
Courier Col Row 14 15 16 17 18 19 1A 1B 1C 1D 1E 1F 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 2A 2B 2C 2D 2E 2F 30 31 32 33
Data Type Indexed String Indexed String Indexed String Indexed String Indexed String Indexed String Indexed String Indexed String Indexed String Indexed String Indexed String Indexed String Indexed String Indexed String Indexed String Indexed String Indexed String Indexed String Indexed String Indexed String Indexed String Indexed String Indexed String Indexed String Indexed String Indexed String Indexed String Indexed String Indexed String Indexed String Indexed String Indexed String
Strings
Modbus Address
Start 40619 40620 40621 40622 40623 40624 40625 40626 40627 40628 40629 40630 40631 40632 40633 40634 40635 40636 40637 40638 40639 40640 40641 40642 40643 40644 40645 40646 40647 40648 40649 40650
End
Modbus Database
Default Setting Relay 5 No Trigger Relay 6 No Trigger Relay 7 No Trigger Opto Input 1 Relay 8 No Trigger Opto Input 2 Relay 9 No Trigger Opto Input 3 Relay 10 No Trigger Opto Input 4 Relay 11 No Trigger Opto Input 5 Relay 12 No Trigger Opto Input 6 Relay 13 No Trigger Opto Input 7 Relay 14 No Trigger Opto Input 8 Opto Input 1 No Trigger Not Used Opto Input 2 No Trigger Not Used Opto Input 3 No Trigger Not Used Opto Input 4 No Trigger Not Used Opto Input 5 No Trigger Not Used Opto Input 6 No Trigger
Cell Type
Min 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
Max DDB Size 2 DDB Size 2 DDB Size 2 DDB Size 2 DDB Size 2 DDB Size 2 DDB Size 2 DDB Size 2 DDB Size 2 DDB Size 2 DDB Size 2 DDB Size 2 DDB Size 2 DDB Size 2 DDB Size 2 DDB Size 2
Step 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
Model Password Level P341 P342 P343 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * *
Comment
G32 G66 G32 G66 G32 G66 G32 G66 G32 G66 G32 G66 G32 G66 G32 G66 G32 G66 G32 G66 G32 G66 G32 G66 G32 G66 G32 G66 G32 G66 G32 G66
Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting
P341/EN GC/D22 Page 17/158
Courier Text Digital Input 21 Input 21 Trigger Digital Input 22 Input 22 Trigger Digital Input 23 Input 23 Trigger Digital Input 24 Input 24 Trigger Digital Input 25 Input 25 Trigger Digital Input 26 Input 26 Trigger Digital Input 27 Input 27 Trigger Digital Input 28 Input 28 Trigger Digital Input 29 Input 29 Trigger Digital Input 30 Input 30 Trigger Digital Input 31 Input 31 Trigger Digital Input 32 Input 32 Trigger MEASURE'T SETUP Default Display Local Values Remote Values Measurement Ref Measurement Mode Fix Dem Period Roll Sub Period Num Sub Periods COMMUNICATIONS Rear Protocol
UI
Courier Col Row 34 35 36 37 38 39 3A 3B 3C 3D 3E 3F 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 4A 4B 0D 00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 0E 00 01
Data Type Indexed String Indexed String Indexed String Indexed String Indexed String Indexed String Indexed String Indexed String Indexed String Indexed String Indexed String Indexed String Indexed String Indexed String Indexed String Indexed String Indexed String Indexed String Indexed String Indexed String Indexed String Indexed String Indexed String Indexed String Indexed String Indexed String Indexed String Indexed String Unsigned Integer Courier Number (time-minutes) Courier Number (time-minutes) Unsigned Integer Indexed String
Strings
Modbus Address
Start 40651 40652 40653 40654 40655 40656 40657 40658 40659 40660 40661 40662 40663 40664 40665 40666 40667 40668 40669 40670 40671 40672 40673 40674 40700 40701 40702 40703 40705 40706 40707 40708
End
Modbus Database
Default Setting Not Used Opto Input 7 No Trigger Not Used Opto Input 8 No Trigger Not Used Opto Input 9 No Trigger Not Used Opto Input 10 No Trigger Not Used Opto Input 11 No Trigger Not Used Opto Input 12 No Trigger Not Used Opto Input 13 No Trigger Not Used Opto Input 14 No Trigger Not Used Opto Input 15 No Trigger Not Used Opto Input 16 No Trigger Not Used No Trigger Not Used No Trigger Description Primary Primary VA 0 15 1 15
Cell Type
Min 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 1
Max DDB Size 2 DDB Size 2 DDB Size 2 DDB Size 2 DDB Size 2 DDB Size 2 DDB Size 2 DDB Size 2 DDB Size 2 DDB Size 2 DDB Size 2 DDB Size 2 7 1 1 5 3 99 99 15
Step 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
Model Password Level P341 P342 P343 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 1 1 1 1 2 2 2 * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * *
Comment
Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Data
MEASUREMENT SETTINGS Local Measurement Values Remote Measurement Values Measurement Phase Reference Fixed Demand Interval Rolling demand sub period Number of rolling sub-periods
G71
P341/EN GC/D22 Page 18/158
Courier Text Remote Address Remote Address Remote Address Remote Address Inactivity Timer Inactivity Timer Inactivity Timer Baud Rate Baud Rate Baud Rate Parity Parity Measure't Period Physical Link Time Sync CS103 Blocking COMMISSION TESTS Opto I/P Status Relay O/P Status Test Port Status LED Status Monitor Bit 1 Monitor Bit 2 Monitor Bit 3 Monitor Bit 4 Monitor Bit 5 Monitor Bit 6 Monitor Bit 7 Monitor Bit 8 Test Mode Test Pattern Contact Test Test LEDs DDB 31 - 0 DDB 63 - 32 DDB 95 - 64
UI
Courier Col Row 02 02 02 02 03 03 03 04 04 04 05 05 06 07 08 0A 0F 00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 0A 0B 0C 0D 0E 0F 10
Data Type Unsigned integer (16 bits) Unsigned integer (16 bits) Unsigned integer (16 bits) Unsigned integer (16 bits) Courier Number (Time-minutes) Courier Number (Time-minutes) Courier Number (Time-minutes) Indexed String Indexed String Indexed String Indexed String Indexed String Courier Number (Time) Indexed String Indexed String Indexed String Binary Flag(16 bits) Indexed String Binary Flag(32 bits) Indexed String Binary Flag(8 bits) Indexed String Binary Flag(8 bits) Unsigned Integer Unsigned Integer Unsigned Integer Unsigned Integer Unsigned Integer Unsigned Integer Unsigned Integer Unsigned Integer Indexed String Binary Flag (21bits) Indexed String Indexed String Binary Flag (8bits) Indexed String Binary Flag(32) Binary Flag(32) Binary Flag(32)
Strings
Modbus Address
Start
End
Modbus Database
Default Setting 255 1 1 1 15 15 15
Cell Type
Min 0 1 0 0 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0
Max 255 247 254 65534 30 30 30 2 1 5 2 2 60 1 1 2
Step 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
Model Password Level P341 P342 P343 1 1 1 1 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 1 2 2 * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * *
Comment Build = Courier Build = Modbus Default Modbus address is 1 Build = IEC60870-5-103 Build=DNP 3.0 Build = Courier Build = Modbus Build = IEC60870-5-103 Build = Modbus Build = IEC60870-5-103 Build = DNP 3.0 Build = Modbus Build = DNP 3.0 Build = IEC60870-5-103 Build=IEC60870-5-103 and Fibre Optic Board fitted Build=DNP 3.0 visible when IRIGB is disabled Build=IEC60870-5-103
Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Data Data Data Data
G38m G38v G38d G39 G39 G21 G37 G210 G8 G9 0-7 0-7 40850 40851 40852 40853 40854 40855 40856 40857 G119 G9 G93 G94 40858 40859 40861 40862 30723 30725 30727 30724 30726 30728 40860 0-7 G1 G1 G1 G1 G1 G1 G1 G1 G119 G9 G93 G94 G27 G27 G27
19200 bits/s 19200 bits/s 19200 bits/s None None 15 RS485 Disabled Disabled
64 65 66 67 68 69 70 71 Disabled 0 No Operation No Operation
Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Command Command Data Data Data
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
1022 1022 1022 1022 1022 1022 1022 1022 2 20 2 1
1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 2 2 2 2
* * * * * * * * * * * * * * *
IEC60870 Test Mode Change IEC60870 Test Mode Change IEC60870 Test Mode Change
N/A N/A N/A
20 21 22
DDB Elements 0-31
P341/EN GC/D22 Page 19/158
Courier Text DDB 127 - 96 DDB 159 - 128 DDB 191 - 160 DDB 223 - 192 DDB 255 - 224 DDB 287 - 256 DDB 319 - 288 DDB 351 - 320 DDB 383 - 352 DDB 415 - 384 DDB 447 - 416 DDB 479 - 448 DDB 511 - 480 DDB 543 - 512 DDB 575 - 544 DDB 607 - 576 DDB 639 - 608 DDB 671 - 640 DDB 703 - 672 DDB 735 - 704 DDB 767 - 736 DDB 799 - 768 DDB 831 - 800 DDB 863 - 832 DDB 895 - 864 DDB 927 - 896 DDB 959 - 928 DDB 991 - 960 DDB 1022 - 992
UI N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A
Courier Col Row 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 2A 2B 2C 2D 2E 2F 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 3A 3B 3C 3D 3E 3F
Data Type Binary Flag(32) Binary Flag(32) Binary Flag(32) Binary Flag(32) Binary Flag(32) Binary Flag(32) Binary Flag(32) Binary Flag(32) Binary Flag(32) Binary Flag(32) Binary Flag(32) Binary Flag(32) Binary Flag(32) Binary Flag(32) Binary Flag(32) Binary Flag(32) Binary Flag(32) Binary Flag(32) Binary Flag(32) Binary Flag(32) Binary Flag(32) Binary Flag(32) Binary Flag(32) Binary Flag(32) Binary Flag(32) Binary Flag(32) Binary Flag(32) Binary Flag(32) Binary Flag(32) Binary Flag(16) Courier Number (current) Courier Number (current) Courier Number (current) Courier Number (voltage) Courier Number (voltage) Courier Number (voltage) Courier Number (power) Courier Number (power) Courier Number (decimal) Courier Number (frequency) Binary Flag(8)
Strings
Modbus Address
Start 30729 30731 30733 30735 30737 30739 30741 30743 30745 30747 30749 30751 30753 30755 30757 30759 30761 30763 30765 30767 30769 30771 30773 30775 30777 30779 30781 30783 30785 30701 30702 30704 30706 30708 30710 30712 30714 30717 30720 30721 30722 40151
End 30730 30732 30734 30736 30738 30740 30742 30744 30746 30748 30750 30752 30754 30756 30758 30760 30762 30764 30766 30768 30770 30772 30774 30776 30778 30780 30782 30784 30786
Modbus Database
Default Setting
Cell Type
Min
Max
Step
Model Password Level P341 P342 P343 * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * *
Comment
G27 G27 G27 G27 G27 G27 G27 G27 G27 G27 G27 G27 G27 G27 G27 G27 G27 G27 G27 G27 G27 G27 G27 G27 G27 G27 G27 G27 G27 G26
Data Data Data Data Data Data Data Data Data Data Data Data Data Data Data Data Data Data Data Data Data Data Data Data Data Data Data Data Data Data Data Data Data Data Data Data Data Data Data Data Data 2 Setting 1 2 0.1 2
30703 30705 30707 30709 30711 30713 30716 30719
G24 G24 G24 G24 G24 G24 G29 G29 G30 G30 G1 G2
Relay Status (repeat of Courier status) IA Magnitude IB Magnitude IC Magnitude VAB Magnitude VBC Magnitude VCA Magnitude 3 Phase Watts 3 Phase VArs 3 Phase Power Factor Frequency Relay Test Port Status Broken Current Index
CB MONITOR SETUP Broken I^
10
00 01 Courier Number (Decimal)
P341/EN GC/D22 Page 20/158
Courier Text I^ Maintenance I^ Maintenance I^ Lockout I^ Lockout No. CB Ops Maint No. CB Ops Maint No. CB Ops Lock No. CB Ops Lock CB Time Maint CB Time Maint CB Time Lockout CB Time Lockout Fault Freq Lock Fault Freq Count Fault Freq Time OPTO CONFIG Global Nominal V Opto Input 1 Opto Input 2 Opto Input 3 Opto Input 4 Opto Input 5 Opto Input 6 Opto Input 7 Opto Input 8 Opto Input 9 Opto Input 10 Opto Input 11 Opto Input 12 Opto Input 13 Opto Input 14 Opto Input 15 Opto Input 16 Opto Input 17 Opto Input 18 Opto Input 19 Opto Input 20 Opto Input 21
UI
Courier Col Row 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 0A 0B 0C 0D 0E 0F 10 11 00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 0A 0B 0C 0D 0E 0F 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
Data Type Indexed String Courier Number (Current) Indexed String Courier Number (Current) Indexed String Unsigned Integer Indexed String Unsigned Integer Indexed String Courier Number (Time) Indexed String Courier Number (Time) Indexed String Unsigned Integer Courier Number (Time)
Strings
Modbus Address
Start 40152 40153
End
Modbus Database
Default Setting Alarm Disabled 1000 Alarm Disabled 2000 Alarm Disabled 10 Alarm Disabled 20 Alarm Disabled 0.1 Alarm Disabled 0.2 Alarm Disabled 10 3600
Cell Type
Min 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 0.005 0 0.005 0 1 0
Max 1 25000 1 25000 1 10000 1 10000 1 0.5 1 0.5 1 9999 9999
Step 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 0.001 1 0.001 1 1 1
Model Password Level P341 P342 P343 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * *
Comment Broken Current to cause maint. alarm IX Maintenance Alarm Broken Current to cause lockout alarm IX Maintenance Lockout CB Trips to cause maint. alarm Number of CB Trips for maint. alarm CB Trips to cause lockout alarm Number of CB Trips for lockout alarm CB Oper. Time to cause maint. alarm CB Operating time for maint. alarm CB Oper. Time to cause lockout alarm CB Operating time for lockout alarm Excessive fault frequency Excessive Fault Frequency Counter Excessive Fault Frequency Time Visible for Model Number design suffix 'B' and beyond Select Custom to select individual Opto Threshold Voltages
G88
G88 40154 G35 G88 40157 G35 G88 G1 G88 G1 G88 40164 G35 G88 40167 G35 G88 G1 40171 G35
Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting
G88 G88
40155 40156 40158 40159
G88
40160 40161
G88
40162 40163
G88
40165 40166
G88
40168 40169 40170
Indexed String Indexed String Indexed String Indexed String Indexed String Indexed String Indexed String Indexed String Indexed String Indexed String Indexed String Indexed String Indexed String Indexed String Indexed String Indexed String Indexed String Indexed String Indexed String Indexed String Indexed String Indexed String
G200 G201 G201 G201 G201 G201 G201 G201 G201 G201 G201 G201 G201 G201 G201 G201 G201 G201 G201 G201 G201 G201
40900 40901 40902 40903 40904 40905 40906 40907 40908 40909 40910 40911 40912 40913 40914 40915 40916 40917 40918 40919 40920 40921
48-54V 48-54V 48-54V 48-54V 48-54V 48-54V 48-54V 48-54V 48-54V 48-54V 48-54V 48-54V 48-54V 48-54V 48-54V 48-54V 48-54V 48-54V 48-54V 48-54V 48-54V 48-54V
Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
5 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4
1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2
* * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * *
P341/EN GC/D22 Page 21/158
Courier Text Opto Input 22 Opto Input 23 Opto Input 24 Opto Input 25 Opto Input 26 Opto Input 27 Opto Input 28 Opto Input 29 Opto Input 30 Opto Input 31 Opto Input 32 CONTROL INPUTS Ctrl I/P Status Control Input 1 Control Input 2 Control Input 3 Control Input 4 Control Input 5 Control Input 6 Control Input 7 Control Input 8 Control Input 9 Control Input 10 Control Input 11 Control Input 12 Control Input 13 Control Input 14 Control Input 15 Control Input 16 Control Input 17 Control Input 18 Control Input 19 Control Input 20 Control Input 21 Control Input 22 Control Input 23 Control Input 24 Control Input 25 Control Input 26 Control Input 27 Control Input 28 Control Input 29 Control Input 30 Control Input 31
UI
Courier Col Row 17 18 19 1A 1B 1C 1D 1E 1F 20 21 12 00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 0A 0B 0C 0D 0E 0F 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 1A 1B 1C 1D 1E 1F 20
Data Type Indexed String Indexed String Indexed String Indexed String Indexed String Indexed String Indexed String Indexed String Indexed String Indexed String Indexed String Binary Flag (32 bits) Indexed String Indexed String Indexed String Indexed String Indexed String Indexed String Indexed String Indexed String Indexed String Indexed String Indexed String Indexed String Indexed String Indexed String Indexed String Indexed String Indexed String Indexed String Indexed String Indexed String Indexed String Indexed String Indexed String Indexed String Indexed String Indexed String Indexed String Indexed String Indexed String Indexed String Indexed String
Strings
Modbus Address
Start 40922 40923 40924 40925 40926 40927 40928 40929 40930 40931 40932 40950 40952 40953 40954 40955 40956 40957 40958 40959 40960 40961 40962 40963 40964 40965 40966 40967 40968 40969 40970 40971 40972 40973 40974 40975 40976 40977 40978 40979 40980 40981 40982
End
Modbus Database
Default Setting 48-54V 48-54V 48-54V 48-54V 48-54V 48-54V 48-54V 48-54V 48-54V 48-54V 48-54V
Cell Type
Min 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
Max 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4
Step 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
Model Password Level P341 P342 P343 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * 2 * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * *
Comment
G201 G201 G201 G201 G201 G201 G201 G201 G201 G201 G201 G202 G203 G203 G203 G203 G203 G203 G203 G203 G203 G203 G203 G203 G203 G203 G203 G203 G203 G203 G203 G203 G203 G203 G203 G203 G203 G203 G203 G203 G203 G203 G203
G201 G201 G201 G201 G201 G201 G201 G201 G201 G201 G201 40951 G202 G203 G203 G203 G203 G203 G203 G203 G203 G203 G203 G203 G203 G203 G203 G203 G203 G203 G203 G203 G203 G203 G203 G203 G203 G203 G203 G203 G203 G203 G203 G203
Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting
No Operation No Operation No Operation No Operation No Operation No Operation No Operation No Operation No Operation No Operation No Operation No Operation No Operation No Operation No Operation No Operation No Operation No Operation No Operation No Operation No Operation No Operation No Operation No Operation No Operation No Operation No Operation No Operation No Operation No Operation No Operation
Command Command Command Command Command Command Command Command Command Command Command Command Command Command Command Command Command Command Command Command Command Command Command Command Command Command Command Command Command Command Command
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2
1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2
P341/EN GC/D22 Page 22/158
Courier Text Control Input 32 GROUP 1 GEN DIFF GenDiff Function Gen Diff Is1 Gen Diff k1 Gen Diff Is2 Gen Diff k2 GROUP 1 POWER Power1 Function -P>1 Setting P<1 Setting P>1 Setting Power1 TimeDelay Power1 DO Timer P1 Poledead Inh Power2 Function -P>2 Setting P<2 Setting P>2 Setting Power2 TimeDelay Power2 DO Timer P2 Poledead Inh GROUP 1 FIELD FAILURE FFail Alm Status FFail Alm Angle FFail Alm Delay FFail1 Status FFail1 -Xa1 FFail1 Xb1 FFail1 TimeDelay FFail1 DO Timer FFail2 Status FFail2 -Xa2 FFail2 Xb2
UI
Courier Col 30 Row 21 00 01 02 03 04 05 31 00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 0A 0B 0C 0D 0E 32 00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 0A 0B
Data Type Indexed String
Strings
Modbus Address
Start 40983
End
Modbus Database
Default Setting No Operation
Cell Type
Min 0
Max 2
Step 1
Model Password Level P341 P342 P343 2 * * * *
Comment
G203
G203
Command
Indexed String Courier Number (Current) Courier Number (Percentage) Courier Number (Current) Courier Number (Percentage)
G101
41000 41001 41002 41003 41004
G101 G2 G2 G2 G2
Percentage Bias 0.1 0 1.2 150
Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting
0 0.05*I1 0 1*I1 20
2 0.5*I1 20 5*I1 150
1 0.01*I1 5 0.1*I1 10
2 2 2 2 2 * *
* * * * * *
Indexed String Courier Number (Power) Courier Number (Power) Courier Number (Power) Courier Number (Time) Courier Number (Time) Indexed String Indexed String Courier Number (Power) Courier Number (Power) Courier Number (Power) Courier Number (Time) Courier Number (Time) Indexed String
G102
41050 41051 41052 41053 41054 41055
G102 G2 G2 G2 G2 G2 G37 G102 G2 G2 G2 G2 G2 G37
Over Reverse 20 5 20 10 120 120 5 0 Enabled Disabled Low Forward 20 5 20 10 120 120 2 0 Enabled
Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting
0 14*V1*I1 4*V1*I1 14*V1*I1 4*V1*I1 14*V1*I1 4*V1*I1 0 0 0 0 14*V1*I1 4*V1*I1 14*V1*I1 4*V1*I1 14*V1*I1 4*V1*I1 0 0 0
3 40*V1*I1 40*V1*I1 40*V1*I1 40*V1*I1 300*V1*I1 300*V1*I1 100 100 1 3 40*V1*I1 40*V1*I1 40*V1*I1 40*V1*I1 300*V1*I1 300*V1*I1 100 100 1
1 2*V1*I1 0.5*V1*I1 2*V1*I1 0.5*V1*I1 2*V1*I1 0.5*V1*I1 0.01 0.01 1 1 2*V1*I1 0.5*V1*I1 2*V1*I1 0.5*V1*I1 2*V1*I1 0.5*V1*I1 0.01 0.01 1
2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2
* * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * *
G37 G102
41056 41057 41058 41059 41060 41061 41062
G37
41063
Indexed String Courier Number (Angle) Courier Number (Time) Indexed String Courier Number (Impedance) Courier Number (Impedance) Courier Number (Time) Courier Number (Time) Indexed String Courier Number (Impedance) Courier Number (Impedance)
G37
41100 41101 41102
G37 G2 G2 G37 G2 G2 G2 G2 G37 G2 G2
Disabled 15 5 Enabled 20 220 5 0 Disabled 20 110
Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting
0 15 0 0 0 25*V1/I1 0 0 0 0 25*V1/I1
1 75 100 1 40*V1/I1 325*V1/I1 100 100 1 40*V1/I1 325*V1/I1
1 1 0.01 1 0.5*V1/I1 1*V1/I1 0.01 0.01 1 0.5*V1/I1 1*V1/I1
2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2
* * * * * * * * * * *
G37
41103 41104 41105 41106 41107
G37
41108 41109 41110
P341/EN GC/D22 Page 23/158
Courier Text FFail2 TimeDelay FFail2 DO Timer GROUP 1 NPS THERMAL I2>1 Alarm I2>1 Current Set I2>1 Time Delay I2>2 Trip I2>2 Current Set I2>2 k Setting I2>2 kRESET I2>2 tMAX I2>2 tMIN GROUP 1 SYSTEM BACKUP Backup Function Vector Rotation V Dep OC Char V Dep OC I> Set V Dep OC T Dial V Dep OC Reset V Dep OC Delay V Dep OC TMS V Dep OC tRESET V Dep OC V<1 Set V Dep OC V<2 Set V Dep OC k Set Z<1 Setting Z<1 Time Delay Z<1 tRESET Z< Stage 2 Z<2 Setting Z<2 Time Delay Z<2 tRESET GROUP 1 OVERCURRENT I>1 Function I>1 Direction I>1 Current Set I>1 Time Delay I>1 TMS
UI
Courier Col Row 0C 0D 33 00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 34 00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 0A 0B 0C 0D 0E 0F 10 11 12 13 35 00 01 02 03 04 05
Data Type Courier Number (Time) Courier Number (Time)
Strings
Modbus Address
Start 41111 41112
End
Modbus Database
Default Setting 0 0
Cell Type
Min 0 0
Max 100 100
Step 0.01 0.01
Model Password Level P341 P342 P343 2 2 * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * *
Comment
G2 G2
Setting Setting
Indexed String Courier Number (Current) Courier Number (Time) Indexed String Courier Number (Current) Courier Number (Time) Courier Number (Time) Courier Number (Time) Courier Number (Time)
G37
41150 41151 41152
G37 G2 G2 G37 G2 G2 G2 G2 G2
Enabled 0.05 20s Enabled 0.1 15 15 1000 0.25
Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting
0 0.03*I1 0 0 0.05*I1 2 2 500 0
1 0.5*I1 100 1 0.5*I1 40 40 2000 100
1 0.01*I1 0.01 1 0.01*I1 0.1 0.1 1 0.01
2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2
* * * * * * * * * *
G37
41153 41154 41155 41156 41157 41158
Indexed String Indexed String Indexed String Courier Number (Current) Courier Number (Decimal) Indexed String Courier Number (Time) Courier Number (Decimal) Courier Number (Time) Courier Number (Voltage) Courier Number (Voltage) Courier Number (Decimal) Courier Number (Impedance) Courier Number (Time) Courier Number (Time) Indexed String Courier Number (Impedance) Courier Number (Time) Courier Number (Time)
G103 G104 G111
41200 41201 41202 41203 41204 41205 41206 41207 41208 41209 41210 41211 41212 41213 41214
G103 G104 G111 G2 G2 G60 G2 G2 G2 G2 G2 G2 G2 G2 G2 G37 G2 G2 G2
Voltage controlled None IEC S Inverse 1 7 DT 1 1 0 80 60 0.25 70 5 0 Disabled 70 5 0
Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting
0 0 0 0.8*I1 0.5 0 0 0.025 0 20*V1 20*V1 0.25 2*V1/I1 0 0 0 2*V1/I1 0 0
3 1 9 4*I1 15 1 100 1.2 100 120*V1 120*V1 1 120*V1/I1 100 100 1 120*V1/I1 100 100
1 1 1 0.01*I1 0.1 1 0.01 0.025 0.01 1*V1 1*V1 0.05 0.5*V1/I1 0.01 0.01 1 0.5*V1/I1 0.01 0.01
2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 *
* * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * *
OC reset characteritic selection. Apply to US curves only. Apply to DT trip characteristic only 4>=3403>=1 (4>=3403>=0 OR 3406=0)&&(3401>1)
G37
41215 41216 41217 41218
Optional 2nd Stage Underimpedance Phase 2.12
Indexed String Indexed String Courier Number (Current) Courier Number (Time) Courier Number (Decimal)
G43 G44
41250 41251 41252 41253 41254
G43 G44 G2 G2 G2
Disabled IEC S Inverse Non-Directional 1 1 1
0 0 0.08*I1 0 0.025
10 2 4.0*I1 100 1.2
1 1 0.01*I1 0.01 0.025
2 2 2 2 2
* * *
I>1 Current Setting I>1 Definite Time 5>=3501>=2
P341/EN GC/D22 Page 24/158
Courier Text I>1 Time Dial I>1 Reset Char I>1 tRESET I>2 Function I>2 Direction I>2 Current Set I>2 Time Delay I>2 TMS I>2 Time Dial I>2 Reset Char I>2 tRESET I>3 Status I>3 Direction I>3 Current Set I>3 Time Delay I>4 Status I>4 Direction I>4 Current Set I>4 Time Delay I> Char Angle I> Function Link GROUP 1 THERMAL OVERLOAD Thermal Thermal I> Thermal Alarm T-heating T-cooling M Factor GROUP 1 Not Used GROUP 1 EARTH FAULT IN Input IN>1 Function IN>1 Direction IN>1 Current
UI
Courier Col Row 06 07 08 09 0A 0B 0C 0D 0E 0F 10 11 12 13 14 16 17 18 19 1A 1B 36 00 50 55 5A 5F 64 69 37 38 00 00 01 02 03 04
Data Type Courier Number (Decimal) Indexed String Courier Number (Time) Indexed String Indexed String Courier Number (Current) Courier Number (Time) Courier Number (Decimal) Courier Number (Decimal) Indexed String Courier Number (Time) Indexed String Indexed String Courier Number (Current) Courier Number (Time) Indexed String Indexed String Courier Number (Current) Courier Number (Time) Courier Number (Angle) Binary Flag
Strings
Modbus Address
Start 41255 41256 41257 41258 41259 41260 41261 41262 41263
End
Modbus Database
Default Setting 7 DT 0 Disabled DT Non-Directional 1 10 1 1 7 DT 0 Disabled Non-Directional 20 0 Disabled Non-Directional 20 0 30 15
Cell Type
Min 0.5 0 0 0 0 0 0.08*I1 0.08*I1 0 0.025 0.5 0 0 0 0 0.08*I1 0 0 0 0.08*I1 0 -95 15
Max 15 1 100 10 1 2 4.0*I1 10.0*I1 100 1.2 15 1 100 1 2 32*I1 100 1 2 32*I1 100 95 4
Step 0.1 1 0.01 1 1 1 0.01*I1 0.01*I1 0.01 0.025 0.1 1 0.01 1 1 0.01*I1 0.01 1 1 0.01*I1 0.01 1 1
Model Password Level P341 P342 P343 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * *
Comment
Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting
G60 G43 G105 G44
5>=3501>=1 OR 3507=0 I>2 Overcurrent Status
5>=3509>=2
G60 G37 G44
41264 41265 41266 41267 41268 41269
5>=3509>=1 OR 350F=0
G37 G44
41270 41271 41272 41273 41274
I> Characteristic Angle
G14
41275
Indexed String Courier Number (Current) Courier Number (Percentage) Courier Number (Time, minutes) Courier Number (Time, minutes) Courier Number (Decimal)
G37
41308 41309 41310 41311 41312 41313
G37 G2 G2 G2 G2 G2
Enabled 1.2 90 60 60 0
Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting
0 0.5*I1 20 1 1 0
1 2.5*I1 100 200 200 10
1 0.01*I1 1 1 1 1
2 2 2 2 2 2
* * * * * *
Thermal overload (I2t characteristic)
* Indexed String Indexed String Indexed String Courier Number (Current) G49 G43 G44 41400 41401 41402 G49 G43 G44 G2 Derived Measured IEC S Inverse Non-Directional 0.2 0.1 Setting Setting Setting 0 0 0.08*I1 0.02*I2 Setting Setting 0 0.025 10 2 4.0*I1 4.0*I2 200 1.2 1 1 0.01*I1 0.01*I2 0.01 0.025 2 2 * * 2 2 2 * * * Data *
* *
* *
* * *
* * *
IN>1 Time Delay IN>1 TMS
05 06
Courier Number (Time) Courier Number (Decimal)
41403 41404
G2 G2
1 1
Change scaling factor for Models 2&3 I>1 Definite Time 5>=3802>=2
P341/EN GC/D22 Page 25/158
Courier Text IN>1 Time Dial IN>1 Reset Char IN>1 tRESET IN>2 Function IN>2 Direction IN>2 Current
UI
Courier Col Row 07 08 09 0A 0B 0C
Data Type Courier Number (Decimal) Indexed String Courier Number (Time) Indexed String Indexed String Courier Number (Current)
Strings
Modbus Address
Start 41405 41406 41407 41408 41409 41410
End
Modbus Database
Default Setting 7 DT 0 Disabled Disabled Non-Directional 0.2 0.45
Cell Type
Min 0.5 0 0 0 0 0 0.08*I1 0.02*I2
Max 15 1 100 10 1 2 4.0*I1 10.0*I2 200 1.2 15 1 100 1 2 32*I1 200 1 2 32*I1 200 4 95 1 1 80*V1 80*V3 25*V1 1*I1
Step 0.1 1 0.01 1 1 1 0.01*I1 0.01*I2 0.01 0.025 0.1 1 0.01 1 1 0.01*I1 0.01 1 1 0.01*I1 0.01 1 1 1 1 0.5*V1 0.5*V3 0.5*V1 0.01*I1
Model Password Level P341 P342 P343 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 * * * 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * *
Comment
G2 G60 G2 G43 G105 G44 G2
G60 G43 G105 G44
5>=3802>=1 OR 3808=0
Change scaling factor for Models 2&3
IN>2 Time Delay IN>2 TMS IN>2 Time Dial IN>2 Reset Char IN>2 tRESET IN>3 Status IN>3 Direction IN>3 Current IN>3 Time Delay IN>4 Status IN>4 Direction IN>4 Current IN>4 Time Delay IN> Func Link IN> DIRECTIONAL IN> Char Angle IN> Pol IN> VNpol Input IN> VNpol Set IN> V2pol Set IN> I2pol Set GROUP 1 Not Used GROUP 1 SEF/REF PROT'N SEF/REF Options ISEF>1 Function ISEF>1 Direction ISEF>1 Current ISEF>1 Delay ISEF>1 TMS ISEF>1 Time Dial 3A 39
0D 0E 0F 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 1A 1B 1C 1D 1E 1F 20 21 00 00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07
Courier Number (Time) Courier Number (Decimal) Courier Number (Decimal) Indexed String Courier Number (Time) Indexed String Indexed String Courier Number (Current) Courier Number (Time) Indexed String Indexed String Courier Number (Current) Courier Number (Time) Binary Flags (Sub Heading) Courier Number(Angle) Indexed String Indexed String Courier Number (Voltage) Courier Number (Voltage) Courier Number (Current) G46 G49 G63 G37 G44 G37 G44 G60
41411 41412 41413 41414 41415 41416 41417 41418 41419 41420 41421 41422 41423 41424 41425 41426 41427 41428 41429 41430
G2 G2 G2 G60 G2 G37 G44 G2 G2 G37 G44 G2 G2 G63 G2 G46 G49 G2 G2 G2
1 0 1 7 DT 0 Disabled Non-Directional 0.5 0 Disabled Non-Directional 0.5 0 15 -60 Zero Sequence Measured 5 5 0.08
Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting
0 0.025 0.5 0 0 0 0 0.08*I1 0 0 0 0.08*I1 0 15 -95 0 0 0.5*V1 0.5*V3 0.5*V1 0.08*I1
5>=380A>=2
5>=380A>=1 OR 3810=0
IN> V0 Polarising Setting Change scaling factor IN> V2 Polarising Setting
* Indexed String Indexed String Indexed String Courier Number (Current) Courier Number (Time) Courier Number (Decimal) Courier Number (Decimal) G58 G43 G105 G44 41502 41503 41504 41505 41506 41500 41501 G58 G43 G105 G44 G2 G2 G2 G2 Non-Directional 0.05 1 1 7 Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting SEF DT Setting Setting 0 0 0 0 0 0.005*I3 0 0.025 0.5 4 7 10 1 2 0.1*I3 200 1.2 15 1 1 1 1 1 0.00025*I3 0.01 0.025 0.1 2 2 2 2 2 * * * * * 2 2 2 * *
* Protection Options
* * * * *
* * * * * (3A01<=3) OR (3A01>=6) ISEF>1 Directionality ISEF>1 Current Setting ISEF>1 Definite Time 5>=3A02>=2
P341/EN GC/D22 Page 26/158
Courier Text ISEF>1 Reset Chr ISEF>1 tRESET ISEF>2 Function ISEF>2 Direction ISEF>2 Current ISEF>2 Delay ISEF>2 TMS ISEF>2 Time Dial ISEF>2 Reset Chr ISEF>2 tRESET ISEF>3 Status ISEF>3 Direction ISEF>3 Current ISEF>3 Delay ISEF>4 Status ISEF>4 Direction ISEF>4 Current ISEF>4 Delay ISEF> Func Link ISEF DIRECTIONAL ISEF> Char Angle ISEF>VNpol Input ISEF> VNpol Set
UI
Courier Col Row 08 09 0A 0B 0C 0D 0E 0F 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 1A 1B 1C 1D 1E
Data Type Indexed String Courier Number (Time) Indexed String Indexed String Courier Number (Current) Courier Number (Time) Courier Number (Decimal) Courier Number (Decimal) Indexed String Courier Number (Time) Indexed String Indexed String Courier Number (Current) Courier Number (Time) Indexed String Indexed String Courier Number (Current) Courier Number (Time) Binary Flags (Sub Heading) Courier Number(Angle) Indexed String Courier Number (Voltage)
Strings
Modbus Address
Start 41507 41508
End
Modbus Database
Default Setting DT 0 Disabled Non-Directional 0.05 1 1 7 DT 0 Disabled Non-Directional 0.4 0.5 Disabled Non-Directional 0.6 0.25 15 90 Measured 5
Cell Type
Min 0 0 0 0 0.005*I3 0 0.025 0.5 0 0 0 0 0.005*I3 0 0 0 0.005*I3 0 15 -95 0 0.5*V1 0.5*V3
Max 1 100 10 2 0.1*I3 200 1.2 15 1 100 1 2 0.8*I3 200 1 2 0.8*I3 200 4 95 1 80*V1 80*V3 20*V1*I3 20*V3*I3 20 150 1.0*I1 1.5*I1 1.0*I3
Step 1 0.01 1 1 0.00025*I3 0.01 0.025 0.1 1 0.01 1 1 0.001*I3 0.01 1 1 0.001*I3 0.01 1 1 1 0.5*V1 0.5*V3 0.05*V1*I3 0.05*V3*I3 1 1 0.01*I1 0.01*I1 0.01*I3
Model Password Level P341 P342 P343 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * 2 * * * 2 2 2 2 2 * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * *
Comment
G60
Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting
(5>=3A02>=1 OR 3A08=0)&&(3A01<=3)
G43 G44
41509 41510 41511 41512 41513 41514
5>=3A0A>=2
G60
41515 41516
(5>=3A0A>=1 OR 3A10=0)&&(3A01<=3) ISEF>3 Directionality ISEF>3 Current Setting ISEF>3 Definite Time ISEF>4 Directionality ISEF>4 Current Setting ISEF>4 Definite Time (3A01<=3) OR (3A01>=6) (3A01<=3) OR (3A01>=6) (3A01<=3) OR (3A01>=6) (3A01<=3) OR (3A01>=6) (3A01<=3) OR (3A01>=6) Change scaling factor for measured VN (3A01=3) OR (3A01=6) (3A01=3) OR (3A01=6) Change scaling factor for Measured VN Restricted Earth Fault REF K1, applied to L Impedance REF K2, applied to L impedance REF Is1, applied to L impedance REF Is2, applied to L impedance REF Is, applied to H impedance
G37 G44
41517 41518 41519 41520
G37 G44
41521 41522 41523 41524
G64
41525 41526
G49
41527 41528
WATTMETRIC SEF PN> Setting
1F 20
(Sub Heading) Courier Number (Power) 41529 G2 9 Setting 0.0*V1*I3 0.0*V3*I3
RESTRICTED E/F IREF> k1 IREF> k2 IREF> Is1 IREF> Is2 IREF> Is GROUP 1 RESIDUAL O/V NVD VN Input VN>1 Function VN>1 Voltage Set VN>1 Time Delay VN>1 TMS VN>1 tReset 3B
21 22 23 24 25 26 00 01 02 03 04 05 06
(Sub Heading) Courier Number (Percentage) Courier Number (Percentage) Courier Number (Current) Courier Number (Current) Courier Number (Current) 41530 41531 41532 41533 41534 G2 G2 G2 G2 G2 20 150 0.2 1 0.2 Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting 0 0 0.05*I1 0.1*I1 0.05*I3
Indexed String Indexed String Courier Number (Voltage) Courier Number (Time) Courier Number (Decimal) Courier Number (Time)
G49 G23
41550 41551 41552 41553 41554 41555
G49 G23 G2 G2 G2 G2
Measured DT 5 5 1 0
0 0 1*V1 1*V3 0 0.5 0
1 2 50*V1 50*V3 100 100 100
1 1 1*V1 1*V3 0.01 0.5 0.01
2 2 2 2 2 2
* * * * * *
Change scaling factor * * *
P341/EN GC/D22 Page 27/158
Courier Text VN>2 Status VN>2 Voltage Set VN>2 Time Delay GROUP 1 100% STATOR EF 100%St EF Status 100% St EF VN3H< VN3H< Delay V<Inhibit set P< Inhibit P<Inhibit set Q< Inhibit Q<Inhibit set S< Inhibit S<Inhibit set 100% St EF VN3H> VN3H> Delay GROUP 1 VOLTS/HZ V/Hz Alm Status V/Hz Alarm Set V/Hz Alarm Delay V/Hz Trip Func V/Hz Trip Set V/Hz Trip TMS V/Hz Trip Delay GROUP 1 DF/DT df/dt Status df/dt Setting df/dt Time Delay df/dt f Low df/dt f High GROUP 1 V VECTOR SHIFT V Shift Status V Shift Angle GROUP 1 DEAD MACHINE Dead Mach Status Dead Mach I> Dead Mach V< Dead Mach tPU
UI
Courier Col Row 07 08 09 3C 00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 0A 0B 0C 3D 00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 3E 00 01 02 03 04 05 3F 00 01 02 40 00 01 02 03 04
Data Type Indexed String Courier Number (Voltage) Courier Number (Time)
Strings
Modbus Address
Start 41556 41557 41558
End
Modbus Database
Default Setting Disabled 10 10
Cell Type
Min 0 1*V1 1*V3 0
Max 1 50*V1 50*V3 100
Step 1 1*V1 1*V3 0.01
Model Password Level P341 P342 P343 2 2 2 * * * * * * * *
Comment
G37
G37 G2 G2
Change scaling factor * *
Indexed String Courier Number (Voltage) Courier Number (Time) Courier Number (Voltage) Indexed String Courier Number (Power) Indexed String Courier Number (VAr) Indexed String Courier Number (VA) Courier Number (Voltage) Courier Number (Time)
G112
41600 41601 41602 41603
G112 G2 G2 G2 G37 G2 G37 G2 G37 G2 G2 G2
1 (Undervoltage) 1 5 80 Disabled 4 Disabled 4 Disabled 4 1 5
Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting
0 0.3*V3 0 30*V1 0 4*V1*I1 0 4*V1*I1 0 4*V1*I1 0.3*V3 0
2 20*V3 100 120*V1 1 200*V1*I1 1 200*V1*I1 1 200*V1*I1 20*V3 100
1 0.1*V3 0.01 1*V1 1 0.5*V1*I1 1 0.5*V1*I1 1 0.5*V1*I1 0.1*V3 0.01
2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 *
* * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * *
G37 G37 G37
41604 41605 41606 41607 41608 41609 41610 41611
Indexed String Courier Number (Volts/Hz) Courier Number (Time) Indexed String Courier Number (Volts/Hz) Courier Number (Decimal) Courier Number (Time)
G37
41650 41651 41652
G37 G2 G2 G23 G2 G2 G2
Enabled 2.31 10 DT 2.42 1 1
0 1.5*V1 0 0 1.5*V1 1 0
1 3.5*V1 100 2 3.5*V1 63 100
1 0.01*V1 0.01 1 0.01*V1 1 0.01
2 2 2 2 2 2 2 *
* * * * * * *
G23
41653 41654 41655 41656
Indexed String Courier Number (Hz/s) Courier Number (Time) Courier Number (Frequency) Courier Number (Frequency)
G37
41700 41701 41702 41703 41704
G37 G2 G2 G2 G2
Enabled 0.2 0.5 49.5 50.5
0 0.1 0 45 45
1 10 100 65 65
1 0.01 0.01 0.01 0.01
2 2 2 2 2
* * * * * *
Indexed String Courier Number (Angle)
G37
41750 41751
G37 G2
Enabled 10
Setting Setting
0 2
1 30
1 1
2 2
* * *
Indexed String Courier Number (Current) Courier Number (Voltage) Courier Number (Time)
G37
41800 41801 41802 41803
G37 G2 G2 G2
Disabled 0.1 80 5
Setting Setting Setting Setting
0 0.08*I1 10*V1 0
1 4*I1 120*V1 10
1 0.01*I1 1*V1 0.1
2 2 2 2
* * * *
P341/EN GC/D22 Page 28/158
Courier Text Dead Mach tDO GROUP 1 RECONNECT DELAY Reconnect Status Reconnect Delay Reconnect tPULSE GROUP 1 VOLT PROTECTION UNDER VOLTAGE V< Measur't Mode V< Operate Mode V<1 Function V<1 Voltage Set V<1 Time Delay V<1 TMS V<1 Poledead Inh V<2 Status V<2 Voltage Set V<2 Time Delay V<2 Poledead Inh OVERVOLTAGE V> Measur't Mode V> Operate Mode V>1 Function V>1 Voltage Set V>1 Time Delay V>1 TMS V>2 Status V>2 Voltage Set V>2 Time Delay GROUP 1 FREQ PROTECTION UNDER FREQUENCY F<1 Status F<1 Setting F<1 Time Delay F<2 Status F<2 Setting F<2 Time Delay F<3 Status F<3 Setting F<3 Time Delay F<4 Status F<4 Setting F<4 Time Delay
UI
Courier Col 41 Row 05 00 01 02 03 42 00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 0A 0B 0C 0D 0E 0F 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 43 00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 0A 0B 0C 0D
Data Type Courier Number (Time)
Strings
Modbus Address
Start 41804
End
Modbus Database
Default Setting 0.5
Cell Type
Min 0
Max 10
Step 0.1
Model Password Level P341 P342 P343 2 * *
Comment
G2
Setting
Indexed String Courier Number (Time) Courier Number (Time)
G37
41850 41852 41853
G37 G2 G2
Enabled 60 1
0 0 0.01
1 300 30
1 0.01 0.01
2 2 2
* * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * Phase-Neutral Range covers Ph-N & Ph-Ph
(Sub Heading) Indexed String Indexed String Indexed String Courier Number (Voltage) Courier Number (Time) Courier Number (Decimal) Indexed String Indexed String Courier Number (Voltage) Courier Number (Time) Indexed String (Sub Heading) Indexed String Indexed String Indexed String Courier Number (Voltage) Courier Number (Time) Courier Number (Decimal) Indexed String Courier Number (Voltage) Courier Number (Time) G37 G47 G48 G23 41961 41962 41963 41964 41965 41966 41967 41968 41969 G47 G48 G23 G2 G2 G2 G37 G2 G2 Phase-Phase Any Phase DT 130 10 1 Disabled 150 0.5 Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting 0 0 0 60*V1 0 0.5 0 60*V1 0 1 1 2 185*V1 100 100 1 185*V1 100 1 1 1 1*V1 0.01 0.5 1 1*V1 0.01 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 G37 G37 G37 G47 G48 G23 41950 41951 41952 41953 41954 41955 41956 41957 41958 41959 41960 G47 G48 G23 G2 G2 G2 G37 G37 G2 G2 G37 Phase-Neutral Any Phase DT 50 10 1 Enabled Disabled 38 5 Enabled Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting 0 0 0 10*V1 0 0.5 0 0 10*V1 0 0 1 1 2 120*V1 100 100 1 1 70*V1 100 1 1 1 1 1*V1 0.01 0.5 1 1 1*V1 0.01 1 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2
* * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * *
(Sub Heading) Indexed String Courier Number (Frequency) Courier Number (Time) Indexed String Courier Number (Frequency) Courier Number (Time) Indexed String Courier Number (Frequency) Courier Number (Time) Indexed String Courier Number (Frequency) Courier Number (Time) G37 G37 G37 G37 42000 42001 42002 42003 42004 42005 42006 42007 42008 42009 42010 42011 G37 G2 G2 G37 G2 G2 G37 G2 G2 G37 G2 G2 Enabled 49.5 4 Disabled 49 3 Disabled 48.5 2 Disabled 48 1 Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting 0 45 0 0 45 0 0 45 0 0 45 0 1 65 100 1 65 100 1 65 100 1 65 100 1 0.01 0.01 1 0.01 0.01 1 0.01 0.01 1 0.01 0.01 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2
* * * * * * * * * * * * *
P341/EN GC/D22 Page 29/158
Courier Text F< Function Link OVER FREQUENCY F>1 Status F>1 Setting F>1 Time Delay F>2 Status F>2 Setting F>2 Time Delay GROUP 1 RTD PROTECTION Select RTD RTD 1 Alarm Set RTD 1 Alarm Dly RTD 1 Trip Set RTD 1 Trip Dly RTD 2 Alarm Set RTD 2 Alarm Dly RTD 2 Trip Set RTD 2 Trip Dly RTD 3 Alarm Set RTD 3 Alarm Dly RTD 3 Trip Set RTD 3 Trip Dly RTD 4 Alarm Set RTD 4 Alarm Dly RTD 4 Trip Set RTD 4 Trip Dly RTD 5 Alarm Set RTD 5 Alarm Dly RTD 5 Trip Set RTD 5 Trip Dly RTD 6 Alarm Set RTD 6 Alarm Dly RTD 6 Trip Set RTD 6 Trip Dly RTD 7 Alarm Set RTD 7 Alarm Dly RTD 7 Trip Set RTD 7 Trip Dly RTD 8 Alarm Set RTD 8 Alarm Dly RTD 8 Trip Set RTD 8 Trip Dly RTD 9 Alarm Set RTD 9 Alarm Dly
UI
Courier Col Row 0E 0F 10 11 12 13 14 15 44 00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 0A 0B 0C 0D 0E 0F 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 1A 1B 1C 1D 1E 1F 20 21 22 23
Data Type Binary Flag (4 bits) (Sub Heading) Indexed String Courier Number (Frequency) Courier Number (Time) Indexed String Courier Number (Frequency) Courier Number (Time)
Strings
Modbus Address
Start 42012 42013 42014 42015
End
Modbus Database
Default Setting 16 Enabled 50.5 2 Disabled 51 1
Cell Type
Min 15 0 45 0 0 45 0
Max 4 1 65 100 1 65 100
Step 1 1 0.01 0.01 1 0.01 0.01
Model Password Level P341 P342 P343 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * *
Comment
G65 G37
G65 G37 G2 G2 G37 G2 G2
G37
42016 42017 42018
Binary Flags(10 bits)Indexed String Courier Number (Temperature) Courier Number (Time) Courier Number (Temperature) Courier Number (Time) Courier Number (Temperature) Courier Number (Time) Courier Number (Temperature) Courier Number (Time) Courier Number (Temperature) Courier Number (Time) Courier Number (Temperature) Courier Number (Time) Courier Number (Temperature) Courier Number (Time) Courier Number (Temperature) Courier Number (Time) Courier Number (Temperature) Courier Number (Time) Courier Number (Temperature) Courier Number (Time) Courier Number (Temperature) Courier Number (Time) Courier Number (Temperature) Courier Number (Time) Courier Number (Temperature) Courier Number (Time) Courier Number (Temperature) Courier Number (Time) Courier Number (Temperature) Courier Number (Time) Courier Number (Temperature) Courier Number (Time) Courier Number (Temperature) Courier Number (Time)
G50
42053 42054 42055 42056 42057 42058 42059 42060 42061 42062 42063 42064 42065 42066 42067 42068 42069 42070 42071 42072 42073 42074 42075 42076 42077 42078 42079 42080 42081 42082 42083 42084 42085 42086 42087
G50 G1 G1 G1 G1 G1 G1 G1 G1 G1 G1 G1 G1 G1 G1 G1 G1 G1 G1 G1 G1 G1 G1 G1 G1 G1 G1 G1 G1 G1 G1 G1 G1 G1 G1
0 80 10 85 1 80 10 85 1 80 10 85 1 80 10 85 1 80 10 85 1 80 10 85 1 80 10 85 1 80 10 85 1 80 10
Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting
1023 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
10 200 100 200 100 200 100 200 100 200 100 200 100 200 100 200 100 200 100 200 100 200 100 200 100 200 100 200 100 200 100 200 100 200 100
1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2
* * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * *
P341/EN GC/D22 Page 30/158
Courier Text RTD 9 Trip Set RTD 9 Trip Dly RTD 10 Alarm Set RTD 10 Alarm Dly RTD 10 Trip Set RTD 10 Trip Dly GROUP 1 CB FAIL & I< BREAKER FAIL CB Fail 1 Status CB Fail 1 Timer CB Fail 2 Status CB Fail 2 Timer CBF Non I Reset CBF Ext Reset UNDER CURRENT I< Current Set IN< Current Set ISEF< Current BLOCKED O/C Remove I> Start Remove IN> Start GROUP 1 SUPERVISION VT SUPERVISION VTS Status VTS Reset Mode VTS Time Delay VTS I> Inhibit VTS I2> Inhibit CT SUPERVISION CTS Status CTS VN Input CTS VN< Inhibit CTS IN> Set CTS Time Delay GROUP 1 SENSITIVE POWER Comp Angle Sen Power1 Func Sen -P>1 Setting Sen P<1 Setting Sen P>1 Setting Sen Power1 Delay
UI
Courier Col Row 24 25 26 27 28 29 45 00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 0A 0B 0C 0D 0E 46 00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 0A 0B 0C 47 00 01 02 03 04 05 06
Data Type Courier Number (Temperature) Courier Number (Time) Courier Number (Temperature) Courier Number (Time) Courier Number (Temperature) Courier Number (Time)
Strings
Modbus Address
Start 42088 42089 42090 42091 42092 42093
End
Modbus Database
Default Setting 85 1 80 10 85 1
Cell Type
Min 0 0 0 0 0 0
Max 200 100 200 100 200 100
Step 1 1 1 1 1 1
Model Password Level P341 P342 P343 2 2 2 2 2 2 * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * *
Comment
G1 G1 G1 G1 G1 G1
(Sub Heading) Indexed String Courier Number (Time) Indexed String Courier Number (Time) Indexed String Indexed String (Sub Heading) Courier Number (Current) Courier Number (Current) Courier Number (Current) (Sub Heading) Indexed String Indexed String G37 G37 42109 42110 G37 G37 Disabled Disabled Setting Setting 0 0 1 1 1 1 2 2 42106 42107 42108 G2 G2 G2 0.1 0.1 0.02 Setting Setting Setting 0.02*I1 0.02*I2 0.001*I3 3.2*I1 3.2*I2 0.8*I3 0.01*I1 0.01*I2 0.0005*I3 2 2 2 G68 G68 G37 G37 42100 42101 42102 42103 42104 42105 G37 G2 G37 G2 G68 G68 Enabled 0.2 Disabled 0.4 CB Open & I< CB Open & I< Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 10 1 10 2 2 1 0.01 1 0.01 1 1 2 2 2 2 2 2
* * * * * * * * *
P341 does not have IN input Blocked Overcurrent Schemes
(Sub Heading) Indexed String Indexed String Courier Number (Time) Courier Number (Current) Courier Number (Current) (Sub Heading) Indexed String Indexed String Courier Number (Voltage) Courier Number (Current) Courier Number (Time) G37 G49 42155 42156 42157 42158 42159 G37 G49 G2 G2 G2 Disabled Derived 5 0.2 5 Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting 0 0 0.5*V1 0.5*V3 0.08*I1 0 1 1 22*V1 22*V3 4*I1 10 1 1 0.5*V1 0.5*V3 0.01*I1 1 2 2 2 2 2 G7 G69 42150 42151 42152 42153 42154 G7 G69 G2 G2 G2 Blocking Manual 5 10 0.05 Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting 0 0 1 0.08*I1 0.05*I1 1 1 10 32*I1 0.5*I1 1 1 0.1 0.01*I1 0.01*I1 2 2 2 2 2
* * * * * * * * * * * * *
Change scaling factor * * * * * * * * *
Courier Number (Angle) Indexed String Courier Number (Power) Courier Number (Power) Courier Number (Power) Courier Number (Time) G102
42175 42176 42177 42178 42179 42180
G2 G102 G2 G2 G2 G2
0 Reverse 0.5*V1*I3 0.5*V1*I3 50*V1*I3 5
-5 0 0.3*V1*I3 0.3*V1*I3 0.3*V1*I3 0
5 3 15*V1*I3 15*V1*I3 100*V1*I3 100
0.1 1 0.1*V1*I3 0.1*V1*I3 0.1*V1*I3 0.01
2 2 2 2 2 2
* * * * * *
P341/EN GC/D22 Page 31/158
Courier Text Power1 DO Timer P1 PoleDead Inh Sen Power2 Func Sen -P>2 Setting Sen P<2 Setting Sen P>2 Setting Sen Power2 Delay Power2 DO Timer P2 PoleDead Inh GROUP 1 NOT USED GROUP 1 POLE SLIPPING PSlip Function Z Based PoleSlip Pole Slip Mode PSlip Za Forward PSlip Zb Reverse Lens Angle PSlip Timer T1 PSlip Timer T2 Blinder Angle PSlip Zc Zone1 Slip Count Zone2 Slip Count PSlip Reset Time GROUP 1 INPUT LABELS Opto Input 1 Opto Input 2 Opto Input 3 Opto Input 4 Opto Input 5 Opto Input 6 Opto Input 7 Opto Input 8 Opto Input 9 Opto Input 10 Opto Input 11 Opto Input 12 Opto Input 13 Opto Input 14 Opto Input 15 Opto Input 16 Opto Input 17
UI
Courier Col Row 07 08 09 0A 0B 0C 0D 0E 0F 48 49 00 00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 0A 0B 0C 0D 4A 00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 0A 0B 0C 0D 0E 0F 10 11
Data Type Courier Number (Time) Indexed String Indexed String Courier Number (Power) Courier Number (Power) Courier Number (Power) Courier Number (Time) Courier Number (Time) Indexed String
Strings
Modbus Address
Start 42181 42182 42183 42184 42185 42186 42187 42188
End
Modbus Database
Default Setting 0 Enabled Low Forward 0.5*V1*I3 0.5*V1*I3 50*V1*I3 2 0 Enabled
Cell Type
Min 0 0 0 0.3*V1*I3 0.3*V1*I3 0.3*V1*I3 0 0 0
Max 100 1 3 15*V1*I3 15*V1*I3 100*V1*I3 100 100 1
Step 0.01 1 1 0.1*V1*I3 0.1*V1*I3 0.1*V1*I3 0.01 0.01 1
Model Password Level P341 P342 P343 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * *
Comment
G2 G37 G102 G2 G2 G2 G2 G2 G37
Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting
G37 G102
G37
42189
* Indexed String (Sub Heading) Indexed String Courier Number (Impedance) Courier Number (Impedance) Courier Number (Angle) Courier Number (Time) Courier Number (Time) Courier Number (Angle) Courier Number (Impedance) Unsigned Integer Unsigned Integer Courier Number (Time) G1 G1 G113 42251 42252 42253 42254 42255 42256 42257 42258 42259 42260 42261 G113 G2 G2 G2 G2 G2 G2 G2 G1 G1 G2 Generating 100*V1/I1 150*V1/I1 120 0.015 0.015 75 50*V1/I1 1 2 30 Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting 0 0.5*V1/I1 0.5*V1/I1 90 0 0 20 0.5*V1/I1 1 1 0 2 350*V1/I1 350*V1/I1 150 1 1 90 350*V1/I1 20 20 100 1 0.5*V1/I1 0.5*V1/I1 1 0.005 0.005 1 0.5*V1/I1 1 1 0.01 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 * ASCII Text (16 chars) ASCII Text (16 chars) ASCII Text (16 chars) ASCII Text (16 chars) ASCII Text (16 chars) ASCII Text (16 chars) ASCII Text (16 chars) ASCII Text (16 chars) ASCII Text (16 chars) ASCII Text (16 chars) ASCII Text (16 chars) ASCII Text (16 chars) ASCII Text (16 chars) ASCII Text (16 chars) ASCII Text (16 chars) ASCII Text (16 chars) ASCII Text (16 chars) 42300 42308 42316 42324 42332 42340 42348 42356 42364 42372 42380 42388 42396 42404 42412 42420 42428 42307 42315 42323 42331 42339 42347 42355 42363 42371 42379 42387 42395 42403 42411 42419 42427 42435 G3 G3 G3 G3 G3 G3 G3 G3 G3 G3 G3 G3 G3 G3 G3 G3 G3 ** ** ** ** ** ** ** ** ** ** ** ** ** ** ** ** ** Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting 32 32 32 32 32 32 32 32 32 32 32 32 32 32 32 32 32 163 163 163 163 163 163 163 163 163 163 163 163 163 163 163 163 163 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * G37 42250 G37 Enabled Setting 0 1 1 2 * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * ** Refer to Default PSL Settings ** Refer to Default PSL Settings ** Refer to Default PSL Settings ** Refer to Default PSL Settings ** Refer to Default PSL Settings ** Refer to Default PSL Settings ** Refer to Default PSL Settings ** Refer to Default PSL Settings ** Refer to Default PSL Settings ** Refer to Default PSL Settings ** Refer to Default PSL Settings ** Refer to Default PSL Settings ** Refer to Default PSL Settings ** Refer to Default PSL Settings ** Refer to Default PSL Settings ** Refer to Default PSL Settings ** Refer to Default PSL Settings
P341/EN GC/D22 Page 32/158
Courier Text Opto Input 18 Opto Input 19 Opto Input 20 Opto Input 21 Opto Input 22 Opto Input 23 Opto Input 24 Opto Input 25 Opto Input 26 Opto Input 27 Opto Input 28 Opto Input 29 Opto Input 30 Opto Input 31 Opto Input 32 GROUP 1 OUTPUT LABELS Relay 1 Relay 2 Relay 3 Relay 4 Relay 5 Relay 6 Relay 7 Relay 8 Relay 9 Relay 10 Relay 11 Relay 12 Relay 13 Relay 14 Relay 15 Relay 16 Relay 17 Relay 18 Relay 19 Relay 20 Relay 21 Relay 22 Relay 23 Relay 24 Relay 25 Relay 26 Relay 27 Relay 28
UI
Courier Col Row 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 1A 1B 1C 1D 1E 1F 20 4B 00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 0A 0B 0C 0D 0E 0F 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 1A 1B 1C
Data Type ASCII Text (16 chars) ASCII Text (16 chars) ASCII Text (16 chars) ASCII Text (16 chars) ASCII Text (16 chars) ASCII Text (16 chars) ASCII Text (16 chars) ASCII Text (16 chars) ASCII Text (16 chars) ASCII Text (16 chars) ASCII Text (16 chars) ASCII Text (16 chars) ASCII Text (16 chars) ASCII Text (16 chars) ASCII Text (16 chars)
Strings
Modbus Address
Start 42436 42444 42452 42460 42468 42476 42484 42492 42500 42508 42516 42524 42532 42540 42548
End 42443 42451 42459 42467 42475 42483 42491 42499 42507 42515 42523 42531 42539 42547 42555
Modbus Database
Default Setting ** ** ** ** ** ** ** ** ** ** ** ** ** ** **
Cell Type
Min 32 32 32 32 32 32 32 32 32 32 32 32 32 32 32
Max 163 163 163 163 163 163 163 163 163 163 163 163 163 163 163
Step 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
Model Password Level P341 P342 P343 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * *
Comment ** Refer to Default PSL Settings ** Refer to Default PSL Settings ** Refer to Default PSL Settings ** Refer to Default PSL Settings ** Refer to Default PSL Settings ** Refer to Default PSL Settings ** Refer to Default PSL Settings ** Refer to Default PSL Settings ** Refer to Default PSL Settings ** Refer to Default PSL Settings ** Refer to Default PSL Settings ** Refer to Default PSL Settings ** Refer to Default PSL Settings ** Refer to Default PSL Settings ** Refer to Default PSL Settings
G3 G3 G3 G3 G3 G3 G3 G3 G3 G3 G3 G3 G3 G3 G3
Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting
ASCII Text (16 chars) ASCII Text (16 chars) ASCII Text (16 chars) ASCII Text (16 chars) ASCII Text (16 chars) ASCII Text (16 chars) ASCII Text (16 chars) ASCII Text (16 chars) ASCII Text (16 chars) ASCII Text (16 chars) ASCII Text (16 chars) ASCII Text (16 chars) ASCII Text (16 chars) ASCII Text (16 chars) ASCII Text (16 chars) ASCII Text (16 chars) ASCII Text (16 chars) ASCII Text (16 chars) ASCII Text (16 chars) ASCII Text (16 chars) ASCII Text (16 chars) ASCII Text (16 chars) ASCII Text (16 chars) ASCII Text (16 chars) ASCII Text (16 chars) ASCII Text (16 chars) ASCII Text (16 chars) ASCII Text (16 chars)
42556 42564 42572 42580 42588 42596 42604 42612 42620 42628 42636 42644 42652 42660 42668 42676 42684 42692 42700 42708 42716 42724 42732 42740 42748 42756 42764 42772
42563 42571 42579 42587 42595 42603 42611 42619 42627 42635 42643 42651 42659 42667 42675 42683 42691 42699 42707 42715 42723 42731 42739 42747 42755 42763 42771 42779
** ** ** ** ** ** ** ** ** ** ** ** ** ** ** ** ** ** ** ** ** ** ** ** ** ** ** **
Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting
32 32 32 32 32 32 32 32 32 32 32 32 32 32 32 32 32 32 32 32 32 32 32 32 32 32 32 32
163 163 163 163 163 163 163 163 163 163 163 163 163 163 163 163 163 163 163 163 163 163 163 163 163 163 163 163
1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2
* * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * *
** Refer to Default PSL Settings ** Refer to Default PSL Settings ** Refer to Default PSL Settings ** Refer to Default PSL Settings ** Refer to Default PSL Settings ** Refer to Default PSL Settings ** Refer to Default PSL Settings ** Refer to Default PSL Settings ** Refer to Default PSL Settings ** Refer to Default PSL Settings ** Refer to Default PSL Settings ** Refer to Default PSL Settings ** Refer to Default PSL Settings ** Refer to Default PSL Settings ** Refer to Default PSL Settings ** Refer to Default PSL Settings ** Refer to Default PSL Settings ** Refer to Default PSL Settings ** Refer to Default PSL Settings ** Refer to Default PSL Settings ** Refer to Default PSL Settings ** Refer to Default PSL Settings ** Refer to Default PSL Settings ** Refer to Default PSL Settings ** Refer to Default PSL Settings ** Refer to Default PSL Settings ** Refer to Default PSL Settings ** Refer to Default PSL Settings
P341/EN GC/D22 Page 33/158
Courier Text Relay 29 Relay 30 Relay 31 Relay 32 GROUP 1 RTD LABELS RTD 1 RTD 2 RTD 3 RTD 4 RTD 5 RTD 6 RTD 7 RTD 8 RTD 9 RTD 10 GROUP 2 PROTECTION SETTINGS
Repeat of Group 1 columns/rows
UI
Courier Col Row 1D 1E 1F 20 4C 00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 0A 50 70 90 00 00 00 00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 0A 0B 0C 0D 0E 0E 0F 0F
Data Type ASCII Text (16 chars) ASCII Text (16 chars) ASCII Text (16 chars) ASCII Text (16 chars)
Strings
Modbus Address
Start 42780 42788 42796 42804
End 42787 42795 42803 42811
Modbus Database
Default Setting ** ** ** **
Cell Type
Min 32 32 32 32
Max 163 163 163 163
Step 1 1 1 1
Model Password Level P341 P342 P343 2 2 2 2 * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * *
Comment ** Refer to Default PSL Settings ** Refer to Default PSL Settings ** Refer to Default PSL Settings ** Refer to Default PSL Settings 0927=1 AND 091F=1 AND 0006="P34????B*"
G3 G3 G3 G3
Setting Setting Setting Setting
ASCII Text (16 chars) ASCII Text (16 chars) ASCII Text (16 chars) ASCII Text (16 chars) ASCII Text (16 chars) ASCII Text (16 chars) ASCII Text (16 chars) ASCII Text (16 chars) ASCII Text (16 chars) ASCII Text (16 chars)
42812 42820 42828 42836 42844 42852 42860 42868 42876 42884 43000 45000 47000
42819 42827 42835 42843 42851 42859 42867 42875 42883 42891 44999 46999 48999
G3 G3 G3 G3 G3 G3 G3 G3 G3 G3
RTD 1 RTD 2 RTD 3 RTD 4 RTD 5 RTD 6 RTD 7 RTD 8 RTD 9 RTD 10
Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting
32 32 32 32 32 32 32 32 32 32
163 163 163 163 163 163 163 163 163 163
1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 * * * * * * *
* * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * *
GROUP 3 PROTECTION SETTINGS

GROUP 4 PROTECTION SETTINGS

(No Header) Select Record Faulted Phase Start Elements1 Start Elements2 Trip Elements1 Trip Elements2 Fault Alarms Fault Time Active Group System Frequency Fault Duration CB Operate Time Relay Trip Time IA IA-1 IB IB-1
N/A B0
Auto extraction Event Record Column Unsigned Integer(2) Binary Flag (8 bits) Indexed String Binary Flag (32 Bits) Indexed String Binary Flag (32 Bits) Indexed String Binary Flag (32 Bits) Indexed String Binary Flag (32 Bits) Indexed String Binary Flag (32 Bits) Indexed String IEC870 Time & Date Unsigned Integer Courier Number (frequency) Courier Number (time) Courier Number (time) Courier Number (time) Courier Number (current) Courier Number (current) Courier Number (current) Courier Number (current) 0..31 0..31 0..31 0..31 0..31 0..31 0..31 0..31 0..31 0..31 1 bit per elementLSB String..MSB String 1 bit per elementLSB String..MSB String 1 bit per elementLSB String..MSB String 1 bit per elementLSB String..MSB String 1 bit per elementLSB String..MSB String Setting Data Data Data Data Data Data Data Data Data Data Data Data Data Data Data Data 0 65535 1
* * * * * * * * * * * * * *
Unique cyclical fault number(from event) Product Specific Bit Flags Targetting Product Specific Bit Flags Targetting Product Specific Bit Flags Targetting Product Specific Bit Flags Targetting Product Specific Bit Flags Targetting
P341/EN GC/D22 Page 34/158
Courier Text IC IC-1 VAB VBC VCA VAN VBN VCN IA-2 IB-2 IC-2 IA Differential IB Differential IC Differential VN Measured VN Derived IN Measured IN Derived I Sensitive IREF Diff IREF Bias I2 3 Phase Watts 3 Phase VARs 3 Phase Power Factor RTD 1 label RTD 2 label RTD 3 label RTD 4 label RTD 5 label RTD 6 label RTD 7 label RTD 8 label RTD 9 label RTD 10 label df/dt V Vector Shift No Header Select Record Time and Date Record Text Error No1 Error No2 DATA TRANSFER Domain
UI
Courier Col Row 10 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 1A 1B 1C 1D 1E 1F 1F 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 2A 2B 2C 2D 2E 2F 30 31 32
Data Type Courier Number (current) Courier Number (current) Courier Number (voltage) Courier Number (voltage) Courier Number (voltage) Courier Number (voltage) Courier Number (voltage) Courier Number (voltage) Courier Number (current) Courier Number (current) Courier Number (current) Courier Number (Current) Courier Number (Current) Courier Number (Current) Courier Number (Voltage) Courier Number (Voltage) Courier Number (Voltage) Courier Number (Current) Courier Number (Current) Courier Number (Current) Courier Number (Current) Courier Number (Current) Courier Number (Watts) Courier Number (VARs) Courier Number (No unit) Courier Number (Temperature) Courier Number (Temperature) Courier Number (Temperature) Courier Number (Temperature) Courier Number (Temperature) Courier Number (Temperature) Courier Number (Temperature) Courier Number (Temperature) Courier Number (Temperature) Courier Number (Temperature) Courier Number (Hz/s) Courier Number (Angle) UINT16 IEC Date and Time ASCII Text UINT32 UINT32 Indexed String
Strings
Modbus Address
Start
End
Modbus Database
Default Setting
Cell Type
Min
Max
Step
Model Password Level P341 P342 P343 * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * *
Comment
Data Data Data Data Data Data Data Data Data Data Data Data Data Data Data Data Data Data Data Data Data Data Data Data Data Data Data Data Data Data Data Data Data Data Data Data Data Setting Data Data Data Data G57 PSL Settings Setting 0 1 1 2 0 65535 1
N/A B1
00 01 02 03 04 05
* * * * * *
Text Description of Error Error Code Error Code
(No N/A B2
00 04
P341/EN GC/D22 Page 35/158
Courier Text Sub-Domain Version Start Length Data Transfer Reference Transfer Mode Data Transfer RECORDER CONTROL UNUSED Recorder Source Reserved for future use RECORDER EXTRACTION Select Record Trigger Time Active Channels Channel Types Channel Offsets Channel Scaling Channel SkewVal Channel MinVal Channel MaxVal Format Upload UNUSED No. Of Samples Trig Position Time Base UNUSED Sample Timer UNUSED Dist. Channel 1 Dist. Channel 2 Dist. Channel 3 Dist. Channel 4 Dist. Channel 5 Dist. Channel 6 Dist. Channel 7 Dist. Channel 8 Dist. Channel 9 Dist. Channel 10 Dist. Channel 11 Dist. Channel 12 Dist. Channel 13
UI
Courier Col Row 08 0C 10 14 18 1C 20
Data Type Indexed String Unsigned Integer (2 Bytes) Not Used Not Used Unsigned Integer Indexed Strings Repeated groups of Unsigned Integers
Strings
Modbus Address
Start
End
Modbus Database
Default Setting Group 1 256
Cell Type
Min 0 0
Max 3 65535
Step 1 1
Model Password Level P341 P342 P343 2 2 * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * *
Comment
G90
Setting Setting
G76
G76
Setting Setting
* * * *
Only settable if Domain = PSL Settings
N/A B3
00 01 02 03-1F Indexed String 0 0 Samples Data
* * *
N/A B4
00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 0A 0B 0C-0F 10 11 12 13 14 15-1F 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 2A 2B 2C Integer Integer Integer Integer Integer Integer Integer Integer Integer Integer Integer Integer Integer Data Data Data Data Data Data Data Data Data Data Data Data Data Unsigned Integer Data Unsigned Integer Unsigned Integer Courier Number (time) Data Data Data Unsigned Integer IEC870 Time & Date Binary Flag Binary Flag Courier Number (decimal) Courier Number (decimal) Integer Integer Integer Unsigned Integer Unsigned Integer 0 Setting Data Data Data Data Data Data Data Data Data Data -199 199 1 0
* * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * *
Build=IEC60870-5-103 Build=IEC60870-5-103 Build=IEC60870-5-103 Build=IEC60870-5-103 Build=IEC60870-5-103 Build=IEC60870-5-103 Build=IEC60870-5-103 0 = uncompressed, 1 = compressed Unused when Build=IEC60870-5103 Build=IEC60870-5-103 Build=IEC60870-5-103 Build=IEC60870-5-103 Build=IEC60870-5-103 Build=IEC60870-5-103 Build=IEC60870-5-103 Build=IEC60870-5-103 Build=IEC60870-5-103 Build=IEC60870-5-103 Build=IEC60870-5-103 Build=IEC60870-5-103 Build=IEC60870-5-103 Build=IEC60870-5-103 Build=IEC60870-5-103 Build=IEC60870-5-103 Build=IEC60870-5-103 Build=IEC60870-5-103
P341/EN GC/D22 Page 36/158
Courier Text UNUSED Dist. Channel 31 Dist. Channel 32
UI
Courier Col Row 2D-3D 3E 3F
Data Type
Strings
Modbus Address
Start
End
Modbus Database
Default Setting
Cell Type
Min
Max
Step
Model Password Level P341 P342 P343 * * * * * *
Comment
Binary Flag Binary Flag 30800 30801 30802 30803 40250 30930 30933 30929 G1 G1 G1 G1 G1 G12
Data Data Data Data Data Data Setting Data 1 65535 1 2
Build=IEC60870-5-103 Build=IEC60870-5-103 No. of Disturbance Records (0 to 200) Oldest Stored Dist. Record (1 to 65535) Number of Registers in Current Page Disturbance Record Page (0 to 65535) Select Disturbance Record Timestamp of selected record
Calibration Coefficients Cal Soft Version Cal Date and Time Channel Types Cal Coeffs Comms Diagnostics Bus Comms Err Count Front Bus Message Count Front Protocol Err Count Front Slave Message Count Front Reset front count Bus Comms Err Count Rear Protocol Err Count Rear Slave Message Count Rear Busy Count Rear Reset Rear Count PSL DATA Grp 1 PSL Ref Date/Time Grp 1 PSL ID Grp 2 PSL Ref Date/Time Grp 2 PSL ID Grp 3 PSL Ref Date/Time Grp 3 PSL ID Grp 4 PSL Ref Date/Time Grp 4 PSL ID COMMS SYS DATA Dist Record Cntrl Ref Dist Record Extract Ref Setting Transfer
(Hi N/A B5 01 02 03 04 (HN/A B6 00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 0A B7 00 01 02 03 11 12 13 21 22 23 31 32 33 N/A BF 00 01 02 03 Menu Cell(2) Menu Cell(2) Unsigned Integer B300 B400 Data Data Setting ASCII Text (32 Chars) IEC 870 Date & Time Unsigned Integer (32 bits) ASCII Text (32 Chars) IEC 870 Date & Time Unsigned Integer (32 bits) ASCII Text (32 Chars) IEC 870 Date & Time Unsigned Integer (32 bits) ASCII Text (32 Chars) IEC 870 Date & Time Unsigned Integer (32 bits) 31000 31016 31020 31022 31038 31042 31044 31060 31064 31066 31082 31086 31015 31019 31021 31037 31041 31043 31059 31063 31065 31079 31085 31087 G3 G12 G27 G3 G12 G27 G3 G12 G27 G3 G12 G27 Data Data Data Data Data Data Data Data Data Data Data Data ASCII text 16 chars IEC Date and time Repeated Group 16 * Binary Flag 8 bits Block transfer Repeated Group of UINT32 (4 coeffs voltage channel, 8 coeffs current channel) Note: No text in column text UINT32 UINT32 UINT32 UNIT32 (Reset Menu Cell cmd only) UINT32 UINT32 UINT32 UINT32 (Reset Menu Cell cmd only)
* * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * *
* * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * *
* * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * *
P341/EN GC/D22 Page 37/158
Courier Text Reset Demand UNUSED Block Xfer Ref DIAGNOSTICS (hidden) Enable Column CPU Load-Instant CPU Load-Average CPU Load-Min CPU Load-Max CPU Load Reset DDB to set: DDB to reset: DDB to pulse: UINT32 - 1 UINT32 - 2 UINT32 - 3 UINT32 - 4 UINT32 - 5 INT32 - 1 INT32 - 2 INT32 - 3 INT32 - 4 INT32 - 5 BIN32 - 1 BIN32 - 2 BIN32 - 3 BIN32 - 4 BIN32 - 5 FLT32 - 1 FLT32 - 2 FLT32 - 3 FLT32 - 4 FLT32 - 5
UI
Courier Col Row 04 05 06 E0 00 01 11 12 13 14 1F 21 22 23 31 32 33 34 35 41 42 43 44 45 51 52 53 54 55 61 62 63 64 65
Data Type None (Reset Menu Cell) Menu Cell(2) Indexed String Unsigned Integer (32 bits) Unsigned Integer (32 bits) Unsigned Integer (32 bits) Unsigned Integer (32 bits) Indexed String Unsigned Integer (32 bits) Unsigned Integer (32 bits) Unsigned Integer (32 bits) Unsigned Integer (32 bits) Unsigned Integer (32 bits) Unsigned Integer (32 bits) Unsigned Integer (32 bits) Unsigned Integer (32 bits) Signed Integer (32 bits) Signed Integer (32 bits) Signed Integer (32 bits) Signed Integer (32 bits) Signed Integer (32 bits) Binary Flag (32 bits) Binary Flag (32 bits) Binary Flag (32 bits) Binary Flag (32 bits) Binary Flag (32 bits) Courier Number (meters) Courier Number (meters) Courier Number (meters) Courier Number (meters) Courier Number (meters)
Strings
Modbus Address
Start
End
Modbus Database
Default Setting
Cell Type
Min
Max
Step
Model Password Level P341 P342 P343 * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * *
Comment
Data(but supports Reset Menu cell) B200 G11 G11 G25 G25 G25 G25 G11 G11 0 (No) 0 (No) Data Setting Data Data Data Data Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Data Data Data Data Data Data Data Data Data Data G24 G24 G24 G24 G24 Data Data Data Data Data 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1022 1022 1022 2^32-1 2^32-1 2^32-1 2^32-1 2^32-1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 0 1 1 2
* * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * *
CPU Load Measurements
Manual DDB Control for tests
Debug variables - default: Not used
P341/EN GC/D22 Page 38/158
Data Types
TYPE G1 G2 VALUE/BIT MASK UNSIGNED INTEGER eg. 5678 stored as 5678 NUMERIC SETTING Modbus value = (relay setting - minimum setting)/step size G3 0x00FF 0xFF00 G4 (Second reg, First Reg) 0x0000,0x0001 0x0000,0x0002 0x0000,0x0004 0x0000,0x0008 0x0000,0x0010 0x0000,0x0020 0x0000,0x0040 0x0000,0x0080 0x0000,0x0100 0x0000,0x0200 0x0000,0x0400 0x0000,0x0800 0x0000,0x1000 0x0000,0x2000 0x0000,0x4000 0x0000,0x8000 G5 CB1 Open (0 = Off, 1 = On) CB1 Closed (0 = Off, 1 = On) Not Used (0 = Off, 1 = On) Not Used (0 = Off, 1 = On) Not Used (0 = Off, 1 = On) Not Used (0 = Off, 1 = On) Not Used (0 = Off, 1 = On) Not Used (0 = Off, 1 = On) Not Used (0 = Off, 1 = On) Not Used (0 = Off, 1 = On) Not Used (0 = Off, 1 = On) Not Used (0 = Off, 1 = On) Not Used (0 = Off, 1 = On) Not Used (0 = Off, 1 = On) Not Used (0 = Off, 1 = On) Not Used (0 = Off, 1 = On) CONTROL STATUS (2 REGISTERS) ASCII TEXT CHARACTERS Second character First character PLANT STATUS (2 REGISTERS) DESCRIPTION
P341/EN GC/D22 Page 39/158
TYPE
VALUE/BIT MASK (Second reg, First Reg) 0x0000,0x0001 0x0000,0x0002 0x0000,0x0004 0x0000,0x0008 0x0000,0x0010 0x0000,0x0020 0x0000,0x0040 0x0000,0x0080 0x0000,0x0100 0x0000,0x0200 0x0000,0x0400 0x0000,0x0800 0x0000,0x1000 0x0000,0x2000 0x0000,0x4000 0x0000,0x8000 Not Used (0 = Off, 1 = On) Not Used (0 = Off, 1 = On) Not Used (0 = Off, 1 = On) Not Used (0 = Off, 1 = On) Not Used (0 = Off, 1 = On) Not Used (0 = Off, 1 = On) Not Used (0 = Off, 1 = On) Not Used (0 = Off, 1 = On) Not Used (0 = Off, 1 = On) Not Used (0 = Off, 1 = On) Not Used (0 = Off, 1 = On) Not Used (0 = Off, 1 = On) Not Used (0 = Off, 1 = On) Not Used (0 = Off, 1 = On) Not Used (0 = Off, 1 = On) Not Used (0 = Off, 1 = On) Record Control Command Register 0 1 2 3 4 No operation Clear Event records Clear Fault Record Clear Maintenance Records Reset Indications VTS Indicate/Block 0 1 Blocking Indication
DESCRIPTION
G6
G7
G8 P341 0x0000,0x0001 0x0000,0x0002 Opto 1 Input State (0=Off, 1=On) Opto 2 Input State (0=Off, 1=On)
LOGIC INPUT STATUS P342 Opto 1 Input State (0=Off, 1=On) Opto 2 Input State (0=Off, 1=On) P343 Opto 1 Input State (0=Off, 1=On) Opto 2 Input State (0=Off, 1=On)
P341/EN GC/D22 Page 40/158
TYPE
VALUE/BIT MASK 0x0000,0x0004 0x0000,0x0008 0x0000,0x0010 0x0000,0x0020 0x0000,0x0040 0x0000,0x0080 0x0000,0x0100 0x0000,0x0200 0x0000,0x0400 0x0000,0x0800 0x0000,0x1000 0x0000,0x2000 0x0000,0x4000 0x0000,0x8000 0x0001,0x0000 0x0002,0x0000 0x0004,0x0000 0x0008,0x0000 0x0010,0x0000 0x0020,0x0000 0x0040,0x0000 0x0080,0x0000 0x0100,0x0000 0x0200,0x0000 0x0400,0x0000 0x0800,0x0000 0x1000,0x0000 0x2000,0x0000 0x4000,0x0000 0x8000,0x0000 Opto 3 Input State (0=Off, 1=On) Opto 4 Input State (0=Off, 1=On) Opto 5 Input State (0=Off, 1=On) Opto 6 Input State (0=Off, 1=On) Opto 7 Input State (0=Off, 1=On) Opto 8 Input State (0=Off, 1=On) Opto 9 Input State (0=Off, 1=On) Opto 10 Input State (0=Off, 1=On) Opto 11 Input State (0=Off, 1=On) Opto 12 Input State (0=Off, 1=On) Opto 13 Input State (0=Off, 1=On) Opto 14 Input State (0=Off, 1=On) Opto 15 Input State (0=Off, 1=On) Opto 16 Input State (0=Off, 1=On)
DESCRIPTION Opto 3 Input State (0=Off, 1=On) Opto 4 Input State (0=Off, 1=On) Opto 5 Input State (0=Off, 1=On) Opto 6 Input State (0=Off, 1=On) Opto 7 Input State (0=Off, 1=On) Opto 8 Input State (0=Off, 1=On) Opto 9 Input State (0=Off, 1=On) Opto 10 Input State (0=Off, 1=On) Opto 11 Input State (0=Off, 1=On) Opto 12 Input State (0=Off, 1=On) Opto 13 Input State (0=Off, 1=On) Opto 14 Input State (0=Off, 1=On) Opto 15 Input State (0=Off, 1=On) Opto 16 Input State (0=Off, 1=On) Opto 3 Input State (0=Off, 1=On) Opto 4 Input State (0=Off, 1=On) Opto 5 Input State (0=Off, 1=On) Opto 6 Input State (0=Off, 1=On) Opto 7 Input State (0=Off, 1=On) Opto 8 Input State (0=Off, 1=On) Opto 9 Input State (0=Off, 1=On) Opto 10 Input State (0=Off, 1=On) Opto 11 Input State (0=Off, 1=On) Opto 12 Input State (0=Off, 1=On) Opto 13 Input State (0=Off, 1=On) Opto 14 Input State (0=Off, 1=On) Opto 15 Input State (0=Off, 1=On) Opto 16 Input State (0=Off, 1=On) Opto 17 Input State (0=Off, 1=On) Opto 18 Input State (0=Off, 1=On) Opto 19 Input State (0=Off, 1=On) Opto 20 Input State (0=Off, 1=On) Opto 21 Input State (0=Off, 1=On) Opto 22 Input State (0=Off, 1=On) Opto 23 Input State (0=Off, 1=On) Opto 24 Input State (0=Off, 1=On) Opto 25 Input State (0=Off, 1=On) Opto 26 Input State (0=Off, 1=On) Opto 27 Input State (0=Off, 1=On) Opto 28 Input State (0=Off, 1=On) Opto 29 Input State (0=Off, 1=On) Opto 30 Input State (0=Off, 1=On) Opto 31 Input State (0=Off, 1=On) Opto 32 Input State (0=Off, 1=On)
P341/EN GC/D22 Page 41/158
TYPE G9
VALUE/BIT MASK 0x8000,0x0000 Not Used P341 0x0000,0x0001 0x0000,0x0002 0x0000,0x0004 0x0000,0x0008 0x0000,0x0010 0x0000,0x0020 0x0000,0x0040 0x0000,0x0080 0x0000,0x0100 0x0000,0x0200 0x0000,0x0400 0x0000,0x0800 0x0000,0x1000 0x0000,0x2000 0x0000,0x4000 0x0000,0x8000 0x0001,0x0000 0x0002,0x0000 0x0004,0x0000 0x0008,0x0000 0x0010,0x0000 0x0020,0x0000 0x0040,0x0000 0x0080,0x0000 0x0100,0x0000 0x0200,0x0000 0x0400,0x0000 Relay 1 (0=Off, 1=On) Relay 2 (0=Off, 1=On) Relay 3 (0=Off, 1=On) Relay 4 (0=Off, 1=On) Relay 5 (0=Off, 1=On) Relay 6 (0=Off, 1=On) Relay 7 (0=Off, 1=On) Relay 8 (0=Off, 1=On) Relay 9 (0=Off, 1=On) Relay 10 (0=Off, 1=On) Relay 11 (0=Off, 1=On) Relay 12 (0=Off, 1=On) Relay 13 (0=Off, 1=On) Relay 14 (0=Off, 1=On) Relay 15 (0=Off, 1=On) Relay 16 (0=Off, 1=On) Not Used
DESCRIPTION Opto 32 Input State (0=Off, 1=On) RELAY OUTPUT STATUS P342 Relay 1 (0=Off, 1=On) Relay 2 (0=Off, 1=On) Relay 3 (0=Off, 1=On) Relay 4 (0=Off, 1=On) Relay 5 (0=Off, 1=On) Relay 6 (0=Off, 1=On) Relay 7 (0=Off, 1=On) Relay 8 (0=Off, 1=On) Relay 9 (0=Off, 1=On) Relay 10 (0=Off, 1=On) Relay 11 (0=Off, 1=On) Relay 12 (0=Off, 1=On) Relay 13 (0=Off, 1=On) Relay 14 (0=Off, 1=On) Relay 15 (0=Off, 1=On) Relay 16 (0=Off, 1=On) Relay 1 (0=Off, 1=On) Relay 2 (0=Off, 1=On) Relay 3 (0=Off, 1=On) Relay 4 (0=Off, 1=On) Relay 5 (0=Off, 1=On) Relay 6 (0=Off, 1=On) Relay 7 (0=Off, 1=On) Relay 8 (0=Off, 1=On) Relay 9 (0=Off, 1=On) Relay 10 (0=Off, 1=On) Relay 11 (0=Off, 1=On) Relay 12 (0=Off, 1=On) Relay 13 (0=Off, 1=On) Relay 14 (0=Off, 1=On) Relay 15 (0=Off, 1=On) Relay 16 (0=Off, 1=On) Relay 17 (0=Off, 1=On) Relay 18 (0=Off, 1=On) Relay 19 (0=Off, 1=On) Relay 20 (0=Off, 1=On) Relay 21 (0=Off, 1=On) Relay 22 (0=Off, 1=On) Relay 23 (0=Off, 1=On) Relay 24 (0=Off, 1=On) Relay 25 (0=Off, 1=On) Relay 26 (0=Off, 1=On) Relay 27 (0=Off, 1=On) P343
P341/EN GC/D22 Page 42/158
TYPE
VALUE/BIT MASK 0x0800,0x0000 0x1000,0x0000 0x2000,0x0000 0x4000,0x0000 0x8000,0x0000
DESCRIPTION Relay 28 (0=Off, 1=On) Relay 29 (0=Off, 1=On) Relay 30 (0=Off, 1=On) Relay 31 (0=Off, 1=On) Relay 32 (0=Off, 1=On) SIGNED FIXED POINT NUMBER - 1 DECIMAL PLACE -3276.8 to 3276.7 e.g. display of temperature
G10
G11 0 1 G12 0x007F 0x0FFF 0x9FBF 0xFFFF G13 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
YES/NO No Yes TIME AND DATE (4 REGISTERS - IEC870 FORMAT) First register - Years Second register - Month of year / Day of month / Day of week Third Register - Summertime and hours / Validity and minutes Fourth Register - Milli-seconds EVENT RECORD TYPE Latched alarm active Latched alarm inactive Self reset alarm active Self reset alarm inactive Relay event Opto event Protection event Platform event Fault logged event
P341/EN GC/D22 Page 43/158
TYPE G14
VALUE/BIT MASK 9 Maintenance record logged event
DESCRIPTION I> FUNCTION LINK P341 P342 Not Used Not Used Not Used Not Used Not Used Not Used Not Used Not Used Not Used Not Used Not Used Not Used Not Used Not Used Not Used Not Used P343
Bit 0 Bit 1 Bit 2 Bit 3 Bit 4 Bit 5 Bit 6 Bit 7 G15 0 1 2 G16 0x0001 0x0002 0x0004 0x0008 0x0010 0x0020 0x0040 0x0080 G17 0 1 2 3 G18
I>1 VTS Block (0=Non-dir, I=VTS Blk) I>2 VTS Block (0=Non-dir, I=VTS Blk) I>3 VTS Block (0=Non-dir, I=VTS Blk) I>4 VTS Block (0=Non-dir, I=VTS Blk) Not Used Not Used Not Used Not Used DISTURBANCE RECORD INDEX STATUS No Record Un-extracted Extracted FAULTED PHASE Start A Start B Start C Start N Trip A Trip B Trip C Trip N IRIG-B STATUS Card not fitted Card failed Signal healthy No signal Record Selection Command Register (MODBUS)
P341/EN GC/D22 Page 44/158
TYPE
VALUE/BIT MASK 0x0000 0x0001 0x0002 0x0004 0x0008 0x0010 No Operation Select next event Accept Event Select next Disurbance Record Accept disturbance record Select Next Disturbance record page LANGUAGE 0 1 2 3 English Francais Deutsch Espanol PASSWORD (2 REGISTERS) First password character Second password character Third password character Fourth password character
DESCRIPTION
G19
G20
(Second reg, First Reg) 0x0000, 0x00FF 0x0000, 0xFF00 0x00FF, 0x0000 0xFF00, 0x0000
NOTE THAT WHEN REGISTERS OF THIS TYPE ARE READ THE SLAVE WILL ALWAYS INDICATE AN "*" IN EACH CHARACTER POSITION TO PRESERVE THE PASSWORD SECURITY. G21 0 1 G22 0 1 2 G23 0 1 IEC60870 Interface RS485 Fibre Optic PASSWORD CONTROL ACCESS LEVEL Level 0 - Passwords required for levels 1 & 2. Level 1 - Password required for level 2. Level 2 - No passwords required. Voltage and V/Hz Curve selection Disabled DT
P341/EN GC/D22 Page 45/158
TYPE G24
VALUE/BIT MASK 2 2 REGISTERS IDMT UNSIGNED LONG VALUE, 3 DECIMAL PLACES High order word of long stored in 1st register Low order word of long stored in 2nd register Example 123456.789 stored as 123456789
DESCRIPTION
G25 G26
1 REGISTER
UNSIGNED VALUE, 3 DECIMAL PLACES Example 50.050 stored as 50050 RELAY STATUS
0x0001 0x0002 0x0004 0x0008 0x0010 0x0020 0x0040 0x0080 0x0100 0x0200 0x0400 0x0800 0x1000 0x2000 0x4000 0x8000 G27 2 REGISTERS
Out of Service Minor self test failure Event Time Synchronisation DISTURB Flag Fault Unused Unused Unused Unused Unused Unused Unused Unused Unused Unused UNSIGNED LONG VALUE High order word of long stored in 1st register Low order word of long stored in 2nd register Example 123456 stored as 123456
G28
1 REGISTER
SIGNED VALUE POWER & WATT-HOURS
P341/EN GC/D22 Page 46/158
TYPE G29
VALUE/BIT MASK Power = (Secondary power/CT secondary) * (100/VT secondary) 3 REGISTER POWER MULTIPLER All power measurments use a signed value of type G28 and a 2 register unsigned long multiplier of type G27 Value = Real Value*110/(CTsecondary*VTsecondary) For Primary Power Multipler = CTprimary * VTprimary/110 For Secondary Power Multipler = CTsecondary * VTsecondary/110
DESCRIPTION
G30 G31
1 REGISTER
SIGNED VALUE, 2 DECIMAL PLACES ANALOGUE CHANNEL ASSIGNMENT SELECTOR P341 P342 VAN VBN VCN VN IA IB IC IN IN Sensitive VAN VBN VCN VN IA-1 IB-1 IC-1 IN IN Sensitive IA-2 IB-2 IC-2 DIGITAL CHANNEL ASSIGNMENT SELECTOR P341 P342 Unused R1 Trip CB R2 Trip PrimeMov R3 Any Trip R4 General Alarm R5 CB Fail Unused R1 Trip CB R2 Trip PrimeMov R3 Any Trip R4 General Alarm R5 CB Fail P343 P343
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 G32 0 1 2 3 4 5
VAN VBN VCN VN IA IB IC IN Sensitive
Unused R1 IN>1 Start R2 I>1 Start R3 Any Trip R4 General Alarm R5 CB Fail
P341/EN GC/D22 Page 47/158
TYPE
VALUE/BIT MASK 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 R6 Control Close R7 Control Trip R8 Not Used R9 Not Used R10 Not Used R11 Not Used R12 Not Used R13 Not Used R14 Not Used R15 Not Used R16 Not Used R17 Not Used R18 Not Used R19 Not Used R20 Not Used R21 Not Used R22 Not Used R23 Not Used R24 Not Used L1 Setting group L2 Setting group L3 Block IN>3&4 L4 Block I> 3&4 L5 Reset L6 Ext Prot Trip L7 52a L8 52b L9 Not Used L10 Not Used L11 Not Used R6 E/F trip R7 V or F Trip R8 Not Used R9 Not Used R10 Not Used R11 Not Used R12 Not Used R13 Not Used R14 Not Used R15 Not Used R16 Not Used R17 Not Used R18 Not Used R19 Not Used R20 Not Used R21 Not Used R22 Not Used R23 Not Used R24 Not Used L1 Setting Group L2 Setting Group L3 Block IN>2 L4 Block I>2 L5 Reset L6 Ext Prot Trip L7 52a L8 52b L9 Not Used L10 Not Used L11 Not Used
DESCRIPTION R6 E/F Trip R7 Volt Trip R8 Freq Trip R9 Diff Trip R10 SysBack Trip R11 NPS Trip R12 Ffail Trip R13 Power trip R14 V/Hz trip R15 Not Used R16 Not Used R17 Not Used R18 Not Used R19 Not Used R20 Not Used R21 Not Used R22 Not Used R23 Not Used R24 Not Used R25 Not Used R26 Not Used R27 Not Used R28 Not Used R29 Not Used R30 Not Used R31 Not Used R32 Not Used L1 Setting Group L2 Setting Group L3 Block IN>2
P341/EN GC/D22 Page 48/158
TYPE
VALUE/BIT MASK 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 60 61 62 63 64 65 L12 Not Used L13 Not Used L14 Not Used L15 Not Used L16 Not Used L17 Not Used L18 Not Used L19 Not Used L20 Not Used L21 Not Used L22 Not Used L23 Not Used L24 Not Used LED 1 LED 2 LED 3 LED 4 LED 5 LED 6 LED 7 LED 8 SG-opto Invalid Prot'n Disabled VT Fail Alarm CT Fail Alarm CB Fail Alarm I^ Maint Alarm I^ Lockout Alarm CB Ops Maint CB Ops Lockout L12 Not Used L13 Not Used L14 Not Used L15 Not Used L16 Not Used L17 Not Used L18 Not Used L19 Not Used L20 Not Used L21 Not Used L22 Not Used L23 Not Used L24 Not Used LED 1 LED 2 LED 3 LED 4 LED 5 LED 6 LED 7 LED 8 SG-opto Invalid Prot'n Disabled VT Fail Alarm CT Fail Alarm CB Fail Alarm I^ Maint Alarm I^ Lockout Alarm CB Ops Maint CB Ops Lockout
DESCRIPTION L4 Block I>2 L5 Reset L6 Ext Prot Trip L7 52a L8 52b L9 Not Used L10 Not Used L11 Not Used L12 Not Used L13 Not Used L14 Not Used L15 Not Used L16 Not Used L17 Not Used L18 Not Used L19 Not Used L20 Not Used L21 Not Used L22 Not Used L23 Not Used L24 Not Used L25 Not Used L26 Not Used L27 Not Used L28 Not Used L29 Not Used L30 Not Used L31 Not Used L32 Not Used LED 1
P341/EN GC/D22 Page 49/158
TYPE
VALUE/BIT MASK 66 67 68 69 70 71 72 73 74 75 76 77 78 79 80 81 82 83 84 85 86 87 88 89 90 91 92 93 94 95 CB Op Time Maint CB Op Time Lock Fault Freq Lock CB Status Alarm Man CB Trip Fail Man CB Cls Fail Man CB Unhealthy F out of Range Thermal Alarm Freq Prot Alm Voltage Prot Alm User Alarm 1 User Alarm 2 User Alarm 3 df/dt Trip V Shift Trip IN>1 Trip IN>2 Trip IN>3 Trip IN>4 Trip IREF> Trip ISEF>1 Trip ISEF>2 Trip ISEF>3 Trip ISEF>4 Trip VN>1 Trip VN>2 Trip V<1 Trip V<1 Trip A/AB V<1 Trip B/BC CB Op Time Maint CB Op Time Lock Fault Freq Lock CB Status Alarm Man CB Trip Fail Man CB Cls Fail Man CB Unhealthy NPS Alarm Thermal Alarm V/Hz Alarm Field Fail Alarm RTD Thermal Alm RTD Open Cct RTD short Cct RTD Data Error RTD Board Fail Freq Prot Alm Voltage Prot Alm User Alarm 1 User Alarm 2 User Alarm 3 Field Fail1 Trip Field Fail2 Trip NPS Trip V Dep OC Trip V Dep OC Trip A V Dep OC Trip B V Dep OC Trip C V/Hz Trip RTD 1 Trip
DESCRIPTION LED 2 LED 3 LED 4 LED 5 LED 6 LED 7 LED 8 SG-opto Invalid Prot'n Disabled VT Fail Alarm CT Fail Alarm CB Fail Alarm I^ Maint Alarm I^ Lockout Alarm CB Ops Maint CB Ops Lockout CB Op Time Maint CB Op Time Lock Fault Freq Lock CB Status Alarm Man CB Trip Fail Man CB Cls Fail Man CB Unhealthy NPS Alarm Thermal Alarm V/Hz Alarm Field Fail Alarm RTD Thermal Alm RTD Open Cct RTD short Cct
P341/EN GC/D22 Page 50/158
TYPE
VALUE/BIT MASK 96 97 98 99 100 101 102 103 104 105 106 107 108 109 110 111 112 113 114 115 116 117 118 119 120 121 122 123 124 125 V<1 Trip C/CA V<2 Trip V<2 Trip A/AB V<2 Trip B/BC V<2 Trip C/CA V>1 Trip V>1 Trip A/AB V>1 Trip B/BC V>1 Trip C/CA V>2 Trip V>2 Trip A/AB V>2 Trip B/BC V>2 Trip C/CA F<1 Trip F<2 Trip F<3 Trip F<4 Trip F>1 Trip F>2 Trip Power1 Trip Power2 Trip I>1 Trip I>1 Trip A I>1 Trip B I>1 Trip C I>2 Trip I>2 Trip A I>2 Trip B I>2 Trip C I>3 Trip RTD 2 Trip RTD 3 Trip RTD 4 Trip RTD 5 Trip RTD 6 Trip RTD 7 Trip RTD 8 Trip RTD 9 Trip RTD 10 Trip Any RTD Trip IN>1 Trip IN>2 Trip IREF> Trip ISEF>1 Trip VN>1 Trip VN>2 Trip V<1 Trip V<1 Trip A/AB V<1 Trip B/BC V<1 Trip C/CA V<2 Trip V<2 Trip A/AB V<2 Trip B/BC V<2 Trip C/CA V>1 Trip V>1 Trip A/AB V>1 Trip B/BC V>1 Trip C/CA V>2 Trip V>2 Trip A/AB
DESCRIPTION RTD Data Error RTD Board Fail Freq Prot Alm Voltage Prot Alm User Alarm 1 User Alarm 2 User Alarm 3 100% ST EF Trip DeadMachine Trip Gen Diff Trip Gen Diff Trip A Gen Diff Trip B Gen Diff Trip C Field Fail1 Trip Field Fail2 Trip NPS Trip V Dep OC Trip V Dep OC Trip A V Dep OC Trip B V Dep OC Trip C V/Hz Trip RTD 1 Trip RTD 2 Trip RTD 3 Trip RTD 4 Trip RTD 5 Trip RTD 6 Trip RTD 7 Trip RTD 8 Trip RTD 9 Trip
P341/EN GC/D22 Page 51/158
TYPE
VALUE/BIT MASK 126 127 128 129 130 131 132 133 134 135 136 137 138 139 140 141 142 143 144 145 146 147 148 149 150 151 152 153 154 155 I>3 Trip A I>3 Trip B I>3 Trip C I>4 Trip I>4 Trip A I>4 Trip B I>4 Trip C Bfail1 Trip 3ph Bfail2 Trip 3ph SPower1 Trip SPower2 Trip Thermal O/L Trip Any Start VN>1 Start VN>2 Start V<1 Start V<1 Start A/AB V<1 Start B/BC V<1 Start C/CA V<2 Start V<2 Start A/AB V<2 Start B/BC V<2 Start C/CA V>1 Start V>1 Start A/AB V>1 Start B/BC V>1 Start C/CA V>2 Start V>2 Start A/AB V>2 Start B/BC V>2 Trip B/BC V>2 Trip C/CA F<1 Trip F<2 Trip F<3 Trip F<4 Trip F>1 Trip F>2 Trip Power1 Trip Power2 Trip I>1 Trip I>1 Trip A I>1 Trip B I>1 Trip C I>2 Trip I>2 Trip A I>2 Trip B I>2 Trip C Bfail1 Trip 3ph Bfail2 Trip 3ph SPower1 Trip SPower2 Trip Thermal O/L Trip Z<1 Trip Z<1 Trip A Z<1 Trip B Z<1 Trip C Z<2 Trip Z<2 Trip A Z<2 Trip B
DESCRIPTION RTD 10 Trip Any RTD Trip IN>1 Trip IN>2 Trip IREF> Trip ISEF>1 Trip VN>1 Trip VN>2 Trip V<1 Trip V<1 Trip A/AB V<1 Trip B/BC V<1 Trip C/CA V<2 Trip V<2 Trip A/AB V<2 Trip B/BC V<2 Trip C/CA V>1 Trip V>1 Trip A/AB V>1 Trip B/BC V>1 Trip C/CA V>2 Trip V>2 Trip A/AB V>2 Trip B/BC V>2 Trip C/CA F<1 Trip F<2 Trip F<3 Trip F<4 Trip F>1 Trip F>2 Trip
P341/EN GC/D22 Page 52/158
TYPE
VALUE/BIT MASK 156 157 158 159 160 161 162 163 164 165 166 167 168 169 170 171 172 173 174 175 176 177 178 179 180 181 182 183 184 185 V>2 Start C/CA Power1 Start Power2 Start I>1 Start I>1 Start A I>1 Start B I>1 Start C I>2 Start I>2 Start A I>2 Start B I>2 Start C I>3 Start I>3 Start A I>3 Start B I>3 Start C I>4 Start I>4 Start A I>4 Start B I>4 Start C IN>1 Start IN>2 Start IN>3 Start IN>4 Start ISEF>1 Start ISEF>2 Start ISEF>3 Start ISEF>4 Start F<1 Start F<2 Start F<3 Start Z<2 Trip C Any Start VN>1 Start VN>2 Start V<1 Start V<1 Start A/AB V<1 Start B/BC V<1 Start C/CA V<2 Start V<2 Start A/AB V<2 Start B/BC V<2 Start C/CA V>1 Start V>1 Start A/AB V>1 Start B/BC V>1 Start C/CA V>2 Start V>2 Start A/AB V>2 Start B/BC V>2 Start C/CA Power1 Start Power2 Start I>1 Start I>1 Start A I>1 Start B I>1 Start C I>2 Start I>2 Start A I>2 Start B I>2 Start C
DESCRIPTION Power1 Trip Power2 Trip I>1 Trip I>1 Trip A I>1 Trip B I>1 Trip C I>2 Trip I>2 Trip A I>2 Trip B I>2 Trip C Bfail1 Trip 3ph Bfail2 Trip 3ph SPower1 Trip SPower2 Trip PSlipz Z1 Trip PSlipz Z2 Trip Thermal O/L Trip Z<1 Trip Z<1 Trip A Z<1 Trip B Z<1 Trip C Z<2 Trip Z<2 Trip A Z<2 Trip B Z<2 Trip C Any Start VN>1 Start VN>2 Start V<1 Start V<1 Start A/AB
P341/EN GC/D22 Page 53/158
TYPE
VALUE/BIT MASK 186 187 188 189 190 191 192 193 194 195 196 197 198 199 200 201 202 203 204 205 206 207 208 209 210 211 212 213 214 215 F<4 Start F>1 Start F>2 Start I> BlockStart IN/SEF>Blk Start df/dt Start IA< Start IB< Start IC< Start ISEF< Start SPower1 Start SPower2 Start VTS Fast Block VTS Slow Block CTS Block Control Trip Control Close Close in Prog Reconnection Lockout Alarm CB Open 3 ph CB Closed 3 ph Field volts fail All Poles Dead Any Pole Dead Pole Dead A Pole Dead B Pole Dead C IN>1 Start IN>2 Start ISEF>1 Start F<1 Start F<2 Start F<3 Start F<4 Start F>1 Start F>2 Start IA< Start IB< Start IC< Start ISEF< Start IN< Start V/Hz Start FFail1 Start FFail2 Start V Dep OC Start V Dep OC Start A V Dep OC Start B V Dep OC Start C SPower1 Start SPower2 Start Z<1 Start Z<1 Start A Z<1 Start B Z<1 Start C Z<2 Start Z<2 Start A Z<2 Start B
DESCRIPTION V<1 Start B/BC V<1 Start C/CA V<2 Start V<2 Start A/AB V<2 Start B/BC V<2 Start C/CA V>1 Start V>1 Start A/AB V>1 Start B/BC V>1 Start C/CA V>2 Start V>2 Start A/AB V>2 Start B/BC V>2 Start C/CA Power1 Start Power2 Start I>1 Start I>1 Start A I>1 Start B I>1 Start C I>2 Start I>2 Start A I>2 Start B I>2 Start C IN>1 Start IN>2 Start ISEF>1 Start 100% ST EF Start F<1 Start F<2 Start
P341/EN GC/D22 Page 54/158
TYPE
VALUE/BIT MASK 216 217 218 219 220 221 222 223 224 225 226 227 228 229 230 231 232 233 234 235 236 237 238 239 240 241 242 243 244 245 Z<2 Start C VTS Fast Block VTS Slow Block CTS Block RTD 1 Alarm RTD 2 Alarm RTD 3 Alarm RTD 4 Alarm RTD 5 Alarm RTD 6 Alarm RTD 7 Alarm RTD 8 Alarm RTD 9 Alarm RTD 10 Alarm Lockout Alarm CB Open 3 ph CB Closed 3 ph Field volts fail All Poles Dead Any Pole Dead Pole Dead A Pole Dead B Pole Dead C
DESCRIPTION F<3 Start F<4 Start F>1 Start F>2 Start IA< Start IB< Start IC< Start ISEF< Start IN< Start V/Hz Start FFail1 Start FFail2 Start V Dep OC Start V Dep OC Start A V Dep OC Start B V Dep OC Start C SPower1 Start SPower2 Start PSlipz Z1 Start PSlipz Z2 Start PSlipz LensStart PSlipz BlindStrt PSlipz ReactStrt Z<1 Start Z<1 Start A Z<1 Start B Z<1 Start C Z<2 Start Z<2 Start A Z<2 Start B
P341/EN GC/D22 Page 55/158
TYPE
VALUE/BIT MASK 246 247 248 249 250 251 252 253 254 255 256 257 258 259 260 261 262 263 264 265 266 267 268
DESCRIPTION Z<2 Start C VTS Fast Block VTS Slow Block CTS Block RTD 1 Alarm RTD 2 Alarm RTD 3 Alarm RTD 4 Alarm RTD 5 Alarm RTD 6 Alarm RTD 7 Alarm RTD 8 Alarm RTD 9 Alarm RTD 10 Alarm Lockout Alarm CB Open 3 ph CB Closed 3 ph Field volts fail All Poles Dead Any Pole Dead Pole Dead A Pole Dead B Pole Dead C Not Used TRIGGER MODE
G33 G34 0 1 G35
Single Extended Numeric Setting (as G2 but 2 registers) Number of steps from minimum value
P341/EN GC/D22 Page 56/158
TYPE G36
VALUE/BIT MASK expressed as 2 register 32 bit unsigned int REAL NUMBERS 0 1 Polar Rectangular ENABLED / DISABLED 0 1 Disabled Enabled COMMUNICATION BAUD RATE (MODBUS) 0 1 2 9600 bits/s 19200 bits/s 38400 bits/s COMMUNICATION BAUD RATE (IEC 60870) 0 1 9600 bits/s 19200 bits/s COMMUNICATION BAUD RATE (DNP 3.0) 0 1 2 3 4 5 1200 bits/s 2400 bits/s 4800 bits/s 9600 bits/s 19200 bits/s 38400 bits/s COMMUNICATIONS PARITY 0 1 2 Odd Even None CHECK SYNC INPUT SELECTION 0 1 2 3 A-N B-N C-N A-B
DESCRIPTION
G37
G38m
G38v
G38d
G39
G40
P341/EN GC/D22 Page 57/158
TYPE
VALUE/BIT MASK 4 5 B-C C-A CHECK SYNC VOLTAGE BLOCKING 0 1 2 3 None Undervoltage Differential Both CHECK SYNC SLIP CONTROL 0 1 2 3 None Timer Frequency Both IDMT CURVE TYPE 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 Disabled DT IEC S Inverse IEC V Inverse IEC E Inverse UK LT Inverse IEEE M Inverse IEEE V Inverse IEEE E Inverse US Inverse US ST Inverse DIRECTION 0 1 2 Non-Directional Directional Fwd Directional Rev VTS BLOCK 0 Block
DESCRIPTION
G41
G42
G43
G44
G45
P341/EN GC/D22 Page 58/158
TYPE G46
VALUE/BIT MASK 1 0 1 Non-Directional POLARISATION Zero Sequence Neg Sequence MEASURING MODE 0 1 Phase-Phase Phase-Neutral OPERATION MODE 0 1 Any Phase Three Phase VN OR IN INPUT 0 1 Measured Derived RTD SELECT 0x0001 0x0002 0x0004 0x0008 0x0010 0x0020 0x0040 0x0080 0x0100 0x0200 RTD Input #1 RTD Input #2 RTD Input #3 RTD Input #4 RTD Input #5 RTD Input #6 RTD Input #7 RTD Input #8 RTD Input #9 RTD Input #10 FAULT LOCATION 0 1 2 Distance Ohms % of Line DEFAULT DISPLAY 0 3Ph + N Current
DESCRIPTION
G47
G48
G49
G50
G51
G52
P341/EN GC/D22 Page 59/158
TYPE
VALUE/BIT MASK 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 3 Ph-neutral Voltage Power Date and Time Description Plant Reference Frequency Access Level SELECT FACTORY DEFAULTS 0 1 2 3 4 5 No Operation All Settings Setting Group 1 Setting Group 2 Setting Group 3 Setting Group 4 SELECT PRIMARY SECONDARY MEASUREMENTS 0 1 Primary Secondary CIRCUIT BREAKER CONTROL 0 1 2 No Operation Trip Close PHASE MEASUREMENT REFERENCE 0 1 2 3 4 5 VA VB VC IA IB IC Data Transfer Domain 0 PSL Settings
DESCRIPTION
G53
G54
G55
G56
G57
P341/EN GC/D22 Page 60/158
TYPE G58
VALUE/BIT MASK 1 PSL Configuration
DESCRIPTION SEF/REF SELECTION P341 P342 SEF SEF cos(PHI) SEF sin (PHI) Wattmetric Hi Z REF Lo Z REF Lo Z REF+SEF Lo Z REF+Wattmet BATTERY STATUS Dead Healthy Time Delay Selection DT Inverse ACTIVE GROUP CONTROL Select via Menu Select via Opto SAVE AS No Operation Save Abort IN> Function Link P341 P342 Not Used Not Used Not Used Not Used Not Used Not Used Not Used Not Used P343 SEF SEF cos(PHI) SEF sin (PHI) Wattmetric Hi Z REF Lo Z REF Lo Z REF+SEF Lo Z REF+Wattmet P343
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 G59 0 1 G60 0 1 G61 0 1 G62 0 1 2 G63 Bit 0 Bit 1 Bit 2 Bit 3
SEF SEF cos(PHI) SEF sin (PHI) Wattmetric Hi Z REF
IN>1 VTS Block(0=Non-dir, 1=VTS blk) IN>2 VTS Block(0=Non-dir, 1=VTS blk) IN>3 VTS Block(0=Non-dir, 1=VTS blk) IN>4 VTS Block(0=Non-dir, 1=VTS blk)
P341/EN GC/D22 Page 61/158
TYPE
VALUE/BIT MASK Bit 4 Bit 5 Bit 6 Bit 7 Not Used Not Used Not Used Not Used P341 Bit 0 Bit 1 Bit 2 Bit 3 Bit 4 Bit 5 Bit 6 Bit 7 ISEF>1 VTS Block(0=Non-dir,1=Block) ISEF>2 VTS Block(0=Non-dir,1=Block) ISEF>3 VTS Block(0=Non-dir,1=Block) ISEF>4 VTS Block(0=Non-dir,1=Block) Not Used Not Used Not Used Not Used F< Function Link Bit 0 Bit 1 Bit 2 Bit 3 Bit 4 Bit 5 Bit 6 Bit 7 F<1 Poledead Blk F<2 Poledead Blk F<3 Poledead Blk F<4 Poledead Blk Not Used Not Used Not Used Not Used DISTURBANCE RECORDER DIGITAL CHANNEL TRIGGER 0 1 2 No Trigger Trigger L/H Trigger H/L THERMAL OVERLOAD 0 Single Not Used Not Used Not Used Not Used Not Used Not Used Not Used Not Used Not Used Not Used Not Used
DESCRIPTION Not Used Not Used Not Used Not Used ISEF> Func Link P342 ISEF>1 VTS Block(0=Non-dir,1=Block) Not Used Not Used Not Used Not Used Not Used Not Used Not Used P343 ISEF>1 VTS Block(0=Non-dir,1=Block)
G64
G65
G66
G67
P341/EN GC/D22 Page 62/158
TYPE G68
VALUE/BIT MASK 1 0 1 2 Dual CB Fail Reset Options I< Only CB Open & I< Prot Reset & I< VTS RESET MODE 0 1 Manual Auto AUTORECLOSE MODE 0 1 2 3 Opto set Auto User Set Pulse Set PROTOCOL 0 1 2 3 Courier IEC870-5-103 Modbus DNP 3.0 START DEAD TIME 0 1 Protection Reset CB Trips AUTORECLOSE RECLAIM TIME EXTENSION 0 1 On Prot Start No Operation RESET LOCKOUT 0 1 User Interface Select NonAuto Auto-Reclose after Manual Close 0 Enabled
DESCRIPTION
G69
G70
G71
G72
G73
G74
G75
P341/EN GC/D22 Page 63/158
TYPE G76
VALUE/BIT MASK 1 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 Inhibited TRANSFER MODE Prepare Rx Complete Rx Prepare Tx Complete Tx Rx Prepared Tx Prepared OK Error Auto-Reclose 0 1 Out of Service In Service Autoreclose Telecontrol commands 0 1 2 No Operation Auto Non-auto Custom Settings 0 1 2 Disabled Basic Complete Visible/Invisible 0 1 Invisible Visible Reset Lockout by 0 1 User Interface CB Close Autoreclose Protection blocking 0 No Block
DESCRIPTION
G77
G78
G79
G80
G81
G82
P341/EN GC/D22 Page 64/158
TYPE G83
VALUE/BIT MASK 1 0 1 2 Block Inst Prot Autoreclose Status Auto Mode Non-auto Mode Live Line
DESCRIPTION
G84
Modbus value+bit pos (Second reg, First Reg) 0x0000,0x0001 0x0000,0x0002 0x0000,0x0004 0x0000,0x0008 0x0000,0x0010 0x0000,0x0020 0x0000,0x0040 0x0000,0x0080 0x0000,0x0100 0x0000,0x0200 0x0000,0x0400 0x0000,0x0800 0x0000,0x1000 0x0000,0x2000 0x0000,0x4000 0x0000,0x8000 0x0001,0x0000 0x0002,0x0000 0x0004,0x0000 0x0008,0x0000 0x0010,0x0000 0x0020,0x0000 0x0040,0x0000 Start Sen Power1 Start Sen Power2 Start Sen Power1 Start Sen Power2 Start I>1 Start I>2 Start I>3 Start I>4 Start IN>1 Start IN>2 Start IN>3 Start IN>4 Start ISEF>1 Start ISEF>2 Start ISEF>3 Start ISEF>4 Start NVD VN>1 Start NVD VN>2 Start ISEF>1 Start IN>1 Start IN>2 General Start Start Power1 Start Power2 Start FFail1 Start FFail2 Start V Dep O/C Start I>1 Start I>2 P341
Started Elements (1) P342 P343
Start FFail1 Start FFail2 Start V Dep O/C Start I>1 Start I>2
Start IN>1 Start IN>2
Start ISEF>1
Start 100% ST EF Start Sen Power1 Start Sen Power2
P341/EN GC/D22 Page 65/158
TYPE
VALUE/BIT MASK 0x0080,0x0000 0x0100,0x0000 0x0200,0x0000 0x0400,0x0000 0x0800,0x0000 0x1000,0x0000 0x2000,0x0000 0x4000,0x0000 0x8000,0x0000 Start Z<1 Start Z<1 Start Z<1 Start Z<1
DESCRIPTION Start z PSlip Z1 Start z PSlip Z2 Start Z<1 Start Z<1
G85
Modbus value+bit pos (Second reg, First Reg) 0x0000,0x0001 0x0000,0x0002 0x0000,0x0004 0x0000,0x0008 0x0000,0x0010 0x0000,0x0020 0x0000,0x0040 0x0000,0x0080 0x0000,0x0100 0x0000,0x0200 0x0000,0x0400 0x0000,0x0800 0x0000,0x1000 0x0000,0x2000 0x0000,0x4000 0x0000,0x8000 0x0001,0x0000 0x0002,0x0000 0x0004,0x0000 Trip I>1 Trip I>2 Trip I>3 Trip I>4 Trip IN>1 Trip IN>2 Trip IN>3 Trip IN>4 Trip ISEF>1 Trip ISEF>2 Trip ISEF>3 Trip ISEF>1 Trip IN>1 Trip IN>2 Trip Power1 Trip Power2 Any Trip P341 Any Trip Trip Gen Diff Trip Power1 Trip Power2 Trip FFail1 Trip FFail2 Trip NPS Trip V Dep O/C Trip I>1 Trip I>2
Tripped Elements (1) P342 Any Trip Trip Gen Diff Trip Power1 Trip Power2 Trip FFail1 Trip FFail2 Trip NPS Trip V Dep O/C Trip I>1 Trip I>2 P343
Trip IN>1 Trip IN>2
Trip ISEF>1
P341/EN GC/D22 Page 66/158
TYPE
VALUE/BIT MASK 0x0008,0x0000 0x0010,0x0000 0x0020,0x0000 0x0040,0x0000 0x0080,0x0000 0x0100,0x0000 0x0200,0x0000 0x0400,0x0000 0x0800,0x0000 0x1000,0x0000 0x2000,0x0000 0x4000,0x0000 0x8000,0x0000 Trip Thermal O/L Trip Z<1 Trip Z<2 P341 Trip V<1 Trip V<2 Trip V< A/AB Trip V< B/BC Trip V< C/CA Trip V>1 Trip V>2 Trip V> A/AB Trip V> B/BC Trip V> C/CA Trip F<1 Trip F<2 Trip F<3 Trip F<4 Trip F>1 Trip V<1 Trip V<2 Trip V< A/AB Trip V< B/BC Trip V< C/CA Trip V>1 Trip V>2 Trip V> A/AB Trip V> B/BC Trip V> C/CA Trip F<1 Trip F<2 Trip F<3 Trip F<4 Trip F>1 Trip Thermal O/L Trip Z<1 Trip Z<2 Trip Sen Power1 Trip Sen Power2 Trip Sen Power1 Trip Sen Power2 Trip ISEF>4 Trip IREF> Trip NVD VN>1 Trip NVD VN>2 Trip IREF> Trip NVD VN>1 Trip NVD VN>2
DESCRIPTION Trip IREF> Trip NVD VN>1 Trip NVD VN>2 Trip 100% ST EF Trip Dead Mach Trip Sen Power1 Trip Sen Power2 Trip z PSlip Z1 Trip z PSlip Z2 Trip Thermal O/L Trip Z<1 Trip Z<2 Tripped Elements (2) P342 Trip V<1 Trip V<2 Trip V< A/AB Trip V< B/BC Trip V< C/CA Trip V>1 Trip V>2 Trip V> A/AB Trip V> B/BC Trip V> C/CA Trip F<1 Trip F<2 Trip F<3 Trip F<4 Trip F>1 P343
G86
Bit Description (Second reg, First Reg) 0x0000,0x0001 0x0000,0x0002 0x0000,0x0004 0x0000,0x0008 0x0000,0x0010 0x0000,0x0020 0x0000,0x0040 0x0000,0x0080 0x0000,0x0100 0x0000,0x0200 0x0000,0x0400 0x0000,0x0800 0x0000,0x1000 0x0000,0x2000 0x0000,0x4000
P341/EN GC/D22 Page 67/158
TYPE
VALUE/BIT MASK 0x0000,0x8000 0x0001,0x0000 0x0002,0x0000 0x0004,0x0000 0x0008,0x0000 0x0010,0x0000 0x0020,0x0000 0x0040,0x0000 0x0080,0x0000 0x0100,0x0000 0x0200,0x0000 0x0400,0x0000 0x0800,0x0000 0x1000,0x0000 0x2000,0x0000 0x4000,0x0000 0x8000,0x0000 Trip df/dt Trip V Shift Trip RTD 1 Trip RTD 2 Trip RTD 3 Trip RTD 4 Trip RTD 5 Trip RTD 6 Trip RTD 7 Trip RTD 8 Trip RTD 9 Trip RTD 10 Trip F>2 Trip F>2 Trip V/Hz
DESCRIPTION Trip F>2 Trip V/Hz
Trip RTD 1 Trip RTD 2 Trip RTD 3 Trip RTD 4 Trip RTD 5 Trip RTD 6 Trip RTD 7 Trip RTD 8 Trip RTD 9 Trip RTD 10
G87
Bit Description (Second reg, First Reg) 0x0000,0x0001 0x0000,0x0002 0x0000,0x0004 0x0000,0x0008 0x0000,0x0010 0x0000,0x0020 0x0000,0x0040 0x0000,0x0080 0x0000,0x0100 0x0000,0x0200 0x0000,0x0400
Fault Alarms CB Fail 1 CB Fail 2 VTS CTS CB Fail 1 CB Fail 2 VTS CTS Alarm FFail Alarm NPS Alarm V/Hz Alarm RTD 1 Alarm RTD 2 Alarm RTD 3 Alarm RTD 4 CB Fail 1 CB Fail 2 VTS CTS Alarm FFail Alarm NPS Alarm V/Hz Alarm RTD 1 Alarm RTD 2 Alarm RTD 3 Alarm RTD 4
P341/EN GC/D22 Page 68/158
TYPE
VALUE/BIT MASK 0x0000,0x0800 0x0000,0x1000 0x0000,0x2000 0x0000,0x4000 0x0000,0x8000 0x0001,0x0000 0x0002,0x0000 0x0004,0x0000 0x0008,0x0000 0x0010,0x0000 0x0020,0x0000 0x0040,0x0000 0x0080,0x0000 0x0100,0x0000 0x0200,0x0000 0x0400,0x0000 0x0800,0x0000 0x1000,0x0000 0x2000,0x0000 0x4000,0x0000 0x8000,0x0000 Alarm Thermal Alarm RTD 5 Alarm RTD 6 Alarm RTD 7 Alarm RTD 8 Alarm RTD 9 Alarm RTD 10 Alarm Thermal
DESCRIPTION Alarm RTD 5 Alarm RTD 6 Alarm RTD 7 Alarm RTD 8 Alarm RTD 9 Alarm RTD 10 Alarm Thermal
G88 0 1 G89 0 1 G90 0 1
Alarms Alarm Disabled Alarm Enabled Main VT Location Line Bus Group Selection Group 1 Group 2
P341/EN GC/D22 Page 69/158
TYPE
VALUE/BIT MASK 2 3 Group 3 Group 4 A/R Protection Blocking 0 1 Allow Tripping Block Tripping Lockout 0 1 No Lockout Lockout Commission Test 0 1 2 No Operation Apply Test Remove Test Commission Test 0 1 No Operation Apply Test System Function Links Bit 0 Bit 1 Bit 2 Bit 3 Bit 4 Bit 5 Bit 6 Bit 7 Trip led self reset (1 = enable self reset) Not Used Not Used Not used Not Used Not Used Not Used Not Used
DESCRIPTION
G91
G92
G93
G94
G95
G96
Bit Position P341 0 1 2 3 Battery Fail Field Volt Fail SG-opto Invalid Prot'n Disabled Battery Fail Field Volt Fail SG-opto Invalid Prot'n Disabled
Indexed Strings P342 Battery Fail Field Volt Fail SG-opto Invalid Prot'n Disabled P343
P341/EN GC/D22 Page 70/158
TYPE
VALUE/BIT MASK 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 Freq Prot Alm Voltage Prot Alm User Alarm 1 User Alarm 2 User Alarm 3 Distance Unit 0 Kilometres VT Fail Alarm CTS Fail Alarm CB Fail I^ Maint Alarm I^ Maint Lockout CB OPs Maint CB OPs Lock CB Time Maint CB Time Lockout Fault Freq Lock CB Status Alarm CB Trip Fail CB Close Fail Man CB Unhealthy F out of Range Thermal Alarm NPS Alarm Thermal Alarm V/Hz Alarm Field Fail Alarm RTD Thermal Alm RTD Open Cct RTD short Cct RTD Data Error RTD Board Fail Freq Prot Alm Voltage Prot Alm User Alarm 1 User Alarm 2 User Alarm 3 VT Fail Alarm CTS Fail Alarm CB Fail I^ Maint Alarm I^ Maint Lockout CB OPs Maint CB OPs Lock CB Time Maint CB Time Lockout Fault Freq Lock CB Status Alarm
DESCRIPTION VT Fail Alarm CTS Fail Alarm CB Fail I^ Maint Alarm I^ Maint Lockout CB OPs Maint CB OPs Lock CB Time Maint CB Time Lockout Fault Freq Lock CB Status Alarm
NPS Alarm Thermal Alarm V/Hz Alarm Field Fail Alarm RTD Thermal Alm RTD Open Cct RTD short Cct RTD Data Error RTD Board Fail Freq Prot Alm Voltage Prot Alm User Alarm 1 User Alarm 2 User Alarm 3
G97
P341/EN GC/D22 Page 71/158
TYPE G98
VALUE/BIT MASK 1 0 1 2 3 4 Miles Copy to No Operation Group 1 Group 2 Group 3 Group 4 CB Control 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 Disabled Local Remote Local+Remote Opto Opto+local Opto+Remote Opto+Rem+local Gen Diff Function Select 0 1 2 Disabled Percentage Bias High Impedance Power Function Select 0 1 2 3 Disabled Reverse Low Forward Over System Backup Function Select 0 1 2 Disabled Underimpedance Volt controlled
DESCRIPTION
G99
G101
G102
G103
P341/EN GC/D22 Page 72/158
TYPE G104
VALUE/BIT MASK 3 0 1 Volt restrained System Backup Vector Rotation None Delta-Star DEFINITE TIME OVERCURRENT SELECTION 0 1 Disabled DT
DESCRIPTION
G105
G107
Modbus value+bit pos (Second reg, First Reg) 0x0000,0x0001 0x0000,0x0002 0x0000,0x0004 0x0000,0x0008 0x0000,0x0010 0x0000,0x0020 0x0000,0x0040 0x0000,0x0080 0x0000,0x0100 0x0000,0x0200 0x0000,0x0400 0x0000,0x0800 0x0000,0x1000 0x0000,0x2000 0x0000,0x4000 0x0000,0x8000 0x0001,0x0000 0x0002,0x0000 0x0004,0x0000 0x0008,0x0000 0x0010,0x0000 Start df/dt Start V<1 Start V<2 Start V< A/AB Start V< B/BC Start V< C/CA Start V>1 Start V>2 Start V> A/AB Start V> B/BC Start V> C/CA Start F<1 Start F<2 Start F<3 Start F<4 Start F>1 Start F>2 P341 Start V<1 Start V<2 Start V< A/AB Start V< B/BC Start V< C/CA Start V>1 Start V>2 Start V> A/AB Start V> B/BC Start V> C/CA Start F<1 Start F<2 Start F<3 Start F<4 Start F>1 Start F>2 Start V/Hz
Started Elements (2) P342 Start V<1 Start V<2 Start V< A/AB Start V< B/BC Start V< C/CA Start V>1 Start V>2 Start V> A/AB Start V> B/BC Start V> C/CA Start F<1 Start F<2 Start F<3 Start F<4 Start F>1 Start F>2 Start V/Hz P343
P341/EN GC/D22 Page 73/158
TYPE
VALUE/BIT MASK 0x0020,0x0000 0x0040,0x0000 0x0080,0x0000 0x0100,0x0000 0x0200,0x0000 0x0400,0x0000 0x0800,0x0000 0x1000,0x0000 0x2000,0x0000 0x4000,0x0000 0x8000,0x0000
DESCRIPTION
G108
Bit position 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
RTD Open Circuit Flags RTD 1 label RTD 2 label RTD 3 label RTD 4 label RTD 5 label RTD 6 label RTD 7 label RTD 8 label RTD 9 label RTD 10 label RTD Short Circuit Flags RTD 1 label RTD 2 label RTD 3 label RTD 4 label RTD 5 label RTD 6 label RTD 7 label
G109
Bit position 0 1 2 3 4 5 6
P341/EN GC/D22 Page 74/158
TYPE
VALUE/BIT MASK 7 8 9 RTD 8 label RTD 9 label RTD 10 label RTD Data Error RTD 1 label RTD 2 label RTD 3 label RTD 4 label RTD 5 label RTD 6 label RTD 7 label RTD 8 label RTD 9 label RTD 10 label IDMT CURVE TYPE 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 DT IEC S Inverse IEC V Inverse IEC E Inverse UK LT Inverse IEEE M Inverse IEEE V Inverse IEEE E Inverse US Inverse US ST Inverse 100% Stator Earth Fault Protection 0 1 2 Disabled VN3H< Enabled VN3H> Enabled Pole Slipping Operating Mode
DESCRIPTION
G110
Bit position 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
G111
G112
G113
P341/EN GC/D22 Page 75/158
TYPE
VALUE/BIT MASK 0 1 2 Generating Motoring Both SEF/REF/Spower Selection 0 1 2 Disabled SEF/REF Sensitive Power CB Control Logic Input Assignments 0 1 2 3 None 52A 52B Both 52A and 52B TEST MODE 0 1 2 Disabled Test Mode Blocked IEEE FLOATING POINT FORMAT Bit 31 = sign Bits 30-23 = e7 - e0 Implicit 1. Bits 22-0 = f22 - f0
DESCRIPTION
G114
G118
G119
G125
2 REGISTERS
G200 0 1 2 3 4 5 G201 0
Global Opto Nominal Voltage Selection 24-27V 30-34V 48-54V 110-125V 220-250V Custom Single Opto Nominal Voltage Selection 24-27V
P341/EN GC/D22 Page 76/158
TYPE
VALUE/BIT MASK 1 2 3 4 30-34V 48-54V 110-125V 220-250V Control Input Status (2 REGISTERS) (2nd Reg, 1st Reg) 0x0000,0x0001 0x0000,0x0002 0x0000,0x0004 0x0000,0x0008 0x0000,0x0010 0x0000,0x0020 0x0000,0x0040 0x0000,0x0080 0x0000,0x0100 0x0000,0x0200 0x0000,0x0400 0x0000,0x0800 0x0000,0x1000 0x0000,0x2000 0x0000,0x4000 0x0000,0x8000 0x0001,0x0000 0x0002,0x0000 0x0004,0x0000 0x0008,0x0000 0x0010,0x0000 0x0020,0x0000 0x0040,0x0000 0x0080,0x0000 Control Input 1 (0 = Reset, 1 = Set) Control Input 2 (0 = Reset, 1 = Set) Control Input 3 (0 = Reset, 1 = Set) Control Input 4 (0 = Reset, 1 = Set) Control Input 5 (0 = Reset, 1 = Set) Control Input 6 (0 = Reset, 1 = Set) Control Input 7 (0 = Reset, 1 = Set) Control Input 8 (0 = Reset, 1 = Set) Control Input 9 (0 = Reset, 1 = Set) Control Input 10 (0 = Reset, 1 = Set) Control Input 11 (0 = Reset, 1 = Set) Control Input 12 (0 = Reset, 1 = Set) Control Input 13 (0 = Reset, 1 = Set) Control Input 14 (0 = Reset, 1 = Set) Control Input 15 (0 = Reset, 1 = Set) Control Input 16 (0 = Reset, 1 = Set) Control Input 17 (0 = Reset, 1 = Set) Control Input 18 (0 = Reset, 1 = Set) Control Input 19 (0 = Reset, 1 = Set) Control Input 20 (0 = Reset, 1 = Set) Control Input 21 (0 = Reset, 1 = Set) Control Input 22 (0 = Reset, 1 = Set) Control Input 23 (0 = Reset, 1 = Set) Control Input 24 (0 = Reset, 1 = Set)
DESCRIPTION
G202
P341/EN GC/D22 Page 77/158
TYPE
VALUE/BIT MASK 0x0100,0x0000 0x0200,0x0000 0x0400,0x0000 0x0800,0x0000 0x1000,0x0000 0x2000,0x0000 0x4000,0x0000 0x8000,0x0000 Control Input 25 (0 = Reset, 1 = Set) Control Input 26 (0 = Reset, 1 = Set) Control Input 27 (0 = Reset, 1 = Set) Control Input 28 (0 = Reset, 1 = Set) Control Input 29 (0 = Reset, 1 = Set) Control Input 30 (0 = Reset, 1 = Set) Control Input 31 (0 = Reset, 1 = Set) Control Input 32 (0 = Reset, 1 = Set) Virtual Input 0 1 2 No Operation Set Reset CS103 Blocking 0 1 2 Disabled Monitor Blocking Command Blocking
DESCRIPTION
G203
G210

IEC60870-5-103: Device Profile
Vendor Name: Device Name: Models Covered: Alstom T&D Ltd., Protection & Control P340 Generator Protection P341****3**05** P342****3**05** P343****3**05** Compatibility Level: Physical Layer Electrical Interface: Number of Loads: Optical Interface (Order Option) Application Layer Common Address of ASDU = Link Address Compatible Range Information Numbers in Monitor Direction ASDU TYPE System Functions 8 6 5 5 5 5 10 8 3 4 5 6 255 255 224 224 224 224 0 0 2 3 4 5 End of General Interrogration Time Synchronisation Reset FCB Reset CU Start/Restart Power On * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * COT FUN INF NO. Description GI 1 Model Number 2 3 4 5 6 EIA RS-485 1 for one protection equipment Plastic fibre BFOC/2.5 type connector 2
P341/EN GC/D22 Page 78/158
Transmission Speed: 9600 or 19200bps (User Setting)
Interpretation
DDB Ordinal
Note: Indentification message in ASDU 5: "ALSTOM P" + 16bit model + 8bit major version + 1 character minor version e.g. "ALSTOM P" + 343 + 05 + 'C' Status Indications 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Supervision Indications 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Earth Fault Indications 1 1 1 1,7,9 1,7,9 1,7,9 224 224 224 48 49 50 Earth Fault L1 Earth Fault L2 Earth Fault L3 * * * 1,7,9 1,7,9 1,7,9 1,7,9 1,7,9 1,7,9 1,7,9 1,7,9 1,7,9 224 224 224 224 224 224 224 224 224 32 33 35 36 37 38 39 46 47 Measurand supervision I Measurand supervision V Phase sequence supervision Trip circuit supervision I>> back-up supervision VT fuse failure Teleprotection disturbed Group warning Group alarm * * * * * * * * * * * * VTS Indication 292 1,7,9,11,12,20,21 224 1,7,9,11,12,20,21 224 1,7,9,11,12,20,21 224 1,7,11,12,20, 21 9,11 9,11 9,11 224 224 224 224 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 Auto-recloser active Tele-protection active Protection active LED Reset Monitor direction blocked Test mode Local parameter setting Characteristic 1 Characteristic 2 Characteristic 3 Characteristic 4 Auxillary input 1 Auxillary input 2 Auxillary input 3 Auxillary input 4 * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * PG1 Changed PG2 Changed PG3 Changed PG4 Changed Opto Input 1 Opto Input 2 Opto Input 3 Opto Input 4 32 33 34 35 * * * * * * * * * * * * Protection Disabled Reset Indications 391 291
1,7,9,11,12,20,21 224 1,7,9,11,12,20,21 224 1,7,9,11,12,20,21 224 1,7,9,11,12,20,21 224 1,7,9,11 1,7,9,11 1,7,9,11 1,7,9,11 224 224 224 224

INF NO. 51 52 64 65 66 67 68 69 70 71 72 73 74 75 76 77 78 79 80 81 82 83 84 85 86 87 88 89 90 91 92 93 GI 1 * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * Model Number 2 3 4 5 6
P341/EN GC/D22 Page 79/158
ASDU TYPE 1 1 Fault Indications 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 4 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 Auto-Reclose Indications 1 1 1 Measurands 3.1 3.2 3.3 3.4 9 Generic Functions 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10
COT 1,7,9 1,7,9 1,7,9 1,7,9 1,7,9 1,7,9 1,7 1,7 1,7 1,7 1,7 1,7 1,7 1,7 1,7 1,7 1,7 1,7 1,7 1,7 1,7 1,7 1,7,9 1,7 1,7 1,7 1,7 1,7 1,7 1,7 1,7 1,7 1,7 1,7 1,7,9 2,7 2,7 2,7 2,7 2,7
FUN 224 224 224 224 224 224 224 224 224 224 224 224 224 224 224 224 224 224 224 224 224 224 224 224 224 224 224 224 224 224 224 224 224 224 224 224 224 224 224 224
Description Earth Fault Fwd Earth Fault Rev Start /pickup L1 Start /pickup L2 Start /pickup L3 Start /pickup N General Trip Trip L1 Trip L2 Trip L3 Trip I>> (back up) Fault Location in ohms Fault forward Fault reverse Teleprotection signal sent Teleprotection signal received Zone 1 Zone 2 Zone 3 Zone 4 Zone 5 Zone 6 General Start Breaker Failure Trip measuring system L1 Trip measuring system L2 Trip measuring system L3 Trip measuring system E Trip I> Trip I>> Trip IN> Trip IN>>
Interpretation
DDB Ordinal
1st Stage O/C Start A 1st Stage O/C Start B 1st Stage O/C Start C 1st Stage EF Start Any Trip 1st Stage O/C Trip A 1st Stage O/C Trip B 1st Stage O/C Trip C
598 599 600 613 162 478 479 480
* *
* *
* *
Any Start Breaker Fail Any Trip
576 294
* * * *
* * * *
* * * *
1st Stage O/C Trip 3ph 2nd Stage O/C Trip 3ph 1st Stage EF Trip 2nd Stage EF Trip
477 481 442 443
128 CB 'on' by A/R 129 CB 'on' by long time A/R 130 AR blocked 144 Measurand I 145 Measurands I,V 146 Measurands I,V,P,Q 147 Measurands IN,VEN 148 Measurands IL1,2,3,VL1,2,3,P,Q,f * * * Note unavailable measurands sent as invalid *
42,43 42,43 42,43 1,2,7,9,11,12, 42,43 10 41,44 40,41 40
224 224 224 224 224 224 224 224
240 Read Headings 241 Read attributes of all entries of a group
243 Read directory of entry 244 Real attribute of entry 245 End of GGI 249 Write entry with confirm 250 Write entry with execute 251 Write entry aborted *

INF NO. GI 1 Model Number 2 3 4 5 6
P341/EN GC/D22 Page 80/158
ASDU TYPE
COT
FUN
Description
Interpretation
DDB Ordinal
Compatible Range Information Numbers in Control Direction ASDU TYPE System Functions 7 6 General Commands 20 20 20 20 20 20 20 20 Generic Functions 21 21 21 21 21 10 10 10 10 Test Mode Blocking of monitor direction Disturbance data Generic services Private data Miscellaneous Measurands Current L1 Current L2 Current L3 Voltage L1-E Voltage L2-E Voltage L3-E Active Power P Reactive Power Q Frequency F Voltage L1-L2 Private Range Information Numbers in Monitor Direction ASDU TYPE 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 COT 1,7,9 1,7,9 1,7,9 1,7,9 1,7,9 1,7,9 1,7,9 1,7,9 FUN NF NO 226 226 226 226 226 226 226 226 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 Contact 1 Contact 2 Contact 3 Contact 4 Contact 5 Contact 6 Contact 7 Contact 8 Description GI 1 * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * Model Number 2 * * * * * * * * 3 * * * * * * * * 4 5 6 Interpretation Output Relay 1 Output Relay 2 Output Relay 3 Output Relay 4 Output Relay 5 Output Relay 6 Output Relay 7 Output Relay 8 DDB Ordinal 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 42 42 42 42 9 40 40 40 40 224 224 224 224 224 224 224 224 224 * * * * * 240 241 Read headings of all defined groups Read single attribute of all entries of a group 20 20 20 20 20 20 20 20 224 224 224 224 224 224 224 224 16 17 18 19 23 24 25 26 Auto-recloser on/off Teleprotection on/off Protection on/off LED Reset Activate characteristic 1 Activate characteristic 2 Activate characteristic 3 Activate characteristic 4 * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * Reset Indications and Latches Activate Setting Group 1 Activate Setting Group 2 Activate Setting Group 3 Activate Setting Group 4 Autoreclose in Service 9 8 255 255 0 0 Init General Interrogation Time Synchronisation * * * * * * COT FUN INF NO. Description GI 1 Model Number 2 3 4 5 6 Interpretation DDB Ordinal
243 Read directory of single entry 244 Read attribute of sngle entry 245 Generic General Interrogation (GGI)
248 Write entry 249 Write with confirm 250 Write with execute 251 Write entry abort * * * * * * * 1.2 * 2.4 * * * * * * * * * Max. MVAL = times rated value * * * * * * * * *
Basic Application Functions

INF NO. 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 27 28 29 30 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 60 61 62 63 64 Contact 9 Contact 10 Contact 11 Contact 12 Contact 13 Contact 14 Contact 15 Contact 16 Contact 17 Contact 18 Contact 19 Contact 20 Contact 21 Contact 22 Contact 23 Contact 24 Contact 25 Contact 26 Contact 27 Contact 28 Contact 29 Contact 30 Contact 31 Contact 32 Opto 1 Opto 2 Opto 3 Opto 4 Opto 5 Opto 6 Opto 7 Opto 8 Opto 9 Opto 10 Opto 11 Opto 12 Opto 13 Opto 14 Opto 15 Opto 16 Opto 17 Opto 18 Opto 19 Opto 20 Opto 21 Opto 22 Opto 23 Opto 24 Opto 25 Opto 26 Opto 27 Opto 28 Opto 29 Opto 30 Opto 31 Opto 32 LED 1 GI 1 * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * Model Number 2 * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * 3 * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * 4 5 6
P341/EN GC/D22 Page 81/158
ASDU TYPE 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
COT 1,7,9 1,7,9 1,7,9 1,7,9 1,7,9 1,7,9 1,7,9 1,7,9 1,7,9 1,7,9 1,7,9 1,7,9 1,7,9 1,7,9 1,7,9 1,7,9 1,7,9 1,7,9 1,7,9 1,7,9 1,7,9 1,7,9 1,7,9 1,7,9 1,7,9,11 1,7,9,11 1,7,9,11 1,7,9,11 1,7,9,11 1,7,9,11 1,7,9,11 1,7,9,11 1,7,9,11 1,7,9,11 1,7,9,11 1,7,9,11 1,7,9,11 1,7,9,11 1,7,9,11 1,7,9,11 1,7,9,11 1,7,9,11 1,7,9,11 1,7,9,11 1,7,9,11 1,7,9,11 1,7,9,11 1,7,9,11 1,7,9,11 1,7,9,11 1,7,9,11 1,7,9,11 1,7,9,11 1,7,9,11 1,7,9,11 1,7,9,11
FUN 226 226 226 226 226 226 226 226 226 226 226 226 226 226 226 226 226 226 226 226 226 226 226 226 224 224 224 224 226 226 226 226 226 226 226 226 226 226 226 226 226 226 226 226 226 226 226 226 226 226 226 226 226 226 226 226 226
Description
Interpretation Output Relay 9 Output Relay 10 Output Relay 11 Output Relay 12 Output Relay 13 Output Relay 14 Output Relay 15 Output Relay 16 Output Relay 17 Output Relay 18 Output Relay 19 Output Relay 20 Output Relay 21 Output Relay 22 Output Relay 23 Output Relay 24 Output Relay 25 Output Relay 26 Output Relay 27 Output Relay 28 Output Relay 29 Output Relay 30 Output Relay 31 Output Relay 32 Opto Input 1 Opto Input 2 Opto Input 3 Opto Input 4 Opto Input 5 Opto Input 6 Opto Input 7 Opto Input 8 Opto Input 9 Opto Input 10 Opto Input 11 Opto Input 12 Opto Input 13 Opto Input 14 Opto Input 15 Opto Input 16 Opto Input 17 Opto Input 18 Opto Input 19 Opto Input 20 Opto Input 21 Opto Input 22 Opto Input 23 Opto Input 24 Opto Input 25 Opto Input 26 Opto Input 27 Opto Input 28 Opto Input 29 Opto Input 30 Opto Input 31 Opto Input 32 Programmable LED 1
DDB Ordinal 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 60 61 62 63 64

INF NO. 65 66 67 68 69 70 71 72 73 74 75 76 77 78 79 80 81 82 83 84 85 86 87 88 89 90 91 92 93 94 95 96 97 98 99 100 101 102 103 104 105 106 107 108 109 110 111 112 113 114 115 116 LED Cond IN 1 LED Cond IN 2 LED Cond IN 3 LED Cond IN 4 LED Cond IN 5 LED Cond IN 6 LED Cond IN 7 LED Cond IN 8 * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * LED 2 LED 3 LED 4 LED 5 LED 6 LED 7 LED 8 GI 1 * * * * * * * Model Number 2 * * * * * * * 3 * * * * * * * 4 5 6
P341/EN GC/D22 Page 82/158
ASDU TYPE
COT
FUN 226 226 226 226 226 226 226 226 226 226 226 226 226 226 226 226 226 226 226 226 226 226 226 226 226 226 226 226 226 226 226 226 226 226 226 226 226 226 226 226 226 226 226 226 226 226 226 226 226 226 226 226
Description
Interpretation Programmable LED 2 Programmable LED 3 Programmable LED 4 Programmable LED 5 Programmable LED 6 Programmable LED 7 Programmable LED 8
DDB Ordinal 65 66 67 68 69 70 71 72 73 74 75 76 77 78 79
Input to LED Output Condition Input to LED Output Condition Input to LED Output Condition Input to LED Output Condition Input to LED Output Condition Input to LED Output Condition Input to LED Output Condition Input to LED Output Condition
80 81 82 83 84 85 86 87 88 89 90 91 92 93 94 95 96 97 98 99 100 101 102 103 104 105 106 107 108 109 110 111 112 113 114 115 116

INF NO. 117 118 119 120 121 122 123 124 125 126 127 128 129 130 131 132 133 134 135 136 137 138 139 140 141 142 143 144 145 146 147 148 149 150 151 152 153 154 155 156 157 158 159 160 Relay Cond 1 161 Relay Cond 2 68 Any Trip * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * GI 1 Model Number 2 3 4 5 6
P341/EN GC/D22 Page 83/158
ASDU TYPE
COT
FUN 226 226 226 226 226 226 226 226 226 226 226 226 226 226 226 226 226 226 226 226 226 226 226 226 226 226 226 226 226 226 226 226 226 226 226 226 226 226 226 226 226 226 226 226 226
Description
Interpretation
DDB Ordinal 117 118 119 120 121 122 123 124 125 126 127 128 129 130 131 132 133 134 135 136 137 138 139 140 141 142 143 144 145 146 147 148 149 150 151 152 153 154 155 156 157 158 159
Input to Relay Output Condition Input to Relay Output Condition Input to Relay Output Condition Input to Relay Output Condition Input to Relay Output Condition Input to Relay Output Condition Input to Relay Output Condition Input to Relay Output Condition
160 161 162 163 164 165 166 167
1,7
224 226 226 226 226 226
163 Relay Cond 4 164 Relay Cond 5 165 Relay Cond 6 166 Relay Cond 7 167 Relay Cond 8

INF NO. GI 1 * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * Model Number 2 * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * 3 * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * 4 5 6
P341/EN GC/D22 Page 84/158
ASDU TYPE
COT
FUN 226 226 226 226 226 226 226 226 226 226 226 226 226 226 226 226 226 226 226 226 226 226 226 226 226 226 226 226 226 226 226 226 226 226 226 226 226 226 226 226 226
Description
Interpretation Input to Relay Output Condition Input to Relay Output Condition Input to Relay Output Condition Input to Relay Output Condition Input to Relay Output Condition Input to Relay Output Condition Input to Relay Output Condition Input to Relay Output Condition Input to Relay Output Condition Input to Relay Output Condition Input to Relay Output Condition Input to Relay Output Condition Input to Relay Output Condition Input to Relay Output Condition Input to Relay Output Condition Input to Relay Output Condition Input to Relay Output Condition Input to Relay Output Condition Input to Relay Output Condition Input to Relay Output Condition Input to Relay Output Condition Input to Relay Output Condition Input to Relay Output Condition Input to Relay Output Condition
DDB Ordinal 168 169 170 171 172 173 174 175 176 177 178 179 180 181 182 183 184 185 186 187 188 189 190 191 192 193 194 195 196 197 198 199 200 201 202 203 204 205 206 207 208
168 Relay Cond 9 169 Relay Cond 10 170 Relay Cond 11 171 Relay Cond 12 172 Relay Cond 13 173 Relay Cond 14 174 Relay Cond 15 175 Relay Cond 16 176 Relay Cond 17 177 Relay Cond 18 178 Relay Cond 19 179 Relay Cond 20 180 Relay Cond 21 181 Relay Cond 22 182 Relay Cond 23 183 Relay Cond 24 184 Relay Cond 25 185 Relay Cond 26 186 Relay Cond 27 187 Relay Cond 28 188 Relay Cond 29 189 Relay Cond 30 190 Relay Cond 31 191 Relay Cond 32 192 193 194 195 196 197 198 199 200 201 202 203 204 205 206 207 208

INF NO. 209 210 211 212 213 214 215 216 217 218 219 220 221 222 223 224 Timer in 1 225 Timer in 2 226 Timer in 3 227 Timer in 4 228 Timer in 5 229 Timer in 6 230 Timer in 7 231 Timer in 8 232 233 234 235 236 237 238 239 240 241 242 243 244 245 246 247 248 249 250 251 252 253 254 255 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 Timer out 1 Timer out 2 Timer out 3 Timer out 4 Timer out 5 Timer out 6 Timer out 7 Timer out 8 * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * GI 1 Model Number 2 3 4 5 6
P341/EN GC/D22 Page 85/158
ASDU TYPE
COT
FUN 226 226 226 226 226 226 226 226 226 226 226 226 226 226 226 226 226 226 226 226 226 226 226 226 226 226 226 226 226 226 226 226 226 226 226 226 226 226 226 226 226 226 226 226 226 226 226 227 227 227 227 227 227 227 227 227 227
Description
Interpretation
DDB Ordinal 209 210 211 212 213 214 215 216 217 218 219 220 221 222 223
Input to Auxiliary Timer 1 Input to Auxiliary Timer 2 Input to Auxiliary Timer 3 Input to Auxiliary Timer 4 Input to Auxiliary Timer 5 Input to Auxiliary Timer 6 Input to Auxiliary Timer 7 Input to Auxiliary Timer 8
224 225 226 227 228 229 230 231 232 233 234 235 236 237 238 239 240 241 242 243 244 245 246 247 248 249 250 251 252 253 254 255
Output from Auxiliary Timer 1 Output from Auxiliary Timer 2 Output from Auxiliary Timer 3 Output from Auxiliary Timer 4 Output from Auxiliary Timer 5 Output from Auxiliary Timer 6 Output from Auxiliary Timer 7 Output from Auxiliary Timer 8
256 257 258 259 260 261 262 263 264 265

INF NO. 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 21 38 37 85 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 SG-opto Invalid Prot'n Disabled VT Fail Alarm CT Fail Alarm CB Fail Alarm I^ Maint Alarm I^ Lockout Alarm CB Ops Maint CB Ops Lockout CB Op Time Maint CB Op Time Lock Fault Freq Lock CB Status Alarm Man CB Trip Fail Man CB Cls Fail Man CB Unhealthy F out of Range NPS Alarm Thermal Alarm V/Hz Alarm Field Fail Alarm RTD Thermal Alm RTD Open Cct RTD short Cct RTD Data Error RTD Board Fail Freq Prot Alm * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * Fault REC TRIG * * * GI 1 Model Number 2 3 4 5 6
P341/EN GC/D22 Page 86/158
ASDU TYPE
COT
FUN 227 227 227 227 227 227 227 227 227 227 227 227 227 227 227 227 227 227 227 227 227 227 227 227
Description
Interpretation
DDB Ordinal 266 267 268 269 270 271 272 273 274 275 276 277 278 279 280 281 282 283 284 285 286 287
Trigger for Fault Recorder Setting Group via opto invalid Alarm Test Mode Enabled Alarm VTS Indication CTS Indication Breaker Fail Any Trip Broken Current Maintenance Alarm Broken Current Lockout Alarm No of CB Ops Maintenance Alarm No of CB Ops Maintenance Lockout Excessive CB Op Time Maintenance Alarm Excessive CB Op Time Lockout Alarm Excessive Fault Frequency Lockout Alarm CB Status Alarm (Invalid CB auxilliary contacts) CB Failed to Trip Alarm CB Failed to Close Alarm CB Unhealthy on Control Close Alarm Frequency out of range Negative Phase Sequence Alarm Thermal Overload Alarm Volts Per Hz Alarm Field failure Alarm RTD thermal Alarm RTD open circuit failure RTD short circuit failure RTD data inconsistency error RTD Board failure Frequency protection alarm
288 289 290 291 292 293 294 295 296 297 298 299 300 301 302 303 304 305 306 306 307 308 309 310 311 312 313 314 315
1 1 1 1 2 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
1,7,9 9,11 1,7,9 1,7,9 1,7 1,7,9 1,7,9 1,7,9 1,7,9 1,7,9 1,7,9 1,7,9 1,7,9 1,7 1,7 1,7 1,7,9 1,7,9 1,7,9 1,7,9 1,7,9 1,7,9 1,7,9 1,7,9 1,7,9 1,7,9 1,7,9
227 224 224 227 224 227 227 227 227 227 227 227 227 227 227 227 227 227 227 227 227 227 227 227 227 227 227

INF NO. 60 61 62 63 64 65 66 67 68 69 70 71 72 73 74 75 76 77 78 79 80 81 82 83 84 85 86 87 88 89 90 91 92 93 94 95 96 97 98 99 VDepOC Timer Blk UnderZ Timer Blk I>1 Timer Block I>2 Timer Block * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * GI 1 * * * * * * * * Model Number 2 * * * * 3 * * * * 4 5 6
P341/EN GC/D22 Page 87/158
ASDU TYPE 1 1 1 1
COT 1,7,9 1,7,9 1,7,9 1,7,9
FUN 227 227 227 227 227 227 227 227 227 227 227 227 227 227 227 227 227 227 227 227 227 227 227 227 227 227 227 227 227 227 227 227 227 227 227 227 227 227 227 227 227 227 227 227 227 227 227 227 227 227 227
Description Voltage Prot Alm User Alarm 1 User Alarm 2 User Alarm 3
Interpretation Voltage protection alarm User settable alarm 1 User settable alarm 2 User settable alarm 3
DDB Ordinal 316 317 318 319 320 321 322 323 324 325 326 327 328 329 330 331 332 333 334 335 336 337 338 339 340 341 342 343 344 345 346 347 348 349 350 351
Block Voltage Dependent time delay Block Under Impedance time delay Block Phase Overcurrent Stage 1 time delay Block Phase Overcurrent Stage 2 time delay Block Phase Overcurrent Stage 3 time delay Block Phase Overcurrent Stage 4 time delay Block Earth Fault Stage 1 time delay Block Earth Fault Stage 2 time delay Block Earth Fault Stage 3 time delay Block Earth Fault Stage 4 time delay Block SEF Stage 1 time delay Block SEF Stage 2 time delay Block SEF Stage 3 time delay Block SEF Stage 4 time delay Logic Input Trip CB
352 353 354 355 356 357 358 359 360 361 362 363 364 365 366
100 I>3 Timer Block 101 I>4 Timer Block 102 IN>1 Timer Blk 103 IN>2 Timer Blk 104 IN>3 Timer Blk 105 IN>4 Timer Blk 106 ISEF>1 Timer Blk 107 ISEF>2 Timer Blk 108 ISEF>3 Timer Blk 109 ISEF>4 Timer Blk 110 Init Trip CB

INF NO. GI 1 * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * Model Number 2 3 4 5 6
P341/EN GC/D22 Page 88/158
ASDU TYPE
COT
FUN 227 227 227 227 227 227 227 227 227 227 227 227 227 227 227 227 227 227 227 227 227 227 227 227
Description
Interpretation Logic Input Close CB Block Residual Overvoltage Stage 1 time delay Block Residual Overvoltage Stage 2 time delay Block Phase Undervoltage Stage 1 time delay Block Phase Undervoltage Stage 2 time delay Block Phase Overvoltage Stage 1 time delay Block Phase Overvoltage Stage 2 time delay Block Underfrequency Stage 1 Timer Block Underfrequency Stage 2 Timer Block Underfrequency Stage 3 Timer Block Underfrequency Stage 4 Timer Block Overfrequency Stage 1 Timer Block Overfrequency Stage 2 Timer External Trip 3ph 52-A (3 phase) 52-B (3 phase) CB Healthy MCB/VTS opto Reset Manual CB Close Time Delay Reset Latched Relays & LEDs Reset Lockout Opto Input Reset CB Maintenance Values Reset NPS Thermal State Reset Overload Thermal State IEC60870-5-103 Monitor Blocking IEC60870-5-103 Command Blocking
DDB Ordinal 367 368 369 370 371 372 373 374 375 376 377 378 379 380 381 382 383 384 385 386 387 388 389 390 391 392 393 394 395 396 397 398 399 400 401 402 403 404 405 406 407 408 409 410 411
111 Init Close CB 112 VN>1 Timer Blk 113 VN>2 Timer Blk 114 V<1 Timer Block 115 V<2 Timer Block 116 V>1 Timer Block 117 V>2 Timer Block 118 F<1 timer Block 119 F<2 Timer Block 120 F<3 Timer Block 121 F<4 Timer Block 122 F>1 Timer Block 123 F>2 Timer Block 124 Ext. Trip 3ph 125 CB Aux 3ph(52-A) 126 CB Aux 3ph(52-B) 127 CB Healthy 128 MCB/VTS 129 Reset Close Dly 130 Reset Relays/LED 131 Reset Lockout 132 Reset All Values 133 Reset I2 Thermal 134 Reset ThermalO/L 20 Monitor Blocked
1 1
9, 11 9, 11
224 227 227 227 227 227 227 227 227 227 227 227 227 227 227 227 227 227 227 227 227
136 Command Blocked 137 138 139 140 141 142 143 144 145 146 147 148 149 150 151 152 153 154 155

INF NO. 156 157 158 159 Test Mode 160 100% ST EF Trip 161 DeadMachine Trip 162 Gen Diff Trip 163 Gen Diff Trip A 164 Gen Diff Trip B 165 Gen Diff Trip C 166 Field Fail1 Trip 167 Field Fail2 Trip 168 NPS Trip 169 V Dep OC Trip 170 V Dep OC Trip A 171 V Dep OC Trip B 172 V Dep OC Trip C 173 V/Hz Trip 174 RTD 1 Trip 175 RTD 2 Trip 176 RTD 3 Trip 177 RTD 4 Trip 178 RTD 5 Trip 179 RTD 6 Trip 180 RTD 7 Trip 181 RTD 8 Trip 182 RTD 9 Trip 183 RTD 10 Trip 184 Any RTD Trip 184 df/dt Trip 185 V Shift Trip 92 93 IN>1 Trip IN>2 Trip * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * GI 1 Model Number 2 3 4 5 6
P341/EN GC/D22 Page 89/158
ASDU TYPE
COT
FUN 227 227 227 227
Description
Interpretation
DDB Ordinal 412 413 414
Input To Initiate Test Mode 100% Stator Earth Fault Trip Dead machine protection Trip Generator Differential trip 3ph Generator Differential Trip A Generator Differential Trip B Generator Differential Trip C Field Failure Stage 1 Trip Field Failure Stage 2 Trip Negative Phase Sequence Trip Voltage Dependent O/C Trip 3ph Voltage Dependent O/C Trip A Voltage Dependent O/C Trip B Voltage Dependent O/C Trip C Volts per Hz Trip RTD 1 TRIP RTD 2 TRIP RTD 3 TRIP RTD 4 TRIP RTD 5 TRIP RTD 6 TRIP RTD 7 TRIP RTD 8 TRIP RTD 9 TRIP RTD 10 TRIP Any RTD Trip Rate of change of frequency Trip Voltage vector shift trip 1st Stage EF Trip 2nd Stage EF Trip 3rd Stage EF Trip 4th Stage EF Trip REF Trip 1st Stage SEF Trip 2nd Stage SEF Trip 3rd Stage SEF Trip 4th Stage SEF Trip 1st Stage Residual O/V Trip 2nd Stage Residual O/V Trip 1st Stage Phase U/V Trip 3ph 1st Stage Phase U/V Trip A/AB 1st Stage Phase U/V Trip B/BC 1st Stage Phase U/V Trip C/CA 2nd Stage Phase U/V Trip 3ph
415 416 417 418 419 420 421 422 423 424 425 426 427 428 429 430 431 432 433 434 435 436 437 438 439 440 440 441 442 443 444 445 446 447 448 449 450 451 452 453 454 455 456 457
2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2
1,7 1,7 1,7 1,7 1,7 1,7 1,7 1,7 1,7 1,7 1,7 1,7 1,7 1,7 1,7 1,7 1,7 1,7 1,7 1,7 1,7 1,7 1,7 1,7 1,7 1,7 1,7 1,7 1,7 1,7 1,7 1,7 1,7 1,7 1,7 1,7 1,7 1,7 1,7 1,7 1,7 1,7 1,7
227 227 227 227 227 227 227 227 227 227 227 227 227 227 227 227 227 227 227 227 227 227 227 227 227 227 227 224 224 227 227 227 227 227 227 227 227 227 227 227 227 227 227
188 IN>3 Trip 189 IN>4 Trip 190 IREF> Trip 191 ISEF>1 Trip 192 ISEF>2 Trip 193 ISEF>3 Trip 194 ISEF>4 Trip 195 VN>1 Trip 196 VN>2 Trip 197 V<1 Trip 198 V<1 Trip A/AB 199 V<1 Trip B/BC 200 V<1 Trip C/CA 201 V<2 Trip

INF NO. GI 1 * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * Model Number 2 * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * 3 * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * 4 5 6
P341/EN GC/D22 Page 90/158
ASDU TYPE 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2
COT 1,7 1,7 1,7 1,7 1,7 1,7 1,7 1,7 1,7 1,7 1,7 1,7 1,7 1,7 1,7 1,7 1,7 1,7 1,7 1,7 1,7 1,7 1,7 1,7 1,7 1,7 1,7 1,7 1,7 1,7 1,7 1,7 1,7 1,7 1,7 1,7 1,7 1,7 1,7 1,7 1,7 1,7 1,7 1,7 1,7
FUN 227 227 227 227 227 227 227 227 227 227 227 227 227 227 227 227 227 227 227 224 224 224 224 224 227 227 227 227 227 227 227 227 227 227 227 227 227 227 227 227 227 227 227 227 227
Description
Interpretation 2nd Stage Phase U/V Trip A/AB 2nd Stage Phase U/V Trip B/BC 2nd Stage Phase U/V Trip C/CA 1st Stage Phase O/V Trip 3ph 1st Stage Phase O/V Trip A/AB 1st Stage Phase O/V Trip B/BC 1st Stage Phase O/V Trip C/CA 2nd Stage Phase O/V Trip 3ph 2nd Stage Phase O/V Trip A/AB 2nd Stage Phase O/V Trip B/BC 2nd Stage Phase O/V Trip C/CA Under frequency Stage 1 trip Under frequency Stage 2 trip Under frequency Stage 3 trip Under frequency Stage 4 trip Over frequency Stage 1 Trip Over frequency Stage 2 Trip Power stage 1 trip Power stage 2 trip 1st Stage O/C Trip 3ph 1st Stage O/C Trip A 1st Stage O/C Trip B 1st Stage O/C Trip C 2nd Stage O/C Trip 3ph 2nd Stage O/C Trip A 2nd Stage O/C Trip B 2nd Stage O/C Trip C 3rd Stage O/C Trip 3ph 3rd Stage O/C Trip A 3rd Stage O/C Trip B 3rd Stage O/C Trip C 4th Stage O/C Trip 3ph 4th Stage O/C Trip A 4th Stage O/C Trip B 4th Stage O/C Trip C tBF1 Trip 3Ph tBF2 Trip 3Ph Sensitive A Phase Power Stage 1 Trip Sensitive A Phase Power Stage 2 Trip Pole Slip (Impedance) Zone1 Trip Pole Slip (Impedance) Zone2 Trip Thermal Overload Trip Under Impedance Stage 1 Trip 3 Ph Under Impedance Stage 1 Trip A Under Impedance Stage 1 Trip B
DDB Ordinal 458 459 460 461 462 463 464 465 466 467 468 469 470 471 472 473 474 475 476 477 478 479 480 481 482 483 484 485 486 487 488 489 490 491 492 493 494 495 496 497 498 499 500 501 502
202 V<2 Trip A/AB 203 V<2 Trip B/BC 204 V<2 Trip C/CA 205 V>1 Trip 206 V>1 Trip A/AB 207 V>1 Trip B/BC 208 V>1 Trip C/CA 209 V>2 Trip 210 V>2 Trip A/AB 211 V>2 Trip B/BC 212 V>2 Trip C/CA 213 F<1 Trip 214 F<2 Trip 215 F<3 Trip 216 F<4 Trip 217 F>1 Trip 218 F>2 Trip 219 Power1 Trip 220 Power2 Trip 90 69 70 71 91 I>1 Trip I>1 Trip A I>1 Trip B I>1 Trip C I>2 Trip
226 I>2 Trip A 227 I>2 Trip B 228 I>2 Trip C 229 I>3 Trip 230 I>3 Trip A 231 I>3 Trip B 232 I>3 Trip C 233 I>4 Trip 234 I>4 Trip A 235 I>4 Trip B 236 I>4 Trip C 237 Bfail1 Trip 3ph 238 Bfail2 Trip 3ph 239 SPower1 Trip 240 SPower2 Trip 241 PSlipz Z1 Trip 242 PSlipz Z2 Trip 243 Thermal O/L Trip 244 Z<1 Trip 245 Z<1 Trip A 246 Z<1 Trip B

INF NO. GI 1 Model Number 2 * * * * * 3 * * * * * 4 5 6
P341/EN GC/D22 Page 91/158
ASDU TYPE 2 2 2 2 2
COT 1,7 1,7 1,7 1,7 1,7
FUN 227 227 227 227 227 227 227 227 227 228 228 228 228 228 228 228 228 228 228 228 228 228 228 228 228 228 228 228 228 228 228 228 228 228 228 228 228 228 228 228 228 228 228 228 228 228 228 228 228 228 228 228 228 228
Description
Interpretation Under Impedance Stage 1 Trip C Under Impedance Stage 2 Trip 3 Ph Under Impedance Stage 2 Trip A Under Impedance Stage 2 Trip B Under Impedance Stage 2 Trip C
DDB Ordinal 503 504 505 506 507 508 509 510 511 512 513 514 515 516 517 518 519 520 521 522 523 524 525 526 527 528 529 530 531 532 533 534 535 536 537 538 539 540 541 542 543 544 545 546 547 548 549 550 551 552 553 554 555 556
247 Z<1 Trip C 248 Z<2 Trip 249 Z<2 Trip A 250 Z<2 Trip B 251 Z<2 Trip C 252 253 254 255 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44

INF NO. 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 60 61 62 63 84 65 66 67 68 69 70 71 72 73 74 75 76 77 78 79 80 81 82 83 84 85 64 65 66 89 90 91 Any Start VN>1 Start VN>2 Start V<1 Start V<1 Start A/AB V<1 Start B/BC V<1 Start C/CA V<2 Start V<2 Start A/AB V<2 Start B/BC V<2 Start C/CA V>1 Start V>1 Start A/AB V>1 Start B/BC V>1 Start C/CA V>2 Start V>2 Start A/AB V>2 Start B/BC V>2 Start C/CA Power1 Start Power2 Start I>1 Start I>1 Start A I>1 Start B I>1 Start C I>2 Start I>2 Start A I>2 Start B * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * Any Start GI 1 Model Number 2 3 4 5 6
P341/EN GC/D22 Page 92/158
ASDU TYPE
COT
FUN 228 228 228 228 228 228 228 228 228 228 228 228 228 228 228 228 228 228 228
Description
Interpretation
DDB Ordinal 557 558 559 560 561 562 563 564 565 566 567 568 569 570 571 572 573 574 575 576 577 578 579 580 581 582 583 584 585 586 587 588 589 590 591 592 593 594 595 596 597 598 599 600 601 602 603
2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2
1,7,9 1,7,9 1,7,9 1,7,9 1,7,9 1,7,9 1,7,9 1,7,9 1,7,9 1,7,9 1,7,9 1,7,9 1,7,9 1,7,9 1,7,9 1,7,9 1,7,9 1,7,9 1,7,9 1,7,9 1,7,9 1,7,9 1,7,9 1,7,9 1,7,9 1,7,9 1,7,9 1,7,9
224 228 228 228 228 228 228 228 228 228 228 228 228 228 228 228 228 228 228 228 228 228 224 224 224 228 228 228
1st Stage Residual O/V Start 2nd Stage Residual O/V Start 1st Stage Phase U/V Start 3ph 1st Stage Phase U/V Start A/AB 1st Stage Phase U/V Start B/BC 1st Stage Phase U/V Start C/CA 2nd Stage Phase U/V Start 3ph 2nd Stage Phase U/V Start A/AB 2nd Stage Phase U/V Start B/BC 2nd Stage Phase U/V Start C/CA 1st Stage Phase O/V Start 3ph 1st Stage Phase O/V Start A/AB 1st Stage Phase O/V Start B/BC 1st Stage Phase O/V Start C/CA 2nd Stage Phase O/V Start 3ph 2nd Stage Phase O/V Start A/AB 2nd Stage Phase O/V Start B/BC 2nd Stage Phase O/V Start C/CA Power Stage 1 start Power stage 1 start 1st Stage O/C Start 3ph 1st Stage O/C Start A 1st Stage O/C Start B 1st Stage O/C Start C 2nd Stage O/C Start 3ph 2nd Stage O/C Start A 2nd Stage O/C Start B

INF NO. 92 93 94 95 96 97 98 99 67 GI 1 * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * Model Number 2 * 3 * 4 5 6
P341/EN GC/D22 Page 93/158
ASDU TYPE 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2
COT 1,7,9 1,7,9 1,7,9 1,7,9 1,7,9 1,7,9 1,7,9 1,7,9 1,7,9 1,7,9 1,7,9 1,7,9 1,7,9 1,7,9 1,7,9 1,7,9 1,7,9 1,7,9 1,7,9 1,7,9 1,7,9 1,7,9 1,7,9 1,7,9 1,7,9 1,7,9 1,7,9
FUN 228 228 228 228 228 228 228 228 228 224 228 228 228 228 228 228 228 228 228 228 228 228 228 228 228 228 228 228 228 228 228 228
Description I>2 Start C I>3 Start I>3 Start A I>3 Start B I>3 Start C I>4 Start I>4 Start A I>4 Start B IN>1 Start
Interpretation 2nd Stage O/C Start C 3rd Stage O/C Start 3ph 3rd Stage O/C Start A 3rd Stage O/C Start B 3rd Stage O/C Start C 4th Stage O/C Start 3ph 4th Stage O/C Start A 4th Stage O/C Start B 4th Stage O/C Start C 1st Stage EF Start 2nd Stage EF Start 3rd Stage EF Start 4th Stage EF Start 1st Stage SEF Start 2nd Stage SEF Start 3rd Stage SEF Start 4th Stage SEF Start 100% Stator Earth Fault Start Under frequency Stage 1 START Under frequency Stage 2 START Under frequency Stage 3 START Under frequency Stage 4 START Over frequency Stage 1 START Over frequency Stage 2 START I> Blocked O/C Start, inhibited by CB Fail IN/ISEF> Blocked O/C Start, inhibited by CB Fail Rate of change of frequency Start IA< operate IB< operate IC< operate ISEF< operate IN< operate Volts per Hz Start Field failure Stage 1 start Field failure Stage 2 start Voltage Dependent Overcurrent Start Voltage Dependent Overcurrent Start A Voltage Dependent Overcurrent Start B Voltage Dependent Overcurrent Start C Sensitive A Phase Power Stage 1 Start Sensitive A Phase Power Stage 2 Start Pole Slip (Impedance) Zone1 Start Pole Slip (Impedance) Zone2 Start Pole Slip (impedance) Lens Start
DDB Ordinal 604 605 606 607 608 609 610 611 612 613 614 615 616 617 618 619 620 621 622 623 624 625 626 627 628 629 630 631 632 633 634 635 636 637 638 639 640 641 642 643 644 645 646 647
100 I>4 Start C 102 IN>2 Start 103 IN>3 Start 104 IN>4 Start 105 ISEF>1 Start 106 ISEF>2 Start 107 ISEF>3 Start 108 ISEF>4 Start 109 100% ST EF Start 110 F<1 Start 111 F<2 Start 112 F<3 Start 113 F<4 Start 114 F>1 Start 115 F>2 Start 116 I> BlockStart 117 IN/SEF>Blk Start 118 df/dt Start 119 IA< Start 120 IB< Start 121 IC< Start 122 ISEF< Start 123 IN< Start 124 V/Hz Start 125 FFail1 Start 126 FFail2 Start 127 V Dep OC Start 128 V Dep OC Start A 129 V Dep OC Start B 130 V Dep OC Start C 131 SPower1 Start 132 SPower2 Start 133 PSlipz Z1 Start 134 PSlipz Z2 Start 135 PSlipz LensStart
2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2
1,7,9 1,7,9 1,7,9 1,7,9 1,7,9 1,7,9 1,7,9 1,7,9 1,7,9 1,7,9 1,7,9 1,7,9
228 228 228 228 228 228 228 228 228 228 228 228

INF NO. GI 1 * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * Model Number 2 3 * * * * * * * * * * 4 5 6
P341/EN GC/D22 Page 94/158
ASDU TYPE 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2
COT 1,7,9 1,7,9 1,7,9 1,7,9 1,7,9 1,7,9 1,7,9 1,7,9 1,7,9 1,7,9
FUN 228 228 228 228 228 228 228 228 228 228 228 228 228 228 228 228 228 228 228 228 228 228 228 228 228 228 228 228 228 228 228 228 228 228 228 228 228 228 228 228 228 228 228 228 228 228 228 228 228 228 228
Description
Interpretation Pole Slip (impedance) Blinder Start Pole Slip (impedance) Reactance Line Start Under Impedance Stage 1 Start Under Impedance Stage 1 Start A Under Impedance Stage 1 Start B Under Impedance Stage 1 Start C Under Impedance Stage 2 Start Under Impedance Stage 2 Start A Under Impedance Stage 2 Start B Under Impedance Stage 2 Start C
DDB Ordinal 648 649 650 651 652 653 654 655 656 657 658 659 660 661 662 663 664 665 666 667 668 669 670 671 672 673 674 675 676 677 678 679 680 681 682 683 684 685 686 687 688 689 690 691 692 693 694 695 696 697 698
136 PSlipz BlindStrt 137 PSlipz ReactStrt 138 Z<1 Start 139 Z<1 Start A 140 Z<1 Start B 141 Z<1 Start C 142 Z<2 Start 143 Z<2 Start A 144 Z<2 Start B 145 Z<2 Start C 146 147 148 149 150 151 152 153 154 155 156 157 158 159 160 161 162 163 164 165 166 167 168 169 170 171 172 173 174 175 176 177 178 179 180 181 182 183 184 185 186

INF NO. 187 188 189 190 191 192 193 194 195 196 197 198 199 200 201 202 203 204 205 206 207 208 209 210 211 212 213 214 215 216 217 218 219 220 221 222 223 224 VTS Fast Block 225 VTS Slow Block 226 CTS Block 227 Control Trip 228 Control Close 229 Close in Prog 230 Reconnection 231 RTD 1 Alarm 232 RTD 2 Alarm 233 RTD 3 Alarm 234 RTD 4 Alarm 235 RTD 5 Alarm 236 RTD 6 Alarm 237 RTD 7 Alarm 238 RTD 8 Alarm 239 RTD 9 Alarm 240 RTD 10 Alarm 241 Lockout Alarm 242 CB Open 3 ph 243 CB Closed 3 ph * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * VTS Fast Block VTS Slow Block CTS Block Control Trip Control Close GI 1 Model Number 2 3 4 5 6
P341/EN GC/D22 Page 95/158
ASDU TYPE
COT
FUN 228 228 228 228 228 228 228 228 228 228 228 228 228 228 228 228 228 228 228 228 228 228 228 228 228 228 228 228 228 228 228 228 228 228 228 228 228 228 228 228
Description
Interpretation
DDB Ordinal 699 700 701 702 703 704 705 706 707 708 709 710 711 712 713 714 715 716 717 718 719 720 721 722 723 724 725 726 727 728 729 730 731 732 733 734 735 736 737 738 739 740 741 742 743 744 745 746 747 748 749 750 751 752 753 754 755
1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
1,7 1,7 1,7 1,7 1,7,9 1,7,9 1,7,9 1,7,9 1,7,9 1,7,9 1,7,9 1,7,9 1,7,9 1,7,9 1,7,9 1,7,9
228 228 228 228 228 228 228 228 228 228 228 228 228 228 228 228 228
Control Close in Progress Reconnection Time Delay Output RTD 1 Alarm RTD 2 Alarm RTD 3 Alarm RTD 4 Alarm RTD 5 Alarm RTD 6 Alarm RTD 7 Alarm RTD 8 Alarm RTD 9 Alarm RTD 10 Alarm Composite lockout alarm 3 ph CB Open 3 ph CB Closed

INF NO. GI 1 * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * Model Number 2 * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * 3 * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * 4 5 6
P341/EN GC/D22 Page 96/158
ASDU TYPE 1
COT 1,7,9
FUN 228 228 228 228 228 228 228 228 228 228 228 228 229 229 229 229 229 229 229 229 229 229 229 229 229 229 229
Description
Interpretation Field Voltage Failure All Poles Dead Any Pole Dead Phase A Pole Dead Phase B Pole Dead Phase C Pole Dead Accelerate Ind Any Voltage Dependent Ia over threshold Ib over threshold Ic over threshold Va over threshold Vb over threshold Vc over threshold I2 over threshold V2 over threshold Superimposed Ia over threshold Superimposed Ib over threshold Superimposed Ic over threshold CBF current prot SEF stage trip CBF non current prot stage trip CBF current Prot SEF Trip CBF Non Current Prot Trip Freq High Freq Low Freq Not found Stop Freq Track Reconnect LOM (unqualified) Reconnect Disable (unqualified) Reconnect LOM Reconnect Disable
DDB Ordinal 756 757 758 759 760 761 762 763 764 765 766 767 768 769 770 771 772 773 774 775 776 777 778 779 780 781 782 783 784 785 786 787 788 789 790 791 792 793 794 795 796 797 798 799 800 801 802 803 804 805 806 807 808
244 Field volts fail 245 All Poles Dead 246 Any Pole Dead 247 Pole Dead A 248 Pole Dead B 249 Pole Dead C 250 VTS Acc Ind 251 VTS Volt Dep 252 VTS IA> 253 VTS IB> 254 VTS IC> 255 VTS VA> 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 VTS VB> VTS VC> VTS I2> VTS V2> VTS IA delta> VTS IB delta> VTS IC delta> BFail SEF Trip-1 BFail Non I Tr-1 BFail SEF Trip BFail Non I Trip Freq High Freq Low Freq Not found Stop Freq Track Recon LOM-1 Recon Disable-1 Recon LOM Recon Disable
1 1 1 1
1,7 1,7 1,7 1,7
229 229 229 229 229 229 229 229 229 229 229 229 229 229 229 229 229 229 229 229 229 229 229 229 229 229

INF NO. 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 60 61 62 63 64 65 66 67 68 69 70 71 72 73 74 75 76 77 78 79 80 81 82 83 84 85 86 87 88 89 90 91 92 93 94 95 96 97 Control Input 1 Control Input 2 Control Input 3 Control Input 4 Control Input 5 Control Input 6 Control Input 7 Control Input 8 Control Input 9 Control Input 10 Control Input 11 Control Input 12 Control Input 13 Control Input 14 Control Input 15 Control Input 16 Control Input 17 Control Input 18 Control Input 19 Control Input 20 Control Input 21 Control Input 22 Control Input 23 Control Input 24 Control Input 25 Control Input 26 Control Input 27 Control Input 28 Control Input 29 Control Input 30 Control Input 31 Control Input 32 GOOSE VIP 1 GOOSE VIP 2 * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * Control Input Control Input Control Input Control Input Control Input Control Input Control Input Control Input Control Input Control Input Control Input Control Input Control Input Control Input Control Input Control Input Control Input Control Input Control Input Control Input Control Input Control Input Control Input Control Input Control Input Control Input Control Input Control Input Control Input Control Input Control Input Control Input GI 1 Model Number 2 3 4 5 6
P341/EN GC/D22 Page 97/158
ASDU TYPE
COT
FUN 229 229 229 229 229 229 229 229 229 229 229 229 229 229 229 229 229 229 229 229 229 229 229
Description
Interpretation
DDB Ordinal 809 810 811 812 813 814 815 816 817 818 819 820 821 822 823 824 825 826 827 828 829 830 831 832 833 834 835 836 837 838 839 840 841 842 843 844 845 846 847 848 849 850 851 852 853 854 855 856 857 858 859 860 861 862 863 864 865
1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
9,11,12,20,21 9,11,12,20,21 9,11,12,20,21 9,11,12,20,21 9,11,12,20,21 9,11,12,20,21 9,11,12,20,21 9,11,12,20,21 9,11,12,20,21 9,11,12,20,21 9,11,12,20,21 9,11,12,20,21 9,11,12,20,21 9,11,12,20,21 9,11,12,20,21 9,11,12,20,21 9,11,12,20,21 9,11,12,20,21 9,11,12,20,21 9,11,12,20,21 9,11,12,20,21 9,11,12,20,21 9,11,12,20,21 9,11,12,20,21 9,11,12,20,21 9,11,12,20,21 9,11,12,20,21 9,11,12,20,21 9,11,12,20,21 9,11,12,20,21 9,11,12,20,21 9,11,12,20,21
229 229 229 229 229 229 229 229 229 229 229 229 229 229 229 229 229 229 229 229 229 229 229 229 229 229 229 229 229 229 229 229 229 229

INF NO. 98 99 GI 1 Model Number 2 3 4 5 6
P341/EN GC/D22 Page 98/158
ASDU TYPE
COT
FUN 229 229 229 229 229 229 229 229 229 229 229 229 229 229 229 229 229 229 229 229 229 229 229 229 229 229 229 229 229 229 229 229 229 229 229 229 229 229 229 229 229 229 229 229 229 229 229 229 229 229 229 229 229 229 229 229 229
Description GOOSE VIP 3 GOOSE VIP 4
Interpretation
DDB Ordinal 866 867 868 869 870 871 872 873 874 875 876 877 878 879 880 881 882 883 884 885 886 887 888 889 890 891 892 893 894 895 896 897 898 899 900 901 902 903 904 905 906 907 908 909 910 911 912 913 914 915 916 917 918 919 920 921 922
100 GOOSE VIP 5 101 GOOSE VIP 6 102 GOOSE VIP 7 103 GOOSE VIP 8 104 GOOSE VIP 9 105 GOOSE VIP 10 106 GOOSE VIP 11 107 GOOSE VIP 12 108 GOOSE VIP 13 109 GOOSE VIP 14 110 GOOSE VIP 15 111 GOOSE VIP 16 112 GOOSE VIP 17 113 GOOSE VIP 18 114 GOOSE VIP 19 115 GOOSE VIP 20 116 GOOSE VIP 21 117 GOOSE VIP 22 118 GOOSE VIP 23 119 GOOSE VIP 24 120 GOOSE VIP 25 121 GOOSE VIP 26 122 GOOSE VIP 27 123 GOOSE VIP 28 124 GOOSE VIP 29 125 GOOSE VIP 30 126 GOOSE VIP 31 127 GOOSE VIP 32 128 GOOSE VOP 1 129 GOOSE VOP 2 130 GOOSE VOP 3 131 GOOSE VOP 4 132 GOOSE VOP 5 133 GOOSE VOP 6 134 GOOSE VOP 7 135 GOOSE VOP 8 136 InterLogic I/P 1 137 InterLogic I/P 2 138 InterLogic I/P 3 139 InterLogic I/P 4 140 InterLogic I/P 5 141 InterLogic I/P 6 142 InterLogic I/P 7 143 InterLogic I/P 8 144 InterLogic O/P 1 145 InterLogic O/P 2 146 InterLogic O/P 3 147 InterLogic O/P 4 148 InterLogic O/P 5 149 InterLogic O/P 6 150 InterLogic O/P 7 151 InterLogic O/P 8 152 Direct Ctrl 1 153 Direct Ctrl 2 154 Direct Ctrl 3

INF NO. GI 1 Model Number 2 3 4 5 6
P341/EN GC/D22 Page 99/158
ASDU TYPE
COT
FUN 229 229 229 229 229 229 229 229 229 229 229 229 229 229 229 229 229 229 229 229 229 229 229 229 229 229 229 229 229 229 229 229 229 229 229 229 229 229 229 229 229 229 229 229 229 229 229 229 229 229 229 229 229 229 229 229 229
Description
Interpretation
DDB Ordinal 923 924 925 926 927
155 Direct Ctrl 4 156 Direct Ctrl 5 157 Direct Ctrl 6 158 Direct Ctrl 7 159 Direct Ctrl 8 160 PSL Int. 1 161 PSL Int. 2 162 PSL Int. 3 163 PSL Int. 4 164 PSL Int. 5 165 PSL Int. 6 166 PSL Int. 7 167 PSL Int. 8 168 PSL Int. 9 169 PSL Int. 10 170 PSL Int. 11 171 PSL Int. 12 172 PSL Int. 13 173 PSL Int. 14 174 PSL Int. 15 175 PSL Int. 16 176 PSL Int. 17 177 PSL Int. 18 178 PSL Int. 19 179 PSL Int. 20 180 PSL Int. 21 181 PSL Int. 22 182 PSL Int. 23 183 PSL Int. 24 184 PSL Int. 25 185 PSL Int. 26 186 PSL Int. 27 187 PSL Int. 28 188 PSL Int. 29 189 PSL Int. 30 190 PSL Int. 31 191 PSL Int. 32 192 PSL Int. 33 193 PSL Int. 34 194 PSL Int. 35 195 PSL Int. 36 196 PSL Int. 37 197 PSL Int. 38 198 PSL Int. 39 199 PSL Int. 40 200 PSL Int. 41 201 PSL Int. 42 202 PSL Int. 43 203 PSL Int. 44 204 PSL Int. 45 205 PSL Int. 46 206 PSL Int. 47 207 PSL Int. 48 208 PSL Int. 49 209 PSL Int. 50 210 PSL Int. 51 211 PSL Int. 52 * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * PSL Internal Node 1 PSL Internal Node 2 PSL Internal Node 3 PSL Internal Node 4 PSL Internal Node 5 PSL Internal Node 6 PSL Internal Node 7 PSL Internal Node 8 PSL Internal Node 9 PSL Internal Node 10 PSL Internal Node 11 PSL Internal Node 12 PSL Internal Node 13 PSL Internal Node 14 PSL Internal Node 15 PSL Internal Node 16 PSL Internal Node 17 PSL Internal Node 18 PSL Internal Node 19 PSL Internal Node 20 PSL Internal Node 21 PSL Internal Node 22 PSL Internal Node 23 PSL Internal Node 24 PSL Internal Node 25 PSL Internal Node 26 PSL Internal Node 27 PSL Internal Node 28 PSL Internal Node 29 PSL Internal Node 30 PSL Internal Node 31 PSL Internal Node 32 PSL Internal Node 33 PSL Internal Node 34 PSL Internal Node 35 PSL Internal Node 36 PSL Internal Node 37 PSL Internal Node 38 PSL Internal Node 39 PSL Internal Node 40 PSL Internal Node 41 PSL Internal Node 42 PSL Internal Node 43 PSL Internal Node 44 PSL Internal Node 45 PSL Internal Node 46 PSL Internal Node 47 PSL Internal Node 48 PSL Internal Node 49 PSL Internal Node 50 PSL Internal Node 51 PSL Internal Node 52
928 929 930 931 932 933 934 935 936 937 938 939 940 941 942 943 944 945 946 947 948 949 950 951 952 953 954 955 956 957 958 959 960 961 962 963 964 965 966 967 968 969 970 971 972 973 974 975 976 977 978 979

INF NO. GI 1 * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * Model Number 2 * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * 3 * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * 4 5 6
P341/EN GC/D22 Page 100/158
ASDU TYPE
COT
FUN 229 229 229 229 229 229 229 229 229 229 229 229 229 229 229 229 229 229 229 229 229 229 229 229 229 229 229 229 229 229 229 229 229 229 229 229 229 229 229 229 229 229 229
Description
Interpretation PSL Internal Node 53 PSL Internal Node 54 PSL Internal Node 55 PSL Internal Node 56 PSL Internal Node 57 PSL Internal Node 58 PSL Internal Node 59 PSL Internal Node 60 PSL Internal Node 61 PSL Internal Node 62 PSL Internal Node 63 PSL Internal Node 64 PSL Internal Node 65 PSL Internal Node 66 PSL Internal Node 67 PSL Internal Node 68 PSL Internal Node 69 PSL Internal Node 70 PSL Internal Node 71 PSL Internal Node 72 PSL Internal Node 73 PSL Internal Node 74 PSL Internal Node 75 PSL Internal Node 76 PSL Internal Node 77 PSL Internal Node 78 PSL Internal Node 79 PSL Internal Node 80 PSL Internal Node 81 PSL Internal Node 82 PSL Internal Node 83 PSL Internal Node 84 PSL Internal Node 85 PSL Internal Node 86 PSL Internal Node 87 PSL Internal Node 88 PSL Internal Node 89 PSL Internal Node 90 PSL Internal Node 91 PSL Internal Node 92 PSL Internal Node 93 PSL Internal Node 94 PSL Internal Node 95
DDB Ordinal 980 981 982 983 984 985 986 987 988 989 990 991 992 993 994 995 996 997 998 999 1000 1001 1002 1003 1004 1005 1006 1007 1008 1009 1010 1011 1012 1013 1014 1015 1016 1017 1018 1019 1020 1021 1022
212 PSL Int. 53 213 PSL Int. 54 214 PSL Int. 55 215 PSL Int. 56 216 PSL Int. 57 217 PSL Int. 58 218 PSL Int. 59 219 PSL Int. 60 220 PSL Int. 61 221 PSL Int. 62 222 PSL Int. 63 223 PSL Int. 64 224 PSL Int. 65 225 PSL Int. 66 226 PSL Int. 67 227 PSL Int. 68 228 PSL Int. 69 229 PSL Int. 70 230 PSL Int. 71 231 PSL Int. 72 232 PSL Int. 73 233 PSL Int. 74 234 PSL Int. 75 235 PSL Int. 76 236 PSL Int. 77 237 PSL Int. 78 238 PSL Int. 79 239 PSL Int. 80 240 PSL Int. 81 241 PSL Int. 82 242 PSL Int. 83 243 PSL Int. 84 244 PSL Int. 85 245 PSL Int. 86 246 PSL Int. 87 247 PSL Int. 88 248 PSL Int. 89 249 PSL Int. 90 250 PSL Int. 91 251 PSL Int. 92 252 PSL Int. 93 253 PSL Int. 94 254 PSL Int. 95 255 Battery Fail
1,7
229
Private Range Information Numbers in Control Direction ASDU TYPE 20 20 20 20 20 20 20 20 20 20 20 COT 20 20 20 20 20 20 20 20 20 20 20 FUN 229 229 229 229 229 229 229 229 229 229 229 INF NO. 64 65 66 67 68 69 70 71 72 73 74 Description Control Input 1 Control Input 2 Control Input 3 Control Input 4 Control Input 5 Control Input 6 Control Input 7 Control Input 8 Control Input 9 Control Input 10 Control Input 11 GI 1 * * * * * * * * * * * Model Number 2 * * * * * * * * * * * 3 * * * * * * * * * * * 4 5 6 Interpretation Control Input Control Input Control Input Control Input Control Input Control Input Control Input Control Input Control Input Control Input Control Input DDB Ordinal 832 833 834 835 836 837 838 839 840 841 842

INF NO. 75 76 77 78 79 80 81 82 83 84 85 86 87 88 89 90 91 92 93 94 95 GI 1 * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * Model Number 2 * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * 3 * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * 4 5 6
P341/EN GC/D22 Page 101/158
ASDU TYPE 20 20 20 20 20 20 20 20 20 20 20 20 20 20 20 20 20 20 20 20 20
COT 20 20 20 20 20 20 20 20 20 20 20 20 20 20 20 20 20 20 20 20 20
FUN 229 229 229 229 229 229 229 229 229 229 229 229 229 229 229 229 229 229 229 229 229
Description Control Input 12 Control Input 13 Control Input 14 Control Input 15 Control Input 16 Control Input 17 Control Input 18 Control Input 19 Control Input 20 Control Input 21 Control Input 22 Control Input 23 Control Input 24 Control Input 25 Control Input 26 Control Input 27 Control Input 28 Control Input 29 Control Input 30 Control Input 31 Control Input 32
Interpretation Control Input Control Input Control Input Control Input Control Input Control Input Control Input Control Input Control Input Control Input Control Input Control Input Control Input Control Input Control Input Control Input Control Input Control Input Control Input Control Input Control Input
DDB Ordinal 843 844 845 846 847 848 849 850 851 852 853 854 855 856 857 858 859 860 861 862 863
Disturbance Data Actual Channel Identifiers ACC 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 64 65 66 67 245 Standard Global IL1 IL2 IL3 IN VL1E VL2E VL3E VEN Interpretation Null Channel IA IB IC IN VAN VBN VCN VN IN Sensitive IA-2 IB-2 IC-2 SampleTime
P341/EN GC/D22
Page 102/158
Digital Data Bus DDB No. 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 Source Output Condition Output Condition Output Condition Output Condition Output Condition Output Condition Output Condition Output Condition Output Condition Output Condition Output Condition Output Condition Output Condition Output Condition Output Condition Output Condition Output Condition Output Condition Output Condition Output Condition Output Condition Output Condition Output Condition Output Condition Output Condition Output Condition Output Condition Output Condition Output Condition Output Condition Output Condition Output Condition OPTO OPTO OPTO OPTO OPTO OPTO OPTO OPTO OPTO OPTO OPTO OPTO OPTO OPTO OPTO OPTO Output Relay 1 Output Relay 2 Output Relay 3 Output Relay 4 Output Relay 5 Output Relay 6 Output Relay 7 Output Relay 8 Output Relay 9 Output Relay 10 Output Relay 11 Output Relay 12 Output Relay 13 Output Relay 14 Output Relay 15 Output Relay 16 Output Relay 17 Output Relay 18 Output Relay 19 Output Relay 20 Output Relay 21 Output Relay 22 Output Relay 23 Output Relay 24 Output Relay 25 Output Relay 26 Output Relay 27 Output Relay 28 Output Relay 29 Output Relay 30 Output Relay 31 Output Relay 32 Opto Input 1 Opto Input 2 Opto Input 3 Opto Input 4 Opto Input 5 Opto Input 6 Opto Input 7 Opto Input 8 Opto Input 9 Opto Input 10 Opto Input 11 Opto Input 12 Opto Input 13 Opto Input 14 Opto Input 15 Opto Input 16 Description English Text 0123456789ABCDEF see 4B01 see 4B02 see 4B03 see 4B04 see 4B05 see 4B06 see 4B07 see 4B08 see 4B09 see 4B0A see 4B0B see 4B0C see 4B0D see 4B0E see 4B0F see 4B10 see 4B11 see 4B12 see 4B13 see 4B14 see 4B15 see 4B16 see 4B17 see 4B18 see 4B19 see 4B1A see 4B1B see 4B1C see 4B1D see 4B1E see 4B1F see 4B20 see 4A01 see 4A02 see 4A03 see 4A04 see 4A05 see 4A06 see 4A07 see 4A08 see 4A09 see 4A0A see 4A0B see 4A0C see 4A0D see 4A0E see 4A0F see 4A10 * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * P341 P342 P343 * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * *
P341/EN GC/D22
Page 103/158
English Text 0123456789ABCDEF see 4A11 see 4A12 see 4A13 see 4A14 see 4A15 see 4A16 see 4A17 see 4A18 see 4A19 see 4A1A see 4A1B see 4A1C see 4A1D see 4A1E see 4A1F see 4A20 LED 1 LED 2 LED 3 LED 4 LED 5 LED 6 LED 7 LED 8 * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * *
DDB No. 48 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 60 61 62 63 64 65 66 67 68 69 70 71 72 73 74 75 76 77 78 79 80 81 82 83 84 85 86 87 88 89 90 91 92 93 94 95 96 97 OPTO OPTO OPTO OPTO OPTO OPTO OPTO OPTO OPTO OPTO OPTO OPTO OPTO OPTO OPTO OPTO
Source Opto Input 17 Opto Input 18 Opto Input 19 Opto Input 20 Opto Input 21 Opto Input 22 Opto Input 23 Opto Input 24 Opto Input 25 Opto Input 26 Opto Input 27 Opto Input 28 Opto Input 29 Opto Input 30 Opto Input 31 Opto Input 32
Description
P341 P342 P343 * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * *
Output Condition Output Condition Output Condition Output Condition Output Condition Output Condition Output Condition Output Condition UNUSED UNUSED UNUSED UNUSED UNUSED UNUSED UNUSED UNUSED PSL PSL PSL PSL PSL PSL PSL PSL UNUSED UNUSED UNUSED UNUSED UNUSED UNUSED UNUSED UNUSED UNUSED UNUSED
Programmable LED 1 Programmable LED 2 Programmable LED 3 Programmable LED 4 Programmable LED 5 Programmable LED 6 Programmable LED 7 Programmable LED 8
Input to LED Output Condition Input to LED Output Condition Input to LED Output Condition Input to LED Output Condition Input to LED Output Condition Input to LED Output Condition Input to LED Output Condition Input to LED Output Condition
LED Cond IN 1 LED Cond IN 2 LED Cond IN 3 LED Cond IN 4 LED Cond IN 5 LED Cond IN 6 LED Cond IN 7 LED Cond IN 8
* * * * * * * *
* * * * * * * *
* * * * * * * *
P341/EN GC/D22
Page 104/158
English Text 0123456789ABCDEF
DDB No. 98 99 100 101 102 103 104 105 106 107 108 109 110 111 112 113 114 115 116 117 118 119 120 121 122 123 124 125 126 127 128 129 130 131 132 133 134 135 136 137 138 139 140 141 142 143 144 145 146 147 UNUSED UNUSED UNUSED UNUSED UNUSED UNUSED UNUSED UNUSED UNUSED UNUSED UNUSED UNUSED UNUSED UNUSED UNUSED UNUSED UNUSED UNUSED UNUSED UNUSED UNUSED UNUSED UNUSED UNUSED UNUSED UNUSED UNUSED UNUSED UNUSED UNUSED UNUSED UNUSED UNUSED UNUSED UNUSED UNUSED UNUSED UNUSED UNUSED UNUSED UNUSED UNUSED UNUSED UNUSED UNUSED UNUSED UNUSED UNUSED UNUSED UNUSED
Source
Description
P341 P342 P343
P341/EN GC/D22
Page 105/158
DDB No. 148 149 150 151 152 153 154 155 156 157 158 159 160 161 162 163 164 165 166 167 168 169 170 171 172 173 174 175 176 177 178 179 180 181 182 183 184 185 186 187 188 189 190 191 192 193 194 195 196 197 UNUSED UNUSED UNUSED UNUSED UNUSED UNUSED UNUSED UNUSED UNUSED UNUSED UNUSED UNUSED PSL PSL PSL PSL PSL PSL PSL PSL PSL PSL PSL PSL PSL PSL PSL PSL PSL PSL PSL PSL PSL PSL PSL PSL PSL PSL PSL PSL PSL PSL PSL PSL UNUSED UNUSED UNUSED UNUSED UNUSED UNUSED
Source
Description
P341 P342 P343
Input to Relay Output Condition Input to Relay Output Condition Input to Relay Output Condition Input to Relay Output Condition Input to Relay Output Condition Input to Relay Output Condition Input to Relay Output Condition Input to Relay Output Condition Input to Relay Output Condition Input to Relay Output Condition Input to Relay Output Condition Input to Relay Output Condition Input to Relay Output Condition Input to Relay Output Condition Input to Relay Output Condition Input to Relay Output Condition Input to Relay Output Condition Input to Relay Output Condition Input to Relay Output Condition Input to Relay Output Condition Input to Relay Output Condition Input to Relay Output Condition Input to Relay Output Condition Input to Relay Output Condition Input to Relay Output Condition Input to Relay Output Condition Input to Relay Output Condition Input to Relay Output Condition Input to Relay Output Condition Input to Relay Output Condition Input to Relay Output Condition Input to Relay Output Condition
Relay Cond 1 Relay Cond 2 Any Trip Relay Cond 4 Relay Cond 5 Relay Cond 6 Relay Cond 7 Relay Cond 8 Relay Cond 9 Relay Cond 10 Relay Cond 11 Relay Cond 12 Relay Cond 13 Relay Cond 14 Relay Cond 15 Relay Cond 16 Relay Cond 17 Relay Cond 18 Relay Cond 19 Relay Cond 20 Relay Cond 21 Relay Cond 22 Relay Cond 23 Relay Cond 24 Relay Cond 25 Relay Cond 26 Relay Cond 27 Relay Cond 28 Relay Cond 29 Relay Cond 30 Relay Cond 31 Relay Cond 32
* * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * *
* * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * *
* * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * *
P341/EN GC/D22
Page 106/158
DDB No. 198 199 200 201 202 203 204 205 206 207 208 209 210 211 212 213 214 215 216 217 218 219 220 221 222 223 224 225 226 227 228 229 230 231 232 233 234 235 236 237 238 239 240 241 242 243 244 245 246 247 UNUSED UNUSED UNUSED UNUSED UNUSED UNUSED UNUSED UNUSED UNUSED UNUSED UNUSED UNUSED UNUSED UNUSED UNUSED UNUSED UNUSED UNUSED UNUSED UNUSED UNUSED UNUSED UNUSED UNUSED UNUSED UNUSED PSL PSL PSL PSL PSL PSL PSL PSL UNUSED UNUSED UNUSED UNUSED UNUSED UNUSED UNUSED UNUSED UNUSED UNUSED UNUSED UNUSED UNUSED UNUSED UNUSED UNUSED
Source
Description
P341 P342 P343
Input to Auxiliary Timer 1 Input to Auxiliary Timer 2 Input to Auxiliary Timer 3 Input to Auxiliary Timer 4 Input to Auxiliary Timer 5 Input to Auxiliary Timer 6 Input to Auxiliary Timer 7 Input to Auxiliary Timer 8
Timer in 1 Timer in 2 Timer in 3 Timer in 4 Timer in 5 Timer in 6 Timer in 7 Timer in 8
* * * * * * * *
* * * * * * * *
* * * * * * * *
P341/EN GC/D22
Page 107/158
DDB No. 248 249 250 251 252 253 254 255 256 257 258 259 260 261 262 263 264 265 266 267 268 269 270 271 272 273 274 275 276 277 278 279 280 281 282 283 284 285 286 287 288 289 290 291 292 293 294 295 296 297 UNUSED UNUSED UNUSED UNUSED UNUSED UNUSED UNUSED UNUSED
Source
Description
P341 P342 P343
Auxiliary Timer Auxiliary Timer Auxiliary Timer Auxiliary Timer Auxiliary Timer Auxiliary Timer Auxiliary Timer Auxiliary Timer UNUSED UNUSED UNUSED UNUSED UNUSED UNUSED UNUSED UNUSED UNUSED UNUSED UNUSED UNUSED UNUSED UNUSED UNUSED UNUSED UNUSED UNUSED UNUSED UNUSED UNUSED UNUSED UNUSED UNUSED PSL UNUSED Group Selection Commission Test VT Supervision CT Supervision Breaker Fail CB Monitoring CB Monitoring CB Monitoring
Output from Auxiliary Timer 1 Output from Auxiliary Timer 2 Output from Auxiliary Timer 3 Output from Auxiliary Timer 4 Output from Auxiliary Timer 5 Output from Auxiliary Timer 6 Output from Auxiliary Timer 7 Output from Auxiliary Timer 8
Timer out 1 Timer out 2 Timer out 3 Timer out 4 Timer out 5 Timer out 6 Timer out 7 Timer out 8
* * * * * * * *
* * * * * * * *
* * * * * * * *
Trigger for Fault Recorder Setting Group via opto invalid Alarm Test Mode Enabled Alarm VTS Indication CTS Indication Breaker Fail Any Trip Broken Current Maintenance Alarm Broken Current Lockout Alarm No of CB Ops Maintenance Alarm
Fault REC TRIG SG-opto Invalid Prot'n Disabled VT Fail Alarm CT Fail Alarm CB Fail Alarm I^ Maint Alarm I^ Lockout Alarm CB Ops Maint
* * * * * * * * *
* * * * * * * * *
* * * * * * * * *
P341/EN GC/D22
Page 108/158
English Text 0123456789ABCDEF CB Ops Lockout CB Op Time Maint CB Op Time Lock Fault Freq Lock CB Status Alarm Man CB Trip Fail Man CB Cls Fail Man CB Unhealthy F out of Range NPS Alarm Thermal Alarm V/Hz Alarm Field Fail Alarm RTD Thermal Alm RTD Open Cct RTD short Cct RTD Data Error RTD Board Fail Freq Prot Alm Voltage Prot Alm User Alarm 1 User Alarm 2 User Alarm 3 * * * * * *
DDB No. 298 299 300 301 302 303 304 305 306 306 307 308 309 310 311 312 313 314 315 316 317 318 319 320 321 322 323 324 325 326 327 328 329 330 331 332 333 334 335 336 337 338 339 340 341 342 343 344 345 346
Source CB Monitoring CB Monitoring CB Monitoring CB Monitoring CB Status CB Control CB Control CB Control Frequency Tracking NPS Thermal Thermal Overload Overfluxing Field Failure RTD Thermal RTD Thermal RTD Thermal RTD Thermal RTD Thermal PSL PSL PSL PSL PSL UNUSED UNUSED UNUSED UNUSED UNUSED UNUSED UNUSED UNUSED UNUSED UNUSED UNUSED UNUSED UNUSED UNUSED UNUSED UNUSED UNUSED UNUSED UNUSED UNUSED UNUSED UNUSED UNUSED UNUSED UNUSED UNUSED UNUSED
Description No of CB Ops Maintenance Lockout Excessive CB Op Time Maintenance Alarm Excessive CB Op Time Lockout Alarm Excessive Fault Frequency Lockout Alarm CB Status Alarm (Invalid CB auxilliary contacts) CB Failed to Trip Alarm CB Failed to Close Alarm CB Unhealthy on Control Close Alarm Frequency out of range Negative Phase Sequence Alarm Thermal Overload Alarm Volts Per Hz Alarm Field failure Alarm RTD thermal Alarm RTD open circuit failure RTD short circuit failure RTD data inconsistency error RTD Board failure Frequency protection alarm Voltage protection alarm User settable alarm 1 User settable alarm 2 User settable alarm 3
P341 P342 P343 * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * *
P341/EN GC/D22
Page 109/158
DDB No. 347 348 349 350 351 352 353 354 355 356 357 358 359 360 361 362 363 364 365 366 367 368 369 370 371 372 373 374 375 376 377 378 379 380 381 382 383 384 385 386 387 388 389 390 391 392 393 394 395 396 UNUSED UNUSED UNUSED UNUSED UNUSED PSL PSL PSL PSL PSL PSL PSL PSL PSL PSL PSL PSL PSL PSL PSL PSL PSL PSL PSL PSL PSL PSL PSL PSL PSL PSL PSL PSL PSL PSL PSL PSL PSL PSL PSL PSL PSL PSL PSL PSL PSL UNUSED UNUSED UNUSED UNUSED
Source
Description
P341 P342 P343
Block Voltage Dependent time delay Block Under Impedance time delay Block Phase O/C Stage 1 time delay Block Phase Overcurrent Stage 2 time delay Block Phase Overcurrent Stage 3 time delay Block Phase Overcurrent Stage 4 time delay Block Earth Fault Stage 1 time delay Block Earth Fault Stage 2 time delay Block Earth Fault Stage 3 time delay Block Earth Fault Stage 4 time delay Block SEF Stage 1 time delay Block SEF Stage 2 time delay Block SEF Stage 3 time delay Block SEF Stage 4 time delay Logic Input Trip CB Logic Input Close CB Block Residual Overvoltage Stage 1 time delay Block Residual Overvoltage Stage 2 time delay Block Phase Undervoltage Stage 1 time delay Block Phase Undervoltage Stage 2 time delay Block Phase Overvoltage Stage 1 time delay Block Phase Overvoltage Stage 4 time delay Block Underfrequency Stage 1 Timer Block Underfrequency Stage 2 Timer Block Underfrequency Stage 3 Timer Block Underfrequency Stage 4 Timer Block Overfrequency Stage 1 Timer Block Overfrequency Stage 2 Timer External Trip 3ph 52-A (3 phase) 52-B (3 phase) CB Healthy MCB/VTS opto Reset Manual CB Close Time Delay Reset Latched Relays & LEDs Reset Lockout Opto Input Reset CB Maintenance Values Reset NPS Thermal State Reset Overload Thermal State Blocks most IEC60870-5-103 commands Blocks IEC60870-5-103 'General Command'.
VDepOC Timer Blk UnderZ Timer Blk I>1 Timer Block I>2 Timer Block I>3 Timer Block I>4 Timer Block IN>1 Timer Blk IN>2 Timer Blk IN>3 Timer Blk IN>4 Timer Blk ISEF>1 Timer Blk ISEF>2 Timer Blk ISEF>3 Timer Blk ISEF>4 Timer Blk Init Trip CB Init Close CB VN>1 Timer Blk VN>2 Timer Blk V<1 Timer Block V<2 Timer Block V>1 Timer Block V>2 Timer Block F<1 timer Block F<2 Timer Block F<3 Timer Block F<4 Timer Block F>1 Timer Block F>2 Timer Block Ext. Trip 3ph CB Aux 3ph(52-A) CB Aux 3ph(52-B) CB Healthy MCB/VTS Reset Close Dly Reset Relays/LED Reset Lockout Reset All Values Reset I2 Thermal Reset ThermalO/L Monitor Blocked Command Blocked * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * *
* * * *
* * * *
* *
* *
* * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * *
* * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * *
P341/EN GC/D22
Page 110/158
DDB No. 397 398 399 400 401 402 403 404 405 406 407 408 409 410 411 412 413 414 415 416 417 418 419 420 421 422 423 424 425 426 427 428 429 430 431 432 433 434 435 436 437 438 439 440 440 441 442 443 444 445 UNUSED UNUSED UNUSED UNUSED UNUSED UNUSED UNUSED UNUSED UNUSED UNUSED UNUSED UNUSED UNUSED UNUSED UNUSED UNUSED UNUSED UNUSED PSL
Source
Description
P341 P342 P343
Input To Initiate Test Mode 100% Stator Earth Fault Trip Dead machine protection Trip Generator Differential trip 3ph Generator Differential Trip A Generator Differential Trip B Generator Differential Trip C Field failure Stage 1 start Field failure Stage 2 start Negative Phase Sequence Trip Voltage Dependent O/C Trip 3ph Voltage Dependent O/C Trip A Voltage Dependent O/C Trip B Voltage Dependent O/C Trip C Volts per Hz Trip RTD 1 TRIP RTD 2 TRIP RTD 3 TRIP RTD 4 TRIP RTD 5 TRIP RTD 6 TRIP RTD 7 TRIP RTD 8 TRIP RTD 9 TRIP RTD 10 TRIP Rate of change of frequency Trip Any RTD Trip Voltage vector shift trip 1st Stage EF Trip 2nd Stage EF Trip 3rd Stage EF Trip 4th Stage EF Trip
Test Mode 100% ST EF Trip DeadMachine Trip Gen Diff Trip Gen Diff Trip A Gen Diff Trip B Gen Diff Trip C Field Fail1 Trip Field Fail2 Trip NPS Trip V Dep OC Trip V Dep OC Trip A V Dep OC Trip B V Dep OC Trip C V/Hz Trip RTD 1 Trip RTD 2 Trip RTD 3 Trip RTD 4 Trip RTD 5 Trip RTD 6 Trip RTD 7 Trip RTD 8 Trip RTD 9 Trip RTD 10 Trip Any RTD Trip df/dt Trip V Shift Trip IN>1 Trip IN>2 Trip IN>3 Trip IN>4 Trip
* * * * * * *
100% Stator Earth Fault Dead Machine Generator Differential Generator Differential Generator Differential Generator Differential Field Failure Field Failure NPS Thermal System Backup System Backup System Backup System Backup Overfluxing RTD Thermal RTD Thermal RTD Thermal RTD Thermal RTD Thermal RTD Thermal RTD Thermal RTD Thermal RTD Thermal RTD Thermal df/ft RTD Thermal Voltage Vector Shift Earth Fault Earth Fault Earth Fault Earth Fault
* * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * *
* * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * *
* *
P341/EN GC/D22
Page 111/158
English Text 0123456789ABCDEF IREF> Trip ISEF>1 Trip ISEF>2 Trip ISEF>3 Trip ISEF>4 Trip VN>1 Trip VN>2 Trip V<1 Trip V<1 Trip A/AB V<1 Trip B/BC V<1 Trip C/CA V<2 Trip V<2 Trip A/AB V<2 Trip B/BC V<2 Trip C/CA V>1 Trip V>1 Trip A/AB V>1 Trip B/BC V>1 Trip C/CA V>2 Trip V>2 Trip A/AB V>2 Trip B/BC V>2 Trip C/CA F<1 Trip F<2 Trip F<3 Trip F<4 Trip F>1 Trip F>2 Trip Power1 Trip Power2 Trip I>1 Trip I>1 Trip A I>1 Trip B I>1 Trip C I>2 Trip I>2 Trip A I>2 Trip B I>2 Trip C I>3 Trip I>3 Trip A I>3 Trip B I>3 Trip C I>4 Trip I>4 Trip A I>4 Trip B I>4 Trip C Bfail1 Trip 3ph Bfail2 Trip 3ph SPower1 Trip
DDB No. 446 447 448 449 450 451 452 453 454 455 456 457 458 459 460 461 462 463 464 465 466 467 468 469 470 471 472 473 474 475 476 477 478 479 480 481 482 483 484 485 486 487 488 489 490 491 492 493 494 495
Source Restricted Earth Fault Sensitive Earth Fault Sensitive Earth Fault Sensitive Earth Fault Sensitive Earth Fault Neutral Displacement Neutral Displacement Under Voltage Under Voltage Under Voltage Under Voltage Under Voltage Under Voltage Under Voltage Under Voltage Over Voltage Over Voltage Over Voltage Over Voltage Over Voltage Over Voltage Over Voltage Over Voltage Under Frequency Under Frequency Under Frequency Under Frequency Over Frequency Over Frequency Power Power Over Current Over Current Over Current Over Current Over Current Over Current Over Current Over Current Over Current Over Current Over Current Over Current Over Current Over Current Over Current Over Current Breaker failure Breaker failure Sensitive Power REF Trip 1st Stage SEF Trip 2nd Stage SEF Trip 3rd Stage SEF Trip 4th Stage SEF Trip
Description
P341 P342 P343 * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * *
1st Stage Residual O/V Trip 2nd Stage Residual O/V Trip 1st Stage Phase U/V Trip 3ph 1st Stage Phase U/V Trip A/AB 1st Stage Phase U/V Trip B/BC 1st Stage Phase U/V Trip C/CA 2nd Stage Phase U/V Trip 3ph 2nd Stage Phase U/V Trip A/AB 2nd Stage Phase U/V Trip B/BC 2nd Stage Phase U/V Trip C/CA 1st Stage Phase O/V Trip 3ph 1st Stage Phase O/V Trip A/AB 1st Stage Phase O/V Trip B/BC 1st Stage Phase O/V Trip C/CA 2nd Stage Phase O/V Trip 3ph 2nd Stage Phase O/V Trip A/AB 2nd Stage Phase O/V Trip B/BC 2nd Stage Phase O/V Trip C/CA Under frequency Stage 1 trip Under frequency Stage 2 trip Under frequency Stage 3 trip Under frequency Stage 4 trip Over frequency Stage 1 Trip Over frequency Stage 2 Trip Power stage 1 trip Power stage 2 trip 1st Stage O/C Trip 3ph 1st Stage O/C Trip A 1st Stage O/C Trip B 1st Stage O/C Trip C 2nd Stage O/C Trip 3ph 2nd Stage O/C Trip A 2nd Stage O/C Trip B 2nd Stage O/C Trip C 3rd Stage O/C Trip 3ph 3rd Stage O/C Trip A 3rd Stage O/C Trip B 3rd Stage O/C Trip C 4th Stage O/C Trip 3ph 4th Stage O/C Trip A 4th Stage O/C Trip B 4th Stage O/C Trip C tBF1 Trip 3Ph tBF2 Trip 3Ph Sensitive A Phase Power Stage 1 Trip
P341/EN GC/D22
Page 112/158
English Text 0123456789ABCDEF SPower2 Trip PSlipz Z1 Trip PSlipz Z2 Trip Thermal O/L Trip Z<1 Trip Z<1 Trip A Z<1 Trip B Z<1 Trip C Z<2 Trip Z<2 Trip A Z<2 Trip B Z<2 Trip C * * * * * * * * * *
DDB No. 496 497 498 499 500 501 502 503 504 505 506 507 508 509 510 511 512 513 514 515 516 517 518 519 520 521 522 523 524 525 526 527 528 529 530 531 532 533 534 535 536 537 538 539 540 541 542 543 544 545
Source Sensitive Power Z based Pole Slipping Z based Pole Slipping Thermal Overload System Backup System Backup System Backup System Backup System Backup System Backup System Backup System Backup UNUSED UNUSED UNUSED UNUSED UNUSED UNUSED UNUSED UNUSED UNUSED UNUSED UNUSED UNUSED UNUSED UNUSED UNUSED UNUSED UNUSED UNUSED UNUSED UNUSED UNUSED UNUSED UNUSED UNUSED UNUSED UNUSED UNUSED UNUSED UNUSED UNUSED UNUSED UNUSED UNUSED UNUSED UNUSED UNUSED UNUSED UNUSED
Description Sensitive A Phase Power Stage 2 Trip Pole Slip (Impedance) Zone1 Trip Pole Slip (Impedance) Zone2 Trip Thermal Overload Trip Under Impedance Stage 1 Trip 3 Ph Under Impedance Stage 1 Trip A Under Impedance Stage 1 Trip B Under Impedance Stage 1 Trip C Under Impedance Stage 2 Trip 3 Ph Under Impedance Stage 2 Trip A Under Impedance Stage 2 Trip B Under Impedance Stage 2 Trip C
P341 P342 P343 * * * * * * * * * * * * * *
P341/EN GC/D22
Page 113/158
DDB No. 546 547 548 549 550 551 552 553 554 555 556 557 558 559 560 561 562 563 564 565 566 567 568 569 570 571 572 573 574 575 576 577 578 579 580 581 582 583 584 585 586 587 588 589 590 591 592 593 594 595 UNUSED UNUSED UNUSED UNUSED UNUSED UNUSED UNUSED UNUSED UNUSED UNUSED UNUSED UNUSED UNUSED UNUSED UNUSED UNUSED UNUSED UNUSED UNUSED UNUSED UNUSED UNUSED UNUSED UNUSED UNUSED UNUSED UNUSED UNUSED UNUSED UNUSED
Source
Description
P341 P342 P343
All protection Neutral displacement Neutral displacement Under Voltage Under Voltage Under Voltage Under Voltage Under Voltage Under Voltage Under Voltage Under Voltage Over Voltage Over Voltage Over Voltage Over Voltage Over Voltage Over Voltage Over Voltage Over Voltage Power
Any Start 1st Stage Residual O/V Start 2nd Stage Residual O/V Start 1st Stage Phase U/V Start 3ph 1st Stage Phase U/V Start A/AB 1st Stage Phase U/V Start B/BC 1st Stage Phase U/V Start C/CA 2nd Stage Phase U/V Start 3ph 2nd Stage Phase U/V Start A/AB 2nd Stage Phase U/V Start B/BC 2nd Stage Phase U/V Start C/CA 1st Stage Phase O/V Start 3ph 1st Stage Phase O/V Start A/AB 1st Stage Phase O/V Start B/BC 1st Stage Phase O/V Start C/CA 2nd Stage Phase O/V Start 3ph 2nd Stage Phase O/V Start A/AB 2nd Stage Phase O/V Start B/BC 2nd Stage Phase O/V Start C/CA Power Stage 1 start
Any Start VN>1 Start VN>2 Start V<1 Start V<1 Start A/AB V<1 Start B/BC V<1 Start C/CA V<2 Start V<2 Start A/AB V<2 Start B/BC V<2 Start C/CA V>1 Start V>1 Start A/AB V>1 Start B/BC V>1 Start C/CA V>2 Start V>2 Start A/AB V>2 Start B/BC V>2 Start C/CA Power1 Start
* * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * *
* * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * *
* * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * *
P341/EN GC/D22
Page 114/158
English Text 0123456789ABCDEF Power2 Start I>1 Start I>1 Start A I>1 Start B I>1 Start C I>2 Start I>2 Start A I>2 Start B I>2 Start C I>3 Start I>3 Start A I>3 Start B I>3 Start C I>4 Start I>4 Start A I>4 Start B I>4 Start C IN>1 Start IN>2 Start IN>3 Start IN>4 Start ISEF>1 Start ISEF>2 Start ISEF>3 Start ISEF>4 Start 100% ST EF Start F<1 Start F<2 Start F<3 Start F<4 Start F>1 Start F>2 Start I> BlockStart IN/SEF>Blk Start df/dt Start IA< Start IB< Start IC< Start ISEF< Start IN< Start V/Hz Start FFail1 Start FFail2 Start V Dep OC Start V Dep OC Start A V Dep OC Start B V Dep OC Start C SPower1 Start SPower2 Start PSlipz Z1 Start * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * *
DDB No. 596 597 598 599 600 601 602 603 604 605 606 607 608 609 610 611 612 613 614 615 616 617 618 619 620 621 622 623 624 625 626 627 628 629 630 631 632 633 634 635 636 637 638 639 640 641 642 643 644 645 Power
Source Power stage 1 start
Description
P341 P342 P343 * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * *
Over Current Over Current Over Current Over Current Over Current Over Current Over Current Over Current Over Current Over Current Over Current Over Current Over Current Over Current Over Current Over Current Earth Fault Earth Fault Earth Fault Earth Fault Sensitive Earth Fault Sensitive Earth Fault Sensitive Earth Fault Sensitive Earth Fault 100% Stator Earth Fault Under Frequency Under Frequency Under Frequency Under Frequency Over Frequency Over Frequency Over Current Over Current df/dt Under Current Under Current Under Current Under Current Under Current Overfluxing Field Failure Field Failure System Backup System Backup System Backup System Backup Sensitive Power Sensitive Power Z based Pole Slipping
1st Stage O/C Start 3ph 1st Stage O/C Start A 1st Stage O/C Start B 1st Stage O/C Start C 2nd Stage O/C Start 3ph 2nd Stage O/C Start A 2nd Stage O/C Start B 2nd Stage O/C Start C 3rd Stage O/C Start 3ph 3rd Stage O/C Start A 3rd Stage O/C Start B 3rd Stage O/C Start C 4th Stage O/C Start 3ph 4th Stage O/C Start A 4th Stage O/C Start B 4th Stage O/C Start C 1st Stage EF Start 2nd Stage EF Start 3rd Stage EF Start 4th Stage EF Start 1st Stage SEF Start 2nd Stage SEF Start 3rd Stage SEF Start 4th Stage SEF Start 100% Stator Earth Fault Start Under frequency Stage 1 START Under frequency Stage 2 START Under frequency Stage 3 START Under frequency Stage 4 START Over frequency Stage 1 START Over frequency Stage 2 START I> Blocked O/C Start, inhibited by CB Fail IN/ISEF> Blocked O/C Start, inhibited by CB Fail Rate of change of frequency Start IA< operate IB< operate IC< operate ISEF< operate IN< operate Volts per Hz Start Field failure Stage 1 start Field failure Stage 2 start Voltage Dependent Overcurrent Start Voltage Dependent Overcurrent Start A Voltage Dependent Overcurrent Start B Voltage Dependent Overcurrent Start C Sensitive A Phase Power Stage 1 Start Sensitive A Phase Power Stage 2 Start Pole Slip (Impedance) Zone1 Start
P341/EN GC/D22
Page 115/158
English Text 0123456789ABCDEF PSlipz Z2 Start PSlipz LensStart PSlipz BlindStrt PSlipz ReactStrt Z<1 Start Z<1 Start A Z<1 Start B Z<1 Start C Z<2 Start Z<2 Start A Z<2 Start B Z<2 Start C * * * * * * * *
DDB No. 646 647 648 649 650 651 652 653 654 655 656 657 658 659 660 661 662 663 664 665 666 667 668 669 670 671 672 673 674 675 676 677 678 679 680 681 682 683 684 685 686 687 688 689 690 691 692 693 694 695
Source Z based Pole Slipping Z based Pole Slipping Z based Pole Slipping Z based Pole Slipping System Backup System Backup System Backup System Backup System Backup System Backup System Backup System Backup UNUSED UNUSED UNUSED UNUSED UNUSED UNUSED UNUSED UNUSED UNUSED UNUSED UNUSED UNUSED UNUSED UNUSED UNUSED UNUSED UNUSED UNUSED UNUSED UNUSED UNUSED UNUSED UNUSED UNUSED UNUSED UNUSED UNUSED UNUSED UNUSED UNUSED UNUSED UNUSED UNUSED UNUSED UNUSED UNUSED UNUSED UNUSED
Description Pole Slip (Impedance) Zone2 Start Pole Slip (impedance) Lens Start Pole Slip (impedance) Blinder Start Pole Slip (impedance) Reactance Line Start Under Impedance Stage 1 Start Under Impedance Stage 1 Start A Under Impedance Stage 1 Start B Under Impedance Stage 1 Start C Under Impedance Stage 2 Start Under Impedance Stage 2 Start A Under Impedance Stage 2 Start B Under Impedance Stage 2 Start C
P341 P342 P343 * * * * * * * * * * * *
P341/EN GC/D22
Page 116/158
DDB No. 696 697 698 699 700 701 702 703 704 705 706 707 708 709 710 711 712 713 714 715 716 717 718 719 720 721 722 723 724 725 726 727 728 729 730 731 732 733 734 735 736 737 738 739 740 741 742 743 744 745 UNUSED UNUSED UNUSED UNUSED UNUSED UNUSED UNUSED UNUSED UNUSED UNUSED UNUSED UNUSED UNUSED UNUSED UNUSED UNUSED UNUSED UNUSED UNUSED UNUSED UNUSED UNUSED UNUSED UNUSED UNUSED UNUSED UNUSED UNUSED UNUSED UNUSED UNUSED UNUSED UNUSED UNUSED UNUSED UNUSED UNUSED UNUSED UNUSED UNUSED
Source
Description
P341 P342 P343
VT Supervision VT Supervision CT Supervision CB Control CB Control CB Control Reconnection RTD Thermal RTD Thermal RTD Thermal
VTS Fast Block VTS Slow Block CTS Block Control Trip Control Close Control Close in Progress Reconnection Time Delay Output RTD 1 Alarm RTD 2 Alarm RTD 3 Alarm
VTS Fast Block VTS Slow Block CTS Block Control Trip Control Close Close in Prog Reconnection RTD 1 Alarm RTD 2 Alarm RTD 3 Alarm
* * * * * * *
* * *
* * *
* * *
* * *
P341/EN GC/D22
Page 117/158
English Text 0123456789ABCDEF RTD 4 Alarm RTD 5 Alarm RTD 6 Alarm RTD 7 Alarm RTD 8 Alarm RTD 9 Alarm RTD 10 Alarm Lockout Alarm CB Open 3 ph CB Closed 3 ph Field volts fail All Poles Dead Any Pole Dead Pole Dead A Pole Dead B Pole Dead C VTS Acc Ind VTS Volt Dep VTS IA> VTS IB> VTS IC> VTS VA> VTS VB> VTS VC> VTS I2> VTS V2> VTS IA delta> VTS IB delta> VTS IC delta> BFail SEF Trip-1 BFail Non I Tr-1 BFail SEF Trip BFail Non I Trip Freq High Freq Low Freq Not found Stop Freq Track Recon LOM-1 Recon Disable-1 Recon LOM Recon Disable * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * *
DDB No. 746 747 748 749 750 751 752 753 754 755 756 757 758 759 760 761 762 763 764 765 766 767 768 769 770 771 772 773 774 775 776 777 778 779 780 781 782 783 784 785 786 787 788 789 790 791 792 793 794 795
Source RTD Thermal RTD Thermal RTD Thermal RTD Thermal RTD Thermal RTD Thermal RTD Thermal CB Monitoring CB Status Monitor CB Status Monitor Field Voltage Monitor Poledead Poledead Poledead Poledead Poledead VT Supervision VT Supervision VT Supervision VT Supervision VT Supervision VT Supervision VT Supervision VT Supervision VT Supervision VT Supervision VT Supervision VT Supervision VT Supervision CB Failure CB Failure CB Failure CB Failure Frequency tracking Frequency tracking Frequency tracking Frequency tracking Reconnection Reconnection Reconnection Reconnection UNUSED UNUSED UNUSED UNUSED UNUSED UNUSED UNUSED UNUSED UNUSED RTD 4 Alarm RTD 5 Alarm RTD 6 Alarm RTD 7 Alarm RTD 8 Alarm RTD 9 Alarm RTD 10 Alarm
Description
P341 P342 P343 * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * *
Composite lockout alarm 3 ph CB Open 3 ph CB Closed Field Voltage Failure All Poles Dead Any Pole Dead Phase A Pole Dead Phase B Pole Dead Phase C Pole Dead Accelerate Ind Any Voltage Dependent Ia over threshold Ib over threshold Ic over threshold Va over threshold Vb over threshold Vc over threshold I2 over threshold V2 over threshold Superimposed Ia over threshold Superimposed Ib over threshold Superimposed Ic over threshold CBF current prot SEF stage trip CBF non current prot stage trip CBF current Prot SEF Trip CBF Non Current Prot Trip Freq High Freq Low Freq Not found Stop Freq Track Reconnect LOM (unqualified) Reconnect Disable (unqualified) Reconnect LOM Reconnect Disable
P341/EN GC/D22
Page 118/158
DDB No. 796 797 798 799 800 801 802 803 804 805 806 807 808 809 810 811 812 813 814 815 816 817 818 819 820 821 822 823 824 825 826 827 828 829 830 831 832 833 834 835 836 837 838 839 840 841 842 843 844 845 UNUSED UNUSED UNUSED UNUSED UNUSED UNUSED UNUSED UNUSED UNUSED UNUSED UNUSED UNUSED UNUSED UNUSED UNUSED UNUSED UNUSED UNUSED UNUSED UNUSED UNUSED UNUSED UNUSED UNUSED UNUSED UNUSED UNUSED UNUSED UNUSED UNUSED UNUSED UNUSED UNUSED UNUSED UNUSED UNUSED
Source
Description
P341 P342 P343
CONTROL CONTROL CONTROL CONTROL CONTROL CONTROL CONTROL CONTROL CONTROL CONTROL CONTROL CONTROL CONTROL CONTROL
Control Input Control Input Control Input Control Input Control Input Control Input Control Input Control Input Control Input Control Input Control Input Control Input Control Input Control Input
Control Input 1 Control Input 2 Control Input 3 Control Input 4 Control Input 5 Control Input 6 Control Input 7 Control Input 8 Control Input 9 Control Input 10 Control Input 11 Control Input 12 Control Input 13 Control Input 14
* * * * * * * * * * * * * *
* * * * * * * * * * * * * *
* * * * * * * * * * * * * *
P341/EN GC/D22
Page 119/158
English Text 0123456789ABCDEF Control Input 15 Control Input 16 Control Input 17 Control Input 18 Control Input 19 Control Input 20 Control Input 21 Control Input 22 Control Input 23 Control Input 24 Control Input 25 Control Input 26 Control Input 27 Control Input 28 Control Input 29 Control Input 30 Control Input 31 Control Input 32 GOOSE VIP 1 GOOSE VIP 2 GOOSE VIP 3 GOOSE VIP 4 GOOSE VIP 5 GOOSE VIP 6 GOOSE VIP 7 GOOSE VIP 8 GOOSE VIP 9 GOOSE VIP 10 GOOSE VIP 11 GOOSE VIP 12 GOOSE VIP 13 GOOSE VIP 14 GOOSE VIP 15 GOOSE VIP 16 GOOSE VIP 17 GOOSE VIP 18 GOOSE VIP 19 GOOSE VIP 20 GOOSE VIP 21 GOOSE VIP 22 GOOSE VIP 23 GOOSE VIP 24 GOOSE VIP 25 GOOSE VIP 26 GOOSE VIP 27 GOOSE VIP 28 GOOSE VIP 29 GOOSE VIP 30 GOOSE VIP 31 GOOSE VIP 32
DDB No. 846 847 848 849 850 851 852 853 854 855 856 857 858 859 860 861 862 863 864 865 866 867 868 869 870 871 872 873 874 875 876 877 878 879 880 881 882 883 884 885 886 887 888 889 890 891 892 893 894 895
Source CONTROL CONTROL CONTROL CONTROL CONTROL CONTROL CONTROL CONTROL CONTROL CONTROL CONTROL CONTROL CONTROL CONTROL CONTROL CONTROL CONTROL CONTROL UNUSED UNUSED UNUSED UNUSED UNUSED UNUSED UNUSED UNUSED UNUSED UNUSED UNUSED UNUSED UNUSED UNUSED UNUSED UNUSED UNUSED UNUSED UNUSED UNUSED UNUSED UNUSED UNUSED UNUSED UNUSED UNUSED UNUSED UNUSED UNUSED UNUSED UNUSED UNUSED Control Input Control Input Control Input Control Input Control Input Control Input Control Input Control Input Control Input Control Input Control Input Control Input Control Input Control Input Control Input Control Input Control Input Control Input
Description
P341 P342 P343 * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * *
P341/EN GC/D22
Page 120/158
English Text 0123456789ABCDEF GOOSE VOP 1 GOOSE VOP 2 GOOSE VOP 3 GOOSE VOP 4 GOOSE VOP 5 GOOSE VOP 6 GOOSE VOP 7 GOOSE VOP 8 InterLogic I/P 1 InterLogic I/P 2 InterLogic I/P 3 InterLogic I/P 4 InterLogic I/P 5 InterLogic I/P 6 InterLogic I/P 7 InterLogic I/P 8 InterLogic O/P 1 InterLogic O/P 2 InterLogic O/P 3 InterLogic O/P 4 InterLogic O/P 5 InterLogic O/P 6 InterLogic O/P 7 InterLogic O/P 8 Direct Ctrl 1 Direct Ctrl 2 Direct Ctrl 3 Direct Ctrl 4 Direct Ctrl 5 Direct Ctrl 6 Direct Ctrl 7 Direct Ctrl 8 PSL Internal Node 1 PSL Internal Node 2 PSL Internal Node 3 PSL Internal Node 4 PSL Internal Node 5 PSL Internal Node 6 PSL Internal Node 7 PSL Internal Node 8 PSL Internal Node 9 PSL Internal Node 10 PSL Internal Node 11 PSL Internal Node 12 PSL Internal Node 13 PSL Internal Node 14 PSL Internal Node 15 PSL Internal Node 16 PSL Internal Node 17 PSL Internal Node 18 PSL Int. 1 PSL Int. 2 PSL Int. 3 PSL Int. 4 PSL Int. 5 PSL Int. 6 PSL Int. 7 PSL Int. 8 PSL Int. 9 PSL Int. 10 PSL Int. 11 PSL Int. 12 PSL Int. 13 PSL Int. 14 PSL Int. 15 PSL Int. 16 PSL Int. 17 PSL Int. 18 * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * *
DDB No. 896 897 898 899 900 901 902 903 904 905 906 907 908 909 910 911 912 913 914 915 916 917 918 919 920 921 922 923 924 925 926 927 928 929 930 931 932 933 934 935 936 937 938 939 940 941 942 943 944 945 UNUSED UNUSED UNUSED UNUSED UNUSED UNUSED UNUSED UNUSED UNUSED UNUSED UNUSED UNUSED UNUSED UNUSED UNUSED UNUSED UNUSED UNUSED UNUSED UNUSED UNUSED UNUSED UNUSED UNUSED UNUSED UNUSED UNUSED UNUSED UNUSED UNUSED UNUSED UNUSED PSLINT PSLINT PSLINT PSLINT PSLINT PSLINT PSLINT PSLINT PSLINT PSLINT PSLINT PSLINT PSLINT PSLINT PSLINT PSLINT PSLINT PSLINT
Source
Description
P341 P342 P343
P341/EN GC/D22
Page 121/158
English Text 0123456789ABCDEF PSL Int. 19 PSL Int. 20 PSL Int. 21 PSL Int. 22 PSL Int. 23 PSL Int. 24 PSL Int. 25 PSL Int. 26 PSL Int. 27 PSL Int. 28 PSL Int. 29 PSL Int. 30 PSL Int. 31 PSL Int. 32 PSL Int. 33 PSL Int. 34 PSL Int. 35 PSL Int. 36 PSL Int. 37 PSL Int. 38 PSL Int. 39 PSL Int. 40 PSL Int. 41 PSL Int. 42 PSL Int. 43 PSL Int. 44 PSL Int. 45 PSL Int. 46 PSL Int. 47 PSL Int. 48 PSL Int. 49 PSL Int. 50 PSL Int. 51 PSL Int. 52 PSL Int. 53 PSL Int. 54 PSL Int. 55 PSL Int. 56 PSL Int. 57 PSL Int. 58 PSL Int. 59 PSL Int. 60 PSL Int. 61 PSL Int. 62 PSL Int. 63 PSL Int. 64 PSL Int. 65 PSL Int. 66 PSL Int. 67 PSL Int. 68
DDB No. 946 947 948 949 950 951 952 953 954 955 956 957 958 959 960 961 962 963 964 965 966 967 968 969 970 971 972 973 974 975 976 977 978 979 980 981 982 983 984 985 986 987 988 989 990 991 992 993 994 995 PSLINT PSLINT PSLINT PSLINT PSLINT PSLINT PSLINT PSLINT PSLINT PSLINT PSLINT PSLINT PSLINT PSLINT PSLINT PSLINT PSLINT PSLINT PSLINT PSLINT PSLINT PSLINT PSLINT PSLINT PSLINT PSLINT PSLINT PSLINT PSLINT PSLINT PSLINT PSLINT PSLINT PSLINT PSLINT PSLINT PSLINT PSLINT PSLINT PSLINT PSLINT PSLINT PSLINT PSLINT PSLINT PSLINT PSLINT PSLINT PSLINT PSLINT
Source
Description PSL Internal Node 19 PSL Internal Node 20 PSL Internal Node 21 PSL Internal Node 22 PSL Internal Node 23 PSL Internal Node 24 PSL Internal Node 25 PSL Internal Node 26 PSL Internal Node 27 PSL Internal Node 28 PSL Internal Node 29 PSL Internal Node 30 PSL Internal Node 31 PSL Internal Node 32 PSL Internal Node 33 PSL Internal Node 34 PSL Internal Node 35 PSL Internal Node 36 PSL Internal Node 37 PSL Internal Node 38 PSL Internal Node 39 PSL Internal Node 40 PSL Internal Node 41 PSL Internal Node 42 PSL Internal Node 43 PSL Internal Node 44 PSL Internal Node 45 PSL Internal Node 46 PSL Internal Node 47 PSL Internal Node 48 PSL Internal Node 49 PSL Internal Node 50 PSL Internal Node 51 PSL Internal Node 52 PSL Internal Node 53 PSL Internal Node 54 PSL Internal Node 55 PSL Internal Node 56 PSL Internal Node 57 PSL Internal Node 58 PSL Internal Node 59 PSL Internal Node 60 PSL Internal Node 61 PSL Internal Node 62 PSL Internal Node 63 PSL Internal Node 64 PSL Internal Node 65 PSL Internal Node 66 PSL Internal Node 67 PSL Internal Node 68
P341 P342 P343 * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * *
P341/EN GC/D22
Page 122/158
English Text 0123456789ABCDEF PSL Int. 69 PSL Int. 70 PSL Int. 71 PSL Int. 72 PSL Int. 73 PSL Int. 74 PSL Int. 75 PSL Int. 76 PSL Int. 77 PSL Int. 78 PSL Int. 79 PSL Int. 80 PSL Int. 81 PSL Int. 82 PSL Int. 83 PSL Int. 84 PSL Int. 85 PSL Int. 86 PSL Int. 87 PSL Int. 88 PSL Int. 89 PSL Int. 90 PSL Int. 91 PSL Int. 92 PSL Int. 93 PSL Int. 94 PSL Int. 95
DDB No. 996 997 998 999 1000 1001 1002 1003 1004 1005 1006 1007 1008 1009 1010 1011 1012 1013 1014 1015 1016 1017 1018 1019 1020 1021 1022 PSLINT PSLINT PSLINT PSLINT PSLINT PSLINT PSLINT PSLINT PSLINT PSLINT PSLINT PSLINT PSLINT PSLINT PSLINT PSLINT PSLINT PSLINT PSLINT PSLINT PSLINT PSLINT PSLINT PSLINT PSLINT PSLINT PSLINT
Source
Description PSL Internal Node 69 PSL Internal Node 70 PSL Internal Node 71 PSL Internal Node 72 PSL Internal Node 73 PSL Internal Node 74 PSL Internal Node 75 PSL Internal Node 76 PSL Internal Node 77 PSL Internal Node 78 PSL Internal Node 79 PSL Internal Node 80 PSL Internal Node 81 PSL Internal Node 82 PSL Internal Node 83 PSL Internal Node 84 PSL Internal Node 85 PSL Internal Node 86 PSL Internal Node 87 PSL Internal Node 88 PSL Internal Node 89 PSL Internal Node 90 PSL Internal Node 91 PSL Internal Node 92 PSL Internal Node 93 PSL Internal Node 94 PSL Internal Node 95
P341 P342 P343 * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * *
Rel M enu D at ay abase M i O M P341 C
P341/EN GC/D22 Page 123/158
Event Record Data Format Modbus Event Type G13
Event Text
Additional Text
Event Description
Courier Cell Ref Binary Flag (24 bits)
Value
DDB No.
P341 P342 P343 * * * * * *
Logic Inputs
Changes in opto input status
0020
Binary Flag (32 bits) Value contains new opto input status Binary Flag (24 bits)
Output Contacts
Changes in output contact status
0021
Binary Flag (32 bits) Value contains new output contact status Unsigned integer (32 bits) Bit position for alarm
Alarm Events Battery Fail Field Volt Fail SG-opto Invalid Prot'n Disabled VT Fail Alarm CT Fail Alarm CB Fail Alarm I^ Maint Alarm I^ Lockout Alarm CB Ops Maint CB Ops Lockout CB Op Time Maint CB Op Time Lock Fault Freq Lock CB Status Alarm ON/OFF ON/OFF ON/OFF ON/OFF ON/OFF ON/OFF ON/OFF ON/OFF ON/OFF ON/OFF ON/OFF ON/OFF ON/OFF ON/OFF ON/OFF Battery Fail Field Voltage Fail Setting Group via opto invalid Protection Disabled VTS Alarm CTS Alarm CB Trip Fail Protection Broken Current Maintenance Alarm Broken Current Lockout Alarm No of CB Ops Maintenance Alarm No of CB Ops Maintenance Lockout CB Op Time Maintenance Alarm CB Op Time Lockout Alarm Excessive Fault Frequency Lockout Alarm CB Status Alarm 2/3 2/3 2/3 2/3 2/3 2/3 0/1 2/3 2/3 2/3 2/3 2/3 2/3 2/3 0/1 0022 0022 0022 0022 0022 0022 0022 0022 0022 0022 0022 0022 0022 0022 0022
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14
* * * * * * * * * * * * * * *
* * * * * * * * * * * * * * *
* * * * * * * * * * * * * * *
P341/EN GC/D22 Page 124/158
Event Text Man CB Trip Fail Man CB Cls Fail Man CB Unhealthy F out of range NPS Alarm Thermal Alarm V/Hz Alarm Field Fail Alarm RTD Thermal Alm RTD Open Cct RTD short Cct RTD Data Error RTD Board Fail Freq Prot Alm Voltage Prot Alm User Alarm 1 User Alarm 2 User Alarm 3
Additional Text ON/OFF ON/OFF ON/OFF ON/OFF ON/OFF ON/OFF ON/OFF ON/OFF ON/OFF ON/OFF ON/OFF ON/OFF ON/OFF ON/OFF ON/OFF ON/OFF ON/OFF ON/OFF
Event Description CB Failed to Trip CB Failed to Close No Healthy Control Close Frequency out of range Negative Phase Sequence Alarm Thermal Overload Alarm Volts Per Hz Alarm Field failure Alarm (Latched) RTD thermal Alarm (Latched) RTD open circuit failure (Latched) RTD short circuit failure (Latched) RTD data inconsistency error (Latched) RTD Board failure (Latched) User definable frequency protection alarm (Latched) User definable voltage protection alarm (Latched) User Definable Alarm 1 (Latched) User Definable Alarm 2 (Latched) User Definable Alarm 3 (Self Reset) Protection Events
Modbus Event Type G13 0/1 0/1 0/1 2/3 0/1 0/1 0/1 0/1 0/1 0/1 0/1 0/1 0/1 0/1 0/1 0/1 0/1 2/3
Courier Cell Ref 0022 0022 0023 0022 0022 0023 0022 0022 0022 0022 0022 0022 0022 0022 0022 0022 0022 0022
Value 15 16 17 18 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 Unsigned integer (32 bits) Bit position for event
DDB No.
P341 P342 P343 * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * *
100% ST EF Trip DeadMachine trip Gen Diff Trip Gen Diff Trip A
ON/OFF ON/OFF ON/OFF ON/OFF
100% Stator Earth Fault Trip Dead machine protection Trip Generator Differential trip 3ph Generator Differential Trip A
6 6 6 6
0F2D 0F2D 0F2D 0F2D
0 1 2 3
416 417 418 419
* * * *
P341/EN GC/D22 Page 125/158
Event Text Gen Diff Trip B Gen Diff Trip C Field Fail1 Trip Field Fail2 Trip NPS Trip V Dep O/C Trip V Dep O/C Trip A V Dep O/C Trip B V Dep O/C Trip C V/Hz Trip RTD 1 Trip RTD 2 Trip RTD 3 Trip RTD 4 Trip RTD 5 Trip RTD 6 Trip RTD 7 Trip RTD 8 Trip RTD 9 Trip RTD 10 Trip df/dt Trip Any RTD Trip V Shift Trip IN>1 Trip IN>2 Trip
Additional Text ON/OFF ON/OFF ON/OFF ON/OFF ON/OFF ON/OFF ON/OFF ON/OFF ON/OFF ON/OFF ON/OFF ON/OFF ON/OFF ON/OFF ON/OFF ON/OFF ON/OFF ON/OFF ON/OFF ON/OFF ON/OFF ON/OFF ON/OFF ON/OFF ON/OFF
Event Description Generator Differential Trip B Generator Differential Trip C Field failure Stage 1 Trip Field failure Stage 2 Trip Negative Phase Sequence Trip Voltage Dependent Overcurrent Trip 3ph Voltage Dependent Overcurrent Trip A Voltage Dependent Overcurrent Trip B Voltage Dependent Overcurrent Trip C Volts per Hz Trip RTD 1 TRIP RTD 2 TRIP RTD 3 TRIP RTD 4 TRIP RTD 5 TRIP RTD 6 TRIP RTD 7 TRIP RTD 8 TRIP RTD 9 TRIP RTD 10 TRIP Rate of change of frequency Trip Any RTD Trip Voltage vector shift trip 1st Stage EF Trip 2nd Stage EF Trip
Modbus Event Type G13 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6
Courier Cell Ref 0F2D 0F2D 0F2D 0F2D 0F2D 0F2D 0F2D 0F2D 0F2D 0F2D 0F2D 0F2D 0F2D 0F2D 0F2D 0F2D 0F2D 0F2D 0F2D 0F2D 0F2D 0F2D 0F2D 0F2D 0F2D
Value 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 24 25 26 27
DDB No. 420 421 422 423 424 425 426 427 428 429 430 431 432 433 434 435 436 437 438 439 440 440 441 442 443
P341 P342 P343 * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * *
P341/EN GC/D22 Page 126/158
Event Text IN>3 Trip IN>4 Trip IREF> Trip ISEF>1 Trip ISEF>2 Trip ISEF>3 Trip ISEF>4 Trip VN>1 Trip VN>2 Trip V<1 Trip V<1 Trip A/AB V<1 Trip B/BC V<1 Trip C/CA V<2 Trip V<2 Trip A/AB V<2 Trip B/BC V<2 Trip C/CA V>1 Trip V>1 Trip A/AB V>1 Trip B/BC V>1 Trip C/CA V>2 Trip V>2 Trip A/AB V>2 Trip B/BC V>2 Trip C/CA
Event Description 3rd Stage EF Trip 4th Stage EF Trip REF Trip 1st Stage SEF Trip 2nd Stage SEF Trip 3rd Stage SEF Trip 4th Stage SEF Trip 1st Stage Residual O/V Trip 2nd Stage Residual O/V Trip 1st Stage Phase U/V Trip 3ph 1st Stage Phase U/V Trip A/AB 1st Stage Phase U/V Trip B/BC 1st Stage Phase U/V Trip C/CA 2nd Stage Phase U/V Trip 3ph 2nd Stage Phase U/V Trip A/AB 2nd Stage Phase U/V Trip B/BC 2nd Stage Phase U/V Trip C/CA 1st Stage Phase O/V Trip 3ph 1st Stage Phase O/V Trip A/AB 1st Stage Phase O/V Trip B/BC 1st Stage Phase O/V Trip C/CA 2nd Stage Phase O/V Trip 3ph 2nd Stage Phase O/V Trip A/AB 2nd Stage Phase O/V Trip B/BC 2nd Stage Phase O/V Trip C/CA
Courier Cell Ref 0F2D 0F2D 0F2D 0F2D 0F2E 0F2E 0F2E 0F2E 0F2E 0F2E 0F2E 0F2E 0F2E 0F2E 0F2E 0F2E 0F2E 0F2E 0F2E 0F2E 0F2E 0F2E 0F2E 0F2E 0F2E
Value 28 29 30 31 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20
DDB No. 444 445 446 447 448 449 450 451 452 453 454 455 456 457 458 459 460 461 462 463 464 465 466 467 468
P341 P342 P343 * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * *
P341/EN GC/D22 Page 127/158
Event Text F<1 Trip F<2 Trip F<3 Trip F<4 Trip F>1 Trip F>2 Trip Power1 Trip Power2 Trip I>1 Trip I>1 Trip A I>1 Trip B I>1 Trip C I>2 Trip I>2 Trip A I>2 Trip B I>2 Trip C I>3 Trip I>3 Trip A I>3 Trip B I>3 Trip C I>4 Trip I>4 Trip A I>4 Trip B I>4 Trip C Bfail1 Trip 3ph
Event Description Under frequency Stage 1 trip Under frequency Stage 2 trip Under frequency Stage 3 trip Under frequency Stage 4 trip Over frequency Stage 1 Trip Over frequency Stage 2 Trip Power stage 1 trip Power stage 2 trip 1st Stage O/C Trip 3ph 1st Stage O/C Trip A 1st Stage O/C Trip B 1st Stage O/C Trip C 2nd Stage O/C Trip 3ph 2nd Stage O/C Trip A 2nd Stage O/C Trip B 2nd Stage O/C Trip C 3rd Stage O/C Trip 3ph 3rd Stage O/C Trip A 3rd Stage O/C Trip B 3rd Stage O/C Trip C 4th Stage O/C Trip 3ph 4th Stage O/C Trip A 4th Stage O/C Trip B 4th Stage O/C Trip C tBF1 Trip 3Ph
Courier Cell Ref 0F2E 0F2E 0F2E 0F2E 0F2E 0F2E 0F2E 0F2E 0F2E 0F2E 0F2E 0F2F 0F2F 0F2F 0F2F 0F2F 0F2F 0F2F 0F2F 0F2F 0F2F 0F2F 0F2F 0F2F 0F2F
Value 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13
DDB No. 469 470 471 472 473 474 475 476 477 478 479 480 481 482 483 484 485 486 487 488 489 490 491 492 493
P341 P342 P343 * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * *
P341/EN GC/D22 Page 128/158
Event Text Bfail2 Trip 3ph SPower1 Trip SPower2 Trip PSlipz Z1 Trip PSlipz Z2 Trip Thermal O/L Trip Z<1 Trip Z<1 Trip A Z<1 Trip B Z<1 Trip C Z<2 Trip Z<2 Trip A Z<2 Trip B Z<2 Trip C Any Start VN>1 Start VN>2 Start V<1 Start V<1 Start A/AB V<1 Start B/BC V<1 Start C/CA V<2 Start V<2 Start A/AB V<2 Start B/BC V<2 Start C/CA
Additional Text ON/OFF ON/OFF ON/OFF ON/OFF ON/OFF ON/OFF ON/OFF ON/OFF ON/OFF ON/OFF ON/OFF ON/OFF ON/OFF ON/OFF ON/OFF ON/OFF ON/OFF ON/OFF ON/OFF ON/OFF ON/OFF ON/OFF ON/OFF ON/OFF ON/OFF tBF2 Trip 3Ph
Event Description
Courier Cell Ref 0F2F 0F2F 0F2F 0F2F 0F2F 0F2F 0F2F 0F2F 0F2F 0F2F 0F2F 0F2F 0F2F 0F2F 0F32 0F32 0F32 0F32 0F32 0F32 0F32 0F32 0F32 0F32 0F32
Value 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
DDB No. 494 495 496 497 498 499 500 501 502 503 504 505 506 507 576 577 578 579 580 581 582 583 584 585 586
P341 P342 P343 * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * *
Sensitive A Phase Power Stage 1 Trip Sensitive A Phase Power Stage 2 Trip Pole Slip (Impedance) Zone1 Trip Pole Slip (Impedance) Zone2 Trip Thermal Overload Trip Under Impedance Stage 1 Trip 3 Ph Under Impedance Stage 1 Trip A Under Impedance Stage 1 Trip B Under Impedance Stage 1 Trip C Under Impedance Stage 2 Trip 3 Ph Under Impedance Stage 2 Trip A Under Impedance Stage 2 Trip B Under Impedance Stage 2 Trip C Any Start 1st Stage Residual O/V Start 2nd Stage Residual O/V Start 1st Stage Phase U/V Start 3ph 1st Stage Phase U/V Start A/AB 1st Stage Phase U/V Start B/BC 1st Stage Phase U/V Start C/CA 2nd Stage Phase U/V Start 3ph 2nd Stage Phase U/V Start A/AB 2nd Stage Phase U/V Start B/BC 2nd Stage Phase U/V Start C/CA
P341/EN GC/D22 Page 129/158
Event Text V>1 Start V>1 Start A/AB V>1 Start B/BC V>1 Start C/CA V>2 Start V>2 Start A/AB V>2 Start B/BC V>2 Start C/CA Power1 Start Power2 Start I>1 Start I>1 Start A I>1 Start B I>1 Start C I>2 Start I>2 Start A I>2 Start B I>2 Start C I>3 Start I>3 Start A I>3 Start B I>3 Start C I>4 Start I>4 Start A I>4 Start B
Event Description 1st Stage Phase O/V Start 3ph 1st Stage Phase O/V Start A/AB 1st Stage Phase O/V Start B/BC 1st Stage Phase O/V Start C/CA 2nd Stage Phase O/V Start 3ph 2nd Stage Phase O/V Start A/AB 2nd Stage Phase O/V Start B/BC 2nd Stage Phase O/V Start C/CA Power Stage 1 start Power stage 1 start 1st Stage O/C Start 3ph 1st Stage O/C Start A 1st Stage O/C Start B 1st Stage O/C Start C 2nd Stage O/C Start 3ph 2nd Stage O/C Start A 2nd Stage O/C Start B 2nd Stage O/C Start C 3rd Stage O/C Start 3ph 3rd Stage O/C Start A 3rd Stage O/C Start B 3rd Stage O/C Start C 4th Stage O/C Start 3ph 4th Stage O/C Start A 4th Stage O/C Start B
Courier Cell Ref 0F32 0F32 0F32 0F32 0F32 0F32 0F32 0F32 0F32 0F32 0F32 0F32 0F32 0F32 0F32 0F32 0F32 0F32 0F32 0F32 0F32 0F33 0F33 0F33 0F33
Value 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 0 1 2 3
DDB No. 587 588 589 590 591 592 593 594 595 596 597 598 599 600 601 602 603 604 605 606 607 608 609 610 611
P341 P342 P343 * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * *
P341/EN GC/D22 Page 130/158
Event Text I>4 Start C IN>1 Start IN>2 Start IN>3 Start IN>4 Start ISEF>1 Start ISEF>2 Start ISEF>3 Start ISEF>4 Start 100% ST EF Start F<1 Start F<2 Start F<3 Start F<4 Start F>1 Start F>2 Start I> BlockStart IN/SEF>Blk Start df/dt Start IA< Start IB< Start IC< Start ISEF< Start IN< Start
Additional Text ON/OFF ON/OFF ON/OFF ON/OFF ON/OFF ON/OFF ON/OFF ON/OFF ON/OFF ON/OFF ON/OFF ON/OFF ON/OFF ON/OFF ON/OFF ON/OFF ON/OFF ON/OFF ON/OFF ON/OFF ON/OFF ON/OFF ON/OFF ON/OFF
Event Description 4th Stage O/C Start C 1st Stage EF Start 2nd Stage EF Start 3rd Stage EF Start 4th Stage EF Start 1st Stage SEF Start 2nd Stage SEF Start 3rd Stage SEF Start 4th Stage SEF Start 100% Stator Earth Fault Start Under frequency Stage 1 START Under frequency Stage 2 START Under frequency Stage 3 START Under frequency Stage 4 START Over frequency Stage 1 START Over frequency Stage 2 START I> Blocked O/C Start, inhibited by CB Fail IN/ISEF> Blocked O/C Start, inhibited by CB Fail Rate of change of frequency Start IA< operate IB< operate IC< operate ISEF< operate IN< operate
Modbus Event Type G13 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6
Courier Cell Ref 0F33 0F33 0F33 0F33 0F33 0F33 0F33 0F33 0F33 0F33 0F33 0F33 0F33 0F33 0F33 0F33 0F33 0F33 0F33 0F33 0F33 0F33 0F33 0F33
Value 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27
DDB No. 612 613 614 615 616 617 618 619 620 621 622 623 624 625 626 627 628 629 630 631 632 633 634 635
P341 P342 P343 * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * *
P341/EN GC/D22 Page 131/158
Event Text V/Hz Start FFail1 Start FFail2 Start V Dep OC Start V Dep OC Start A V Dep OC Start B V Dep OC Start C SPower1 Start SPower2 Start PSlipz Z1 Start PSlipz Z2 Start PSlipz LensStart PSlipz BlindStrt PSlipz ReactStrt Z<1 Start Z<1 Start A Z<1 Start B Z<1 Start C Z<2 Start Z<2 Start A Z<2 Start B Z<2 Start C Control Trip Control Close Close in Prog
Event Description Volts per Hz Start Field failure Stage 1 start Field failure Stage 2 start Voltage Dependent Overcurrent Start Voltage Dependent Overcurrent Start A Voltage Dependent Overcurrent Start B Voltage Dependent Overcurrent Start C Sensitive A Phase Power Stage 1 Start Sensitive A Phase Power Stage 2 Start Pole Slip (Impedance) Zone1 Start Pole Slip (Impedance) Zone2 Start Pole Slip (impedance) Lens Start Pole Slip (impedance) Blinder Start Pole Slip (impedance) Reactance Line Start Under Impedance Stage 1 Start Under Impedance Stage 1 Start A Under Impedance Stage 1 Start B Under Impedance Stage 1 Start C Under Impedance Stage 2 Start Under Impedance Stage 2 Start A Under Impedance Stage 2 Start B Under Impedance Stage 2 Start C Control Trip Control Close Control Close in Progress
Courier Cell Ref 0F33 0F33 0F33 0F33 0F34 0F34 0F34 0F34 0F34 0F34 0F34 0F34 0F34 0F34 0F34 0F34 0F34 0F34 0F34 0F34 0F34 0F34 0F37 0F37 0F37
Value 28 29 30 31 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 3 4 5
DDB No. 636 637 638 639 640 641 642 643 644 645 646 647 648 649 650 651 652 653 654 655 656 657 739 740 741
P341 P342 P343 * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * *
P341/EN GC/D22 Page 132/158
Event Text RTD 1 Alarm RTD 2 Alarm RTD 3 Alarm RTD 4 Alarm RTD 5 Alarm RTD 6 Alarm RTD 7 Alarm RTD 8 Alarm RTD 9 Alarm RTD 10 Alarm CB Open 3 ph CB Closed 3 ph Alarms Cleared Events Cleared Faults Cleared Maint Cleared PW Unlocked UI PW Invalid UI PW1 Modified UI PW2 Modified UI PW Expired UI PW Unlocked F PW Invalid F PW1 Modified F
Additional Text ON/OFF ON/OFF ON/OFF ON/OFF ON/OFF ON/OFF ON/OFF ON/OFF ON/OFF ON/OFF ON/OFF ON/OFF RTD 1 Alarm RTD 2 Alarm RTD 3 Alarm RTD 4 Alarm RTD 5 Alarm RTD 6 Alarm RTD 7 Alarm RTD 8 Alarm RTD 9 Alarm
Event Description
Modbus Event Type G13 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7
Courier Cell Ref 0F37 0F37 0F37 0F37 0F37 0F37 0F37 0F37 0F37 0F37 0F37 0F37 FFFF 0B01 0B02 0B03 0002 0002 0002 0002 0002 0002 0002 0002
Value 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 18 19 Unsigned integer (32 bits) 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
DDB No. 743 744 745 746 747 748 749 750 751 752 754 755
P341 P342 P343 * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * *
RTD 10 Alarm 3 ph CB Open 3 ph CB Closed General Events Relay Alarms Cleared Relay Event Records Cleared Relay Fault Records Cleared Relay Maintenance Records Cleared Password Unlocked via User Interface Invalid Password entered on User Interface Password Level 1 Modified on User Interface Password Level 2 Modified on User Interface Password unlock expired User Interface Password Unlocked via Front Port Invalid Password entered on Front Port Password Level 1 Modified on Front Port
P341/EN GC/D22 Page 133/158
Event Text PW2 Modified F PW Expired F PW Unlocked R PW Invalid R PW1 Modified R PW2 Modified R PW Expired R IRIG-B Active IRIG-B Inactive Time Synch C&S Changed Dist Changed Group 1 Changed Group 2 Changed Group 3 Changed Group 4 Changed Act Grp Changed Indication Reset Power On Text Fault Recorded Text Maint Recorded
Additional Text
Event Description Password Level 2 Modified on Front Port Password unlock expired Front Port Password Unlocked via Rear Port Invalid Password entered on Rear Port Password Level 1 Modified on Rear Port Password Level 2 Modified on Rear Port Password unlock expired Rear Port IRIG-B Timesync Active (Valid Signal) IRIG-B Timesync Inactive (No Signal) Relay Clock Adjusted Control and Support Settings Changed Disturbance Recorder Settings Changed Change to Protection Setting Group 1 Change to Protection Setting Group 2 Change to Protection Setting Group 3 Change to Protection Setting Group 4 Active Group Selection Changed Relay Indications Reset Relay Powered Up Fault Recorder Fault Records Self Monitoring Maintenance Records Description Fast Watchdog Error
Modbus Event Type G13 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 8 9
Courier Cell Ref 0002 0002 0002 0002 0002 0002 0002 0805 0805 0801 FFFF 0904 0904 0904 0904 0904 0903 01FF FFFF Cell Ref 0100 Cell Ref FFFF
Value 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 Value 0 Value 0 Continuous
DDB No.
P341 P342 P343 * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * *
Extraction Column B000 Extraction Column B100 *
Record No. 16bit UINT Record No. 16bit UINT P341 P342 P343 * *
Maintenance Record Text Fast W'Dog Error
P341/EN GC/D22 Page 134/158
Event Text Battery Failure BBRAM Failure Field Volt Fail Bus Reset Error Slow W'Dog Error SRAM Failure Bus SRAM Failure Blk FLASH Failure Code Verify Fail EEPROM Failure Software Failure Hard Verify Fail Non Standard
Additional Text
Event Description Battery Failure Battery Back RAM Failure Field Voltage Failure Bus Error Slow Watchdog Error SRAM Bus Failure SRAM Block Failure Flash checksum Error Software Code Verification Failure EEPROM Failure Software Error Hardware Verification Error General Error
Modbus Event Type G13
Courier Cell Ref
Value * * *
DDB No.
P341 P342 P343 * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * *
* * * * * * *
* * * * * * * *
P341/EN GC/D22 Page 135/158

Issue: E Date: 31 May 2001
DNP 3.0
Device Profile Document
Vendor Name: Alstom T&D Protection & Control Ltd. Device Name: P340 Generator Protection Models Covered: P341***A4**04** P342****4**04* P343****4**04* Highest DNP Level Supported: Device Function: For Requests: Level 2 Master For Responses: Level 2 Slave Notable objects, functions, and/or qualifiers supported in addition to the Highest DNP Levels Supported (the complete list is described in the DNP V3.0 Implementation table): For static (non-change-event) object requests, request qualifier codes 00 and 01 (start-stop), 07 and 08 (limited quantity), and 17 and 28 (index) are supported in addition to request qualifier code 06 (no range). Static object requests sent with qualifiers 00, 01, 06, 07, or 08, will be responded with qualifiers 00 or 01. Static object requests sent with qualifiers 17 or 28 will be responded with qualifiers 17 or 28. For change-event object requests, qualifiers 17 or 28 are always responded. 16-bit and 32-bit Analog Change Events with Time may be requested. The read function code for Object 50 (Time and Date), variation 1, is supported. Maximum Data Link Frame Size (octets): Maximum Application Fragment Size (octets): Transmitted: 292 Transmitted: 2048 292 249 Received: Received: Maximum Data Link Re-tries: Maximum Application Layer Re-tries: None None Fixed at 2 Configurable Configurable Requires Data Link Layer Confirmation: Never Always Sometimes Configurable Requires Application Layer Confirmation: Never Always When reporting Event Data When sending multi-fragment responses Sometimes Configurable
P341/EN GC/D22 Page 136/158

Timeouts while waiting for: Data Link Confirm: Fixed at 100ms Fixed at Fixed at 1s Fixed at
None
Variable
Configurable
Complete Appl. Fragment: None Variable Configurable Application Confirm: None Variable Configurable Complete Appl. Response: None Variable Configurable Others: Inter-character Delay: 4 character times at selected baud rate. Select/Operate Arm Timeout: default 10s. Need Time Interval: configurable, 0 or 30min. Sends/Executes Control Operations: WRITE Binary Outputs Never Always Sometimes Configurable SELECT/OPERATE Always Never Sometimes Configurable DIRECT OPERATE Always Never Sometimes Configurable DIRECT OPERATE NO ACK Never Always Sometimes Configurable Count > 1 Pulse On Pulse Off Latch On Latch Off Queue Clear Queue Never Never Never Never Never Always Always Always Always Always Sometimes Sometimes Sometimes Sometimes Sometimes Configurable Configurable Configurable Configurable Configurable
Never Never Sometimes Configurable Never Never Sometimes Configurable Reports Binary Input Change Events when Reports time-tagged Binary Input Change no specific variation requested: Events when no specific variation requested: Never Never Only time-tagged, var 2 Binary Input Change With Time Only non-time-tagged Binary Input Change With Relative Time Configurable Configurable Sends Unsolicited Responses: Sends Static Data in Unsolicited Responses: Never Never Configurable When Device Restarts Only certain Objects When Status Flags Change Sometimes No other options are permitted. ENABLE/DISABLE UNSOLICITED Function codes supported Default Counter Object/Variation: Counters Roll Over at: No Counters Reported No Counters Reported Configurable Configurable Default Object: 20 16 Bits Default Variation: 5 32 Bits Point-by-point list attached Other Value:____ Point-by-point list attached Sends Multi-Fragment Responses: Yes No

Object
Object Variation Number Number 1 1 1 2 2 2 10 10 12 20 20 20 20 20 21 21 21 21 21 30 30 30 30 30 32 32 32 32 32 50 50 52 60 60 0 1 2 0 1 2 0 2 1 0 1 2 5 6 0 1 2 9 10 0 1 2 3 4 0 1 2 3 4 0 1 2 0 1 Description Binary Input - Any Variation Binary Input Binary Input with Status Binary Input Change - Any Variation Binary Input Change without Time Binary Input Change with Time Binary Output - All Variations Binary Output Status Control Relay Output Block Binary Counter 32-Bit Binary Counter with Flag 16-Bit Bianry Counter with Flag 32-Bit Binary Counter without Flag 16-Bit Binary Counter Without Flag Frozen Counter 32-Bit Frozen Counter with Flag 16-Bit Frozen Counter with Flag 32-Bit Frozen Counter without Flag 16-Bit Frozen Counter without Flag Analog Input - All Variations 32-Bit Analog Input 16-Bit Analog Input 32-Bit Analog Input without Flag 16-Bit Analog Input without Flag Analog Change Event - All Variations 32-Bit Analog Change Event without Time 16-Bit Analog Change Event without Time 32-Bit Analog Change Event with Time 16-Bit Analog Change Event with Time Time and Date - All Variations Time and Date Time Delay Fine Class 0,1,2,3 Data Class 0 Data 1 1 06 06
P341/EN GC/D22 Page 137/158

Request
Function Codes (dec) 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 3,4,5,6 1,7,8,9,10 1,7,8,9,10 1,7,8,9,10 1,7,8,9,10 1,7,8,9,10 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1,2 Qualifier Codes (hex) 00,01,06,07, 08,17,28 00,01,06,07, 08,17,28 00,01,06,07, 08,17,28 06,07,08 06,07,08 06,07,08 00,01,06,07, 08,17,28 00,01,06,07, 08,17,28 00,01,07,08, 17,28 00,01,06,07, 08,17,28 00,01,06,07, 08,17,28 00,01,06,07, 08,17,28 00,01,06,07, 08,17,28 00,01,06,07, 08,17,28 00,01,06,07, 08,17,28 00,01,06,07, 08,17,28 00,01,06,07, 08,17,28 00,01,06,07, 08,17,28 00,01,06,07, 08,17,28 00,01,06,07, 08,17,28 00,01,06,07, 08,17,28 00,01,06,07, 08,17,28 00,01,06,07, 08,17,28 00,01,06,07, 08,17,28 06,07,08 06,07,08 06,07,08 06,07,08 06,07,08 00,01,06,07, 08,17,28 00,01,06,07, 08,17,28 129 129 129 129 129 129 17,28 17,28 17,28 17,28 00,01,17,28 00,01,17,28 7 129 129 129 129 00,01,17,28 00,01,17,28 00,01,17,28 00,01,17,28 129 129 129 129 00,01,17,28 00,01,17,28 00,01,17,28 00,01,17,28 129 129 129 129 00,01,17,28 00,01,17,28 00,01,17,28 00,01,17,28 129 129 00,01,17,28 echo 129 129 129 129 129 17,28 17,28 00,01,17,28 00,01,17,28
Response
Function Codes (dec) Qualifier Codes (hex)
129
00,01
P341/EN GC/D22 Page 138/158

Object
Object Variation Number Number 60 60 60 80 2 3 4 1 Class 1 Data Class 2 Data Class 3 Data Internal Indications No Object (function code only) No Object (function code only) No Object (function code only) Description

Request
Function Codes (dec) 1 1 1 2 13 14 23 Qualifier Codes (hex) 06,07,08 06,07,08 06,07,08 00 (index = 7)
Response
Function Codes (dec) 129 129 129 Qualifier Codes (hex) 17, 28 17,28 17,28

Binary Input Points Static (Steady State) Object Number: 1 Change Event Object Number: 2 Static Variation reported when variation 0 requested: 1 (Binary Input without status) Change Event Variation reported when variation 0 requested: 2 (Binary Input Change with Time) P341 P342 P343 Point Point Point Index Index Index Name / Description DDB No.
P341/EN GC/D22 Page 139/158
Change Event Assigned Class (1, 2, 3)
Initial Value
Output Relay Status 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 Output Relay 1 Output Relay 2 Output Relay 3 Output Relay 4 Output Relay 5 Output Relay 6 Output Relay 7 Output Relay 8 Output Relay 9 Output Relay 10 Output Relay 11 Output Relay 12 Output Relay 13 Output Relay 14 Output Relay 15 Output Relay 16 Output Relay 17 Output Relay 18 Output Relay 19 Output Relay 20 Output Relay 21 Output Relay 22 Output Relay 23 Output Relay 24 Output Relay 25 Output Relay 26 Output Relay 27 Output Relay 28 Output Relay 29 Output Relay 30 Output Relay 31 Output Relay 32 Opto Isolator Input Status 24 25 26 27 24 25 26 27 32 33 34 35 Opto Isolator Input 1 Opto Isolator Input 2 Opto Isolator Input 3 Opto Isolator Input 4 32 33 34 35 2 2 2 2 False False False False 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 False False False False False False False False False False False False False False False False False False False False False False False False False False False False False False False False
P341/EN GC/D22 Page 140/158

P341 P342 P343 Point Point Point Index Index Index 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 60 61 62 63 Name / Description DDB No. 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 60 61 62 63

Change Event Assigned Class (1, 2, 3) 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 Initial Value False False False False False False False False False False False False False False False False False False False False False False False False False False False False
Opto Isolator Input 5 Opto Isolator Input 6 Opto Isolator Input 7 Opto Isolator Input 8 Opto Isolator Input 9 Opto Isolator Input 10 Opto Isolator Input 11 Opto Isolator Input 12 Opto Isolator Input 13 Opto Isolator Input 14 Opto Isolator Input 15 Opto Isolator Input 16 Opto Isolator Input 17 Opto Isolator Input 18 Opto Isolator Input 19 Opto Isolator Input 20 Opto Isolator Input 21 Opto Isolator Input 22 Opto Isolator Input 23 Opto Isolator Input 24 Opto Isolator Input 25 Opto Isolator Input 26 Opto Isolator Input 27 Opto Isolator Input 28 Opto Isolator Input 29 Opto Isolator Input 30 Opto Isolator Input 31 Opto Isolator Input 32 Alarm & Event indications
48 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59
48 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59
64 65 66 67 68 69 70 71 72 73 74 75
Setting Group via Opto Invalid Test Mode Enabled VTS Indication CTS Indication Breaker Fail Any Trip Broken Current Maintenance Alarm Broken Current Lockout Alarm Number of CB Operations Maintenance Alarm Number of CB Operations Maintenance Lockout Excessive CB Operation Time Maintenance Alarm Excessive CB Operation Time Lockout Alarm Excessive Fault Frequency Lockout Alarm
290 291 292 293 294 295 296 297 298 299 300 301
2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2
False False False False False False False False False False False False

P341 P342 P343 Point Point Point Index Index Index 60 61 62 63 64 61 65 62 63 64 65 66 67 68 69 66 67 68 69 70 71 72 73 74 70 75 76 77 78 79 80 81 82 83 84 71 72 85 86 77 78 79 80 81 82 83 84 85 86 87 88 89 90 91 92 93 94 95 96 97 98 99 100 101 102 60 76 CB Status Alarm CB Failed to Trip CB Failed to Close Control CB Unhealthy Frequency Out of Range Negative Phase Sequence Alarm Thermal Overload Alarm Volts Per Hz Alarm Field Failure Alarm RTD Thermal Alarm RTD Open Circuit Failure RTD Short Circuit Failure RTD Data Inconsistency Error RTD Board Failure Frequency Protection Alarm Voltage Protection Alarm User Settable Alarm 1 User Settable Alarm 2 User Settable Alarm 3 RTD 1 Alarm RTD 2 Alarm RTD 3 Alarm RTD 4 Alarm RTD 5 Alarm RTD 6 Alarm RTD 7 Alarm RTD 8 Alarm RTD 9 Alarm RTD 10 Alarm Composite Lockout Alarm Field Voltage Failure Miscellaneous Indications 73 74 87 88 103 104 Battery Status IRIG-B Status Protection Operation Signals 75 76 89 90 105 106 107 108 109 110 Any Trip External Trip 3ph 100% Stator Earth Fault Trip Dead Machine Protection Trip Generator Differential Trip 3ph Generator Differential Trip A 162 380 416 417 418 419 N/A N/A Name / Description DDB No. 302 303 304 305 306 306 307 308 309 310 311 312 313 314 315 316 317 318 319 743 744 745 746 747 748 749 750 751 752 753 756
P341/EN GC/D22 Page 141/158

Change Event Assigned Class (1, 2, 3) 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 Initial Value False False False False False False False False False False False False False False False False False False False False False False False False False False False False False False False
2 2
False False
2 2 2 2 2 2
False False False False False False
P341/EN GC/D22 Page 142/158

P341 P342 P343 Point Point Point Index Index Index 111 112 91 92 93 94 95 96 97 98 99 100 101 102 103 104 105 106 107 108 109 77 78 79 80 81 82 83 84 85 86 87 88 89 90 91 92 93 94 95 96 114 115 116 117 118 119 120 121 122 136 137 138 139 140 141 142 143 144 112 113 134 135 110 111 132 133 113 114 115 116 117 118 119 120 121 122 123 124 125 126 127 128 129 130 131 Name / Description DDB No. 420 421 422 423 424 425 426 427 428 429 430 431 432 433 434 435 436 437 438 439 440 440 441 442 443 444 445 446 447 448 449 450 451 452 453 454 455 456 457 458 459

Change Event Assigned Class (1, 2, 3) 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 Initial Value False False False False False False False False False False False False False False False False False False False False False False False False False False False False False False False False False False False False False False False False False
Generator Differential Trip B Generator Differential Trip C Field Failure Stage 1 Trip Field Failure Stage 2 Trip Negative Phase Sequence Trip Voltage Dependant Overcurrent Trip 3ph Voltage Dependant Overcurrent Trip A Voltage Dependant Overcurrent Trip B Voltage Dependant Overcurrent Trip C Volts per Hz Trip RTD 1 Trip RTD 2 Trip RTD 3 Trip RTD 4 Trip RTD 5 Trip RTD 6 Trip RTD 7 Trip RTD 8 Trip RTD 9 Trip RTD 10 Trip Any RTD Trip Rate Of Change Of Frequency Trip Voltage Vector Shift Trip 1st Stage EF Trip 2nd Stage EF Trip 3rd Stage EF Trip 4th Stage EF Trip REF Trip 1st Stage SEF Trip 2nd Stage SEF Trip 3rd Stage SEF Trip 4th Stage SEF Trip 1st Stage Residual O/V Trip 2nd Stage Residual O/V Trip 1st Stage Phase U/V Trip 3ph 1st Stage Phase U/V Trip A/AB 1st Stage Phase U/V Trip B/BC 1st Stage Phase U/V Trip C/CA 2nd Stage Phase U/V Trip 3ph 2nd Stage Phase U/V Trip A/AB 2nd Stage Phase U/V Trip B/BC

P341 P342 P343 Point Point Point Index Index Index 97 98 99 100 101 102 103 104 105 106 107 108 109 110 111 112 113 114 115 116 117 118 119 120 121 122 123 124 125 126 127 128 129 130 131 132 133 148 149 150 151 170 171 172 173 174 175 134 152 153 176 177 123 124 125 126 127 128 129 130 131 132 133 134 135 136 137 138 139 140 141 142 143 144 145 146 147 145 146 147 148 149 150 151 152 153 154 155 156 157 158 159 160 161 162 163 164 165 166 167 168 169 Name / Description DDB No. 460 461 462 463 464 465 466 467 468 469 470 471 472 473 474 475 476 477 478 479 480 481 482 483 484 485 486 487 488 489 490 491 492 493 494 495 496 497 498 499 500
P341/EN GC/D22 Page 143/158

2nd Stage Phase U/V Trip C/CA 1st Stage Phase O/V Trip 3ph 1st Stage Phase O/V Trip A/AB 1st Stage Phase O/V Trip B/BC 1st Stage Phase O/V Trip C/CA 2nd Stage Phase O/V Trip 3ph 2nd Stage Phase O/V Trip A/AB 2nd Stage Phase O/V Trip B/BC 2nd Stage Phase O/V Trip C/CA Under Frequency Stage 1 Trip Under Frequency Stage 2 Trip Under Frequency Stage 3 Trip Under Frequency Stage 4 Trip Over Frequency Stage 1 Trip Over Frequency Stage 2 Trip Power Stage 1 Trip Power Stage 2 Trip 1st Stage O/C Trip 3ph 1st Stage O/C Trip A 1st Stage O/C Trip B 1st Stage O/C Trip C 2nd Stage O/C Trip 3ph 2nd Stage O/C Trip A 2nd Stage O/C Trip B 2nd Stage O/C Trip C 3rd Stage O/C Trip 3ph 3rd Stage O/C Trip A 3rd Stage O/C Trip B 3rd Stage O/C Trip C 4th Stage O/C Trip 3ph 4th Stage O/C Trip A 4th Stage O/C Trip B 4th Stage O/C Trip C tBF1 Trip 3ph tBF2 Trip 3ph Sensitive A Phase Power Stage 1 Trip Sensitive A Phase Power Stage 2 Trip Pole Slip (Impedance) Zone1 Trip Pole Slip (Impedance) Zone2 Trip Thermal Overload Trip Underimpedance 3Phase Stage 1 Trip
P341/EN GC/D22 Page 144/158

P341 P342 P343 Point Point Point Index Index Index 154 155 156 157 158 159 160 135 136 137 138 139 140 141 142 143 144 145 146 147 148 149 150 151 152 153 154 155 156 157 158 159 160 161 162 163 164 165 166 167 168 161 162 163 164 165 166 167 168 169 170 171 172 173 174 175 176 177 178 179 180 181 182 183 184 185 186 187 188 189 178 179 180 181 182 183 184 185 186 187 188 189 190 191 192 193 194 195 196 197 198 199 200 201 202 203 204 205 206 207 208 209 210 211 212 213 Name / Description DDB No. 501 502 503 504 505 506 507 576 577 578 579 580 581 582 583 584 585 586 587 588 589 590 591 592 593 594 595 596 597 598 599 600 601 602 603 604 605 606 607 608 609

Underimpedance Phase A Stage 1 Trip Underimpedance Phase B Stage 1 Trip Underimpedance Phase C Stage 1 Trip Underimpedance 3Phase Stage 2 Trip Underimpedance Phase A Stage 2 Trip Underimpedance Phase B Stage 2 Trip Underimpedance Phase C Stage 2 Trip Any Start 1st Stage Residual O/V Start 2nd Stage Residual O/V Start 1st Stage Phase U/V Start 3ph 1st Stage Phase U/V Start A/AB 1st Stage Phase U/V Start B/BC 1st Stage Phase U/V Start C/CA 2nd Stage Phase U/V Start 3ph 2nd Stage Phase U/V Start A/AB 2nd Stage Phase U/V Start B/BC 2nd Stage Phase U/V Start C/CA 1st Stage Phase O/V Start 3ph 1st Stage Phase O/V Start A/AB 1st Stage Phase O/V Start B/BC 1st Stage Phase O/V Start C/CA 2nd Stage Phase O/V Start 3ph 2nd Stage Phase O/V Start A/AB 2nd Stage Phase O/V Start B/BC 2nd Stage Phase O/V Start C/CA Power Stage 1 Start Power Stage 2 Start 1st Stage O/C Start 3ph 1st Stage O/C Start A 1st Stage O/C Start B 1st Stage O/C Start C 2nd Stage O/C Start 3ph 2nd Stage O/C Start A 2nd Stage O/C Start B 2nd Stage O/C Start C 3rd Stage O/C Start 3ph 3rd Stage O/C Start A 3rd Stage O/C Start B 3rd Stage O/C Start C 4th Stage O/C Start 3ph

P341 P342 P343 Point Point Point Index Index Index 169 170 171 172 173 174 175 176 177 178 179 217 180 181 182 183 184 185 186 187 188 199 200 201 202 203 204 205 189 190 206 207 224 225 226 227 228 229 230 231 232 233 234 235 236 237 208 209 210 211 212 213 238 239 240 241 242 243 193 194 195 196 197 198 218 219 220 221 222 223 192 216 190 191 214 215 Name / Description DDB No. 610 611 612 613 614 615 616 617 618 619 620 621 622 623 624 625 626 627 628 629 630 636 637 638 639 640 641 642 643 644 645 646 647 648 649 650 651 652 653 654 655
P341/EN GC/D22 Page 145/158

4th Stage O/C Start A 4th Stage O/C Start B 4th Stage O/C Start C 1st Stage EF Start 2nd Stage EF Start 3rd Stage EF Start 4th Stage EF Start 1st Stage SEF Start 2nd Stage SEF Start 3rd Stage SEF Start 4th Stage SEF Start 100% Stator Earth Fault Start Under Frequency Stage 1 Start Under Frequency Stage 2 Start Under Frequency Stage 3 Start Under Frequency Stage 4 Start Over Frequency Stage 1 Start Over Frequency Stage 2 Start I> Blocked O/C Start IN/ISEF> Blocked O/C Start Rate Of Change Of Frequency Start Volts per Hz Start Field Failure Stage 1 Start Field Failure Stage 2 Start Voltage Dependant Overcurrent Start 3Ph Voltage Dependant Overcurrent Start A Voltage Dependant Overcurrent Start B Voltage Dependant Overcurrent Start C Sensitive A Phase Power Stage 1 Start Sensitive A Phase Power Stage 2 Start Pole Slip (Impedance) Zone1 Start Pole Slip (Impedance) Zone2 Start Pole Slip (impedance) Lens Start Pole Slip (impedance) Blinder Start Pole Slip (impedance) Reactance Line Start Underimpedance 3Phase Stage 1 Start Underimpedance Phase A Stage 1 Start Underimpedance Phase B Stage 1 Start Underimpedance Phase C Stage 1 Start Underimpedance 3Phase Stage 2 Start Underimpedance Phase A Stage 2 Start
P341/EN GC/D22 Page 146/158

P341 P342 P343 Point Point Point Index Index Index 214 215 191 192 193 194 195 196 197 216 217 218 244 245 246 247 248 Name / Description DDB No. 656 657 736 737 738 739 740 741 742

Change Event Assigned Class (1, 2, 3) 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 Initial Value False False False False False False False False False
Underimpedance Phase B Stage 2 Start Underimpedance Phase C Stage 2 Start VTS Fast Block VTS Slow Block CTS Block Control Trip Control Close Control Close in Progress Reconnection Time Delay Output CB Status
198 199 200 201 202 203
219 220 221 222 223 224 225
249 250 251 252 253 254 255 256 257 258 259 260
3 ph CB Open 3 ph CB Closed IA< Operate IB< Operate IC< Operate ISEF< Operate IN< Operate All Poles Dead Any Pole Dead Phase A Pole Dead Phase B Pole Dead Phase C Pole Dead
754 755 631 632 633 634 635 757 758 759 760 761
2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2
False False False False False False False False False False False False
204 205 206 207 208
226 227 228 229 230
P341/EN GC/D22 Page 147/158
Binary Output Status Points Object Number: 10 Request Function Code supported: 1(read) Default Variation reported when variation 0 requested: 2 (Binary Output Status) Control Relay Output Blocks Object Number: 12 Request Function Code supported: 3 (select), 4 (operate), 5 (direct operate), 6 (direct operate, noack) P341 P342 P343 Point Point Point Index Index Index Name / Description Supported Control Relay Output Block Fields Pulse Activate Settings Group 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 0 1 2 3 0 1 2 3 Activate Setting Group 1 Activate Setting Group 2 Activate Setting Group 3 Activate Setting Group 4 Controls CB Trip CB Close Reset Indication Reset Demand Reset NPSThermal Reset ThermalO/L Clear Events Clear Faults Clear Maint Test LEDs Lockout Reset Reset CB Data Reset RTD Flags Control Inputs Control Input 1 Control Input 2 Control Input 3 Control Input 4 Control Input 5 Control Input 6 Control Input 7 Control Input 8 Control Input 9 Control Input 10 Control Input 11 Control Input 12 Control Input 13 Control Input 14 Control Input 15 Control Input 16 Control Input 17 Control Input 18 Control Input 19 Control Input 20 Control Input 21 Control Input 22 Control Input 23 Control Input 24 Control Input 25 Control Input 26 No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Latch
P341/EN GC/D22 Page 148/158

P341 P342 P343 Point Point Point Index Index Index 41 42 43 44 45 46 41 42 43 44 45 46 41 42 43 44 45 46 Control Input 27 Control Input 28 Control Input 29 Control Input 30 Control Input 31 Control Input 32 Name / Description

Supported Control Relay Output Block Fields Pulse No No No No No No Latch Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
Notes: Only the Pulse On operation is supported when Yes appears in the Pulse column. Both the Latch On and Latch Off operations are supported when Yes appears in the Latch column. The Queue, Clear, Trip/Close, On and Off Time fields are ignored. Data points that support both the Latch and Pulse operations implement them identically as a trigger for the specified action. This implies that such data points are self-reset and will always return a value of zero when read. The Latch Off operation will complete successfully, but will have no effect.
P341/EN GC/D22 Page 149/158
Binary Counter Points Static (Steady-State) Object Number: 20 Request Function Code supported: 1(read), 7(freeze), 8(freeze noack), 9(freeze and clear), 10(freeze and clear, noack) Static Variation reported when variation 0 requested: 5 (32-Bit Binary Counter without Flag) Change Event Variation reported when variation 0 requested: none-not supported Frozen Counter Points Static (Steady State) Object Number: 21 Request Function Code supported: 1 (read) Static Variation reported when variation 0 requested: 9 (32-Bit Binary Counter without Flag) Change Event Variation reported when variation 0 requested: none-not supported P341 P342 P343 Point Point Point Index Index Index 0 1 2 3 4 0 1 2 3 4 0 1 2 3 4 3Ph WHours Fwd 3Ph WHours Rev 3Ph VArHours Fwd 3Ph VArHours Rev CB Operations Name / Description Data Type
D10 D10 D10 D10
P341/EN GC/D22 Page 150/158

Analog Inputs Static (Steady State) Object Number: 30 Change Event Object Number: 32 Request Function Codes supported: 1 (read) Static Variation reported when variation 0 requested: 2 (16-Bit Analog Input) Change Event Variation reported when variation 0 requested: 2 (Analog Change Event without Time) P341 P342 P343 Point Point Point Index Index Index Name / Description Data Type Valid Range
Default Deadband
Change Event Assigned Class (1, 2, 3)
Active Group 0 0 0 Active Group MEASUREMENTS 1 1 2 3 4 5 6 1 2 3 4 5 6 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 7 8 IA Magnitude IA Phase Angle IB Magnitude IB Phase Angle IC Magnitude IC Phase Angle IA-1 Magnitude IA-1 Phase Angle IB-1 Magnitude IB-1 Phase Angle IC-1 Magnitude IC-1 Phase Angle IN Measured Mag IN Measured Ang IN Derived Mag IN Derived Angle I Sen Magnitude I Sen Angle I1 Magnitude I2 Magnitude I0 Magnitude IA RMS IB RMS IC RMS VAB Magnitude VAB Phase Angle VBC Magnitude VBC Phase Angle VCA Magnitude VCA Phase Angle VAN Magnitude VAN Phase Angle VBN Magnitude VBN Phase Angle VCN Magnitude D1 D4 D1 D4 D1 D4 D1 D4 D1 D4 D1 D4 D2 D4 D1 D4 D2 D4 D1 D1 D1 D1 D1 D1 D3 D4 D3 D4 D3 D4 D3 D4 D3 D4 D3 0.00065.534 -180.00+180.00 0.00065.534 -180.00+180.00 0.00065.534 -180.00+180.00 0.00065.534 -180.00+180.00 0.00065.534 -180.00+180.00 0.00065.534 -180.00+180.00 0.00002.0000 -180.00+180.00 0.00065.534 -180.00+180.00 0.00002.0000 -180.00+180.00 0.00065.534 0.00065.534 0.00065.534 0.00065.534 0.00065.534 0.00065.534 0.00220.00 -180.00+180.00 0.00220.00 -180.00+180.00 0.00220.00 -180.00+180.00 0.00220.00 -180.00+180.00 0.00220.00 -180.00+180.00 0.00220.00 0.1 1 0.1 1 0.1 1 0.1 1 0.1 1 0.1 1 0.01 1 0.1 1 0.01 1 0.1 0.1 0.1 0.1 0.1 0.1 5 1 5 1 5 1 5 1 5 1 5 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 D9 14 1 3

P341 P342 P343 Point Point Point Index Index Index 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 Name / Description Data Type D4 D3 D4 D3 D4 D3 D3 D3 D3 D3 D3 D5 Valid Range
P341/EN GC/D22 Page 151/158

Default Deadband 1 5 1 5 1 5 5 5 5 5 5 0.5 Change Event Assigned Class (1, 2, 3) 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3
VCN Phase Angle VN Measured Mag VN Measured Ang VN Derived Mag VN Derived Ang V1 Magnitude V2 Magnitude V0 Magnitude VAN RMS VBN RMS VCN RMS Frequency MEASUREMENTS 2
-180.00+180.00 0.00220.00 -180.00+180.00 0.00220.00 -180.00+180.00 0.00220.00 0.00220.00 0.00220.00 0.00220.00 0.00220.00 0.00220.00 5.0070.00
40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 60 61 62 63 64 65 66 67 68
40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 60 61 62 63 64 65 66 67 68
40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 60 61 62 63 64 65 66 67 68
A Phase Watts B Phase Watts C Phase Watts A Phase VArs B Phase VArs C Phase VArs A Phase VA B Phase VA C Phase VA 3 Phase Watts 3 Phase VArs 3 Phase VA 3Ph Power Factor APh Power Factor BPh Power Factor CPh Power Factor 3Ph W Fix Demand 3Ph VArs Fix Dem IA Fixed Demand IB Fixed Demand IC Fixed Demand 3 Ph W Roll Dem 3Ph VArs RollDem IA Roll Demand IB Roll Demand IC Roll Demand 3Ph W Peak Dem 3Ph VAr Peak Dem IA Peak Demand
D6 D6 D6 D6 D6 D6 D6 D6 D6 D6 D6 D6 D8 D8 D8 D8 D6 D6 D1 D1 D1 D6 D6 D1 D1 D1 D6 D6 D1
-3150.0+3150.0 -3150.0+3150.0 -3150.0+3150.0 -3150.0+3150.0 -3150.0+3150.0 -3150.0+3150.0 -3150.0+3150.0 -3150.0+3150.0 -3150.0+3150.0 -3150.0+3150.0 -3150.0+3150.0 -3150.0+3150.0 0.0001.000 0.0001.000 0.0001.000 0.0001.000 -3150.0+3150.0 -3150.0+3150.0 0.00065.534 0.00065.534 0.00065.534 -3150.0+3150.0 -3150.0+3150.0 0.00065.534 0.00065.534 0.00065.534 -3150.0+3150.0 -3150.0+3150.0 0.00065.534
1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 0.1 0.1 0.1 0.1 1 1 0.1 0.1 0.1 1 1 0.1 0.1 0.1 1 1 0.1
3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3
P341/EN GC/D22 Page 152/158

P341 P342 P343 Point Point Point Index Index Index 69 70 69 70 69 70 Name / Description Data Type D1 D1 Valid Range

Default Deadband 0.1 0.1 Change Event Assigned Class (1, 2, 3) 3 3
IB Peak Demand IC Peak Demand MEASUREMENTS 3
0.00065.534 0.00065.534
71 72 73 74 75 76 77 78 79 80 81 82 71 72 83 84 85 73 74 75 76 77 78 79 80 81 82 83 71 72 73 74 84 85 86 87 86 87 88 89 90 91 92 93 94 95 96 97 98 99 100
IA-2 Magnitude IA-2 Phase Angle IB-2 Magnitude IB-2 Phase Angle IC-2 Magnitude IC-2 Phase Angle IA Differential IB Differential IC Differential IA Bias IB Bias IC Bias IREF Diff IREF Bias VN 3rd Harmonic NPS Thermal RTD 1 RTD 2 RTD 3 RTD 4 RTD 5 RTD 6 RTD 7 RTD 8 RTD 9 RTD 10 APh Sen Watts APh Sen Vars APh Power Angle Thermal Overload
D1 D4 D1 D4 D1 D4 D1 D1 D1 D1 D1 D1 D2 D2 D3 D7 D14 D14 D14 D14 D14 D14 D14 D14 D14 D14 D6 D6 D4 D7
0.00065.534 -180.00+180.00 0.00065.534 -180.00+180.00 0.00065.534 -180.00+180.00 0.00065.534 0.00065.534 0.00065.534 0.00065.534 0.00065.534 0.00065.534 0.00002.0000 0.00002.0000 0.00220.00 0.00327.67 -40.0300.0 -40.0300.0 -40.0300.0 -40.0300.0 -40.0300.0 -40.0300.0 -40.0300.0 -40.0300.0 -40.0300.0 -40.0300.0 -3150.0+3150.0 -3150.0+3150.0 -180.00+180.00 0.00327.67
0.1 1 0.1 1 0.1 1 0.1 0.1 0.1 0.1 0.1 0.1 0.01 0.01 5 10 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 10
3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3
MiCOM P341
Relay Menu Database
Data Types Notes: 1. Type D6 can represent Watts, VArs or VA; the exact unit applied depends on the description of the item. 2. The default change event deadband is used unless specified otherwise in the point list. 3. The scaling value represents the multiplier required at the master station. 4. In and Vn represent the rated current and rated voltage respectively. Data Type Name / Description Scaling Default Change Event Deadband 0.1 0.01 5 1 0.5 1 10 0.1 1 Change Event Deadband Min Change Event Deadband Max Change Event Deadband Step Standard Numeric Range Units
D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 D7 D8 D9 D10 D11 D12 D13 D14 D15
Standard Phase, RMS and sequence current Sensitive current Voltage Angle Frequency Power Percentage Power Factor Setting Group Energy Admittance (Standard current) Admittance (Sensitive current) Time (minutes) Temperature Time (seconds)
x In / 500 x In / 10000 x Vn /(110 x 100) x 0.01 x 0.01 x 0.1 In .Vn / 110 x 0.01 x 0.001 x1 x In .Vn / 110 x (In / 1000).(110 / Vn) x (In / 10000).(110 / Vn) x 0.01 x 0.1 x 0.00001
0.05 In 0.01 In 0.1 Vn / 110 0.1 0.1 0.1 In .Vn / 110 0.1 0.01 1 In .Vn / 110
64 In 2 In 220 Vn / 110 180 70 3200 In .Vn / 110 320 1 4 32000 In .Vn / 110 32 In .( 110 / Vn) 2 In .( 110 / Vn) 30 300 0.03
0.01 In 0.001 In 0.1 Vn / 110 0.1 0.1 0.1 In .Vn / 110 0.1 0.01 1 In .Vn / 110 (0.01 In).( 110 / Vn) (0.001 In).( 110 / Vn) 0.5 0.1 0.0001
0.00065.534 0.00002.0000 0.00220.00 -180.00+180.00 5.0070.00 -3150.0+3150.0 0.00327.67 0.0001.000 14 0(2^31)-1 -7.040+7.040 -0.0220+0.0220 0.00327.67 -40.0300.0 0.000000.32767
A A V Degrees Hz W/Var/VA % [None] [None] Wh/Varh/Vah S
0.1 0.01 5 1 0.001
(0.01 In).( 110 / Vn) (0.001 In).( 110 / Vn) 1 0.1 0.0001
P341/EN GC/D22
Page 153/158
min C s
P341/EN GC/D22 Page 154/158 MiCOM P341 PROGRAMMABLE SCHEME LOGIC Opto Input Mappings
IN>3 Timer Blk DDB #360 L3 Block IN>3&4 DDB #034 IN>4 Timer Blk DDB #361
I>3 Timer Block DDB #356 L4 Block I>3&4 DDB #035 I>4 Timer Block DDB #357
L5 Reset DDB #036
Reset Relays/LED DDB #386
L6 Ext Prot Trip DDB #037
Ext. Trip 3ph DDB #380
L7 52a DDB #038
CB Aux 3ph(52-A) DDB #381
L8 52b DDB #039
CB Aux 3ph(52-B) DDB #382
Fault Record Trigger Mapping
R3 Any Trip DDB #002
Fault REC TRIG DDB #288
Relay Menu Database MiCOM P341 MiCOM P341 PROGRAMMABLE SCHEME LOGIC Output Relay Mappings
P341/EN GC/D22 Page 155/158
df/dt Trip DDB #440 V Shift Trip DDB #441 IN>1 Trip DDB #442 IN>2 Trip DDB #443 IN>3 Trip DDB #444 IN>4 Trip DDB #445 IREF> Trip DDB #446 ISEF>1 Trip DDB #447 ISEF>2 Trip DDB #448 ISEF>3 Trip DDB #449 ISEF>4 Trip DDB #450 VN>1 Trip DDB #451 VN>2 Trip DDB #452 V<1 Trip DDB #453 V<2 Trip DDB #457 V>1 Trip DDB #461 V>2 Trip DDB #465 F<1 Trip DDB #469 F<2 Trip DDB #470 F<3 Trip DDB #471 F<4 Trip DDB #472 F>1 Trip DDB #473 F>2 Trip DDB #474 Power1 Trip DDB #475 Power2 Trip DDB #476 I>1 Trip DDB #477 I>2 Trip DDB #481 I>3 Trip DDB #485 I>4 Trip DDB #489 SPower1 Trip DDB #495 SPower2 Trip DDB #496 Thermal O/L Trip DDB #499
100
Dwell
R3 Any Trip DDB #002
P341/EN GC/D22 Page 156/158 MiCOM P341 PROGRAMMABLE SCHEME LOGIC Output Relay Mappings
IN/SEF>Blk Start DDB #629 0
Straight
0
R1 IN>1 Start DDB #000
I> BlockStart DDB #628 SG-opto Invalid DDB #290
Straight
R2 I>1 Start DDB #001
VT Fail Alarm DDB #292 CT Fail Alarm DDB #293 CB Fail Alarm DDB #294 I^ Maint Alarm DDB #295 I^ Lockout Alarm DDB #296 CB Ops Maint DDB #297 CB Ops Lockout DDB #298 CB Op Time Maint DDB #299 CB Op Time Lock DDB #300 Fault Freq Lock DDB #301 CB Status Alarm DDB #302 Man CB Trip Fail DDB #303 Man CB Cls Fail DDB #304 Man CB Unhealthy DDB #305 F out of Range DDB #306 Field volts fail DDB #756 Thermal Alarm DDB #307 100 0
Drop-Off
500
R4 General Alarm DDB #003
Bfail1 Trip 3ph DDB #493
Dwell
0
R5 CB Fail DDB #004
Control Close DDB #740
Straight
0
R6 Control Close DDB #005
Control Trip DDB #739
Straight
R7 Control Trip DDB #006
Relay Menu Database MiCOM P341 MiCOM P341 PROGRAMMABLE SCHEME LOGIC LED Mappings
IN>1 Trip DDB #442 IN>2 Trip DDB #443 IN>3 Trip DDB #444 IN>4 Trip DDB #445 ISEF>1 Trip DDB #447 ISEF>2 Trip DDB #448 ISEF>3 Trip DDB #449 ISEF>4 Trip DDB #450 IREF> Trip DDB #446 VN>1 Trip DDB #451 VN>2 Trip DDB #452 I>1 Trip DDB #477 I>2 Trip DDB #481 I>3 Trip DDB #485 I>4 Trip DDB #489
P341/EN GC/D22 Page 157/158
Latching
LED 1 DDB #064
1 1 1
Latching
LED 2 DDB #065
Latching
LED 3 DDB #066
df/dt Trip DDB #440 V Shift Trip DDB #441 V<1 Trip DDB #453 V<2 Trip DDB #457 V>1 Trip DDB #461 V>2 Trip DDB #465 F<1 Trip DDB #469 F<2 Trip DDB #470 F<3 Trip DDB #471 F<4 Trip DDB #472 F>1 Trip DDB #473 F>2 Trip DDB #474 Power1 Trip DDB #475 Power2 Trip DDB #476 SPower1 Trip DDB #495 SPower2 Trip DDB #496
Latching
LED 4 DDB #067
Latching
LED 5 DDB #068
Latching
LED 6 DDB #069
Latching
LED 7 DDB #070
Any Start DDB #576
Non Latching
LED 8 DDB #071
P341/EN GC/D22 Page 158/158
External Connection Diagrams MiCOM P341
P341/EN CO/D22
EXTERNAL CONNECTION DIAGRAMS
P341/EN CO/D22
P341/EN CO/D22 Page 1/8
(Not Available Yet)
(Not Available Yet)
P2139ENb
Figure 1:
Comms Options MiCOM Px40 Platform
P2234ENa
Figure 2:
Interconnection Protection Relay (40TE) for Embedded Generation Using VEE Connected VT's (8 I/P & 7 O/P)
P2232ENa
Figure 3:
Interconnection (8 I/P & 7 O/P)
Protection
Relay
(40TE)
for
Embedded
Generation
P2233ENa
Figure 4:
Interconnection (8 I/P & 7 O/P)
Protection
Relay
(40TE)
for
Embedded
Generation
P2236ENa
Figure 5:
Interconnection Protection (8 I/P & 15 O/P)
Relay
(40TE)
for
Embedded
Generation
P2235ENa
Figure 6:
Relay
(40TE)
for
Embedded
Generation
P2237ENa
Figure 7:
Relay
(40TE)
for
Embedded
Generation
Hardware/Software Version History and Compatibility MiCOM P341
P341/EN VC/C22
HARDWARE / SOFTWARE VERSION HISTORY AND COMPATIBILITY
(Note: Includes versions released and supplied to customers only)
P341/EN VC/C22
Relay type: P341.. Software Version 01 02 Date of Issue Backward Compatibility Full Description of Changes S1 Compatibility V1.09 V1.10 OK OK OK PSL Setting Files Menu Text Files
11/10/1999 First release to Production 19/10/2000 Released to production DNP 3.0 included Courier Bay Module compatibility modification Modbus Bay Module compatibility modification Modifications to IEC60870-5-103 Test Mode Poledead logic DDB signals made visible in PSL Foreign language text updated
Refer to manual reference TG8617A for software version 01.
Refer to manual reference P341/EN T/B11 for software version 02. 03 23/01/2001 Released to production Includes event filtering Refer to manual reference P341/EN T/B11 for software version 03. P341/EN VC/C22 V2 OK OK OK
Page 1/4
Page 2/4
P341/EN VC/C22
Relay type: P341.. Software Version 04 Date of Issue 04/12/01 Backward Compatibility Full Description of Changes Released to production Includes sensitive reverse power Neutral voltage displacement threshold, VN>1/2, increased from 50 to 80 V (100/120 V), 200 to 320 (380/480V) Earth fault polarising voltage threshold, Vnpol, increased from 22 to 88 V(100/120 V) and 88 to 352 V (380/480V) Refer to manual reference P341/EN T/B11 for software version 04. 05 01/03/2002 Released to production Includes thermal overload protection Includes control inputs Enhancements to IEC60870-5-103 builds to include private codes, monitor blocking and disturbance record extraction PSL DDB list of signals increased from 512 to 1023 signals V2.05 X OK X S1 Compatibility V2.02a PSL OK Setting Files OK Menu Text Files OK
Relay type: P341.. Software Version Date of Issue Backward Compatibility Full Description of Changes PSL Data menu included with PSL Reference information for version history Optional additional opto inputs and output contacts with a larger case size option available New Universal wide ranging opto inputs (Model number suffix B) New outputput contacts with better break and continuous carry ratings (Model number suffix B) Refer to manual reference P341/EN T/C22 for software version 05. S1 Compatibility PSL Setting Files Menu Text Files
P341/EN VC/C22
Page 3/4
P341/EN VC/C22 Page 4/4
Publication: P341/EN T/D22
TRANSMISSION & DISTRIBUTION
Energy Automation & Information energy.automation-information@areva-td.com www.areva.com

Micom P341

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Micom P341

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

MiCOM P341

Interconnection Protection Relay

Technical Guide MiCOM P341 Interconnection Protection Relay

Issue Control MiCOM P341 Manual Issue D

Issue Control MiCOM P341

Issue Control MiCOM P341 Manual Issue D

2.13.1 2.14 2.14.1

2.22.1 2.22.2 4.1

Issue Control MiCOM P341

4.1.2 4.1.2.1 4.1.2.2

84 85 AP AP AP AP AP AP AP AP 4.3.1 4.4 4.5 4.6 4.8 4.9.1.3 4.9.1.6 4.9.4 86 86 86 - 87 87 - 90 92 - 96 98 99 101

Issue Control MiCOM P341 Manual Issue D

4.13 4.14 4.15

106 107 107 - 108

5.5.4 5.6 5.7.2

109 110 111

112 112 - 115 Throughout

8 HW HW HW HW HW 2.4.1 2.4.2 2.5 3.4.3.1 4.2 9 9 9 13 16

Issue Control MiCOM P341

1.5 1.6 2.3 2.4

10.2.2 13.2.2 15.2.4 19.

Technical Guide MiCOM P341

INTERCONNECTION PROTECTION RELAY MiCOM P341 CONTENT

Technical Guide MiCOM P341

HANDLING OF ELECTRONIC EQUIPMENT

INSTALLING, COMMISSIONING AND SERVICING EQUIPMENT OPERATING CONDITIONS

OLDER PRODUCTS DECOMMISSIONING AND DISPOSAL TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Caution : refer to product documentation

Caution : risk of electric shock

Protective/safety *earth terminal

INSTALLING, COMMISSIONING AND SERVICING

EQUIPMENT OPERATING CONDITIONS

DECOMMISSIONING AND DISPOSAL

Insulation Category (Overvoltage):

Compliance is demonstrated by reference to generic safety standards.

EN 61010-1 : 1993/A2 : 1995 EN 60950 : 1992/A11 : 1997

Introduction MiCOM P341

Introduction MiCOM P341

Introduction MiCOM P341

P341/EN IT/D22 Page 1/24

Introduction MiCOM P341 6 8 13 16 17 19

Introduction MiCOM P341

P341/EN IT/D22 Page 3/24

P341/EN IT/D22 Page 4/24

Introduction MiCOM P341

INTRODUCTION TO MiCOM GUIDES

Handling of Electronic Equipment Safety Section P341/EN IT Introduction

Introduction MiCOM P341

P341/EN IT/D22 Page 5/24

Handling of Electronic Equipment Safety Section P341/EN IT Introduction

P341/EN IT/D22 Page 6/24

Introduction MiCOM P341

USER INTERFACES AND MENU STRUCTURE

Fixed function LEDs

ALARM OUT OF SERVICE HEALTHY = CLEAR = READ = ENTER

User programable function LEDs

Bottom cover Battery compartment Front comms port Download/monitor port

Relay front view

Introduction MiCOM P341

P341/EN IT/D22 Page 7/24

Note: *May vary according to relay type/model

P341/EN IT/D22 Page 8/24

Introduction MiCOM P341